15,049 Statistics about Digital Marketing (SEO, PPC, Social Media)

I think that this is probably the largest collection of statistics about digital marketing – including SEO, social media, and PPC – that has ever been collected on the internet. I have wanted to do this for a long time!

How did I do it? I used the excellent content explorer feature from Ahrefs, and used a complicated search command that found articles that had both “statistics”/”stats” in the title, as well as one of several words that included things like “PPC”, “SEO”, “Twitter”, “TikTok” and so on. But that was the easy part. Our resident tech expert, Trishin, then pulled out sentence data from each of these posts that included a percentage character within each sentence. I am sure that there were many thousands of stats that we left behind, but what was pulled out was more than enough to work with.

Following exporting this data, I then spent many hours using various regex commands to remove bad entities that were either too short, too long, had HTML errors, among various other things that I had to cut out. I removed around a third of the original data before settling on this list below. As well as these data tweaks, I also had to remove duplicate links to the same url which sounds a lot easier than it was to do, strangely. I removed statistics blog posts from before 2020, as some of that data would probably not be so useful.

In the list below, you will see a link to each blog post from where statistics were extracted. Each statistic underneath a link is from the same post. So each time you see a link, this means that this data is from a different post than the line above it.

So, enjoy perhaps the largest amount of digital marketing statistics that you ever did see:

  • The importance of social media marketing:7 stats that prove social’s role in business success: According to The 2023 Sprout Social Index™, 68% of consumers follow brands on social to stay informed about new products or services.
  • 50+ Must-know social media marketing statistics for 2024: TikTok is the fastest-growing platform with a staggering 100% user growth rate between 2020 and 2022.
  • And between Q3 2022 and Q3 2023, TikTok’s monthly active users grew 13%.
  • 1% of total Instagram users worldwide are between the ages 18-34, and mostly identify as male.
  • In 2023, 43% of marketers plan to increase their investment in Instagram.
  • 60% of worldwide users are between ages 25 and 34 years old, far exceeding any other age group.
  • 80% of weekly users have found a new brand or product on the platform.
  • TikTok’s user base skews female, with 48% of users identifying as women (based on available gender data.
  • 7% of TikTok users are 18-24 years old and account for the largest share of TikTok’s advertising audience.
  • 53% of X users use the platform to get the latest news.
  • More than half (63%) of X users are men (based on available gender data).
  • 33% of users plan to spend less time on X in 2024.
  • Nearly 90% of all visits to YouTube come from a mobile device.
  • 44% of people prefer to learn about a new product or service via short video content.
  • 87% of marketers say video marketing has directly increased sales.
  • 1% of marketers believe TikTok offers the highest ROI to influencer marketers for short-form video content, followed by 29.
  • 69% of marketers use TikTok for influencer marketing, making it the most popular influencer marketing channel.
  • 60% of marketers plan to spend more on influencer marketing campaigns in 2024.
  • 63% of marketers plan to use AI in launching their influencer campaigns.
  • 9% of internet users purchase a product using their mobile devices at least once a week.
  • 2024 Marketing Statistics, Trends & Data — The Ultimate List of Digital Marketing Stats: Nearly two out of three marketers report that their average landing page conversion rate is less than 10% (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • The average website has a bounce rate of 37% and an SEO click-through rate of 13% (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • 70% of marketers believe that A/B testing is essential to boost conversion rates (ZipDo Essential A/B Testing Statistics, 2023).
  • The average conversion rate across all e-commerce sites is under 2% (Statista, 2023).
  • Mobile Search Younger users prefer mobile search to desktop, with 80% of Gen Z and 62% of millennials reporting primarily using mobile search (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • Google accounts for over 95% of global mobile search market share (StatCounter, 2023).
  • Organic Search 75% of marketers believe that AI-enabled search engines will positively impact their blogs, and 68% predict that their site will get more traffic.
  • Only 9% believe this will harm blog traffic (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • 39% of marketers list optimizing on-page content based on keywords as their top SEO strategy (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • 80% of Gen Z, 62% of millennials, 66% of Gen X, 35% of Boomers, and 52% of the general population primarily use mobile search (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • 29% of marketers list SEO as a top trend they leverage (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • Voice Search 13% of marketers are leveraging voice search optimization (Alexa, Siri, etc.
  • About 90% of people think voice search is easier and faster than traditional search (TechReport, 2023).
  • E-commerce Smartphones account for over 70% of retail website visits worldwide (Statista, 2023).
  • E-commerce accounts for over 20% of all global retail sales (Statista, 2023).
  • Companies with blogs produce an average of 67% more leads per month than companies that don’t have active blogs (DemandMetric).
  • 43% of content marketers report using AI to help them generate ideas (43%), but just 3% use it to write entire articles (Orbit Media, 2023).
  • The average blog post length is 1,427 words — more than 70% longer than ten years ago (Orbit Media, 2023).
  • Only 3% of brands regularly publish blog posts longer than 2,000 words (Orbit Media, 2023).
  • (HubSpot Marketing Trends Report, 2024) 91% of businesses use video as a marketing tool in 2023.
  • (Wyzowl, 2023) 42% of video marketers say they spend between $0 and $500 on an average video.
  • 8% of marketing videos average less than 10,000 views, 16% average under 1,000 views, and 16% average over 100,000 views (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • 60% of video marketers list engagement rate as a top KPI, followed by conversion rate (56%) and click-through rate (52%) (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • 96% of marketers agree that the optimal length of a marketing video is under 10 minutes.
  • 36% of video marketers believe that the optimal length for a marketing video is between one and three minutes, 27% say the optimal length is four to six minutes, and 15% say it’s seven to nine (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2024) Over 41% of marketers measure the success of their content marketing strategy through sales.
  • (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2024) 50% of marketers plan on increasing their investment in content marketing in 2024.
  • 48% of social media marketers share similar or repurposed content across platforms with minor moderations or adaptations.
  • In comparison, 34% make unique content from scratch for each platform, and 17% share the same content across platforms (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • 13% of marketing leaders report that content strategy is their top challenge (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • Audio 25% of marketers leverage podcasts or other audio content as part of their content strategy.
  • (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2024) 47% of marketers who leverage audio content and podcasts plan to invest more budget in 2024.
  • (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2024) Only 3% of marketers say they’ve used audio chat rooms like Clubhouse in their marketing role.
  • 86% of consumers recall podcast ads more than any other channel (Basis Technologies, 2023).
  • 53% of people who own a smart speaker and have heard an ad on their device say they will likely respond to it (Basis Technologies, 2023).
  • 61% of audio listeners pay attention to audio ads (compared to just 19% of TV watchers who actively watch TV ads) (Basis Technologies, 2023).
  • 86% of consumers recall podcast ads more than any other channel (Basis Technologies, 2023).
  • 53% of people who own a smart speaker and have heard an ad on their device say they will likely respond to it (Basis Technologies, 2023).
  • 61% of audio listeners pay attention to audio ads (compared to just 19% of TV watchers who actively watch TV ads) (Basis Technologies, 2023).
  • Instagram posts generate 23% more engagement than Facebook, even though Facebook has twice as many monthly users (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • In 2023, 22% of Instagram users watched branded content Stories from a company, business, or brand more than once a week, and 36% liked, commented, or shared branded Stories (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • 66% of marketers reported that they would keep their brand on X in 2023, but 71% said they spent less time working on the platform in 2023 than in previous years, and 67% planned to invest in X alternatives (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • 40% of B2B marketers list LinkedIn as the most effective channel for driving high-quality leads (Sprout Social, 2023).
  • 89% of B2B marketers use LinkedIn for lead generation, and 62% say it produces leads for them effectively (Sprout Social, 2023).
  • 85% of Pinterest’s weekly users have purchased the platform (Pinterest, 2023).
  • Social Media Management 90% of social media marketers say building an active online community is crucial to a successful social media strategy (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • 80% of social media marketers believe consumers will buy products directly in social apps more often than on brands’ websites or third-party websites like Amazon (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • 66% of social media marketers report that funny content is the most effective for their brand, followed by relatable content (63%) and trendy content (59%) (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • Visual Content 26% of marketers are already using infographics while 15% plan to leverage it for the first time in 2024.
  • 21% of marketers list using visual content to boost dwell time as a top SEO marketing strategy (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • Infographics are 30 times more likely to be read than a written article, and they can increase website traffic by up to 12% (DemandSage, 2023).
  • 55% of marketers create social media infographics more than any other visual media (DemandSage, 2023).
  • 43% of marketers say that creating consistently high-quality visual content is one of the biggest hurdles they face (DemandSage, 2023).
  • (Business of Apps, 2023) About 60% of the world’s population uses social media (DataReportal, 2023).
  • More than 90% of working professionals aged 16 to 24 use social media for work-related communication, while less than two-thirds of professionals aged 55 to 64 report using social media at work (DataReportal, 2023).
  • More than one in three video marketers say that the optimal video is just one to three minutes long, and 96% agree that videos should be less than 10 minutes long (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • 73% of consumers prefer to watch a short-form video to learn about a product or service (The Leap, 2023).
  • Product Video 96% of marketers agree that videos have helped increase users’ understanding of their product or service (HubSpot State of Video Marketing Report, 2023).
  • 40% of marketers report that the biggest benefit of creating video content is to help their customers understand its products and services (HubSpot State of Video Marketing Report, 2023).
  • 96% of people say they watch explainer videos to learn more about a product, and 89% report having been swayed to purchase (HubSpot State of Video Marketing Report, 2023).
  • Around 51% of consumers rely on product videos to make an educated purchase decision (Plainly, 2023).
  • Social Video 71% of videos created by companies are made for use on social media (HubSpot State of Video Marketing Report, 2023).
  • 32% of marketers report that the most effective way to generate leads from marketing videos is to place links to landing pages on social media video ads (HubSpot State of Video Marketing Report, 2023).
  • Marketers report that the top social media platform for sharing videos is YouTube (70%), followed by Instagram (60%) and TikTok (35%) (HubSpot State of Video Marketing Report, 2023).
  • 67% of marketers say that sharing social videos on platforms like YouTube, Instagram, or TikTok has the biggest ROI of any marketing strategy (HubSpot State of Video Marketing Report, 2023).
  • (Wistia, 2023) Data shows that video engagement rate stays high at 38% for videos up to 30 minutes.
  • For videos between 30 and 60 minutes, it drops to 26% then to 16% for videos over an hour.
  • (Wistia, 2023) 92% of video marketers reported that video gives them a positive ROI.
  • (Wyzowl, 2023) 92% of video marketers feel the levels of noise and competition have increased in the last year.
  • (Wyzowl) 99% of people who use video for marketing say they’ll continue using video.
  • (Facebook, 2020) The most common types of videos made by companies are live action (66%), followed by screen recorded (57%), and animated (55%).
  • (Wyzowl, 2023) 53% of video marketers say video has reduced the number of support calls they’ve received.
  • 22% of marketers have incorporated YouTube Stories into their video marketing strategy (Social Media Examiner, 2023).
  • Marketers report that segmented emails drive 30% more opens and 50% more clickthroughs than unsegmented ones (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • Email Copy 95% of marketers who use generative AI for email creation rate it as “effective,” and 54% rate it as “very effective” (HubSpot State of Generative AI Report, 2023).
  • 43% of marketers who use generative AI say that it’s most helpful for creating email copy (HubSpot State of Generative AI Report, 2023).
  • 47% of email recipients say they open an email based on the subject line alone, and 69% mark an email as spam based on the subject line alone (OptinMonster, 2023).
  • Email Segmentation Segmented emails drive 30% more opens and 50% more clickthroughs than unsegmented ones (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • 78% of marketers report that subscriber segmentation is the most effective strategy they use for email marketing campaigns (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • 64% of marketers personalize their emails by segment (Constant Contact, 2023).
  • Email Usage 59% of Americans say that most emails they receive are not useful to them (Edison Mail, 2023).
  • 40% of email users have at least 50 unread messages in their inboxes (MailButler, 2023).
  • 22% of marketers send two or three marketing emails per day, and 21% send daily emails (HubSpot Research, 2023).
  • Mobile Email 41% of email views — and 75% of Gmail users’ email views — come from mobile devices (MailButler, 2023).
  • 35% of email marketers use a mobile-first or mobile-responsive design process.
  • (Demand Gen Report, 2021) More than half (53%) of marketers say webinars is the top-of-the-funnel format that generates the most high-quality leads.
  • (Demand Gen Report, 2021) 53% of marketers say email has been the most effective channel for early-stage lead generation.
  • (Demand Gen Report, 2021) In 2021, 78% of marketers say theirdemand-gen budget will grow or remain the same.
  • (Activate, 2020) 28% of marketers say using additional account-level fields helps improve their lead scoring.
  • (HubSpot, 2020) Over 60% of marketers said their CAC has increased in the past three years.
  • (HubSpot, 2020) 49% of companies report that increasing customer acquisition is their primary objective.
  • (Ascend2, 2020) Marketing Automation 64% of marketers use AI/automation and 38% of those who don’t will start using it in 2024.
  • (HubSpot Blog Marketing Strategy Report, 2024) 63% of marketing leaders report that they use automation in their email marketing efforts, 50% use it for social media management, and 40% automate their paid ads efforts (Statista, 2023).
  • 91% of marketers reported that demand for automation from their business teams increased between 2020 and 2022 (Salesforce, 2022).
  • More than three-quarters of customer journeys are somewhat automated, and 10% are fully automated (Ascend2, 2023).
  • (HubSpot Blog Marketing Strategy Report, 2024) A majority of marketers say that the data they have about their target audiences is high quality (44%).
  • (HubSpot Blog Marketing Strategy Report, 2024) Just over half (53%) of marketing decisions are influenced by marketing analytics (Gartner, 2022).
  • 87% of marketers report that data is their company’s most under-utilized asset (Invoca, 2023).
  • 22% of social media marketers list measuring and justifying their work as a top challenge (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • 26% of marketers report that decision-makers do not review the information the marketing analytics team provides, and 24% report that decision-makers reject the marketing analytics team’s recommendations or rely on gut instincts to make decisions (Gartner, 2022).
  • 7% of global internet users reported using ad blockers to block ads when viewing content online (Statista, 2023).
  • Ad blocking is most common in China, Indonesia, and Vietnam, where more than 40% of internet users use these tools to block ads (Statista, 2023).
  • Display Advertising 22% of marketers use display ads as part of their marketing strategy.
  • (HubSpot Marketing Strategy Report, 2024) In 2022, display advertisements accounted for 30% of all digital ad spending in the United States (Statista, 2023).
  • marketers report allocating 19% of their marketing budgets to mobile advertising (Statista, 2023).
  • Pay-Per-Click (PPC) Advertising With effective optimization, pay-per-click (PPC) advertising can yield average returns of $2 for every $1 spent — a 200% ROI (Wordstream, 2023).
  • A personalized landing page can make PPC ad campaigns 5% more effective (Ranktracker, 2022).
  • 84% of brands and marketers said they see good results with their PPC advertising campaigns (Ranktracker, 2022).
  • 92% of video marketers report that video advertising provides a good ROI (Wyzowl, 2023).
  • 91% of businesses report using video as a marketing tool (Wyzowl, 2023).
  • (HubSpot Blog Marketing Trends Report, 2024) 60% of consumers prefer messaging over email or phone calls (Spectrm, 2023).
  • 70% of consumers have opted in to receive texts from businesses, and 61% say they want the ability to text a business back (SimpleTexting, 2023).
  • 65% of consumers use social media messaging apps to contact a company’s customer service team (HubSpot Research, 2023).
  • Augmented Reality 14% of marketers are using virtual reality (VR) and augmented reality (AR) as part of their marketing strategy, and 49% plan to increase their investments in 2024.
  • (HubSpot Blog Marketing Trends Report, 2024) 47% of marketers will increase their investments in experiential marketing in 2023.
  • (HubSpot Blog Marketing Trends Report, 2024) 14% of marketers are using virtual reality (VR) and augmented reality (AR) as part of their marketing strategy, and 49% plan to increase these investments in 2024 (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • In 2023, 47% of marketers reported increasing their investments in experiential marketing efforts (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • Mobile There are nearly 7 billion smartphones worldwide, and 95% of Americans have access to a cell phone (Exploding Topics, 2023).
  • 74% of people report that they are more likely to return to a website if it’s optimized for mobile (WebFX, 2023).
  • 67% of mobile users say they’re more likely to buy a company’s product or service if its website is mobile-friendly (WebFX, 2023).
  • CRM 61% of sales leaders automated their CRM software in 2023 (Prezentor, 2023).
  • 78% of sales leaders say their CRM effectively improves alignment between sales and marketing teams (HubSpot Research, 2023).
  • Top-performing salespeople spend about 18% more time updating their CRM system than average salespeople (LinkedIn, 2022).
  • 91% of companies with ten or more employees use a CRM system to manage customer data (Zippia, 2023).
  • 45% of companies report that their use of CRM software has increased sales revenue (Zippia, 2023).
  • 22% of marketing leaders report that growing revenue and sales is their primary goal (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
  • 96% of prospects report doing their own research before speaking with a human sales rep (HubSpot State of Sales Report, 2023).
  • More than half of sales leaders report using sales enablement content, and 79% say these materials are essential for making a sale (HubSpot State of Sales Report, 2023).
  • Service Level Agreement (SLA) 85% of marketers with a service level agreement (SLA) believe that their marketing strategy is effective (HubSpot Research, 2023).
  • Companies with an active SLA are 31% more likely to hire additional salespeople to meet demand (HubSpot Research, 2023).
  • Social Selling 78% of businesses that use social selling outperform those that don’t (LinkedIn, 2023).
  • Businesses that prioritize social selling are 51% more likely to reach their sales quotas (LinkedIn, 2023).
  • Sales professionals with a strong social selling index on LinkedIn have 45% more sales opportunities than those without a strong social selling index (LinkedIn, 2023).
  • 99+ Mind-Blowing Digital Marketing Statistics (2022): Over half of marketers (51%) consider email marketing their most effective tool.
  • Email marketing is deemed essential by 44% of CMOs, who allocate 8% of their marketing budgets to it.
  • Automated email campaigns are responsible for 31% of all email-based orders.
  • Segmentation of subscribers is deemed the top strategy for email campaigns by 78% of marketers.
  • Customized emails result in a 14% increase in click-through rates and a 10% boost in conversions.
  • Welcome emails and other single-message autoresponders see an impressive 94% open rate and a 31.
  • A significant portion of Americans (59%) say the emails they receive are not useful.
  • Regular newsletters from brands influence purchasing decisions for 27% of US consumers.
  • Responsive design in emails can lead to a 5-15% increase in click rates.
  • A majority of marketers (73%) acknowledge the critical role of email in their company’s success.
  • Data privacy changes relating to email have influenced the marketing strategies of 86% of marketers in the past year.
  • The top challenge for 41% of marketers is constructing effective emails.
  • Email newsletters are the primary content marketing tool for 81% of B2B marketers.
  • 61% of email senders report increasing challenges in email deliverability.
  • Mobile devices are responsible for more than 58% of overall web traffic.
  • Despite high open rates on mobile, these devices see only 18% of email clicks.
  • Facebook is the preferred shopping platform for 31% of online consumers, while Instagram is more popular among 39% of Gen-Z shoppers.
  • More than half of American consumers (53%) make purchases through social media weekly.
  • Nearly half (43%) of customers discover new products through social networks.
  • About 30% of younger generations, including Gen Z and Millennials, have recently made purchases directly through social media.
  • Social media serves as the primary platform for 35% of Gen Z to follow brands and products.
  • By 2023, 80% of social media marketers anticipate brands to prominently feature influencers or creators.
  • In the 18-54 age group, 21% of social media users have been influenced by influencers to make purchases in recent months.
  • A significant 61% of organizations practicing social selling report a beneficial effect on revenue growth.
  • Companies focusing on social selling are 51% more likely to achieve their sales goals.
  • Nearly half of sales professionals (47%) believe social media generates the highest quality leads, trailing only behind customer referrals.
  • A significant majority of marketers, 85%, believe that customers now expect experiences tailored to their preferences.
  • A notable 83% of consumers are happy to provide personal data in exchange for more customized experiences.
  • There’s a rising expectation for personalized interactions among consumers, with 71% expecting such experiences, and 76% feeling frustrated when they don’t occur.
  • About 78% of brands recognize their struggle with insufficient immediate customer data, impeding their ability to offer relevant personalized experiences.
  • Personalized and targeted email campaigns are responsible for generating 58% of all revenue in email marketing.
  • Firms that are proficient in nurturing leads are known to produce 50% more sales-ready leads while reducing costs by 33%.
  • Approximately 26% of marketing professionals lack a formal strategy for nurturing leads and have no plans to implement one.
  • Enhancing customer retention and engagement are considered top priorities in lead nurturing programs by 43% of marketers.
  • For 56% of marketing experts, targeted content is the most critical component of a lead generation program, with timely follow-ups and personalization also seen as vital by 49%.
  • A considerable 80% of marketing professionals believe that automation software plays a crucial role in enhancing lead nurturing performance.
  • Allocating more resources and time to lead nurturing is viewed by 84% of marketers as a strategy that could significantly improve conversion rates.
  • Closing deals with nurtured leads can result in a 47% increase in the order value.
  • 15% of organizations are incorporating AI tools in their content marketing strategies for generating and nurturing leads.
  • 14 billion individuals globally shop online – 27% of the global population.
  • 1% by 2024, significantly outpacing the 2% growth projected for physical store sales.
  • Currently, online retail constitutes 20% of total retail sales, with expectations to increase to 25% by 2025.
  • Projections indicate that by 2040, a vast majority (95%) of purchases will be conducted online.
  • Quick shipping and delivery are key to 78% of online shoppers, making it their primary purchase consideration, followed closely by product description accuracy (73%) and ease of purchase process (72%).
  • Nearly half of Gen Z consumers (46%) would spend more for the opportunity to shop in their favorite online stores.
  • A significant portion of shoppers, 46%, would switch retailers to ensure product availability.
  • Amazon leads the global eCommerce market, drawing over 13% of desktop traffic, quadruple that of eBay.
  • 3% of all eCommerce sales, showing an increase from the previous year’s 41.
  • The cross-border eCommerce sector is set to expand by an impressive 108% from 2023 to 2028.
  • November sees sales increase by 12% to 140% more than other months, with the lowest online sales occurring in the summer.
  • In countries where Amazon is well-established, 60% of shoppers use it for product searches.
  • In 2022, 5% of online purchases in the US were made with buy now, pay later payment options.
  • Around 60% of Gen-Z and Millennials prefer to buy products from small businesses.
  • 35% of consumers would shop for clothes online more if virtual try-on was available.
  • Fast shipping and delivery are the most important factors for 78% of frequent online shoppers.
  • 73% of shoppers using a mobile device will switch from a poorly designed mobile site to one that facilitates easier purchasing.
  • 28% of US consumers use their phones during in-store shopping for discounts and product information.
  • 29% of Americans make purchases on their smartphones at least once per week.
  • 95% of young people aged 13-17 own a phone, and most get their first phone at age 11.
  • 2% of online shoppers prefer shipment notifications via text rather than email.
  • 68% of shoppers browse on mobile, and 56% of online sales are completed on mobile.
  • Showing customer reviews on a brand’s website can lead to an increase in conversion rates, potentially by as much as 20%.
  • Nearly half of the consumer population, 49%, places as much trust in online reviews as they do in personal recommendations from their network.
  • Review submission increases from 12% to 26% when customers are incentivized, such as through discount codes.
  • A vast majority, 85%, of consumers expect a product to have between 50 to 500 reviews.
  • 52% of businesses observe a loyalty increase from online reviews, with 53% noting higher in-store sales, and 63% experiencing improved SEO.
  • A significant 89% of marketers that invested in influencer marketing intend to sustain or increase their investment.
  • About 28% of younger generations, specifically Gen-Z and millennials, have made direct purchases via social media platforms in recent months.
  • 49% of Gen Z say they’re less likely to make a purchase and 27% say they’ll stop shopping with the brand or share the negative experience with friends or family after an impersonal experience with a brand.
  • Over half of Gen-Z, at 55%, state that their purchasing decisions are most influenced by recommendations from influencers.
  • Influencer recommendations have swayed 21% of social media users in the 18-54 age range to make purchases in the last three months.
  • Over 30% of people say they unsubscribed from an email because the subject line was not aligned with the content of the emails.
  • Readers are 26% more likely to open emails with personalized subject lines.
  • 69% of email recipients report emails as spam based only on the subject line.
  • Brands using emojis in their email subject lines see a 56% increase in open rates.
  • 55% of emails are opened on mobile devices, meaning it’s a good idea to keep email subject lines under 50 characters if possible.
  • 47% of marketers test email subject lines to optimize click-through rates.
  • 33% of email recipients open emails because of a catchy subject line (Finances Online) 13.
  • Adding a preheader to your email subject line increases open rates by an average of 7%.
  • “Boring” subject lines sometimes perform best, with straightforward newsletter and descriptive subject lines performing the highest of 40 million emails examined in one study, with open rates of 60-87%.
  • Emails with numbers or question marks in the subject line have 8% higher open rates on average.
  • Incorporating a recipient’s name in the email subject line can elevate open rates by 10-14%.
  • 29% of marketers use a search-optimized website and blog to attract and convert leads.
  • SEO is considered the top source of high-scoring leads, with 35% of marketers attributing their most valuable leads to this channel.
  • 55% of marketers agree that publishing more content drives higher organic rankings.
  • Small businesses with blogs generate 67% more leads than those without.
  • Over half of lead acquisition methods are attributed to content marketing, and over 70% of industry professionals believe blogging is most effective in generating leads.
  • 51% of companies find updating old content the most efficient content marketing strategy.
  • Websites with active blogs generate 97% more backlinks than those without.
  • 88% of marketers using SEO plan to increase or maintain their investment this year.
  • 37% of marketers use AI to automate time-consuming SEO tasks, indicating a trend towards more automated SEO processes.
  • 84% of bloggers say AI has impacted their SEO strategy, showing the growing influence of technology in content creation and optimization.
  • (Marketing Insider Group) 19 56% of consumers most often use a mobile device for search engines, compared to 29% using a desktop.
  • 44% of online shoppers have discovered new products in the last 3 months by searching the internet.
  • The highest conversion rates are seen in catering and restaurants, and media and entertainment at over 18% on average.
  • Regularly running A/B tests on emails improves ROI by an average of 82%.
  • Even small changes can have a massive impact on your conversion rates—sometimes by as much as 300%.
  • Only 10% of marketing teams have a dedicated CRO budget and over 30% don’t allocate budget to optimization at all.
  • Digital analytics is considered to be the most effective CRO tactic, with marketers rating it over 80% effective.
  • Optimizers still focus mainly on desktop website optimization, with only around 9% of teams optimizing for mobile apps.
  • Cross-selling modules are one of the most effective CRO features, used by 100% of the top-performing retailers examined in a study.
  • Only 29% of marketers are optimizing to actual conversion value or customer lifetime.
  • 68% of B2B marketers report Google Analytics or another web-based analytics tool is their primary source of data for optimization.
  • 79% of CMOs said they will invest more in conversion rate optimization this year.
  • 56% of people are afraid of missing out on events, news and important status updates if they are away from social networks.
  • 31% of Americans feel they are missing out on fun activities that others are doing.
  • 26% of adults under 35 say social media makes them more likely to feel like they’re missing out.
  • TikTok usage was valued 33% higher among peers, while Instagram was valued 24% higher.
  • Travel posts are the content that is most likely to cause FOMO, with 59% of Millennials admitting they feel a sense of FOMO after viewing them.
  • Events and parties (56%) and food (29%) are also common FOMO-causing content.
  • 52% of US adults check their social media accounts as soon as they wake up.
  • Facebook is the social media platform that causes the most anxiety, with over 21% of social media users admitting the FOMO they experience from bedtime scrolling makes it more difficult for them to sleep.
  • Almost 28% of users use social media for inspiration on things to do and buy.
  • 18% of social media users aged 18 to 29 use social media posts for vacation inspiration.
  • 61% of people aged 18 to 29 would quit their jobs to become social media influencers.
  • Over 30% of Gen Z and millennials said the main reason they overspent with their wealthier friends was because they didn’t want to feel left out.
  • Email subject lines that use FOMO marketing tactics have a 22% higher open rate.
  • 55% of senior executives in leading global sales and marketing organizations believe AI will have a significant impact on marketing optimization such as A/B testing and SEO strategies (McKinsey & Company) 2.
  • 97% of leaders agree artificial intelligence (AI) and machine learning (ML) will enable companies to analyze social media data and insights more efficiently.
  • The most popular type of AI used by marketers is Chatbots (used by 53%), text generation tools (44%), visual tools (44%), and audio tools (33%) (Hubspot) 4.
  • 84% of bloggers/SEOs say AI and automation have impacted their SEO strategy for 2023 (Hubspot) 5.
  • 84% of Marketers say that AI and automation are very effective at aligning web content with search intent, 80% for improving the user experience on their site, and 74% for raising their SERP ranking (Hubspot) 6.
  • 96% of the time AI content is not complete enough to publish on its own.
  • 92% of businesses are using AI-driven personalization to drive growth in their business (Twilio Segment) 11.
  • 61% of salespeople believe generative AI will help them better serve their customers (Salesforce) 12.
  • 84% of salespeople using generative AI say it helps increase sales at their organization by enhancing and speeding up customer interactions.
  • 51% of marketers believe that AI enhances the effectiveness of email marketing over traditional methods.
  • 24 Essential Digital Marketing Statistics You Need to Know in 2024: Facebook is actually the most popular of the platforms, used by 89% of B2B and B2C marketers around the world.
  • 86% of the Global MarketshareAnother important thing to consider is how people are accessing your content.
  • 86% of the global market share comes from mobile, followed by desktop at 42.
  • According to a survey, 59% of people think it’s important to be able to shop using their phones when deciding where to buy.
  • Interestingly, 61% of folks prefer shopping on mobile websites that let them use search filters.
  • is Evenly SplitIn the United States, web activity is almost evenly split between mobile and desktop, with mobile accounting for about 49%, and desktop at 48%.
  • Additionally, a separate study highlights that a significant 63% of online traffic originates from smartphones or tablets, underscoring the growing prevalence of mobile devices in shaping our online experiences.
  • 7% of Marketers Increased Social Media Activity as the Pandemic BeganThe COVID-19 pandemic brought about many changes in our world as we know it.
  • 7% of Social Media Users Spent an Extra 1-2 Hours Per Day on Social MediaIt wasn’t just brands using social media more often during the pandemic though.
  • Video Marketing Has Increased by 41% Since 2016There’s no denying that video is a powerful way to connect with your audience on a deeper level.
  • In fact, an estimated 91% of businesses are using video marketing in 2023.
  • These digital marketing statistics show just how important it can be for business owners:89% of Marketers See a Positive ROI When Delivering a Personalized ExperienceDo you resonate more with brands that create a personalized experience that’s been tailored to your needs and interests?
  • A whopping 89% of marketers witness a boost in their returns when they incorporate personalization into their campaigns.
  • Meanwhile, 60% of consumers are likely to become repeat customers when they enjoy a personalized shopping experience.
  • Additionally, a remarkable 80% of consumers are open to sharing their personal data in exchange for special deals or offers.
  • Companies That Excel at Nurturing Leads Through Inbound Marketing Make 50% More SalesMore sales always sounds good, right?
  • It turns out that nurturing your leads through inbound marketing can help you generate 50% more sales.
  • Let’s see how these two methods compare:82% of Customers Rely on Print Ads When Deciding What to BuyAccording to a MarketingSherpa survey, old-school advertising methods are the most trusted.
  • People rely on print ads (82%), TV ads (80%), direct mail (76%), and radio ads (71%) when deciding what to buy.
  • 58% of Consumers in the United States Said They’ve Made a Purchase After Viewing a Social Media AdAccording to a survey in 2023, around 58% of shoppers in the United States mentioned they bought something they saw on social media.
  • Meanwhile, in the United Kingdom, 44% of people and in Germany, 40% said they did the same after finding something on social networksDigital Marketing ROI StatisticsAt the end of the day, the return on investment (ROI) for the actions you take in your business is what matters the most.
  • These digital marketing statistics provide just how impactful its ROI can be:Marketers Can Boost Brand Awareness by 80% Using Digital AdsPutting digital ads out there can boost how many people know about your brand by a staggering 80%.
  • If folks see those display ads, they’re 155% more likely to search for your brand-specific terms later on.
  • And here’s an interesting bit:if customers come across a retargeting ad, they’re 70% more likely to go ahead and make a purchase.
  • 66% of Marketers Increased Their Company’s Credibility and Trust Through Digital Marketing TacticsPeople buy from brands they trust, which is why you need to focus on building a trusting relationship before you can expect to generate sales.
  • 66% of marketers said digital marketing tactics helped their business to succeed.
  • 33% of Marketers That Blog Say it’s an Effective Tactic33% of marketers use blogs as one of their top six marketing strategies.
  • Marketing Accounts for 5% of the Employee Base for B2B CompaniesIn companies focused on business-to-business (B2B) marketing, the marketing departments typically make up about 5% of the total employees.
  • Surprisingly, over 40% of solo marketing teams rely on a content management system.
  • 54% of Marketing Leaders are Hiring FreelancersA recent survey from Fiverr Pro spills the beans that a whopping 54% of marketing leaders are embracing freelancers like never before.
  • 57% of Video Marketers in the UK Reported Using Live VideoClearly, marketers see the value in going live on social media, as it provides a way to connect with their audience in real time.
  • 57% of video marketers based in the UK said they used live video in their digital marketing strategy.
  • 180+ Powerful Digital Marketing Statistics for 2024 – WordStream: The compound annual growth rate of digital marketing from 2020-2026 is projected at 9%.
  • 63% of businesses have already increased their digital marketing budgets in recent years.
  • On top of this, 94% of small businesses plan to increase their marketing spending in 2024.
  • Between 2023 and 2024, there was a 10% growth rate in digital marketing budget spending across businesses.
  • 49% of businesses say that organic search brings them the best marketing ROI.
  • Over 20% of businesses say that the number of leads generated is the primary factor they base the success of their marketing channels.
  • 72% of overall marketing budgets get put towards digital marketing channels.
  • It’s estimated that 60% of marketing will be digital by the end of 2024 with offline media spending declining in recent years.
  • According to the Bureau of Labor Statistics, marketing job demand is set to increase by 10% by 2026—above the average for all careers.
  • In fact, digital marketing jobs are set to increase by 6% (higher than the average job growth rate) by 2032.
  • More digital marketing statistics The average local business puts 5-10% of its revenue towards its digital marketing budget, but for larger businesses, that number can climb to about 14%.
  • People spend 50% more with businesses that regularly respond to reviews.
  • 90% of internet users will see a Google Ad during their online experience.
  • Consumers are 155% more likely to look up your brand-specific terms after they’ve been exposed to display ads.
  • Customers are 70% more likely to make a purchase from a retargeting ad.
  • When someone conducts a search after initially seeing a related display ad, the likelihood of them converting is 59%.
  • 27% of consumers conduct a search for a business after seeing their display ad.
  • 75% of people say online ads make it easier to find what they’re looking for.
  • Website visitors sourced from PPC ads have a 50% higher likelihood of converting than organic visitors.
  • 62% of advertising in the past year was online, and it’s projected to grow beyond 8.
  • 15% of the average business’s website traffic comes from paid search, while paid social traffic only makes up 5% of overall website traffic.
  • Less than 20% of marketers use landing page A/B tests to improve conversion rates.
  • 61% of marketers say that generating traffic and leads is their number one challenge…so yes.
  • For example, while two-thirds of businesses are using AI for content brainstorming sessions, drafts, and outlines, 25% of businesses are worried about the impact of AI on website traffic.
  • 49% of businesses say that organic search brings them the best marketing ROI.
  • In other words, 75% of people never scroll past the first page of the SERP.
  • The top-ranking site in Google organic search results has an average CTR of 31%.
  • If local SEO is a focus for your brand, you’re in luck as 28% of local searches result in a purchase within 24 hours.
  • It’s no secret that content marketing is key for growing businesses—especially since brands that blog have 434% more indexed pages than those that don’t.
  • 93% of businesses are active on Facebook, and 86% also take advantage of Facebook advertising.
  • TikTok is the fastest growing social media platform, with 40% of businesses planning to incorporate TikTok into their 2024 social media strategy.
  • Less than 5% of businesses use Facebook video ads, so this is a major opportunity for brands looking to stand out.
  • Over 80% of B2B businesses use X for organic social media marketing and X (Twitter) ads.
  • The average swipe-up rate for Snapchat ads is 50% and the average cost per swipe is just $.
  • 80% of B2B businesses use LinkedIn Advertising, and 96% of B2B content marketers use LinkedIn for organic social media marketing.
  • 30% of the avage business’s engagement on LinkedIn comes from its employees.
  • 72% of TikTok users find TikTok ads “inspiring,” and 70% of users said that TikTok ads were even enjoyable.
  • 25% of people on TikTok have researched or purchased a product after seeing a TikTok about it.
  • 95% of Pinterest users have the app to help them plan or make a purchase.
  • In fact, 52% of Pinterest users have seen something on the app and made the purchase online later.
  • 64% of consumers watching branded videos on social media made a purchase after.
  • The average open rate across all industries is 80% and the average click-through rate is 2.
  • This makes it the second most popular marketing channel, behind social media at 89%.
  • Email marketing copy is one of the top use cases for generative AI, as 41% of businesses are using AI to create email content.
  • More email marketing statistics 64% of small businesses say they use email marketing to reach their ideal customers.
  • 80% of marketers say they’d rather give up social media than email marketing.
  • 64% of small businesses already leveraging email marketing, so you won’t want to miss out on taking advantage of this low-cost way to promote your business.
  • 33% of people will open an email simply because they think the subject line is catchy.
  • 47% of email recipients decide to open an email based on the subject line alone.
  • 38% of people will stop engaging with a website if the content or layout is unattractive.
  • Websites that have a superior user experience generate a 400% higher conversion rate.
  • More website statistics Nearly 60% of people said they wouldn’t recommend a business if it had a poorly designed mobile website.
  • About 40% of people will stop interacting with a website if images take too long to load.
  • 70% of small business websites are missing a call to action on their homepage.
  • Nearly 90% of consumers will shop with a competitor after a poor website experience.
  • 73% of businesses invest in web design to help their brand stand out from competitors.
  • 85% of people will abandon a page if they realize it’s an unsecured website—even if they already have a purchase in process.
  • 43% of small businesses that do have a website plan on improving their website performance this year.
  • I’ve got your back with these additional digital marketing trends:US ecommerce revenue increased by 7% between 2021 and 2022.
  • 60% of marketers either don’t know or don’t understand their Core Web Vitals.
  • 49% of businesses report that they grow revenue faster when they’re using video content.
  • 86% of consumers say they’d like to see more video content from brands they love.
  • 73% of customers are willing to spend more with a brand that has complete transparency online.
  • 76% of brands report having used marketing automation just this past year.
  • In 2024, 42% of businesses are increasing their investment in AR and VR strategies.
  • Mobile advertising will account for 77% of all digital ad spend in 2024.
  • Video marketing is on the rise, with 92% of businesses already considering it one of the most important parts of their digital marketing strategies.
  • Social media advertising and marketing worldwide – statistics & facts | Statista: 98% Detailed statistics Social media ads CTR worldwide 2022-2023 Social media advertising cost-per-mille (CPM) worldwide 6.
  • 30 Content Marketing Statistics You Should Know: According to the Content Marketing Institute, 73% of B2B marketers and 70% of B2C marketers use content marketing as part of their overall marketing strategy.
  • 91% of marketing pros surveyed by Semrush achieved success with their content marketing in 2021.
  • 83% of marketers believe it’s more effective to create higher quality content less often.
  • In a 2022 Statista Research Study of marketers worldwide, 62% of respondents said they believed it was important to be “always on” for their customers, whereas 23% thought content-led communications were most effective for personalized targeting purposes.
  • Short articles/posts (83%) and videos (61%) are the top two content types that B2C marketers used in the last 12 months.
  • 8% of marketers said original graphics (infographics, illustrations) helped them reach their marketing goals in 2020 (Source:Venngage) 72% of B2C marketers expected their organization to invest in video marketing in 2022.
  • (Source:CMI) Short content (300-900 words) attracts 21% less traffic and 75% fewer backlinks than articles of average length (900–1200 words.
  • 6% more engagement than static content, with buyers spending an average of 8.
  • 80% of B2B marketers who use paid distribution use paid social media advertising (Source:CMI) Content Consumption Once content reaches an audience, it’s important to understand how an audience consumes the content or takes action as a result.
  • A 2021 DemandGen study revealed 62% of those making B2B purchase decisions said they relied more on practical content like case studies and visual content, such as webinars, to guide their buying decisions and citing a higher emphasis on the trustworthiness of the source.
  • 65% of respondents to DemandGen’s survey said they give more credence to peer reviews, user-generated content, and third-party publications/analysts vs.
  • Content marketing generates three times as many leads as traditional outbound marketing but costs 62% less (Source:CMI).
  • 56% of marketers who leverage blogging say it’s an effective tactic, and 10% say it generates the greatest ROI (return on investment).
  • (Source:Hubspot blog research) Over 60% of marketers measure the success of their content marketing strategy through sales.
  • 61% of B2C marketers in CMI’s 2021 study said their 2022 content marketing budget would exceed their 2021 budget.
  • 22% of B2B marketers said they spent 50% or more of their total marketing budget on content marketing.
  • Furthermore, 43% saw their content marketing budgets grow from 2020 to 2021, and 66% expected them to grow again in 2022.
  • Top challenges included “attracting quality leads with our content” (41%), “generating enough traffic and promoting our content” (39%), “creating content that resonates with our audience” (31%), and “proving the ROI of our content” (30%).
  • (Source:Semrush’s State of Content Marketing 2022) Changes to SEO/search algorithms (64%), changes to social media algorithms (53%), and data management/analytics (48%) are among the top concerns for B2C marketers.
  • Top Digital Marketing Stats You Should Know About [Must Know]: According to the latest CMO Survey, 56% of businesses are modifying their business models to capitalize on digital opportunities.
  • Digital Marketing Stats ‘Quality’ Content Is Still the King 70% of internet users want to get information about products through content instead of traditional advertisements.
  • 53% of marketers agree to have blogging on the top of their content marketing agenda.
  • Blogging drives 97% more links to business websites (compared to ones that don’t) and over 68% of consumers feel that a blog makes a website more trustworthy.
  • Learn All the Tricks of the Marketing TradePurdue PG Digital Marketing ProgramExplore Course Offline Gets a Beating According to a report by Accenture, global revenue from offline commerce channels will see a 20% dip by 2021, while B2B Commerce market, in the US alone, will hit $1.
  • 4% growth in 2020, it’s expected to bounce back with a 17% growth in 2021.
  • ROI Matters the Most In a DemandGen report, 89% marketers pointed out improving the ability to measure and analyze marketing impact as a top priority.
  • ROI Is Also a Leading Challenge 40% of marketers believe ROI to be the top marketing challenge they face.
  • (Source:MarketingProfs) Audience Targeting/Segmentation Is a Challenge Forrester reports that 58% of marketers are struggling to target or segment their audience.
  • 88% of marketers say that collecting first-party data is their priority in 2021 to get a better understanding of their customers and meet their needs.
  • As such, Forrester survey shows that 85% of marketers consider inbound calls and phone conversations as an important part of their organization’s digital-first strategy.
  • Video Marketing Promises Good ROI Nearly 90% of video marketers experience a good return on investment.
  • The best ROI of any marketing channel, according to 49% of marketers, is achieved via organic search.
  • Content Marketing Statistics 81% of marketers consider content to be a key marketing strategy.
  • An article, website, or blog post with text is what 18% of people like to read.
  • Video Marketing Statistics Over the past three years, there has been a 23% growth in the use of video for marketing purposes.
  • Email marketing is used by small firms to contact clients in 64% of cases.
  • Lead Generation Stats Lead generation is cited by 61% of marketers as their greatest difficulty.
  • 53% of marketers pay out at least half of their marketing budget on lead generation.
  • One of the main challenges for 37% of marketers was finding high-quality leads.
  • 90% of those conducting searches haven’t made up their minds about a brand yet.
  • Marketing Technology Stats Over 75% of marketers say their marketing technology initiatives directly affect sales, and 91% are confident that their platform investments impact the company’s value.
  • More successful startups invest more than 25% of their marketing budget in marketing technology.
  • According to the latest CMO Survey, 56% of businesses are modifying their business models to capitalize on digital opportunities.
  • 4% growth in 2020, it’s expected to bounce back with a 17% growth in 2021.
  • 61 Compelling Social Media Marketing Statistics to Know in 2024: In addition, 67% of consumers expect brands and companies to have social media presence to provide customer service.
  • 9% of survey respondents said that they have made a purchase after seeing a social media advertisement.
  • 81% are aged 30 to 49, group age between 50-64 takes 73% and elder people aged 65+ use social media lesser out of all age group at 45%.
  • This represents about 60% of the global population and 94% of internet connected people.
  • By contrast, the African continent social media saturation ranges from 7% (Middle Africa) to 41% (Southern Africa).
  • Studies show that 90% of teenagers have used or are using social channels.
  • In fact, an astounding 44% of 8-11-year olds are on at least one social media network.
  • Smartphones and other mobile devices are used by 91% of social media users.
  • Social media users spend almost 80% of their social media time using the platform’s mobile versions.
  • About 99% of social media users will use a mobile connection to view these sites at some point.
  • In fact, 84% of content sharing happens outside of social media on other platforms, including instant messenger, email, and SMS.
  • You can get a much higher engagement rate on posts by tagging them with another location (79%) or user (56%).
  • Sharing branded video content is popular, with 74% of customers doing so.
  • Internet users are saying “no” to ads on social media, with more than 40% turning on ad blockers.
  • Video posted on social media has earned new customers for 93% of brands.
  • Among people who buy things online, 97% have accessed social media in the previous month.
  • Among American internet users between the ages of 18-34, almost 40% have bought a product from social media.
  • Product research is one reason why 76% of internet users access social media.
  • Customers who have enjoyed positive social media interactions with brands recommend the brand to social contacts at a rate of 71%.
  • Social media-based influencer recommendations help 49% of consumers decide what to buy–and around 80% of consumers have purchased something after seeing it recommended by an influencer.
  • For 13% of social media users, having a “buy” button would make them more likely to buy through the platform.
  • Among internet users ages 18-34, 95% will follow at least one brand on social media.
  • Brand discovery from online sources comes through social media 52% of the time.
  • For 43% of all internet users, social media is a major source of information on what to buy.
  • Brand familiarity–or the ability to see and become familiar with brands–influences 80% of customers to purchase something.
  • Social media has been a method of communicating with brands and businesses for 90% of those with an account.
  • Companies are expected to use social media to provide customer service by 70% of customers.
  • Interacting with customers on social media leads them to spend 20-40% more money on products and services.
  • Among consumers between 18 and 29, 49% admit to buying something in response to a social media ad.
  • For 86% of Americans, transparency on social media is so important that they will take their business elsewhere if a brand refuses to show transparency.
  • Over half, or 53%, of social media users say that transparency regarding changes to products and services is critical.
  • Of all social media content types, video is considered the most transparent content type by 67% of consumers.
  • Taking that one step further, 43% of consumers believe that live video is the most transparent form of content creation.
  • Social consciousness is important for 70% of consumers, who expect brands to take a public stand on issues that matter.
  • For 55% of consumers, values are important enough that they might boycott brands they disagree with.
  • For 47% of consumers, social media is where they expect brands to express their views.
  • About 40% of consumers believe that working with a relevant nonprofit is an ideal way for brands to express their views on social media.
  • An Adobe study indicates that for 50% of Gen Z and 42% of Millennials, social media is the advertising channel they find most relevant.
  • Unfortunately, for 53% of customers there’s a belief that marketing and publicity are the only reasons companies take a stand.
  • According to 90% of marketers, social media is very important to their clients and business.
  • The use of social media for marketing campaigns is growing, with more than 92% of American businesses adopting this practice.
  • According to a survey, 73% of marketers believe that their social media marketing efforts have been “somewhat effective” or “very effective” for their business.
  • Likewise, social media platforms are seen as effective marketing tools for 90% of small businesses.
  • According to 93% of marketers, increased exposure for brands is the primary benefit of advertising on social media.
  • 75% of marketers credit social media marketing with increased web traffic, and almost 90% say it has improved business exposure.
  • Among 80% of social marketers, the main goal is to boost engagement across social media.
  • For marketers who have used social media marketing for two years or more, 50% have seen increased sales.
  • This is why 92% of marketers in B2B companies prefer LinkedIn over all other social platforms as part of their social media marketing strategy.
  • In 2022, almost 92% of marketers who work for companies with more than 100 employees in the United States are expected to start using social media for marketing.
  • Social media marketing is proven to be effective because between online consumers, 97% of them accessed social media at least once a month.
  • In addition, 67% of consumers expect brands and companies to have social media presence to provide customer service.
  • 9% of survey respondents said that they have made a purchase after seeing a social media advertisement.
  • In the United States alone, the biggest percentage of social media users (84%) are aged between 18 to 29.
  • 81% are aged 30 to 49, group age between 50-64 takes 73% and elder people aged 65+ use social media lesser out of all age group at 45%.
  • 101 Digital Marketing Statistics You Need to Know for 2024: Showing 1 – 10 out of 832 for:Article Previous Next Home Digital Marketing Statistics 101 Digital Marketing Statistics That Show the Impact of Online Marketing in 2024 Did you know that 97% of people check a company’s online presence before deciding to visit their business?
  • 500% is how much searches for “near me” have increased in the past few years.
  • 76% of users who search for a local business on mobile visit a store within 24 hours 97% of users searched online for a local business 46% of all searches have local intent 97 billion local searches take place monthly 1.
  • 75% of people say paid ads make it easier for them to find what they need.
  • 84% is how much more likely YouTube mobile ads are to hold attention than TV ads.
  • Check out these digital marketing statistics on email marketing:760% is how much revenue can increase from creating segmented email marketing campaigns.
  • 300% is how much video can increase click-through rates in an email.
  • 70% of brands fail to use personalized emails even though they generate six times higher transaction rates.
  • 68% of people automatically delete emails that don’t have content relevant to their interests.
  • 3% of people will delete an email if it’s not optimized for mobile 2.
  • 5% of web designers believe that the top reason visitors leave a website is because it loads too slowly 73% of users leave a website due to non-responsive web design 50% of consumers believe brands should prioritize web design 43.
  • Digital Marketing Statistics 2024 | MediaValet: Only 17% of organizations clearly define their digital marketing strategy.
  • Not even 1% of searchers go as far as the second page of Google to find what they’re looking for.
  • 6% of internet users will access the web solely via their smartphones by 2025.
  • Source:CNBC, 2019 More than 70% of shoppers buy online via their mobile.
  • More than 50% of marketers agree that visual content is essential to their marketing strategy.
  • Source:Venngage, 2022 Content with relevant images gets 94% more views than content without relevant images.
  • Over the past 10 years, videos longer than 30 minutes, such as webinars and live events, saw over 11,000% growth.
  • Source:HubSpot, 2023Video traffic now equates to 65% of all internet traffic.
  • Source:MediaValet, 202390% of marketers say video marketing has helped them generate leads while 87% say it has increased sales.
  • Source:HubSpot, 2022Adding videos to landing pages can improve conversions by up to 86%.
  • Source:EyeView, 2022Almost half, (48%) of marketers create a new landing page for each new campaign.
  • On average, posts that include images get 650x more engagement than text-only postsSource:Medium, 201888% of marketers stated that they incorporated images in more than 50% of all the articles they published.
  • Source:Venngage, 2019When information is paired with images, people retain 65% of the information, rather than 10% without.
  • 79% of marketers report a blog as the second most popular distribution channel.
  • Source:Content Marketing Institute, 2023 40% of marketers think that a blog is one of the most effective marketing channels.
  • Source:DemandSage, 202342% of marketers use TikTok already, and more than half of them (56%) plan to increase their investment.
  • Source:Omnicore, 2021Photos on Instagram showing faces get 30% more likes than photos without faces.
  • Source:Zephoria, 202179% of internet users in the United States have Facebook (beating out Instagram, at only 32%).
  • TwitterApproximately 52% of all Twitter users are on the platform daily.
  • Source:Brandwatch, 2020On average, brands that use Twitter for business experience a 7% improvement in brand preference.
  • Source:Omnicore, 2022YouTube is the preferred source of video for 83% of consumers globally.
  • 6% of internet users will access the web solely via their smartphones by 2025.
  • 6% of internet users will access the web solely via their smartphones by 2025.
  • 70 Content Marketing Statistics to Bookmark for 2024: 82% of marketers are actively investing in content marketing, 10% report not using content marketing, and 8% are unsure if their company uses content marketing.
  • (HubSpot)40% of B2B marketers have a documented content marketing strategy.
  • That percentage is higher among the most successful B2B marketers — 64% have a documented content marketing strategy.
  • (Content Marketing Institute)69% of marketers actively invest time in SEO.
  • (HubSpot)76% of marketers report that content marketing generates demand/leads (a 9 percentage points increase since last year).
  • In addition, 63% of marketers say that content marketing helps to nurture the audience/customers/leads, and 50% say that it helps build loyalty with existing clients/customers (a 13 percentage points decrease).
  • (CMI)Video was the primary form of content being created in 2023 (50%), images (47%), and blogs (33%).
  • (HubSpot)73% of people admit to skimming blog posts, while 27% consume them thoroughly.
  • (HubSpot)51% of the businesses that invest in content marketing publish content every day.
  • (The Manifest)44% say they typically consume three to five pieces of content before engaging with a vendor.
  • (DemandGen)73% of respondents prefer to learn about a product or service from a short video.
  • 🤔— Ahrefs (@ahrefs) November 8, 2023 We found that almost 80% of our respondents had already adopted AI tools in their content marketing strategies.
  • Another 10% plan to, and only a minority of 10% don’t plan to use any AI for content.
  • My guess is that the remaining 10% of non-adopters are not just being “neutral” about AI — they’ve decided not to use it (yet) and likely not just ignored the tech.
  • The top 3 use cases are:brainstorming new topics (51%), researching headlines and keywords (45%), and writing drafts (45%).
  • (CMI)50% of marketers believe inadequate AI adoption is holding them back from achieving their goals.
  • (Mailchimp)58% of US marketers said they have increased their content creation performance thanks to generative AI.
  • 83% of marketers say it’s better to focus on quality rather than quantity of content, even if it means posting less often.
  • (eMarketer)Content marketing generates over 3x as many leads as outbound marketing and costs 62% less.
  • (Demand Metric)72% of the most successful marketers in North America measure the ROI of their content marketing.
  • Only 7% of B2B marketers don’t plan to develop a content marketing strategy.
  • (CMI)87% of B2B marketers prioritize the audience’s informational needs over the organization’s sales/promotional messages.
  • (CMI)84% of marketers voted for LinkedIn as the best-performing social media platform, followed by Facebook (29%) and YouTube (22%).
  • (CMI)78% of B2B marketers employ keyword research for SEO while creating content.
  • Only 5% of B2C marketers don’t plan to develop a content marketing strategy.
  • (CMI)65% of B2C marketers prioritize the audience’s informational needs over the organization’s sales/promotional messages.
  • (CMI)B2C marketers who use nonpaid social media platforms report that Facebook (63%), LinkedIn (53%), and Instagram (39%) produced the best overall content marketing results.
  • (CMI)Only 22% of B2C marketers don’t use paid content distribution channels.
  • (CMI)73% of B2C marketers employ keyword research for SEO when creating content.
  • Even though Bing was the quickest to the market with the AI search feature, it didn’t help the search engine cross the 4% market share (Statcounter).
  • 71% of B2B researchers start their research with a generic search instead of branded search.
  • (Google)53% of shoppers say they always do research before a purchase to ensure they are making the best possible choice.
  • 7% of pages will rank in the top 10 search results within a year of publication.
  • (Nielsen)70% of people rather get information from blogs than traditional advertisements.
  • (Demand Metric)How-to articles are the most popular content formats (76%), followed by lists (55%), and news and trends (47%).
  • (Google)79% of people say they’ve been convinced to buy or download a piece of software or app by watching a video (a 1 percentage point increase since last year).
  • (Google)91% of businesses use video as a marketing tool (a 5 percentage points increase since last year).
  • (Wyzowl)96% of people have watched an explainer video to learn more about a product or service.
  • (Wyzowl)91% of people wanted to see more videos from brands in 2023 (a 3 percentage points increase since last year).
  • 64% of Americans listened to a podcast as of 2023 (a 2 percentage points increase from last year), and 42% listened to a podcast last month.
  • (Edison Research)46% of monthly podcast listeners say that ads on podcasts are not intrusive.
  • (Edison Research)80% of podcast listeners listen to all or most of each episode.
  • (Nielsen)95% of marketers who use generative AI for email creation rate it “effective”, with 54% rating it “very effective.
  • ” (Hubspot)71% of marketers said that they rely on email engagement to evaluate content performance.
  • Digital Marketing Statistics For 2024 – On The Map Marketing: 51% of customers say they will unfollow a brand if it irritates them on social media.
  • According to 81% of marketers, video content has a direct and favorable impact on sales.
  • Social media will account for 33% of all digital advertising spending in 2022.
  • 78% of Google searches went to the second page and clicked on something.
  • SEO for mobile sites on mobile devices is considered an effective investment by 48% of SEO marketers.
  • Using strategic keywords is the number one SEO marketing strategy, according to 71% of marketers.
  • CTR increased by about 4% in titles with positive or negative sentiment.
  • Social media stories are considered “very effective” by 57% of marketers, while 35% think they are “somewhat effective.
  • 70% of consumers have purchased a product after seeing it advertised on YouTube.
  • In 2021, 82% of B2B content marketing experts used Twitter for their organic marketing efforts.
  • Carousel Ads on the web delivered a 15% increase in click-through rates, and app Carousel ads showed a 24% increase in installs-per-impression.
  • Email marketing is recognized as having the highest ROI by 30% of marketers worldwide.
  • With a 15% conversion rate in 2020, email collection forms successfully convert viewers.
  • Exit-Intent campaigns convert 2-4% of visitors who are about to leave into email subscribers (OptinMonster) 4.
  • 70% of marketers stated that their best-performing email campaigns came from a person rather than a company.
  • 33% of marketers send weekly emails, and 26% send emails multiple times per month.
  • Enjoy up to a 28% higher return when you put testing to work for your email program.
  • Free delivery is the most effective inducement for 53% of online buyers in persuading them to buy something from an online retailer.
  • 60% of retail, e-commerce, and consumer goods and services companies are personalizing emails based on past purchases, versus 38% in 2019.
  • 187 Must Know Digital Marketing Statistics In 2024: 69% of the overall advertisement spending will be generated via smartphones by 2026.
  • Roughly 87% of the Digital Advertising revenue will be generated via programmatic advertising in 2026.
  • General Digital Marketing Statistics 49% of marketers say that organic search has the best ROI.
  • 20% of businesses say they measure Digital Marketing’s success by measuring the number of leads generated.
  • 72% of the marketing budget goes towards Digital Marketing, according to a survey from Gartner.
  • Google is the world’s biggest search engine, catering to 92% of global searches.
  • The marketing job demand is set to increase by 10% by 2026, as per a survey by the Bureau of Labor.
  • Customers spend 50% more with businesses that respond to reviews at regular intervals.
  • Over 90% of people read reviews online before making a purchasing decision.
  • Digital Advertisements can increase a brand’s awareness by 80% 62% of marketers use software for Customer Relationship Management.
  • Emails that include a call to action button have 37% higher click-through rates.
  • Mondays have the highest opening rate (22%), while Sundays have the lowest with 20.
  • 82% of digital marketers implement email marketing globally, out of which 65% use automated emails.
  • Nearly 70% of email recipients can tell if an email is spam simply by reading its subject line.
  • The conversion rate increases by 56% if an Email has an emoji in its subject line rather than plain text.
  • 46% of customers prefer to be contacted by brands via emails Digital Advertising Statistics Studies reveal that an average person sees around 10,000 advertisements daily.
  • With a 100% increase in less than a decade, the online space is filled with people trying to sell you stuff via targeted ads.
  • 65% of total ad spending will be generated through mobile phones in 2024.
  • Non-programmatic ad spending will hold a 20% share in 2024, while programmatic will hold 80%.
  • 90% Source:Statista E-commerce Marketing Statistics The e-commerce scene has been booming for the last decade, and the COVID-19 pandemic gave a huge push to that craziness.
  • 14 billion people, equivalent to 27% of the world’s population, are shopping online.
  • 69% of total eCommerce traffic comes from an organic source (Google) 60% of Millennials will visit Amazon before making a purchase online.
  • 71% People trust product reviews from their friends and family 80% of the time.
  • 90% Shopify has the most out of 24 million e-commerce websites globally, with 5.
  • 7% of online shoppers prefer to buy products that have content written in their mother tongue.
  • 53% of smartphone users prefer to shop from their favorite business’s app.
  • 65% of customers surf similar products on their mobile phones while in a store.
  • M-commerce websites’ bounce rates increase by 32% when their loading times jump from 1 to 3 seconds.
  • 32% of customers decide their position about buying something in a store after looking up a similar product online on their smartphones.
  • Over 70% of online buyers prefer to buy from well-optimized websites that offer them a smoother shopping experience.
  • 62% of customers are less likely to shop with you again if they have a bad experience with your website’s functioning.
  • 61% of people tend to shop on mobile websites that allow them to apply search filters.
  • Brands with a dedicated blog have a 55% more traffic rate than those that don’t.
  • More than half (55%) of the world’s internet traffic comes via smartphones.
  • 88% of people who search for a local business over the web are likely to visit them within 24 hours.
  • 36% of local searches result in a purchase Local searches contribute 22.
  • 82% of consumers read online reviews for local businesses 93% of consumers use Google Maps when searching for a business.
  • Google My Business listings with contact information receive 94% of calls on working days.
  • 71% of people surveyed say that positive Google My Business reviews made them more likely to use a business Source:Ahrefs, Hubspot, Think With Google, Gitnux, Publer.
  • 80% of those who considered themselves very successful in content marketing have documented their content marketing strategies.
  • Nearly 80% of very successful content marketers spend more than 10% of their total marketing budgets on content.
  • 20% of marketers have a budget of 3 to 5K, while only 6% have a budget of over $20,000.
  • 52% of marketers say social media and community building is a top priority, as is improving content quality, followed by audience research.
  • 45% of marketers say that Videos are the top-performing content for their brands.
  • PPC returns $2 for every $1 spent, which means the ROI of a PPC campaign is around 200%.
  • Paid ads and social media account for less than 10% of B2B website traffic, leads, or sales.
  • Videos on a website can increase the average time spent on a page by 88%.
  • 40% of users won’t engage with a website if its layout is unattractive.
  • 50% of internet users say that they consider website design as a factor in formulating their opinion on a business.
  • Businesses allocate around 15% of their marketing budget toward social media marketing.
  • Nearly 86% of businesses on Facebook make use of its advertising platform.
  • Over 98% of Facebook’s audience log in to the platform via mobile phones.
  • 83% of global internet users access TikTok Over 1 billion videos are viewed on the platform every day.
  • At least 60% of social media users access the platform for content that’s funny.
  • 38% of the 55% of Gen-Zers and Millennials who share memes follow meme accounts.
  • Nearly 56% of marketers from the United States and the United Kingdom use Instagram to collaborate with influencers.
  • Infographics in Digital Marketing In the fast-paced online world, where 81% of readers skim content, visuals are crucial for digital marketing.
  • The usage of infographics enhances the drive to read by 80% 45% of internet users will click on a link if they see an infographic in it.
  • 70% of social media users would rather learn about a topic through infographics than text Artificial Intelligence in Digital Marketing AI had been around for a long time, but the adoption rates drastically increased after the launch of ChatGPT.
  • Take a look at these interesting stats about AI usage in marketing:In an insider intelligence survey, 76% of marketers said they use AI for basic content creation and to write copy.
  • Gartner forecasts that 30% of outgoing marketing messages from big businesses will be generated by AI by 2025.
  • According to Mailchimp, 50% of marketers believe inadequate adoption of AI is holding them back from achieving their goals.
  • 2% of marketers spend more than 40% of their marketing budget on AI-driven campaigns.
  • 91% of Fortune 1000 companies are increasing their investment in artificial intelligence.
  • A Statista survey shows that the adoption of generative AI is highest in the marketing and advertising sector (37%).
  • The other two sectors showing increased use of AI are technology (35%) and consulting (30%).
  • 26% of businesses are applying AI techniques such as NLP to marketing and sales Bonus:Discover the latest trends and statistics shaping the future of personalization in our comprehensive post on Personalization Trends and Stats.
  • Future of Digital Marketing It is predicted that 69% of the overall advertisement spending will be generated via smartphones.
  • One Statistic also reveals that 90% of mobile users are unaware of what they want to purchase, So they look for it online.
  • Over 50% of digital marketers will increase their content marketing budget in 2024, as per the marketing insider group.
  • 61% of shoppers prefer to shop from businesses that have augmented reality offerings.
  • 100+ Eye-Opening Content Marketing Statistics for 2023: 69% of businesses plan to increase their content marketing budgets in 2023—that’s pretty impressive.
  • And 48% of non-senior content team members are responsible for the planning and strategic elements of social media and other assets.
  • Interestingly, ptimizing content for search is in second place with 32% of respondents.
  • It also seems that marketers are beginning to see the value in optimizing their content for aggregate sites like Reddit (16% use this as a promotion tactic).
  • TakeawaysOverall, we saw that 63% of respondents use paid channels to accelerate their content distribution.
  • 73% of respondents shared they use organic social media channels to promote their content.
  • Regardless of company size, of those that reported extreme success in content marketing, 70% said they do indeed measure content marketing ROI.
  • However, in the overall survey results, only 54% of all businesses engage in this practice.
  • And 61% of respondents believe they are at least above average at measuring their ROI.
  • However, 24% of respondents are wisely looking at what content marketing can do for their advertising budget.
  • The most recent research from BrightEdge shows that 53% of businesses get their overall web traffic from organic search.
  • Taking a look at organic traffic, social media engagement, and backlinks, we averaged the metrics and split them into three areas:high-performing (20%), average-performing (60%), and low-performing (20%) articles.
  • Only 17% of high-performing blogs were found to be very difficult to read.
  • B2B Content Marketing For B2B businesses specifically, our respondents cited creating and posting more content (52%) and improving content (51%) as the top tactics for gaining more organic traffic to their sites.
  • Attracting quality leads with B2B content came in as the top challenge among respondents (54%).
  • Even less (18%) said user experience was an important investment in 2023.
  • 64% of respondents reported calculating revenue that their content marketing generates 51% reported measuring organic traffic 19% reported calculating revenue from non-paid channels Perhaps this is why B2C content marketing is seeing interesting investment trends in 2023.
  • 38% of respondents said they had a dedicated team of one to three specialists doing their content marketing.
  • These are even bigger numbers than dedicated marketing agencies—only 37% of agency respondents said they had one to three specialists, and only 21% said they had four to 10 specialists.
  • In addition, many B2C businesses invest in dedicated teams to do their content marketing work (over 38% said they had one to three specialists).
  • Agencies It’s probably not surprising to read that 71% of agency respondents said they have a documented content marketing plan in place.
  • You might, however, be surprised to learn that only 28% of those surveyed believed their content marketing strategy was mature or complex.
  • Just over half of agencies surveyed also planned to measure their ROI (54%).
  • Just over 25% said no, while just under 25% said yes, it has made them decrease their content marketing budgets.
  • And 48% of non-senior content team members are responsible for the planning and strategic elements of social media and other assets.
  • Only 17% of high-performing blogs were found to be very difficult to read.
  • Just over half of agencies surveyed also planned to measure their ROI (54%).
  • Digital marketing in the United Kingdom (UK) – statistics & facts | Statista: Marketer use Share of marketers allocating the majority of marketing spend towards online marketing 72% Detailed statistics Budget distribution preference between online vs.
  • 16bn USD Detailed statistics Revenue of the social media advertising industry in the UK 2019-2028 Share of mobile in UK digital ad spend 51% Detailed statistics Digital Market Outlook:digital advertising spending in the UK 2019-2028, by device Search advertising spending in the UK 13.
  • 39+ Content Marketing Statistics for Your 2024 Strategy: (Over half of Gen Z [52%], millennials [57%], and Gen X [51%] feel this way.
  • ) How content marketers use AI Nearly half of content marketers use AI to brainstorm new topics, and 46% use it to research headlines and keywords.
  • More than one-third (36%) use AI tools for writing, though many feel conflicted about the idea.
  • 62% of content marketers are concerned that AI will result in less respect for skilled writers/editors.
  • Among their other worries about generative AI:writing/editing viewed as a commodity (55%), lower compensation for writers/editors (46%), fewer jobs for content marketers (45%), and larger workload for writers/editors (17%).
  • Learning how to work with new technologies (such as AI) was the most popular skill of interest cited by content marketers (48%) – up two points from the previous year – followed by improving data analytics/data science skills (42%), and leadership skills (42%).
  • How often content marketers are engaged at work 54% of content marketers say they’re often engaged at work.
  • (Millennials are least likely to say they’re often engaged – just 49% – compared with 62% of Gen X and 62% of baby boomers.
  • The most popular drivers of engagement are doing meaningful work (81%), positive co-worker relationships (78%), and recognition for my work (71%).
  • Other attributes include manager relationships (58%), sense of belonging at work (56%), and professional development opportunities (55%).
  • Content marketers are willing to explore new opportunities 31% say they are actively or highly interested in looking for a new role – three points higher than the previous year.
  • Only 25% of content markets say they see a clear path for advancement at their company.
  • Content marketing challenges 28% of B2B marketers say team members resigned in the last year, 20% say team members were laid off, and about half (49%) say they had new team members acclimating to their ways of working.
  • 72% of B2B marketers use generative AI tools for content-related tasks.
  • However, 61% say their organization lacks guidelines for doing so, and 8% are unsure.
  • The most frequently cited content creation challenge is creating the right content for the audience (57%).
  • The most frequently cited non-creation challenge, by far, is a lack of resources (58%).
  • As for the most common challenge of scaling content production, almost half of content marketers (48%) say not enough content repurposing.
  • Types of content and social media platforms 94% of B2B marketers use short articles/posts, followed by videos (84%) and case studies/customer stories (78%).
  • The same percentage of marketers (53%) find case studies/customer stories and videos to be effective.
  • Nine in 10 B2B marketers use social media platforms (organic) to distribute content, 79% use blogs, and 73% use email newsletters.
  • In-person events and webinars are used by 56% and produce the best results, according to marketers.
  • 84% of B2B marketers say LinkedIn provides the best value among the social media platforms they use.
  • 32% of B2B marketers say they decreased their X use last year (10% increased, 31% stayed the same, and 27% don’t use.
  • While 20% decreased their use of Facebook, 22% increased their presence, 38% stayed the same, and 20% didn’t use it.
  • On Instagram, 10% decreased their use, 32% increased their use, 28% stayed the same, and 31% didn’t use it.
  • With YouTube, 9% decreased their use, 32% upped their use, 39% stayed the same, and 20% didn’t use it.
  • On LinkedIn, 72% increased their use, and 24% stayed the same, with 2% decreasing their use and 2% not using the platform.
  • Most B2B marketers aren’t on TikTok (81%), while 10% increased their use, 7% decreased, and 10% increased their use.
  • 19% of marketers say they use TikTok – more than double the previous year.
  • Content management technology Only 31% of B2B marketers say their organization has the right content management technology.
  • Thirty percent say they have the technology but aren’t using its potential, and 29% say they haven’t acquired the right technology.
  • 45% of B2B marketers say it’s likely their organization will invest in additional content management technology in 2024.
  • Thirty-two percent say they are unlikely to invest in more tech, while 23% say they are neither likely nor unlikely.
  • Metrics and goals The five most common metrics to assess content performance are conversions (73%), email engagement (71%), website traffic (71%), website engagement (69%), and social media analytics (65%).
  • The most common challenge B2B marketers have while measuring content performance is integrating/correlating data across multiple platforms (84%).
  • 58% of B2B marketers say content marketing helped them generate sales/revenue in the last 12 months, up from 42% the previous year.
  • Here’s how the characteristics break down among the most successful, least successful, and all:Strongly agree that the leader they report to understands the work they do:Most (74%), least (23%), all 54%.
  • Organization has the right technology to manage content across the organization:Most (47%), least (11%), and all (31%).
  • Faced with a lack of communication across organizational silos:Most (28%), least (51%), and all (40%).
  • Agree that organization measures content performance effectively:Most (77%), least (17%), and all (46%).
  • They also use content marketing successfully to:Generate demand/leads:Most successful (87%), least successful (55%), and all (76%).
  • Nurture subscribers/audiences/leads:Most (78%), least (42%), and all (63%).
  • Content marketing budgets and investment for 2024 45% of B2B content marketers expect their content marketing budget to increase in 2024.
  • 69% of B2B marketers think their organization will increase investment in video in 2024, followed by thought leadership content (53%) and in-person events (47%).
  • Among the other areas:Paid advertising (43%)Online community building (33%)Webinars (33%)Audio content (25%)Digital events (21%) Hybrid events (11%) How to apply these stats to your content strategy Has content marketing become more critical to your organization as it has for so many?
  • Among the key findings:67% of marketers say videos have become more important to their business in the last year.
  • The percentage of marketers who say it’s important to create a human connection with video increased to 43% – six percentage points higher than the previous year.
  • ) 69% of those who use AI to assist with video creation use it to create video scripts (the most common use cited by far).
  • Video effectiveness Just 7% of marketers say their organization uses videos to its full potential.
  • 60% say the thing they would need to get better results with video is a video strategy.
  • (Twenty-seven percent expect an increase of more than 9%, 37% say the rise will be between 1% and 9%.
  • About one-fourth (26%) expect the budget to stay the same, 1% expect a decrease between 1 and 9%, and 2% expect a decrease of more than 9%.
  • 75% of marketers think their organization needs to invest more in video.
  • 85 Content Marketing Statistics To Make You A Marketing Genius: 50% of bloggers now utilize AI tools to enhance their content creation process.
  • The integration of AI in content creation marks a significant shift, with 50% of bloggers embracing this technology, underscoring its role in enhancing creativity and efficiency.
  • Nearly a third of marketers (29%) actively incorporate content marketing into their strategies.
  • The statistic that 29% of marketers actively use content marketing reflects its solid and consistent role in the marketing mix, emphasizing the value of content in engaging and retaining audiences.
  • In 2024, 50% of marketers plan to boost their investment in content marketing.
  • Podcasts and other forms of audio content are part of the content strategy for 25% of marketers.
  • With 25% of marketers incorporating podcasts or other audio content, this trend points to the diversification of content strategies and the growing appeal of audio formats in capturing audience attention in a screen-dominated world.
  • 20% of articles are high-performing, 60% are average-performing, and 20% are low-performing based on organic search traffic, social media engagement, and backlinks.
  • Articles with 7+ images get 555% more backlinks and 259% more unique page views than those without images.
  • Articles with at least one video generate 70% more organic web traffic.
  • Articles with data are higher performing, with 5% of high-performing articles containing data studies compared to 2% in the low-performing group.
  • Typically 70% of the people who visit your website will leave and never return, meaning all those marketing efforts to reach them have gone to waste.
  • You can unlock this powerful technology 100% free when you purchase our OptinMonster Pro plan.
  • Social Media Marketing Statistics 2024: In fact, 76% of local businesses use social media as part of their marketing strategy, while 41% of them rely on social media to help drive revenue.
  • To develop a solid strategy, social media marketers must adapt to evolving consumer behaviors, with 48% of social media users making purchases directly from the platforms.
  • Content marketing – statistics & facts | Statista: Budgets Share of industry professionals spending between 5 and10k USD monthly on content marketing 17% Detailed statistics Content marketing spending worldwide 2022 Share of marketers planning to increase their content marketing budgets in 2022 49.
  • 52 Visual Content Marketing Statistics You Should Know in 2023: (HubSpot) 50% of marketers leverage video in their marketing strategy, followed closely by images at 47%.
  • (HubSpot) Long-form videos above 30 minutes, like webinars and live events, saw over 11,000% growth over the past decade, making it the fastest-growing video segment.
  • (HubSpot) 71% of B2B marketers say content marketing has become more important to their organization in the last year.
  • (Content Marketing Institute) In 2021, over 50% of marketers used visuals in over 91% of their content.
  • (Venngage) According to a survey by Venngage, original graphics are the most used type of visual content by marketers at 36%, followed by stock photos at nearly 34%.
  • (Venngage) 30% of marketers primarily create visual content for blogs, followed by social channels such as Facebook and LinkedIn.
  • (World Health Organization) Over 50% of marketers agree that visual content is essential to their marketing strategy.
  • (Venngage) Video Marketing Statistics 75% of adults in the US watch short-form video content on a mobile device.
  • (eMarketer) 59% of Gen Z viewers use short-form video apps to discover things that they then watch longer versions of.
  • (HubSpot) Social media videos are the most common type of video marketers create at 71%, followed closely by explainer videos at 70%.
  • (HubSpot) 96% of consumers have watched an explainer video to learn more about a product.
  • (HubSpot) When it comes to B2B, 79% of people say they’ve been convinced to purchase an app or piece of software because of a video.
  • (HubSpot) YouTube is the most widely used video platform by marketers at 90% (Facebook is second, at 86%).
  • (HubSpot) 33% of marketers leverage short-form video content in their marketing strategy.
  • (HubSpot) Emerging Visual Marketing Trends 90% of marketers using short-form video will increase or maintain their investment next year, and 21% of marketers plan to leverage short-form video for the first time in 2023.
  • (HubSpot) 56% of marketers plan to increase their investment in TikTok in 2023.
  • (HubSpot) 24% of marketers are planning to invest more in video than any other format in 2023.
  • Additionally, 29% plan to stop marketing in the Metaverse and in audio chat rooms.
  • (Similarweb) 40% of marketers plan to prioritize mobile-friendly website design in 2023.
  • (HubSpot) 56% of consumers who are interested in the metaverse want to watch TV and movies there.
  • (Venngage) When it comes to content creation, 30% of marketers share infographics.
  • (HubSpot) One study found that people following directions with text and illustrations do 323% better than people following directions without illustrations.
  • (Springer) Source:NeoMam Social Media Stats for Visual Content Marketers Facebook is the most popular social media platform, used by 64% of marketers.
  • (HubSpot) 70% of Instagram users don’t mind seeing ads when watching videos on Instagram.
  • (Instagram Business) 26% of marketers plan to use TikTok for the first time in 2023, and 16% of marketers plan to invest more in TikTok than any other social media app.
  • (HubSpot) In 2023, 31% of marketers use YouTube Shorts and Instagram Reels.
  • (HubSpot) Of the Instagram Story formats people prefer most, 35% say they engage with short narrative-styled Stories with photos, videos, and text most often.
  • (HubSpot) YouTube is the most popular social media platform among teenagers, with 95% of American teenagers ages 13 to 17 using it.
  • Instagram users was between the ages of 18 and 29, making up 71% percent of Instagram’s user base in the U.
  • (Pew Research) In a poll of over 350 consumers, 56% said they “sometimes” watch Instagram Stories with the sound on, while 29% said they “always” do this.
  • (Statista) For videos up to 5 minutes long, viewers will watch about 50% of the content.
  • 8 billion in 2022 (an increase of 9% from the previous year), highlighting the platform’s expanding influence.
  • (Pinterest) Users who saw immersive, actionable ads on Pinterest were 59% more likely to recall that brand.
  • 35 Game-Changing Digital Marketing Statistics You Need to Know in 2024: 40% of marketers say proving the ROI of their marketing activities is a top marketing challenge.
  • 58% of marketers are challenged with targeting or segmenting their audience.
  • 57% of marketers are challenged with optimizing next-best-action marketing decisions.
  • 80% of marketers report their lead generation efforts are only slightly or somewhat effective.
  • 42% of B2B marketing professionals state that a lack of quality data is their biggest barrier to lead generation.
  • Nearly 100% of marketers surveyed believe AI will have some sort of positive impact on their organizations.
  • Our recent survey found that nearly 90% of marketers plan to dedicate a budget specifically for AI tools in 2024, with almost all of them saying they’ll be investing even more than this year.
  • Compared to their competitors, 87% surveyed say that their use of AI is very advanced or advanced.
  • Marketers are brimming with AI confidence:93% of those surveyed boast expert or advanced knowledge, and nearly all believe their companies outpace peers in AI adoption.
  • Omnichannel campaigns produce a 250% higher rate of purchase frequency than do single-channel campaigns.
  • Customer retention rates are 90% higher for omnichannel campaigns than for single-channel campaigns.
  • 80% of consumers say they are more likely to do business with a company if it offers personalized experiences.
  • 81% of marketers are worried that their use of third-party data could raise privacy concerns.
  • 28% of people who perform a local voice search go on to call the business.
  • 84% of marketers report phone calls having higher conversion rates with larger order value (AOV) compared to other forms of engagement.
  • 41% of organizations report having increased phone conversion rates by 25% or more in the past 12 months.
  • 85% of marketers believe inbound calls and phone conversations are a key component of their organization’s digital-first strategy.
  • 48% of marketers have provided or expect to provide enhanced customer experiences as a result of scaling conversation intelligence across the enterprise.
  • 43% of marketers have improved or expect to improve customer acquisition and retention as a result of scaling conversation intelligence across the enterprise.
  • 61 Social Media Marketing Statistics You Need To Know in 2024: 95 billion social media users worldwide in 2023, that’s just over 60% of the whole population.
  • 3 billion internet users worldwide in 2023, that’s just over 65% of the whole population.
  • 80% of social marketers say that their main goal is to boost engagement cross social media.
  • 51% of people are more likely to share videos with friends and family over any other content type.
  • Social Media Brand User Relationship Statistics 78% of consumers want brands to use social media to help people connect with each other.
  • The likelihood of making a purchase is 7% if not referred by social media, users are 71% more likely if referred by social media.
  • 40% of consumers expect brands to problem-solve in the channels of their choice – i.
  • 70% of consumers feel more connected with a brand if their CEO is active on social media, primarily because they feel there are real people behind the brand.
  • 72% of people feel more connected to a brand whose employees share information on social media, primarily as they like learning about the people who make up the brand.
  • The top behaviour that users report makes them feel more connected to a brand on social media is liking or responding to comments or messages with 55% of consumers reporting that this makes them feel more in touch.
  • Social Media Brand User Expectation Statistics 68% of consumers’ primary reason for following a brand on social is ‘To stay informed about new products or services’ – highlighting users’ expectations for this information to be shared on social media.
  • 79% of consumers expect brands to respond to their social media messages within 24 hours.
  • 72% of consumers want brands to be positive contributors to society, 64% to connect with their consumers, and 64% to use their power to help people.
  • Social Media Marketing ROI Statistics Most marketers (25%) cite Instagram as the social media platform that provides them with the highest ROI.
  • Less than 10% of marketers cite Twitter, Snapchat and BeReal as the best channel for ROI.
  • 83% of marketers say that social media ROI is difficult to measure, with their main challenge being determining the appropriate metrics to use.
  • Social Media B2B Marketing Statistics 95% of B2B marketers use social content as part of their content marketing strategy.
  • LinkedIn is the most effective and top organic social media platform used by content marketers with 96% using the channel.
  • 85% of B2B marketers use social media advertising/promoted posts, making it the top paid content distribution channel.
  • 84% of B2B buyers or decision-makers are using social media at some point during their decision making process.
  • Social Media B2C Marketing Statistics 77% of B2C brands invested in video in 2023 and social media is the most common way for marketers to share video.
  • Changes to social media algorithms are a top concern B2C marketers, with 53% stating it is a worry.
  • Social Commerce Marketing Statistics 47% of social media marketers say their brand sells directly within social media apps.
  • Consumers aged 18-54 state that social media is the most common channel for discovering new products, with 48% on average saying they have discovered a new product on social media.
  • Only 42% of social media users feel comfortable making purchases directly on social media platforms.
  • Only 21% of consumers report the products they purchased on social media apps are high quality.
  • Social Media Marketing Growth Statistics BeReal (313%), Twitch (29%), LinkedIn (20%) and TikTok (16%) are the social platforms that have seen the most growth in the US since May 2022.
  • 90% of tiktok users report the platform makes the happy and never gets boring.
  • 59% of consumers say that YouTube ads are more relevant than ads on linear TV or other streaming apps.
  • read more BY:Rowan Byers 18/12/2023 TikTok Shop’s First Christmas:How Brands are Leveraging Social Commerce Solution for the Holidays Social Media Marketing 48% of Gen Z will do their holiday shopping on social media this holiday season.
  • 16 Visual Content Marketing Statistics to Know for 2022 [Infographic] | Venngage: This year, more than 60% of marketers have revamped their visual content strategy.
  • In fact, with IG Reels, you could score a whopping 22% more engagement, as a result, getting more Instagram followers compared to your regular video posts.
  • 9% of marketers reported that over 75% of their content this year was all about visuals.
  • 3% disclosed that visual content made up at least 20-50% of their overall content marketing strategy.
  • With that, it’s crystal clear that visual content is a powerhouse in content marketing strategies across industries, proving to be 43% more persuasive than text alone.
  • That is because more than 65% of us are visual learners who are naturally drawn to visuals, and incorporating charts into your content can increase engagement levels.
  • 22% of the 105 respondents declared that charts and data visualizations take the lead as their most frequently utilized type of visual content in 2023.
  • Stats have revealed that information with visuals like charts, graphs, photos and color design improves by a whopping 80%.
  • Research also found that, at the start of their buying journey, about 72% of B2B consumers prefer infographics.
  • 29% of marketers considered stock photos to be their top-performing visual content, 39.
  • 29% revealed that they spend an average of 10-15 hours a week producing content.
  • 95% of marketers invest more than 20 hours weekly in producing content.
  • 54% of the 105 marketers we checked in with are using AI for their content game this year.
  • As a matter of fact, it’s safe to say that AI isn’t just a new hype and is here to stay for 2024 and beyond with 35% of companies using AI in their business.
  • 48% of marketers get help from in-house designers when creating visual content, most marketers (51.
  • 43%) take it into their own hands to design visual content using advanced design software—such as Adobe’s suite of design tools.
  • On top of that, a solid 40% of marketers opt for the simplicity of online tools or graphic makers, like Venngage, to create visuals effortlessly.
  • Up to 50% of marketers struggle with finding the right design layout for their data, statistics or copy.
  • Many marketers allocate 20-50% of their budget to visual content, with an additional 9.
  • 71% of marketers disclosed that they allocate a substantial 20-50% towards the creation of visual content.
  • 5% uptick in marketers intending to dedicate 50% or more of their budget to visual content production by 2024.
  • In a survey carried out by SEMrush, 44% reported that enhancing the quality and value of their content contributed to their success, while 40% mentioned that producing additional visual and video content played a key role in improving their content marketing.
  • 2%, prefer allocating the lion’s share of their budget to tools and software.
  • 2% of marketers said that visual content plays a very important part in their marketing strategy.
  • Since 91% of consumers prefer visuals more than plain text, it’s no wonder 56.
  • They are mostly visual driven platforms that contain visuals as users are 30% more likely to send payment when visuals are involved with your marketing.
  • In the context of B2B businesses, SEMrush’s respondents identified creating and posting more content (52%) as one of the primary tactics for increasing organic traffic to their websites.
  • About 42% of marketers churn out up to 10 pieces of visual content each week.
  • Well, close to 42% said they post somewhere around five to ten visuals a week across platforms.
  • 6% were the super-active champs, posting a whopping 10 times or more each week.
  • 2% of marketers put out visual content somewhere between two and five times a week.
  • By the end of 2024, most marketers think that up to 50% of businesses will heavily depend on visual content as an integral component of their marketing strategy.
  • Therefore, it’s no surprise that 40% of marketers foresee 20-50% of businesses heavily relying on visual content by the end of 2024, followed by more than 50%, as predicted by 31.
  • 19% of marketers think that over 75% of businesses are all about visual content in their marketing game.
  • Social Selling Statistics for 2022 (Includes Social Media Marketing!): Here are some social media statistics to put things in perspective:87% of buyers think that social media helps them make shopping decisions.
  • 43% of customers learn about new products through social media networks.
  • 71% of people are more likely to buy something based on social media referrals.
  • A successful social selling program leads to increased pipeline, better win rates, and up to 48% larger deals.
  • 73% of marketers say that their social media marketing efforts are ‘somewhat effective’ or ‘very effective’ for their business.
  • Social media marketing has a 100% higher lead-to-close rate than outbound marketing.
  • 66% of marketers who spend an average of 6 hours on social media every week get more leads.
  • 60% of business-to-consumer (B2C) brands get their customers through social media.
  • Instagram Shops is the most popular social media feature, used by 22% of social media marketers.
  • Facebook Shops is a close second, used by 21% of social media marketers.
  • A HubSpot research found that 61% of brands engaged in social selling see revenue growth.
  • Social selling provides 45% more opportunities than traditional sales channels.
  • More than 76% of buyers are willing to talk to salespeople over social media.
  • Social selling influences over 50% of the revenue for major industries like computer and network security, software, and healthcare.
  • 84% of decision-makers like CEOs and VPs use social media in their buying process.
  • 90% of marketers say social media marketing has increased their business’ exposure.
  • According to Snapchat, 92% of customers are willing to buy from brands on social media instead of an online marketplace.
  • 75% of sales reps use Facebook to find leads, followed by Instagram, Linkedin, and YouTube.
  • 33% of sales professionals say that social media offers the highest quality leads.
  • 78% of salespeople who use social selling outperform peers who don’t use social media.
  • Social sellers create 45% more sales opportunities than reps with a lower social selling index (SSI).
  • They are 51% more likely to meet their sales quotas than non-social sellers.
  • 18% of salespeople consider social selling one of their top 5 focus areas.
  • Statistics:How Customers Respond to Social Selling 40% of people say they’ve purchased a product online after seeing it used by a social media influencer.
  • 72% of customers trust a business more if a social media influencer recommends it.
  • 71% of buyers who have had a positive social media experience with a brand recommend it to their friends and family.
  • Customers report spending 20%–40% more money on brands that have interacted with them on social media.
  • 49% of buyers rely on product recommendations from influencers to make purchases.
  • 93% of consumers trust personal recommendations the most, a lot of which comes through social media.
  • 40% of B2B buyers use social media for research before making purchasing decisions.
  • 39% of B2B companies say that they have seen revenue generated from social media.
  • 31% of the B2B professionals believe they have built stronger relationships with clients through social selling.
  • 50% of B2B buyers use LinkedIn as a trusted source to make a purchase decision.
  • 31% of B2B prospects say that social media content resonates most out of all other sales enablement content.
  • 92% of B2B buyers engage with a salesperson who is a well-known industry thought leader.
  • 60% of B2B marketers think social media is the second most effective lead generation strategy.
  • 39% of B2B professionals claimed social selling reduced the length of time they spent researching potential leads.
  • The UK-based B2B social selling and employee branding agency helped Commvault achieve 61% more pipeline and 52% more opportunities through a social selling program.
  • 35 Latest Content Marketing Statistics, Trends, And Facts: Content marketing statistics sources:Conclusion Editor’s top picks – content marketing statistics These are our most interesting statistics about content marketing:82% of companies report using content marketing.
  • (Source:HubSpot State of Marketing Report 2021) Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing.
  • 82% of companies report using content marketing In 2020, only 70% of companies reported the same.
  • This 12% increase shows that content marketing is anything but dead – it’s very much alive and kicking.
  • However, the same report also found that 44% of those who don’t use content marketing yet aren’t sure if they’ll start this year.
  • 79% of content marketers use content marketing to generate high-quality leads According to a recent report, generating high-quality leads is the number one priority goal of content marketing.
  • Other popular goals amongst content marketers include driving traffic to their company website (75%) and improving their brand reputation (57%).
  • 51% of content marketers rate the performance of their strategy as ‘good’ This suggests overall, marketers are seeing a lot of success from their content marketing efforts.
  • However, although the majority rate their performance as good, only 11% rate it as excellent.
  • 75% of marketers say SEO is their most efficient content marketing tactic No surprises here then.
  • …And 61% said updating/repurposing existing content was the most efficient tactic As this statistic shows, content marketing isn’t just about pumping out as much new content as possible.
  • Organic search is the most popular channel for content distribution 89% of companies distribute their content via organic search.
  • Social media is another top distribution channel, following closely behind organic search at 87%.
  • Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing… With content marketing, the biggest costs usually come from the production process.
  • On average, companies allocate 26% of their marketing budget to content creation Not sure how much you should be spending on content marketing?
  • 37% of companies spend less than $10,000 on content marketing SEMrush surveyed over a thousand marketers and asked them how much their companies spend on content marketing.
  • … And only 4% spend $500,000+ While there were a fair number of companies that spent between $25,000 and $500,000, only 4% spent above that figure.
  • 2% spent between 500k and 1M, 1% spent between 1M and 5M, and 1% spent more than 5M.
  • 15% of marketers don’t know how much their company spends on content marketing Interestingly, 15% of survey respondents said they didn’t know how much they were spending on content marketing.
  • However, over 60% of marketers look at their sales figures to determine the success of their content marketing efforts.
  • 30% of companies outsource their content creation efforts Interestingly, a third of companies choose to outsource content creation rather than take care of it in-house.
  • 92% of marketers produce blog posts If you don’t have a blog page on your company website, you’re in the minority.
  • Companies with blogs produce 67% more leads per month It’s unsurprising so many companies publish blog posts given that those that do generate 67% more leads every month.
  • If you’re still undecided about whether or not it’s worth investing in content marketing, ask yourself how much 67% more leads would be worth to your business?
  • Posts containing frequent lists generate 70% more traffic If you’re writing long-form blog posts, don’t make the mistake of just writing a huge wall of continuous prose.
  • In fact, blog posts that include at least one list per 500 words of text generate 70% more traffic than those that don’t, on average.
  • Blog posts with images perform significantly better than those without According to the data, blog posts that include images generate 2-4x more traffic, 30% more shares, and 25% more backlinks.
  • 39% of blog posts with no structure are low-performing By structure, we’re talking about heading tags (H2, H3, H4, etc.
  • The report found that 39% of blog posts that lacked any heading tags whatsoever were low-performing.
  • The average number of video minutes watched increased by 85% in 2020 In total, consumers watched 12.
  • The number of long-form videos created grew by 140% last year Long-form videos are becoming more and more popular with web users.
  • According to the HubSpot State of marketing report 2021, the number of videos that were 30-60 minutes in length grew by around 140% in 2020.
  • In a HubSpot survey, 83% of respondents overall said that they mainly watched videos on YouTube.
  • In the same HubSpot survey, 67% of respondents reported that they currently watch videos on Facebook.
  • 41% of marketers said creating visual/video content was the most efficient content marketing strategy Video content is extremely popular amongst consumers, and some marketers even go as far as to say that increasing video content creation and output is the most efficient content marketing strategy.
  • 42% of marketers use content automation Content automation can be an extremely useful tool for marketers.
  • 88% of content marketing teams use web analytics tools Web analytics tools like Google Analytics and SEMrush and more are invaluable to content marketers.
  • With that in mind, it’s no surprise that 88% of content marketing teams utilize these tools.
  • 82% of content marketing teams also use SEO tools SEO tools are also extremely important for helping content marketers achieve their goals.
  • Although SEO tools are slightly less popular than web analytics tools, over 80% of all content marketing reams still utilize them.
  • 73% of the top marketers use content to nurture their audience When it comes to content marketing, many view it as a way to boost brand awareness.
  • According to a study by Content Marketing Institute, 73% of top performers within the content marketing industry use content to nurture leads, audiences, and subscribers.
  • Amongst less successful content marketers, only 38% use content in this way.
  • 94% of marketers changed their content marketing strategy in response to the pandemic… The COVID-19 pandemic prompted many changes in all industries, and content marketing was also affected.
  • According to Content Marketing Institute, over 90% of businesses made changes to their content strategy in response to the crisis.
  • Reportedly, 70% of marketers adjusted their messaging strategy, and 64% made changes to their editorial calendars.
  • …And 80% say those changes were effective Although adapting to the challenges presented by the pandemic was difficult for some marketers, 80% reported that the changes they made were effective and helped them stay on the top of their game during the unprecedented events of 2020.
  • 68% of marketers expect their content marketing budget to increase this year As you can see from the statistics in this article, content marketing is an extremely effective strategy for achieving a range of goals including lead generation, building brand awareness, driving web traffic.
  • As such, more than 50% of marketers expect their content marketing budget to continue rising in the year ahead.
  • 1% higher win rates than those that didn’t (CSO Insights) What content marketing ‘success’ looks like will depend on your goals.
  • For some companies, ‘success’ might mean increasing organic traffic by 50% in 6 months.
  • 94% of marketers changed their content marketing strategy in response to the pandemic.
  • 94% of marketers changed their content marketing strategy in response to the pandemic.
  • 72 Essential Digital Marketing Statistics for 2024 | Safari Digital: Google is (by far) the most popular search engine Google search traffic accounts for more than 92% of total search engine traffic across desktop, mobile, and tablet devices.
  • 50% of all search queries on Google contain four words or less Search terms that contain four or more words – commonly referred to as long tail keywords in the SEO community, account for more than 50% of all search queries in Google.
  • Updating existing content can improve organic traffic by 437% percent A test carried out by Safari Digital found that updating old, existing website content with new information can increase the volume of web clicks by more than four times.
  • The study carried out across 15 websites and more than 135 web pages found that updating the page title alone increased page clicks by 107% versus those that were not updated.
  • If you’re not on page 1 of google – you have less than 1% chance of a click It’s a mind-blowing statistic, but websites that are on page 2 onwards receive less than 0.
  • 65% of SEO’s admit that link building is the most difficult aspect of SEO With so many rules and a drastic price to pay for getting it wrong – most SEOs admit that link building is the most difficult aspect of search engine optimisation.
  • 34% of businesses investing in SEO allocate more than $1,000 per month to Link Building The latest industry research suggests that more than one third of businesses will invest more $1,000 USD each month into link building.
  • 46% of all searches include a localised intent Looking at investing in a local SEO strategy?
  • 28% of searches with a local intent result in conversion Whether that is a store visit or an online purchase, a staggering 28% of all online searches that include a local search intent will result in a conversion.
  • “Near Me” searches are up by 130% YOY Between 2019 and 2022, “Near Me” searches increased by a staggering 130%.
  • Over the last five years, the number of users including a “Near Me” suffix in a Google search has increased by more than 500% and is projected to continue along these lines as Google’s search algorithm becomes more sophisticated.
  • 61% of marketing professionals believe SEO is the key to success According to digital marketing professionals, search engine optimisation is rated as the key to ongoing business success.
  • Longtail keywords encourage higher click through rate (CTR) The latest SEO statistics reveal that long tail keywords (4 or more keywords) enjoy a 3-5% higher CTR in the SERPs than keywords that are just one or two words in length.
  • 70% of clicks in search engine results pages go to organic, 30% go to paid Seven out of ten users will click on an organic result over a paid result when conducting a search in the major search engines.
  • 72% of users that conducted a local search found a store within 8km (5 miles) Local SEO is a highly effective way to drive local, motivated users to a bricks and mortar location.
  • The latest statistics reveal that 72% of users will find a store within five miles of the location where they conducted the search.
  • 56% of businesses have not claimed their free Google My Business listing More than half of all businesses have not yet claimed their google my business listing.
  • 82% of businesses have not claimed their Free Bing Business Listing Perhaps not as surprising as the 56% of users that have not claimed their GMB listing, this stat reveals that more than 8/10 businesses have not bothered to claim their Bing business listing.
  • With Bing commanding less than 7% of all search engine traffic, it may not be that surprising to learn.
  • 81% of businesses that implemented SEO reported a positive outcome One the fence about hiring an SEO Agency for your business?
  • Updating old content with new images and more content can increase traffic by more than 111%.
  • Regular content marketing improves indexation rates by 434% Consistency is key when it comes to content marketing strategy.
  • 72% of marketers believe relevancy is the key to successful content marketing Before you start writing about high-search topics, it’s time to check – is this relevant to my industry?
  • 72% of marketers say that publishing relevant content is the key to a successful digital marketing strategy.
  • Less than 40% of marketers publish content once per week Want to be at the head of your industry?
  • The latest content marketing stats show that less than 40% of marketers will post content weekly.
  • 73% of customers trust a business with positive online reviews Looking to convert more visitors to customers?
  • Just 34% of businesses run A/B testing on their website Understanding your audience is the key to making the most of paid, social, and organic website traffic.
  • 35% Getting traffic is one thing – converting that traffic to paying customers is another thing altogether.
  • 21% According to Wordstream, the average conversion rate from a Facebook advertisement is 9.
  • Businesses that combine PPC and SEO see 25% more clicks and 27% higher profits Who said you can only spend on one marketing channel?
  • The most recent data suggests that companies that take a multi-channel approach that incorporates SEM and SEO see 27% higher profits than businesses that take a single channel approach.
  • Adblock software is up from 15% to 30% since 2014 Users don’t want to be bombarded with advertisements on their favourite websites.
  • The latest statistics show that 30% of online users have adblock extensions or software which prevents advertisements from being shown in the display network.
  • Search Ads can increase awareness by up to 80% According to Google, search ads can increase brand awareness by as much as 80% for businesses.
  • 49% of users will click on a text advertisement According to data from search engine land, almost half of all users will click on a text advertisement in the search engine results pages.
  • Only 43% of users can tell the difference between organic and paid listings There is no getting around it, Google has consciously integrated paid advertisements into the organic listings over the last few years.
  • 92% of users will access the internet from a mobile device More than 9/10 users will access the internet from their mobile device in 2022.
  • Websites that take more than five seconds to load can expect to receive 70% less mobile sessions than those that load in under three seconds.
  • According to Google, a delay of just one-second can mean a 20% drop in conversions.
  • More than 30% of users will conduct a mobile search before visiting a store It doesn’t matter if you are a bricks and mortar retailer that generates all sales through your physical locations – your online presence matters.
  • 43% of users conduct an online search while they are in a store The latest statistics show that almost half of us will conduct a mobile search while standing in a store.
  • 69% of mobile device users say that they are more likely to buy from an online business that answers their questions Got an FAQ list that needs updating?
  • A whopping 69% of users say that they will buy with a store that effectively answers their questions.
  • 66% of e-Commerce sessions come from mobile, but less than 30% of conversions come from mobile devices While 2/3 of customers will browse a product online, most will turn to their desktop to make the final purchase.
  • More than 50% of search engine use will include voice or image search Voice assistants such as Amazon Alexa, Apple Siri, and Google Home mean that voice search prevalence is increasing in organic search.
  • 88% of customers check online reviews before making a purchase Almost 9/10 customers check online reviews before making a purchase online.
  • 57% of users will avoid purchasing from a website with a poor mobile design Users have more choice than ever before, so it means that they can be more selective with who they shop with.
  • 27% of Google users already use voice search Voice search statistics show that more and more users are using voice search each year.
  • 52% of Voice Assistants are in the living room Convenience from your living room is paramount with more than half of all voice assistants in the living room.
  • According to Price Water House Coopers, a staggering 52% of all voice search assistant devices are located in the living room of the home.
  • The Bedroom (25%) and Kitchen (22%) account for the remaining majority share of voice search device locations.
  • 53% of voice assistant owners feel comfortable talking to smart speakers While it may have seemed like a novelty 2-3 years ago, users are feeling increasingly comfortable using voice assistant devices to conduct searches.
  • 73% of drivers use a voice device in their car The latest insights from Voice Bot suggest that as many of 73% of drivers will use an in-car voice assistant in their car.
  • This number is an increase on the previous recorded figure of 49% and is indicative of the number of new cars that are now fitted with voice AI capability from the factory.
  • 33% According to EDM service provider Mailchimp, the average open rate for email direct marketing across all industries in 2019 was 21.
  • 77% According to the same study, Government emails have the highest email open rate at 28.
  • 03% Users have spoken – vitamin supplement companies have the lowest open rates in the industry.
  • 93% of email users will check their email at least once per day The latest statistics show that users are highly engaged with their emails with most users checking their email at least once each day.
  • Less than 22% of companies personalise emails based on user insights It is interesting to note that despite having age, demographic, and a whole host of other user data, less than one quarter of businesses are using this data to personalise the EDM experience.
  • Web pages that include a video are 53% more likely to be displayed on page 1 of Google Videos improve engagement and conversion rates, so what about your SEO efforts?
  • According to the most recent data, web pages that embed a video in an article or web page are 53% more likely to be displayed on page one of Google.
  • 88% of marketers recommend video marketing Whether you are complementing your SEO or PPC efforts with a video, or you are creating standalone videos – more than 88% of marketers believe that videos are an effective way to reach customers.
  • An uptake of more than 30% makes it the most popular affiliate network in the world.
  • 53% of all affiliate traffic comes from mobile devices Mobile devices now – for the first time ever, are the leading force behind online affiliate traffic.
  • Amazon affiliates pay 1 to 10% commission The latest data shows that amazon affiliate programs pay between 1 to 10% of the purchase price (minus shipping, taxes, and fees) in commission.
  • 180+ Social Media Marketing Statistics for 2024: This means that 93% of people who technically CAN have a social media account, have one.
  • The percentage of the world’s people who use social media has grown from 50% in 2020 to 61% in 2024.
  • Currently an astronomical 80% of all social media activity happens on mobile.
  • 8% Twitter:80% Pinterest:85% LinkedIn:57% Social media’s year-on-year growth rate suggests that, while usage is still climbing, it is slowing down slightly.
  • 2022 saw an increase of only 3%, comfortably the lowest recorded in the last decade.
  • Facebook:31% YouTube:22% Twitter:13% Instagram:11% Reddit:7% Snapchat:4% Social Media Platforms – Comparative Usage Based on their total number of monthly active users (MAU), the 15 most popular social networks in the world are:Facebook (2.
  • South Korea, despite their modest usage, comes in second with 92% and Hong Kong is third with 89.
  • When it comes to men using social networks to consume news content, men are far more likely to use Reddit than women – the split is at 67% vs 31%.
  • Other platforms where men consume news content more than women are Twitter and YouTube – both split at 56% vs 43%.
  • Social Media Marketing Facts and Statistics General Social Media Marketing Statistics In a comprehensive research project, Hubspot found that 77% of professional marketers felt that their social media efforts were “somewhat effective” to “very effective”.
  • 54% of marketing professionals choose short-form video as their top content format with live streaming coming in second.
  • 9% Very ineffective Social Media and Online Commerce The venn diagram of “people who buy things online” and “people who spend time on social media” looks very much like a circle.
  • Currently, 97% of online shoppers say that they have accessed social media in the preceding month.
  • 40% of this demographic says that they have bought an item on a social media commerce channel.
  • 77% of both B2B and B2C marketers use this tactic in their Facebook and Instagram campaigns – 8% more than on Google advertising.
  • In a recent survey, Insider Intelligence found that there was an 8% drop in this metric between 2021 and 2022.
  • 13% of people surveyed say that a visible “buy” button on the social platform will make them more likely to complete a purchase.
  • Nearly half of consumers (49%) rely on influencer recommendations to make purchase decisions.
  • In fact, 72% of online shoppers in the US have written a social media review for a local business at some point.
  • 71% of people who had a positive experience on social media with a customer service agent recommended that brand to someone in their network.
  • Between 2020 and 2021, the number of people seeking customer service via social channels grew by an astonishing 100%.
  • More than a third of consumers (36%) share their customer service experiences on social media.
  • 50% of people surveyed said that a “timely response” to their queries influenced their decision to make a purchase from the brand.
  • 8% of American Facebook users over the age of 16 preferred watching short-form videos on Facebook than on TikTok.
  • Between January and April of this year, the platform’s global advertising reach increased by 13%.
  • Although brands in certain sectors (retail, fitness, apparel, legal, beauty) see a higher average CTR of 1%.
  • 57% of brands feel that Stories were a “pivotal” part of their social media campaigns.
  • Approximately 33% of Twitter’s users have a college degree and earn at least $75,000 per year.
  • According to Twitter’s own analytics, their users spend 26% longer watching marketing posts than on any other platform.
  • Twitter is the world’s third-most actively used social media app with 55% of the platform’s users logging on daily.
  • “Job title” is (by far) the most common item in users’ profile bios with 23% of all users including this info.
  • According to the Twitter Agency Playbook, the platform has seen an average 35% year-on-year increase in engagement with advertising content.
  • 1% of all Singaporeans over the age of 13 are potential advertising targets on Twitter – the largest percentage of any country’s population.
  • 2% of the platform’s user base say that they use it for staying up to date with what’s happening in the world.
  • 82% of marketers surveyed said that they actively promote their content on the platform.
  • Twitter is also a very popular place for offering customer service, with 32% of brands actively using it to interact with customers.
  • 98% of marketers surveyed said that the photo sharing app is where they see the best ROI.
  • 80% of surveyed Instagram users say that they use the platform to help them make a decision on whether or not to buy a specific product or service.
  • Instagram marketing is tremendously popular in the fashion industry with 98% of all major fashion brands having a presence on the platform.
  • This puts the platform in second place behind Facebook, which boasts a figure of 60%.
  • 90% of Instagram’s massive user base follows at least one brand on the platform.
  • Brands that are active on Instagram can expect to grow their followers by roughly 1% every month.
  • Despite growing distrust in social media advertising, 50% of Instagram users report being more interested in a brand when they see an advert for it on the platform.
  • 91% of marketers currently investing in it will increase their spend in 2024.
  • 29% of marketers will make it a part of their social media strategy for the first time.
  • 70% of viewers who watched a video about a specific product, ended up making a purchase from the brand.
  • The platform’s ability to convert viewers into customers is also supported by a survey in which 80% of marketers responded that their YouTube campaigns increased their sales figures.
  • More than half (55%) of digital marketers use YouTube in their social media marketing campaigns.
  • 29% of survey respondents said that skippable ads were their first choice, while only 7% opted for non-skippable ads.
  • 0% the total audience) It is crucial for marketers looking for success on YouTube to become experts in the platform’s SEO logics.
  • Brand exposure through contact with an advertisement on LinkedIn sees a 33% boost in purchase intent amongst the platform’s users.
  • The majority (31%) of LinkedIn’s desktop traffic comes from the US, however.
  • 2022 saw a 22% increase in the amount of times its audience likes, shares, or comments on posts.
  • LinkedIn boats some extremely impressive B2B lead-generation statistics:40% of B2B marketers surveyed replied that the platform is the most effective for generating high-quality leads.
  • On average, a lead costs 28% less on LinkedIn than one generated on Google AdWords.
  • Having a well-populated profile on LinkedIn results in a much higher visibility (30% more views per week) for a company page.
  • Currently the platform boasts a 15% year-on-year uptake in advertisers.
  • In a recent study, Statista found that only 18% or surveyed marketers are actively using TikTok.
  • The tone of TikTok UGC and advertising on the platform is so similar that 15% of surveyed users said that they can’t tell the difference between the two.
  • Currently 35% of all TikTok users have participated in at least one of these.
  • As can be expected from a platform that specializes in short-form content, advertising content that leads with the primary message is 63% more effective than ads with a drawn-out sales pitch.
  • The platform’s own research revealed that 50% of users who watched a brand’s live stream purchased an item from that brand.
  • Its average cost per impression figure is 50% of Instagram’s and 33% of Twitter’s.
  • The platform’s research claims that 92% of its users will either visit the brand’s website, participate in a challenge, or make a purchase.
  • 42% of the app’s users say that having their spirits lifted is key to them making a purchase from the advertiser.
  • 65% of surveyed users say that influencer content and user reviews play a role in their purchasing decisions.
  • 8% of Snapchat’s total ad audience) Snapchat advertising and sponsorship averages and estimates :Snap Ads:The cost varies depending on the campaign, with a minimum starting budget of $3,000 per month in ad spend.
  • 65% of the platform’s users will share a recent purchase to their story, creating significant awareness for the brand.
  • 2%) of Snapchat users are on the platform to follow a specific brand or research products they are interested in.
  • 75% of people who use it weekly put themselves in the “always shopping” category 50% of Pinterest users are on the platform specifically to shop online.
  • Pinterest users engaging with online shopping is growing 20% year-on-year Pinterest’s penetration rate is highest in the US (30.
  • Of all the users who visit Pinterest weekly, 85% have made a purchase from a brand’s pin.
  • From a Return on Ad Spend (ROAS) perspective, Pinterest offers a 32% better return than other digital platforms.
  • 80% of surveyed Pinterest users say that they have discovered a new brand while using the platform.
  • 97% of Pinterest users that use the search feature, are not looking for specific brand items.
  • Referrals from Reddit result in 5% more sales than those coming from YouTube and 6% more than Twitter.
  • 8 billion social media users worldwide, we’re talking about 60% of the global population!
  • Digital Marketing ROI Statistics and Guide: Digital Marketing ROI Statistics Before we dig into the good stuff, let’s start with the key statistics:Digital Marketing ROI Statistics Email marketing has the best average ROI at a huge 3,600%SEO marketing has an average ROI ratio of 22:1, equating to 2,200%!
  • Not only is it 40% better at converting in comparison to platforms like Facebook and Twitter, but for every $1 invested, businesses see an average of $36 dollars in return.
  • According to research carried out by Litmus, this could increase your ROI by up to 107%.
  • On average, 53% of traffic for your business will be driven by organic searching.
  • Getting it right is pretty important, given that content marketing is 62% less expensive than outbound marketing efforts, like email blasts, but still manages to provide three times as many leads!
  • Technical SEO, such as optimizing your site for mobile, has an ROI of 117% and sees bigger returns than plain ol’ Standard Content Marketing with just a 16% ROI.
  • Thought Leadership Marketing, which focuses on audience personas, is the most successful however with an average 748% ROI.
  • For example, 89% of marketers claim that the ROI generated from influencer marketing is comparable, if not higher, than that for other platforms.
  • In fact, social media recently stole the advertising crown from paid search, boasting year-on-year growth of 25% and exceeding $137 billion compared to the $135 billion made by search.
  • 80+ Essential Social Media Marketing Statistics for 2022: Here are some of the most interesting stats we discovered:77% of social media marketers say social media marketing has been somewhat to very effective for their company this year.
  • What’s more, 37% of marketers who said social media marketing was somewhat to very ineffective cited COVID-19, likely due to the rapid change in strategy.
  • 82% of marketers say they repurpose content across social media channels.
  • Short-form videos is the top social media format used by 54% of social media marketers, followed by live streaming, live audio chatrooms, and user-generated content.
  • 80% of marketers say funny content is the most effective on social media.
  • 84% of marketers target Millennials as part of their social media strategy.
  • The biggest challenge marketers face on social media is creating engaging content, reported by 27% of respondents.
  • 67% of marketers say they work with micro-influencers with 10K-100K followers or subscribers.
  • Conversely, only 29% say they work with mega influencers with more than 1 million followers.
  • 25% of respondents said they believe funny content is most effective with Gen Z.
  • Image Source Channel-Specific Social Media Statistics Facebook Statistics In a 2021 HubSpot Blog poll, 79% of marketers report buying paid advertising on Facebook.
  • (HootSuite) Facebook is a popular source of news with 31% of Americans regularly getting their news from the platform.
  • (Pew Research) According to the same poll, more than 50% of marketers plan on increasing their investments in Facebook, YouTube, and TikTok in 2022.
  • (HubSpot) Facebook ads are used by 70% of marketers, and there were 10 million active advertisers on the platform in Q3 2021.
  • (Statista) In a HubSpot Blog poll, 79% of marketers plan to continue investing in Twitter Spaces in 2022.
  • (HubSpot) Link clicks account for 92% of all user interaction with tweets.
  • (Twitter) 99% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll say they plan to continue to invest the same amount or increase their investment in Twitter.
  • (HubSpot) 93% of Twitter community members are open to brands getting involved in conversation, such as providing help and support.
  • Instagram Statistics In a 2021 HubSpot Blog poll, 58% of marketers plan to leverage Instagram Reels in 2022.
  • (Statista) 20% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll report generating the biggest ROI when working with influencers on Instagram, only behind Facebook.
  • (HubSpot) 98% of marketers say Instagram is the most influential platform for influencer marketing, which is 44% higher than Facebook.
  • (Sprout Social) 61% of social media marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll say they plan to increase their investment in 2022.
  • (Instagram) In a 2021 HubSpot Blog poll, 73% of marketers prefer Instagram for influencer marketing.
  • (eMarketer) As of January 2022, 59% of LinkedIn users were between 25 and 34 years old.
  • (LinkedIn) 87% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog survey said LinkedIn offered average or high ROI.
  • (HubSpot) 82% of B2B markers report finding the greatest success on LinkedIn.
  • (LinkedIn Marketing Solutions) Over 46% of all social media traffic to company websites comes from LinkedIn.
  • (LinkedIn) 40% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog survey say they plan to increase their investment in the platform in 2022.
  • 5% of marketers use YouTube for influencer marketing, according to a 2021 eMarketer report.
  • (eMarketer) 50% of social media marketers surveyed by the HubSpot Blog say they plan to increase their investment in YouTube in 2022.
  • In fact, 20% of respondents say they plan to invest in this platform the most.
  • (Statista) In a 2021 HubSpot Blog poll, 44% of marketers plan to leverage YouTube for the first time in 2022.
  • (YouTube) YouTube accounts for more than 25% of total worldwide mobile traffic.
  • (HootSuite) TikTok Statistics 70% of TikTok users agree they feel a deeper connection to people they interact with on TikTok compared to other social networks.
  • (TikTok) In a 2021 HubSpot Blog poll, 61% of marketers plan to increase their investment in TikTok marketing in 2022.
  • (HootSuite) 61% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll say they plan to increase their investment in TikTok in 2022.
  • (HubSpot) 12% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll say they work with influencers the most on TikTok.
  • (Statista) 50% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll plan to increase their investment in Reddit.
  • (Reddit) 23% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll plan to leverage Reddit for the first time in 2022.
  • (Statista) Only 2% of social media marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog plan to invest in Reddit the most in 2022.
  • (HubSpot) 49% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll buy paid ads on Reddit.
  • (HubSpot) Reddit is an unlikely place for influencer marketing but 38% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll say they work with influencers on the platform.
  • Whether you’re considering hiring an external social media consulting service or creating a role in-house, take a look at these trends that demonstrate the importance of social media consulting:Answering a complaint on social media can increase customer advocacy by 25%.
  • (Convince & Convert) 79% of consumers expect brands to respond within a day of reaching out over social media, but average brand response rates across all industries is lower than 25%.
  • (Sprout Social) 79% of people say that user-generated content on social media significantly impacts their purchasing decisions.
  • 61 Social Media Marketing Statistics You Need To Know in 2024: Influencer Marketing Global Landscape Statistics Globally, 72% of marketers work with influencers and creators on Instagram, making it the top social media platform marketers state they work with influencers and creators on.
  • 80% of marketers work with smaller creators/influencers with under 100k followers.
  • 25% of marketing agencies and brands devote between 10 and 20% of their marketing budget to influencer marketing.
  • Globally, 39% of brands, marketing professionals and agencies state they work with up to 10 influencers.
  • Influencer marketers work with influencers/creators in fashion the most (41%), followed by lifestyle/vlog (40%), fitness/health (37%), food (34%), travel (33%), and family (33%).
  • 35% of consumers in the US said they had purchased a product or service promoted by virtual influencers.
  • 67% of marketers plan to increase their budget for influencer marketing in the next 12 months.
  • Influencer fraud is on the decrease, with just 37% accounts impacted in 2022 compared to 50% in 2021.
  • Influencer Marketing Benefits & Engagement Statistics 62% of social media users trust influencers over A-list celebrities, as they feel influencers authentically share their love for specific brands and products.
  • 32% of marketers state ‘increased engagement’ as the metric most effectively fulfilled by influencer marketing, making it the top metric.
  • 19% cited ‘social media traffic increase’ and 11% mentioned a lifting of brand metrics.
  • Social media influencer posts are the number 1 way to get people to try new products with 35% of people stating it has made them try something new.
  • 32% of Gen Z have bought a purchase as a result of an influencer’s recommendation.
  • Influencer Marketing ROI Statistics Instagram yields the highest ROI for influencer marketing with 30% of marketers stating it is their top channel for ROI.
  • 20% say they get their biggest ROI from Facebook and the same for YouTube, whereas 14% claim it to be TikTok.
  • 29% of influencers in the US would work with a brand just for free products if they loved the brand.
  • 51% say that influencer marketing has helped them to acquire better customers.
  • B2B Influencer Marketing Statistics 86% of B2B brands consider their influencer marketing successful.
  • The top qualities that B2B marketers look for in a B2B influencer are:relevance of audience (98%), audience sees them as trustworthy (87%) and subject matter expertise (78%).
  • Webinars are the top favoured form of B2B influencer marketing content at 81%, followed by social media 74% and blog posts 71%.
  • 30% of B2B marketers in the US planned to explore influencer marketing more in 2023.
  • 73%, Mid-tier influencers with 50,000 to 500,000 followers representing 6.
  • 38% and finally,mega-influencers and celebrities with more than one million subscribers who account for 0.
  • TikTok Influencer Marketing Statistics TikTok influencers with 1,000 to 10,000 followers make up 67% of TikTok influencer accounts worldwide.
  • This is followed by micro-influencers with 10,000 to 50,000 followers with 23% and mid-tier influencers with 50,000 to 500,000 followers, accounting 9.
  • YouTube Influencer Marketing Statistics People and blogs is the most popular category for YouTube influencers with 21% of posted influencer videos being related to this topic.
  • Media company videos follows with 6% and brand aggregator content at 2%.
  • Top 150 B2B Marketing Statistics for 2024:Trends, SEO, & More: 38 is the average CPC for Twitter ads 86% of B2B marketers use Twitter for content marketing 29% of B2B marketers use Twitter ads for content marketing Facebook $7.
  • 97 is the average CPC for Facebook ads 83% of B2B marketers use Facebook for content marketing 66% of B2B marketers use Facebook ads for content marketing 43% of B2B marketers obtained clients through Facebook Instagram $7.
  • 56 is the average CPC for Instagram ads 46% of B2B marketers use Instagram for content marketing 17% of B2B marketers use Instagram ads for content marketing B2B video marketing statisticsVideo is one of the top B2B marketing trends for 2024, but why?
  • Today, 56% of B2B companies use their in-house team, plus a third-party partner to market their business online.
  • [Updated] Digital Marketing Statistics 2024 – Don’t Miss These Updates!: 49% of businesses say that organic search brings them the best marketing ROI.
  • Over 20% of companies say the leads generated is the main factor they base on their success of their marketing channels.
  • When asked, “What factors lead to success in content marketing,” 55% of marketers say creating more content and posting more often.
  • Content marketing generates three times as many leads as traditional outbound marketing but costs 62% less.
  • 69% of the most successful businesses plan to increase their content marketing budgets—that’s impressive.
  • 49% of businesses say that organic search brings the best marketing ROI.
  • 70% of internet users want to learn about products through content versus traditional advertisements.
  • Only 58% of marketers say they are often successful in achieving their marketing goals.
  • Jab* Jab* 34% of consumers prefer to learn about products by searching the internet, highlighting the importance of optimizing your website for SEO.
  • 70% of companies are investing in content marketing, which encompasses visual marketing strategies.
  • 57% of content downloads generate leads with the highest conversion rates.
  • Long-form content will get 77% more backlinks and triple the traffic compared to shorter posts.
  • Here are some of the biggest challenges when it comes to content and email marketing— Limited internal resources 28%, lack of strategy 28%, and lack of content 23%.
  • 8% is the average conversion rate for websites using video, compared to 2.
  • 71% of consumers who have had a good social media service experience with a brand is likely to recommend it to others.
  • 30% of millennials engage with a brand on social at least once a month.
  • Almost 90% of marketers say their social marketing efforts have increased exposure for their business, and 75% say they’ve increased traffic.
  • A whopping 93% of brands claim to have gotten a new customer from a video posted on one of their social media channels.
  • 94% of marketers use Facebook advertising regularly, which translates to about 3 million businesses that use Facebook for marketing.
  • 51% of web traffic referrals from social media (Hootsuite)There is a “trust” factor when it comes to Instagram and the users behind the app.
  • “With a good presence on Instagram, businesses can cater to their clients’ needs much easier, as 70% of them don’t mind ads when watching videos on Instagram.
  • 42% of internet users have an annual income of $75,000 or more use Instagram.
  • 77% of content marketers say LinkedIn produces the best organic results.
  • (almost 60% of LinkedIn’s users) “It’s not a surprise that more than half of LinkedIn users are in the age group starting and growing their careers.
  • Ad spending on X dropped by 71% in December 2022 (Reuters) Most of X’s audience (38.
  • 54% (Statcounter) Google has been and still will be on top when it comes to being your dedicated search engine.
  • 6% close rate, while outbound leads (such as direct mail or print advertising) have a 1.
  • 6% (Backlinko)The #1 result in Google has a 10x higher CTR compared to the #10 result.
  • (Ahrefs)On the local SEO front, 76% of people who search on their smartphones for something nearby visit a business within a day.
  • 24 Financial Content Marketing Stats to Prepare for 2024 | NYTLicensing: 47% of buyers view 3-5 pieces of content before engaging with a sales rep.
  • 90% of loan and mortgage consumers, 85% of check-cashing consumers, and 76% of tax return preparation consumers start their journey with an online search.
  • Almost 9 out of 10 of investors surveyed (86%) are spending an hour or more researching.
  • Searches for “mobile banking app” increased around the world by more than 100% when compared to the previous year.
  • 80% of people appreciate learning about a company through custom content.
  • The top content marketing challenges financial organizations face or expect to face is lack of resources (37%), inability to measure effectiveness (37%), and lack of budget (36%).
  • Futhermore, more than 50% of banks either do not measure their marketing ROI, or only measure it in less than 25% of their campaigns.
  • When marketing financial products or services, respondents reported that 28% of marketers view their in-house talent as competently trained in marketing technology.
  • While 95% of financial marketers say they are familiar with content to some degree, 46% say they are not an expert but they know a thing or two.
  • The top three content marketing activities for financial marketers included social media marketing (77%), digital display advertising (62%), and video content (53%).
  • There is a 52% average finish rate for content pertaining to the finance industry.
  • The financial services sector makes up over 14% of overall spend in online advertising.
  • According to Google, mobile searches related to “financial planning and management” and “best credit card(s)” have increased by 70% over the last two years.
  • More than 50% of online investors aren’t tied to a brand when beginning their search.
  • More than half (51%) of Americans are now using some form of contactless payment.
  • In addition, 41% of web traffic to the finance industry comes from organic search.
  • 53% of senior marketers plan to bring in external martech support to plug gaps in their knowledge.
  • 59% of decision-makers believe that thought leadership content is a more trustworthy way to evaluate a company.
  • 82% of marketers report actively using content marketing, up 70% from last year.
  • 75 Digital Marketing Statistics:Stats, Facts & Trends: Open rates for emails are the highest (at 24%) from 6pm to 11pm.
  • (Annual Email Marketing Report) 72% of people claim that being able to check social media takes the guesswork out of buying a new product.
  • (Influence Central) 67% of marketers use a marketing automation platform to help with lead generation and organization.
  • 5% higher open rates and 152% higher click-through rates than create and send marketing messages 63% of emails are opened on mobile devices Those using Campaign Monitor (which accounts for a small percentage of actual email marketers) sent 31.
  • 9% find it totally unacceptable 80% of people prefer an email signature with a professional title such as CEO, VO, etc.
  • In fact 60% of people look to recipes, 57% to photos/videos/images, 53% to testimonials, 51% to reader comments, and 42% look to life hacks when it comes to buying products or services.
  • In Databox’s latest survey, it was reported that 40-70% of marketers’ qualified leads aren’t yet ready to buy – which means there’s a lot of work to be done to land a conversion.
  • Instagram nabs 19% more clicks than the same ads on Facebook or Twitter.
  • After all, high-quality content has the ability to drive traffic to a blog by up to 2,000%.
  • 33% of searches result in a page 1 Google organic click Pages 2 and 3 of Google only get 5.
  • According to Statista, the main reason people abandon their online shopping carts is because they find out near the end of the checkout process that the shipping costs are too high (63% of people agree).
  • According to Drift’s 2019 State of Conversational Marketing, 34% of customers struggle with finding answers to simple questions while shopping online.
  • In addition, this study found:Instant communication is a must – 44% of people want an instant response when talking to a live person online.
  • The means of communication are changing – Only 14% of people prefer filling out an online form on a website when they have a question, compared to the 86% of people that want to use a chatbot instead.
  • The leaders in chatbot communication are retailers – 40% of people claim to have engaged with an online retailer via chatbot within the last 12 months.
  • Following behind are healthcare providers (22%), utility companies (21%), and entertainment companies (20%).
  • Social Media Marketing Statistics:44 Stats For Marketers In 2023: 82% Of The US Population Has At Least One Social Media Profile The chance of getting your organization’s messaging to consumers in the US is easier than ever.
  • Because you can find up to 82% of the US populace on at least one social media platform.
  • 90% Of Social Media Marketers Are Confident Of Bringing In A Positive ROI In 2023 The 2023 State of Social Media report shows many social media marketers want to prove their ROI.
  • 20% Of Gen Z, Millennial, & Gen X Social Media Users Contact Brands Through DMs This stat from HubSpot’s Social Media Report should be enough to get you interacting with your fans online.
  • 87% Of Social Media Marketers Think Consumers Will Find Brands On Social Media More Often Than Through Search Engines This isn’t hypothetical.
  • The HubSpot Social Media report says, “Almost a quarter (24%) of consumers aged 18-54 already go to social media first to search for brands.
  • 90% Of Social Media Marketers Say Building An Active Online Community Is Critical To Success In 2023 (HubSpot Social Media Report) As a marketer, you spend a lot of time, energy, and resources to connect with, engage, and share information with followers.
  • 48% Of Social Media Marketers Share Similar Content Across Various Platforms (HubSpot Social Media Report) Creating fresh content for each social media platform is hard work.
  • 33% Of Social Media Marketers Plan To Invest Most In Short-Form Videos In 2023 (HubSpot Social Media Report) Short-form videos like Instagram reels and stories, TikTok videos, and YouTube shorts are great for generating brand awareness.
  • 96% Of Marketers Say Video Marketing Has Increased User Understanding Of Their Product Or Service If a picture is worth a thousand words, then a video will be worth tens of thousands or a million words.
  • 87% Of Marketers Say Video Marketing Has Helped Them Increase Sales According to a Wyzowl report, this figure has skyrocketed from a meager 64% in 2015.
  • 47% of a Facebook Ad’s Performance Is Based on Images 23% Of Marketers Are Exploring Social Media For Targeted Ads If you want to get leads or customers at the door fast, consider using social media ads like most marketers.
  • 93% Of Social Media Advertisers Use Facebook Advertising For your content to break through the noise on Facebook, you have to boost your posts or turn them into advertisements.
  • 49% Of 18 To 29-Year-Olds Have Purchased Something They Saw In A Social Media Ad The younger generation’s journey to purchasing a product is changing.
  • 37% Of Facebook Users Who Click On An Ad Make A Purchase Facebook is one of the most popular social media advertising platforms.
  • 90% Across all industries, WordStream found that the average click-through rate of Facebook ads is .
  • 47% Of A Facebook Ad’s Performance Is Based On Images This data from a Databox study proves you have to include dynamic images in your Facebook ads.
  • 55% of respondents said video content drives more ad clicks on Facebook.
  • 91% Of Americans Are Using Social Media With 91% of Americans active on different social networks, using social media can help get your business in front of them at the right time.
  • 7% Are Female If your business is looking to target a large number of males or females, start with Facebook.
  • 73% Of US Facebook Users Have a College Degree Targeting an educated audience?
  • 55% Of LinkedIn Users in the United States Are From High-income Households After LinkedIn, Twitter comes at 46%, Twitch at 43%, Reddit and Tumblr at 41%.
  • 42% Of 12 to 34-Year-Olds Use Twitter This data from the Infinite Dial shows Twitter is still an active platform for young people.
  • 3% of 25 to 44 Year Olds Use Facebook About 2 Billion People Use Facebook Daily 7% of Gen Z Facebook Users Plan to Quit the Platform in 2023 49.
  • 3% Of 25 To 44-Year-Olds Use Facebook While most Facebook users are under 50, don’t count the older generations out just yet.
  • 7% Of Gen Z Facebook Users Plan To Quit The Platform In 2023 Seven percent isn’t a mass exodus from Meta.
  • What’s concerning is that 25% of Gen Z also plan to spend less time on the platform.
  • 48% Of 30-to-64-Year-Old Americans Get News From Instagram Pew Research found that almost half of American adults get news from Instagram.
  • 61% Of 12-to-17-Year-Olds Use Instagram Weekly This figure increased from 57% to 61% when Facebook use by this demographic declined to 40%.
  • TikTok Statistics TikTok Statistics TikTok Has 1 billion Global Active Users 69% of 12-to-17-Year-Olds Use TikTok Weekly TikTok Has Multiple Audience Categories TikTok Has 1 Billion Global Active Users One billion users is a huge milestone because TikTok launched in 2016.
  • 69% Of 12-to-17-Year-Olds Use TikTok Weekly The Gen Z love entertainment.
  • Snapchat Statistics Snapchat Statistics Snapchat Has 750 Million Monthly Active Users Most Snapchat Users Are Gen Z and Millennials Snapchat Comprises Less Than 2% Of the US Digital Ad Market Snapchat Has 750 Million Monthly Active Users This figure is valid as of July 2023, according to Snapchat.
  • Most Snapchat Users Are Gen Z & Millennials Snapchat reaches 90% of the 13 to 24-year-old population and 75% of the 13 to 34-year-old population in over 20 countries.
  • Snapchat Comprises Less Than 2% Of The US Digital Ad Market Snapchat has many users, but most are millennials.
  • 55% of respondents said video content drives more ad clicks on Facebook.
  • 15 Digital Marketing Mediums Infographic – Stats To Help Your Business: According to statistics, marketers with documented strategies and marketers with a strategy including defined processes are respectively 538% and 466% more likely to achieve success.
  • Currently, about 97% of marketers use social media to reach their audience and approximately 76% of consumers have purchased a product they have viewed through social media posts.
  • Shoppers spend 138% more when approached via emails and the average return rate is $38 for every $1 that is spent.
  • It comes as no surprise that email is a popular means of communication across all industries and used by 86% of professionals for business communication.
  • About 94% of consumers exit a website with poor graphics and 57% of mobile users do not recommend a website with a poor design.
  • Many marketers have realized the benefits of content marketing and approximately 70% of them invest actively in content marketing, allowing them to generate an average of 3 times more leads as compared to paid marketing.
  • Almost all businesses invest in some sort of graphic design with approximately 69% of marketers saying they consider visual content to be either very important or an absolutely necessary component of their content marketing strategy.
  • Many businesses have discovered the benefits of SEO and therefore approximately 64% of marketers actively invest in SEO.
  • Statistics show that revenue increases by around 23% when branding is consistent across all channels.
  • About 75% of companies who implement marketing automation witness a positive ROI in their first year, while 63% have been known to outperform competitors through marketing automation.
  • Companies with successful lead generation techniques have 50% more sales-ready leads and 56% of organizations exceed their revenue goals due to effective lead generation.
  • In fact, about 90% of people have been known to make an online purchase sometime in their life and 80% in the past month alone.
  • Product videos are known to be able to increase purchases by over 144% and videos on landing pages can improve conversions by 86%.
  • Statistics show that about 48% of users feel frustrated after visiting a poorly optimized website on their mobile device, while 88% of them say they wouldn’t return to the website after having a poor experience.
  • In fact, over 94% of a consumer’s impressions are design-related, while 75% of people form an impression about a brand based on its website aesthetics.
  • 25 Content Marketing Statistics for 2024 | NYTLicensing: As a whole, 90% of all organizations use content in their marketing efforts.
  • In addition, content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing channels, and of these leads, they are 6 times as likely to convert.
  • In fact, content marketing works so well that 73% of B2B marketers and 70% of B2C marketers use content marketing as part of their overall marketing strategy.
  • According to HubSpot, 90% of marketers using short-form video will increase or maintain their investment this year.
  • Furthermore, 50% of marketers are creating and sharing video content, with short-form video content being the most popular.
  • A CMI report found that 80% of respondents report that creating brand awareness is their number one goal, 72% of respondents want to build credibility and trust, and 68% say educating audiences with their content is their third priority.
  • With voice search accounting for at least 20% of all mobile searches on the web, this will mark a shift in how brands will produce content in 2024.
  • In fact, 88% of marketers who already invest in SEO plan to maintain or increase their investment.
  • In fact, 33% of Gen Zers have bought a product based on an influencer’s recommendation in the past three months.
  • Additionally, 89% of marketers who already use influencer marketing plan to keep up or increase their investment.
  • A full 96% of marketers choose to use Linkedin for organic social marketing, with the runner-up being Facebook at 80%, and Twitter at 71%.
  • LinkedIn is still the most popular, with 80% of surveyed B2B brands using LinkedIn paid ads.
  • In 2023, 70% of Content Marketers Reported Having a Strong Content Strategy in Place.
  • In 2024, B2B technology organizations reported using email marketing 44% of the time and email newsletters 39% of the time.
  • 74% of Content Marketers Craft Content Based on Specific Stages of the Customer Journey.
  • 79% of marketers say that blog posts are an effective channel to distribute content, reach customers, and build brand awareness.
  • This is followed by 56% choosing in-person events and only 15% choosing online learning platforms.
  • 90% of B2B marketers report that they use their brand’s social media platforms to distribute their content to their audience.
  • Comparatively, 73% reported using email newsletters and 56% used webinars.
  • 59% of Marketers who measure content marketing rate their ability to demonstrate the ROI as excellent or very good.
  • 48% of B2B marketers think that their brand needs to improve both the quality and conversions of their audiences.
  • 63% of content marketers report that content marketing has helped them to build loyalty with customers.
  • 81% of respondents said that content marketing helped them to create brand awareness, and 63% of respondents reported success in building a growing loyalty with existing clients and customers.
  • Only 28% of Marketers Rate Their Organization’s Overall Level of Content Marketing as Extremely Successful.
  • 100 Digital Marketing Statistics to Support Your 2022 Strategy | Marketing Evolution: 88 percent of mobile users who search for a store on Google Maps visit a related store within a week – and 76% visit within a week.
  • Leaders are 53% more likely to think machine learning assists marketing teams in evaluating data to understand consumer intent.
  • 5 percent of total global retail sales by 2021 More than two thirds of e-commerce website traffic comes from Google, with 43% coming from organic and 26% coming from CPC.
  • 100+ Digital Marketing Statistics to Drive Your Campaigns in 2024 – The Loop Marketing Inc: 53% of marketers spend at least half of their budget on lead generation.
  • 40% of marketers say proving the ROI of their marketing activities is their biggest challenge.
  • More than half of smartphone users have discovered a new company or product when searching on their phone – and 76% who search on their phones want to visit a business the same day.
  • One in three people respond to text message CTAs, and 47% of those end up making a purchase.
  • 75% of those using a search engine will only go as far as the first page of search results.
  • 83% of marketers believe that higher quality content posted less often is the most effective SEO route compared to lower quality content published at a higher frequency.
  • Less than 6% of pages will rank in the top 10 results within a year of publication.
  • 85% of marketers rely on website analytics and SEO tools for campaign tracking, and Google Analytics is the most-used tool.
  • 87% of queries with more than 10,000 monthly searches consist of only one or two words.
  • Yelp appears in the top five search results for 92% of Google web queries, including a city and business category.
  • Content Marketing Statistics 73% of marketers say content marketing is essential for their overall strategy.
  • 70% of marketers actively invest in content marketing, and 78% of companies have one to three content specialists.
  • Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing but generates three times as many leads.
  • Social Media Statistics 91% of markets planned to increase or maintain their investment in YouTube in 2023.
  • 72% of marketers say Instagram is the most important social media platform for influencer marketing.
  • 96% of B2B marketers use LinkedIn for organic content distribution and 83% for paid social.
  • Social media advertising is used by 83% of marketers and ranked second in success behind search engine marketing.
  • Facebook ad spending totaled more than $31 billion in 2020, up 5% from 2019.
  • With 96% of brands using it, Google Ads is the most popular PPC network.
  • About 80% of Google’s total revenues come from Google Ads, with 96% of brands spending money on the platform.
  • 74% of brands call PPC a massive driver for their business, and 64% plan to increase their budget in the next year.
  • About four times as many people will click a paid search ad on Google (63%) than on any other search engine.
  • 90% of B2B marketers say email newsletters are an essential source of success in their content marketing plan.
  • And, 69% of email recipients say they can tell if an email is spam just by the subject line.
  • You are up to six times more likely to get a click from an email than from a tweet – and including a video can increase that by up to 300%, while social sharing buttons increase CTR by 158%.
  • 2016 US Digital Marketing Budgets:Statistics and Trends | Smart Insights: Social Media spending to increase Social media spend is set to increase markedly in the next few years:doubling from 10% of today’s marketing budgets to 20% by 2021.
  • Only 3% of CMOs surveyed reported said social was contributing ‘very highly’ to the companies performance, whilst about a fifth said it wasn’t at all important to performance.
  • This makes sense as it’s following where users actually spend their time, but given that in 3 years time over 65% of time spent on the web may be on mobile devices, it may make sense to increase mobile budgets even more rapidly.
  • 20 Social Media Marketing Statistics to Power Your Strategy: Social media is the #1 most popular advertising channel for small businesses Advertising on social media remains as popular as ever, with recent reports saying that 70% of small businesses use it as part of their marketing efforts, 36% higher than the second most popular channel, print advertising.
  • 5% of their marketing budgets on social media No two marketing budgets are the same, but on average, business owners spend 14.
  • 5% of their marketing budget on social media strategies, according to the CMO’s 2022 survey.
  • While this figure has decreased since the height of the pandemic in June 2020, when businesses spent over 23% of their budget, experts project these social media marketing stats to grow even further in the next few years as social media steadily regains influence.
  • And in the next five years, they project that number will increase to over 21%, nearing the high set in the early days of the COVID-19 pandemic.
  • 38% of small business owners (SBOs) say Facebook is the most effective social media advertising platform Recent years have witnessed the growth of modern social media giants like TikTok and Snapchat.
  • But 38% of small business owners still find Facebook the most effective to advertise on.
  • SBOs find social media marketing up to 7% more effective than digital ads Digital marketing encompasses many fronts, and two of the most prominent are social media marketing and paid ads on Google or websites.
  • However, social media marketing statistics from Visual Objects found that 7% more small business owners found social media as their most successful digital marketing strategy than paid ads on Google and Microsoft.
  • Social media ads take up 30% of small business’ ad budgets Paid ads are one of the most proven and reliable methods to gain results within a period of time, and social media ads remain the most popular, as the previous stat shows.
  • According to social media advertising statistics, small businesses spent up to 30% of their advertising budget on social media alone in 2021.
  • For SBOs, photos & videos are 81% more effective than news articles when educating new customers Social media is a great tool for educating audiences about your product or service.
  • When it comes to the best type of content to post, most small business owners find photos and videos most effective at generating engagement—81% more effective than sharing business news and updates.
  • 83% of small businesses post on social multiple times a week Consistency is key to your social media strategy’s success, as evidenced by social media marketing statistics from GetApp.
  • The survey found that 83% of small businesses posted new content on social media multiple times per week, with only a small percentage posting once a week or less.
  • And 19% of small businesses even posted on social media several times a day.
  • 25% of internet users use social media to find new products to buy While social media may be saturated, you’ll still find a decent chance of gaining new customers and increasing sales from it.
  • According to social media business statistics from Meltwater, 25% of social media users across all age groups say their primary use of social media was to find new products to buy.
  • 55% of consumers discover new businesses on social media If there’s one advantage small and local businesses have over big-name legacy brands, it’s social media marketing.
  • This is because recent social media marketing statistics from Sprout Social found that 55% of customers discover new brands and small businesses on social media.
  • 66% say social media’s biggest benefit is increasing sales It’s no wonder social media marketing growth is part of every business’ strategy:it offers a multitude of benefits, including helping increase business revenue.
  • A 2022 study found that 66% of business owners say that the biggest benefit of using social media to market their business was in helping increase sales.
  • Meanwhile, 51% say social media is most helpful for accessing new customers, and 47% said it improves customer relationships.
  • 33% of consumers are highly likely to buy from a small business recommended by a social media influencer If you’re thinking of entering influencer marketing, take these social media marketing statistics as a green light.
  • A 2021 study found that 33% of consumers are highly likely to buy from a small business if they’re recommended by an influencer on social media, even if they aren’t familiar with its products.
  • 29% of social media influencers are paid in product freebies Entering influencer marketing might seem like a daunting and costly task, but that isn’t usually the case:nearly one in three (29%) of social media influencers are paid in product freebies given by brands.
  • Only 12% of influencers are paid more than $1,000 for their posts, while 19% are paid less than $500.
  • 88% of Gen Z use YouTube more than any other social media platform You’d be forgiven for assuming that TikTok would be the best way to market to Gen Z audiences, today’s youngest consumers.
  • However, statistics on social media marketing find that YouTube is still their most-used social media site, with 88% of the population active on the platform.
  • Over 90% of adults aged 36+ use Facebook In spite of all the new social platforms that have sprung up in recent years, from BeReal to Meta’s Threads, Facebook is still the most used platform for older generations, namely Gen X (aged between 36 and 55) and Baby Boomers (aged over 55).
  • Ninety percent of Gen X and 96% of Boomers use Facebook regularly, compared to just 36% of Gen Z.
  • 51% of consumers want to see content about products or services from brands on social media When it comes to what users want from your brand, social media usage statistics say that the majority (51%) still prefer content about your product or service.
  • Meanwhile, a growing number are also becoming more interested in seeing customer testimonials, with 39% selecting it as their preferred brand content.
  • 63% higher engagement rate than Facebook While Facebook is more popular, TikTok is the more active platform of the two, at least in the past year.
  • 93% of all internet users are on social media Just how many people use social media?
  • That’s over half of the world’s population and about 93% of all internet users.
  • While different social platforms work better than others for different types of businesses, The 2022 Small Business Advertising Report revealed that 38% of small businesses say Facebook is the most effective platform for business-to-consumer (B2C) marketing.
  • According to social media marketing stats, over 80% of small businesses say social media’s biggest benefit is in helping promote products and services.
  • Top Digital Marketing Data [Q2 2022 Stats]: Interest was so high that from 2022 to 2023, topics on learning about AI increased by 550%, according to an analysis we conducted of over 15,500 news articles and blogs.
  • 5%Sample:4,420 respondentsSource:Hootsuite Social Media Consumer 2024 Survey AI is inevitable on social, and scaling back on its use now would be like reverting from computers to typewriters.
  • The majority (60%) of organizations have a presence there, but only a third of them feel strongly that it benefits their business—which might explain the 7% drop in brand use.
  • views, 49% followers, 43% clicks/traffic, 21% leads, 14% sales/revenue, 4% time spent on site/app, 3% sentiment, 3% share of voice, 2% pipeline, 2% survey-based brand awareness.
  • Interest was so high that from 2022 to 2023, topics on learning about AI increased by 550%, according to an analysis we conducted of over 15,500 news articles and blogs.
  • The majority (60%) of organizations have a presence there, but only a third of them feel strongly that it benefits their business-which might explain the 7% drop in brand use.
  • views, 49% followers, 43% clicks/traffic, 21% leads, 14% sales/revenue, 4% time spent on site/app, 3% sentiment, 3% share of voice, 2% pipeline, 2% survey-based brand awareness.
  • 120+ Digital Marketing Statistics of 2024 for Online Growth: 49% of marketers say that organic search has the best return on investment (ROI).
  • Over 90% of people read reviews online before making a purchasing decision.
  • 54% of customers say they get annoyed if they are targeted with an ad for something they’ve already bought.
  • 78% of marketers say they have a small marketing team of between one and three people.
  • These teams usually included a writer (52%), a social media manager (36%), and an SEO specialist (34%).
  • 58% of customers are comfortable with their data being used transparently, but only 63% say companies are generally transparent about how their data is used.
  • Nearly 80% of very successful content marketers spend more than 10% of their total marketing budgets on content.
  • 67% of marketers report SEO as the most effective tactic they implement to grow their content strategy.
  • Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates three times as many leads.
  • The top three content marketing KPIs marketers report using are organic traffic (76%), leads generated (62%), and sessions (60%).
  • 52% of marketers say social media and community building is a top priority, as is improving content quality, followed by audience research.
  • 51% of companies say updating old content is the most efficient tactic.
  • 84% of marketers list “brand awareness” among their B2B content marketing goals.
  • Companies with blogs produce 67% more leads per month than those without.
  • 54% of content marketers say generating quality leads is their biggest challenge.
  • The three most popular content formats are videos (45%), short-form articles (31%) and success stories (28%).
  • 45% of internet users aged 25–34 report listening to podcasts regularly.
  • The two most popular content distribution channels are social media (94%) and email (76%).
  • Videos on a website can increase the average time spent on a page by 88%.
  • 40% of users won’t engage with a website if its layout is unattractive.
  • 50% of internet users say that they consider website design as a factor in formulating their opinion on a business.
  • 73% of marketers say email marketing is their best digital channel for ROI.
  • 60% of consumers subscribe to a brand’s list to get promotional messages and deals, compared to only 20% who follow brands on social media.
  • Segmented email campaigns have a 14% higher open rate and a 75% higher click rate compared to non-segmented email campaigns.
  • Companies that A/B test every email see email marketing returns that are 37% higher than those of brands that don’t.
  • Emails with personalized subject lines had a 50% higher rate compared to emails that didn’t use personalization.
  • Leads that are actively nurtured by marketing produce 20% more sales opportunities.
  • Companies that nurture leads generate 50% more sales at 33% lower costs.
  • Landing pages have the highest conversion rate (23%), while pop-ups have the second-lowest conversion rate (3%).
  • 53% of marketers spend at least half of their budget on lead generation.
  • Only 17% of marketers A/B test their landing pages to improve conversion rates.
  • 42% of companies consider email to be one of their most crucial lead generation channels.
  • 73% of leads are not sales-ready the first time they interact with your brand.
  • 63% of leads who inquire about your business won’t be ready to convert for at least three months.
  • Most marketers agree that LinkedIn is the most effective social media channel for B2B lead generation, but only 47% of marketers use LinkedIn.
  • Paid ads and social media account for less than 10% of B2B website traffic, leads, or sales.
  • 51% of smartphone users have discovered a new company or product when conducting a search on their smartphones.
  • 76% of people search on their smartphones for something nearby or want to visit a business the same day.
  • 33% of SMS recipients react to CTAs in SMS marketing messages, and 47% of those end up making a purchase.
  • SMS marketing click-through rates for e-commerce brands can be as high as 36%.
  • 59% of shoppers surveyed say that being able to shop on mobile is important when deciding which brand or retailer to buy from.
  • 61% of people tend to shop on mobile websites that allow them to apply search filters.
  • 51% of shoppers say they use Google to research a purchase they plan to make online.
  • 85% of marketers report using website analytics and SEO tools to track their campaigns.
  • Businesses allocate around 15% of their marketing budget toward social media marketing.
  • 62% of people said they were more interested in a product after seeing it in a Facebook Story.
  • Only 11% of marketers consider making use of user-generated content to be a tactic worth using.
  • 81% of marketers have synced their social media platforms with commerce systems.
  • 72% of customers prefer learning about a product or service by way of video.
  • 57% of marketers believe video is the hardest form of content to produce.
  • 84% of people say that they’ve been convinced to buy a product or service by watching a brand’s video.
  • 87% of video marketers on LinkedIn described the platform as an effective video marketing channel.
  • 87% of video marketers say that video has increased traffic to their websites.
  • People are able to retain a message 95% better when the information is received in the form of a video compared to just 10% when reading it in text.
  • 50% of marketers believe inadequate adoption of AI is holding them back from achieving their goals.
  • 2% of marketers spend over 40% of their marketing budget on AI-driven campaigns.
  • 91% of Fortune 1000 companies are increasing their investment in artificial intelligence.
  • The adoption of generative AI is highest in the marketing and advertising sector (37%).
  • Technology (35%) and consulting (30%) are the other two sectors showing increased use of AI.
  • 26% of businesses are applying AI techniques such as natural language processing (NLP) to marketing and sales.
  • Essential Content Marketing Statistics for 2024 | ClearVoice: Here are some important content marketing 2024 statistics related to ABM:97% of marketers who use ABM say it delivers a higher ROI than other marketing activities.
  • (WARC) 94% of B2B marketers use ABM (WebFX) 80% of marketers intend to increase their ABM budget.
  • Here are some critical AI statistics related to content marketing:84% of digital marketing leaders believe AI helps with personalization.
  • (Zippia) 82% of marketers say AI has impacted how they plan to create content.
  • (Hubspot) 79% of businesses say AI has contributed to revenue increases in their marketing and sales departments.
  • (Zippia) 76% of marketers using generative AI say they use it for basic content creation and copywriting.
  • (Insider Intelligence) 61% of marketers say that AI is the most essential aspect of their data strategy.
  • According to an Edison Research study, 70% of Americans age 12 and older have listened to online audio in the past week.
  • Here are some crucial content marketing statistics related to podcast marketing:Over 62% of U.
  • Here are some essential video content marketing 2024 statistics you should know:91% of brands use video as a marketing tool.
  • 100+ Up-To-Date Content Marketing Stats (2023): 5% in the 2-4 hour range (Orbit Media) Blog posts containing a relevant image receive an average of 94% more views than posts without an image (MDG) 90% of bloggers include at least one image in their posts.
  • 55% of Americans listen to podcasts (Statista) 49% of podcast listens happen at home versus 22% in the car (Podcast Insights) 51% of US podcast listeners are men.
  • 5 million active podcasts (Podcast Insights) Smartphones are the main medium by which podcast content is consumed (Edison Research) 54% of U.
  • 048% on Twitter (Rival IQ) The same Rival IQ study found that the average number of posts each day is 0.
  • 7% more shares on social compared to short headlines (Backlinko) Content containing 1,000-2,000 words fetch an average of 56.
  • 1% more shares on social compared to content with fewer than 1,000 words (Backlinko) 1.
  • 3% of all articles published online receive 75% of all social shares (Backlinko) Headlines in the form of a question tend to receive 23.
  • 55% of B2C marketers outsource at least part of their content creation (Content Marketing Institute) B2C content produces 9.
  • B2B Social Media Marketing Statistics: According to HubSpot, 85% of companies ranked short-form videos as the most effective type of social content, and 64% of marketers plan to invest more in short-form video.
  • However, when B2B marketing teams that use video were surveyed, 86% said that video has helped increase website traffic, 84% say video has helped them generate leads, and 78% say that video has helped them directly increase sales.
  • 1%) The key here is to focus on creating short, quippy, relatable content.
  • In 2021, the average engagement rate for videos under 60 seconds was 51%.
  • Videos that range from 30 to 60 minutes in length only have a 25% engagement rate.
  • Globally, 47% of internet users ages 16 to 64 have spent more time on social media in 2020 than they did in 2019.
  • (Warc) 95% of B2B marketers use social content as a part of their content marketing strategy, making it the most widely-used type of content.
  • (Content Marketing Institute) 25% of B2B marketers say that social media content is the highest-performing type of content for building brand awareness.
  • (Content Marketing Institute) 91% of B2B marketers use social media to distribute content organically, making it one of the top content distribution channels.
  • (Content Marketing Institute) Social media is a source in making purchasing decisions for 84% of B2B executives and 75% of overall B2B buyers.
  • (IDC) 50% of marketers plan to increase their investments in Facebook, YouTube, and TikTok —indicating that video content will be huge.
  • (LinkedIn) 82% of B2B marketers have reported the greatest success on LinkedIn compared to other social channels.
  • (LinkedIn) 79% of B2B marketers who used paid ads on social media said that LinkedIn produced the best results.
  • (Content Marketing Institute) 93% of Twitter community members are open to brands getting involved in conversations—particularly to provide help and support.
  • 85% of Twitter users earn more than $30,000 annually, and 34% earn $75,000 or more.
  • (Pew Research Center) Tweets with one or more hashtags are 55% more likely to be retweeted.
  • (Buffer) 61% of marketers plan to increase their investment in TikTok marketing.
  • (Apptopia) TikTok had 1 billion users in 2021, with approximately 53% of users between ages 19-39 and 19% of users over 40.
  • (Statista) 44% of marketers plan to leverage YouTube for the first time.
  • Digital Marketing Statistics, Ad Spends, Ad Growth, Ad Share: From the total digital advertising market, 69% of ad spending will be from mobile devices in 2022.
  • By 2027, 53% of all digital advertising market spending will come from mobile devices.
  • By 2027, programmatic advertising will account for 89% of digital advertising revenue.
  • By 2027, 71% of all digital advertising market spending will come from mobile devices.
  • 86% of digital advertising revenue will come from programmatic advertising by 2027.
  • By 2027, 72% of all digital advertising market spending will come from mobile devices.
  • 88% of digital advertising revenue by 2027 will come from programmatic advertising.
  • 91By 2027, 73% of all digital advertising market spending will come from mobile devices.
  • Programmatic advertising will account for 92% of digital advertising revenues by 2027.
  • By 2027, 51% of the digital advertising market spending will come from mobile devices.
  • By 2027, programmatic advertising will account for 86% of digital advertising revenues.
  • By 2027, mobile devices will account for 62% of the total digital advertising market spending.
  • By 2027, programmatic advertising will account for 89% of digital advertising revenues.
  • 72% of the digital advertising market will come from mobile devices by 2027.
  • By 2027, programmatic advertising will account for 86% of digital advertising revenues.
  • 79% of the digital advertising market will come from mobile devices by 2027.
  • Programmatic advertising will account for 92% of digital advertising revenue by 2027.
  • By 2027, 57% of all digital advertising market spending will come from mobile devices.
  • 88% of digital advertising revenues by 2027 will come from programmatic advertising.
  • In 2027, mobile will account for 55% of the total digital advertising market.
  • Programmatic advertising will account for 93% of digital advertising revenue by 2027.
  • By 2027, 53% of all digital advertising market spending will come from mobile devices.
  • Digital Advertising Market:Programmatic Advertising will generate 90% of digital advertising revenues by 2027.
  • Online advertising shares in Argentina are estimated to be 64% in 2022.
  • The percentage of online advertising shares in Colombia is anticipated to be 44%.
  • 6% in 2020 as businesses conducted most of their operations online due to imposed COVID-19 restrictions by respective governments.
  • In 2016, the share of digital advertising spending was only 12% of the total advertising spending in India, which then increased to 15% in 2017, and reached 30% in 2021.
  • In 2022, the share of digital advertising spending is expected to index 34%, and then 38% by 2023.
  • PPC Marketing Statistics – AovUp (formerly Woosuite): PPC Marketing Stats Highlights Google holds 92% of the market share for search engines worldwide.
  • 2 Other PPC Marketing Stats3 Conclusion PPC – Key Statistics Google holds 92% of the market share for search engines worldwide.
  • Google owns 92% of the search engine market, including paid and organic searches.
  • According to PPC stats, paid advertisements redirect 65% of the traffic.
  • PPC traffic results in a 50% higher conversion rate than organic link visitors.
  • 40% of them say it’s getting harder and harder to maintain a competitive budget in such a heavily saturated space.
  • Almost two-thirds of users click on an ad, and 20% make at least one weekly purchase.
  • Also, 70% of mobile users call the business directly from Google search.
  • Other PPC Marketing Stats The top three ads at the top of the first search engine results page get all the clicks at 40%.
  • 75% of people say they click on ads because they expect an answer to their question.
  • Customers are 155% more likely to search for brand-specific terms when exposed to display ads.
  • Digital Marketing Statistics for 2024 | Digital Third Coast: 36% of marketers are attempting to integrate traditional and digital marketing efforts.
  • 82% of marketers who regularly blog see positive ROI from inbound marketing in general.
  • Businesses will spend $110 billion on digital advertising by 2020 (Source:EMarketer) Traditional marketing generates 50% fewer interactions with customers than digital marketing.
  • Digital Marketing & Paid Search Statistics 93% of online interactions start with a search engine.
  • 90% of people haven’t made up their mind about a brand before a search.
  • Google is responsible for 67% of smartphone search traffic and 94% of organic traffic.
  • Digital Marketing & SEO Statistics 61% of marketers agree that improving SEO and growing organic presence is their top inbound marketing priority.
  • 53% of businesses that spend more than $500 per month on SEO services rate themselves as “extremely satisfied” compared to businesses that spend less than $500 per month.
  • 72% of marketers have agreed that relevancy serves as a determining factor for SEO performance.
  • 70-80% of people ignore paid search results, choosing to only click on organic search results.
  • 7% for traditional outbound methods such as cold-calling or direct mail.
  • Content Marketing Statistics The cost of content marketing is 62% less than traditional methods.
  • Nearly 40% of marketers say content marketing is a very important part of their overall marketing strategy.
  • 39% of marketing budget is spent on content marketing by the most effective B2B marketers.
  • 58% of marketers said “original written content” is the most important type of content, outdoing visuals and videos.
  • 72% of marketers think that branded content is more effective than magazine advertisements.
  • Up to 81% of marketers plan to increase their use of original written content.
  • According to LinkedIn, the top 3 content marketing tactics are blogging (53%), social media (64%), and case studies (64%).
  • Blogging is an effective form of marketing according to 56% of marketers, and 1 in 10 say it generates the biggest return on investment.
  • Companies that blog receive 97% more links to their website (Original source:Hubspot State of Inbound Marketing, 2014).
  • 18% of marketers choose WordPress as their website content management system.
  • Managing a Content Marketing Strategy 78% of companies have a team of one to three content specialists.
  • 42% of companies have a designated content strategist executive to ensure all content is meeting branding expectations and being released at the right time.
  • Content Marketing, Lead Generation & ROI 54% of companies measure content marketing ROI.
  • About 49% of marketers are learning to drive content to align with the buyer’s journey.
  • 47% of buyers viewed at least 3 to 5 pieces of content before deciding to speak with a sales rep.
  • 62% of buyers say they can make a purchase selection based on digital content.
  • Strategic landing pages help 68% of B2B businesses acquire new leads (Original source:Marketo, 2018).
  • More than ¼ of the top-performing marketers allocate more than 10% of their working media budget to measurement and analytics.
  • PPC & Digital Marketing Statistics 91% of smartphone owners have made a purchase after seeing a relevant ad.
  • 37% of internet users worldwide use ad blockers Social Media & Digital Marketing Top-performing social content:video, images, offers/promotions, articles, reviews, infographics.
  • 89% of marketers claim that the ROI they get from influencer marketing is almost the same if not higher than that from other platforms.
  • The most common content marketing delivery mechanism is social media, used by 87% of marketers.
  • B2B companies utilize LinkedIn 94% of the time and Twitter 87% of the time.
  • Facebook The number of marketers who say Facebook is “critical” or “important” to their business has increased 83% in just two years.
  • Twitter marketing 81% of millennials check Twitter at least once a day.
  • Marketers have witnessed an increase of 760% in email revenue from segmented campaigns.
  • 72% of consumers prefer their marketing communication to be via email over other channels.
  • The Top Digital Marketing Channels (Ranked By Statistics): By 2022, it’s predicted that 82% of website traffic will come from video.
  • In addition, businesses are still spending 46% of their budget on content creation.
  • 39% of men and 36% of women are monthly podcast listeners in the United States.
  • Content Strategy With these statistics, it’s no surprise that 70% of marketers invest in content marketing and 40% of marketers say content marketing is an important part of their strategy.
  • In addition, 78% of companies have a team of one to three content specialists.
  • Organic Search 64% of marketers invest time in search engine optimization.
  • That’s because 49% of users utilize Google to discover new products and services.
  • Mobile Search Mobile optimization is a top SEO tactic for businesses — almost 25% of businesses use it.
  • Not only that, but 60% of customers contacted a business directly on their phones after finding the business on a search result.
  • 69% of customers still think the option to shop in-person is important.
  • In addition, 46% of buyers confirm inventory online before visiting a store.
  • Over the past couple of years, there have been a 900% increase in “near me” and “today/tonight” keywords.
  • In addition, there has been a 200% increase in keywords with “now” and “open” keywords.
  • 70% of web users utilize the “click to call” feature on a business’ search engine results.
  • In fact, 65% of web users aged 25-49 use voice search on voice-enabled devices at least once a day.
  • Not only that, but organic search generates most e-commerce sessions — organic search caused 33% of shopping experiences as opposed to 32% caused by paid search.
  • Instagram’s video platform, IGTV, is also becoming more popular — 28% of marketers include IGTV in their video marketing strategy.
  • This includes video — 79% of marketers use Facebook as a video marketing channel.
  • In addition, 51% of teenagers between the ages of 13 and 17 have a Facebook account.
  • 30% of B2C and 25% of B2B businesses use Pinterest to market their business.
  • In addition, 20% of marketers say an improved email design benefits their campaign.
  • That’s because 40% of people over the age of 18 open their emails on their phones.
  • 68% of marketers state paid advertising is “very important” to their marketing strategy.
  • Content Marketing Stats 2020: 65% of marketing leaders believe that a brand is a critical driver of buyer behavior on existing customers, and 58% believe it impacts prospects.
  • Approximately 60% of marketers rate content marketing as extremely important or very important to their marketing strategy.
  • Defining and documenting your strategy is important even more because less than 40% of content marketers do so.
  • SEMRush report claims that the top goals of content marketing are generating high-quality leads (75%) and attracting more traffic to the site (71%).
  • 46% of companies didn’t shell more than $10k on content marketing in 2019.
  • They tend to run between 1 to 3 specialists for 78% of companies with the top three roles being:content creators, social media managers, and SEO content managers.
  • Mantis research found that only 39% of marketing teams have conducted an original research in the past 12 months.
  • As per the Hubspot State of Marketing Report, around 64% of marketers invest in SEO.
  • Research by Brightedge confirms that organic traffic continues to occupy the top spot at 53% for most sectors.
  • 8% by moving just one position up in rankings (considering all other things equal).
  • In their analysis of 912 million blog posts, Backlinko and BuzzSumo found that 94% of all blog posts have zero external links.
  • Well, you might already be using social media given that it’s the most popular marketing channel leveraged by 94% of businesses surveyed by SEMRush.
  • Business Blogging and B2C Content Marketing Statistics Did you know that 77% of people on the internet read blogs?
  • However, only 33% of B2C content marketers reported a documented content marketing strategy.
  • Further, only 50% of the respondents report creating content for every stage of the funnel.
  • That’s the reason only 54% of organizations agree that they provide their customers with optimal experiences across their engagement journey.
  • The top three technologies B2C marketers use to assist with content marketing are:social media publishing/analytics at 84% analytics tools at 83% and email marketing software at 72% 6.
  • For instance, 38% of the bloggers that spend 6+ hours on a post report “strong results.
  • Bloggers earning over $50k per year use 343% as many email-collection methods as compared to their lower-income peers.
  • 70% of these high-income bloggers are also more likely to be active or very active promoters than lower-income bloggers.
  • 55% of B2C organizations outsource some content marketing activities, and the most outsourced task done by 80% of companies is content creation.
  • 86% of B2C marketers fact check their content to ensure accuracy, and 60% prioritize the audience’s informational needs over their sales/promotional message.
  • B2B Content Marketing Statistics Did you know that 61% of all B2B transactions start online, and 51% of customers turn to social media to do their initial research?
  • Indeed, in an analysis of 500 SaaS companies, the top 10% SaaS blogs averaged 104,000 organic search visits.
  • In the last 12 months, 86% of B2B marketers report creating brand awareness, 79% have educated their audiences, and 75% have built credibility/trust.
  • Further, 44% of these top performers operate as a centralized content marketing group that works across the organization.
  • 32% of B2B marketers lack a full-time person dedicated to content marketing.
  • Content creation is the most outsourced content marketing activity, with 84% of respondents likely to outsource it.
  • When it comes to links, 93% of B2B content ends up attracting zero external links.
  • A survey of tech B2B buyers found 53% of respondents finding videos as most useful.
  • When it comes to content marketing strategy, 88% of the most successful B2B marketers prioritize the informational needs of their audience over their organization’s sales/promotional message.
  • 46% of top performing B2B content marketers leverage influencer/media relations (vs.
  • Marketing Charts found that 69% of B2B organizations will focus on measurement and analytics in 2020.
  • Of the 80% B2B marketers using metrics to measure content performance, 59% are doing an excellent or outstanding job at demonstrating ROI.
  • While over 40% of B2B organizations are likely to invest MORE time and money on content marketing in 2020, their top priority isn’t quantity.
  • 48% of B2B content marketers will focus on the quality of their audience and conversions.
  • 36% of surveyed marketers report an yearly budget of less than $100,000.
  • 80% of people say that they switch between online search and video while buying.
  • The Social Media Examiner industry report found that 62% of marketers plan to increase their YouTube organic activities.
  • And in their future video marketing activities, 71% plan to increase their use of YouTube.
  • Before launching, don’t forget to add subtitles as it could make users stick around for about 40% longer.
  • Web users scan text and read about 20% of the words on page during an average visit.
  • Further 65% of the general population are visual learners, and after three days of consumption, they can remember 65% of the visual information vis-à-vis 10% recall for written content.
  • A Venngage survey of 200 content marketers predicted that visuals would remain an integral part of marketing strategies in 2020 and 2021 for 66% of businesses.
  • This year 25% of marketers anticipate spending between 10% to 20% of their total budgets on visual content creation.
  • 74% of marketers said that they used visuals in more than 70% of the articles they published.
  • Your palette selection is important as colors can improve your brand recognition by up to 80% as per Xerox.
  • 50+ Critical Social Media Marketing Statistics for Your Business (2022): With 90% of users saying they watch video online at least once a month, it’s easy to see why marketers see video as their most valuable content marketing assets.
  • Around 63% of people say messaging apps are where they feel more confident sharing and talking about content.
  • That said, around 5% of Facebook’s worldwide monthly active users are fake accounts.
  • 86% of Facebook users are between the ages of 18-29, while 77% are aged 30-49 years old.
  • More than half of those users identify as female, with only 46% identifying themselves as male.
  • Around 15% of Facebook users in the United States use the platform to shop for products.
  • In fact, 50% of users want to discover new products through Facebook Stories.
  • After seeing a product/service in a story, 58% say they have browsed the brand’s website to get more information.
  • 5% identify as females, aged 18-24 If you use these data when deciding what to post on Instagram, make sure your posts are catering to Generation Z and younger millennials so you can get higher engagement and potentially for sales.
  • And with 81% of people using Instagram to research products and services, you might want to start looking into adding shoppable posts into your marketing strategy.
  • Twitter users are Democrats, with 30% of Americans identifying that way.
  • On the other hand, only 21% of Twitter users are Republican, although 26% of Americans identify as one.
  • But that said, 71% of American Twitter users use the platform to read news updates.
  • After all, 53% of Twitter’s audience is more likely to buy new products.
  • When looking at who uses YouTube, it’s important to note that 80% of YouTube users come from outside the U.
  • That said, Americans do make up a good proportion of YouTube users, as you can see below:81% of U.
  • adults use YouTube Of the urban adults, 84% use YouTube, compared to only 74% of rural adults 82% of adult males and 80% of adult females are using YouTube Let’s break that down by country.
  • And when you consider that 10% of the most popular content attracts 79% of the views, it might seem impossible trying to reach your target audience on the platform.
  • Wellness videos:Interest in videos related to relaxing is rising, with watch times increasing by over 70% in 12 months.
  • Livestreams:Almost 24% of social media users report watching video livestreams regularly.
  • You have a potential audience of 945 million users aged 18 and above that you can reach when you use TikTok ads:53% of those users identify as females, while almost 47% identify as males.
  • 30 Crucial Social Media Marketing Statistics 2024 – TrueList: Social Media Marketing Statistics (Editor’s Choice) 54% of internet users turn to social media to research products.
  • (GlobalWebIndex) 64% of users make a purchase after watching a video on social media.
  • (Report Linker) According to 62% of marketers, social listening is the best Social media marketing tactic.
  • (Statista) 33% of internet users would rather contact a brand via social media than call them.
  • Another interesting fact is that 99% of social media users access their social media via smartphones.
  • 90% of customers will look up online reviews before visiting a brand’s social media page.
  • Be sure to post authentic user reviews, as 90% of shoppers can recognize fake online reviews.
  • 72% of US social media users have written a review for a business at some point.
  • In 2019, about 66% of social media shoppers stated that they wrote an online review at least once, while 2020 saw a big increase in online reviews, with 72% of US social media consumers reporting that they wrote online reviews for a local business.
  • 57% of marketers find social media stories to be an effective means of advertisement.
  • 6% of advertisers stated that social media stories were either “somewhat effective” or “very effective” for their businesses.
  • 6% said that they thought stories were “very effective” in helping them promote their business, while 35% found them to be “somewhat effective.
  • Social listening is the number one tactic for 62% of social media marketers.
  • Social media ads statistics show that 62% of marketers have recognized that social listening is an indispensable tool in attracting prospective customers and clients.
  • Social media marketing statistics also show that 64% of shoppers ended up making a purchase after seeing brand video content on their social media platforms.
  • 3% of marketers, social media is an important part of their marketing strategy.
  • 5% of marketers claim social media is very important for their overall marketing strategy, while for 30.
  • 8% in the 3 months leading up to April 2022 Social media marketing data shows that Instagram’s ad reach decreased in the past quarter, which placed it 4th in DataReportal’s ranking of the most active social media platforms in the world.
  • B2B social media statistics show that the vast majority of both B2B and B2C marketers choose Facebook as their primary means of advertisement, with 89% and 96% of them being active on the platform, respectively.
  • The second most popular platform is LinkedIn, used by 81% of B2B marketers and 53% of B2C marketers.
  • The third spot belongs to Instagram, where B2C advertisers take the lead, with 83% using the platform, as opposed to 72% of B2B marketers.
  • 22% of all social media marketing activities are done by social media marketing companies.
  • and it’s no surprise that around 22% of overall social media marketing activities are performed by professionals.
  • 90% of top salespeople and 71% of sales professionals use social selling tools.
  • Then, 78% of millennials use social selling tools, with 63% saying social selling is crucial for their business.
  • Social media marketing stats show that 90% of prospective buyers said that they never respond to such calls and would rather turn to social media or similar types of advertisement instead.
  • 78% of social sellers outsell their competition who are not on social media.
  • Social media marketing stats show that up to 78% of them make more sales than the competition.
  • 31% of B2B professionals find social selling helpful in building a relationship with customers.
  • They also find social media helpful for referrals, as up to 84% of social media buyers will make a purchase after getting a warm referral, increasing the odds of a sale up to 4 times.
  • Social media marketing facts further show that up to 70% of B2B companies find that those referrals close faster than other types of leads and convert better.
  • Around 10% of social media sellers closed at least five deals because they were active on social media.
  • Social media users have gotten used to having all the brand information at their fingertips, which is why social media statistics for business show that 10% of sellers managed to close five or more deals just by being active on social media.
  • 33% of internet users would rather contact a brand via social media than call them.
  • 70% of sales professionals use LinkedIn to track down leads and close sales.
  • In second place is, obviously, Facebook, with 64% of sales representatives.
  • Twitter (43%), YouTube (41%), and Instagram (39%) are also commonly used among sales professionals.
  • 98% of sales representatives reach their quotas through social media sales.
  • That’s exactly why social media marketing statistics show that 98% of sales reps with over 5,000 LinkedIn connections said that reaching and exceeding their quotas was easy using the platform.
  • 77% of B2B buyers do independent research before talking to salespeople.
  • Just under 40% of businesses think of social selling as an efficient way of reducing contact research time.
  • 39% of businesses with a social media presence believe that the primary purpose and benefit of social selling is to help them reduce contact research time.
  • According to social media marketing stats, more than 50% of total revenue across 14 major industries is generated by social sales.
  • The countries that are most active on social media are the United Arab Emirates at 99%, South Korea at 89.
  • About 96% of small and medium-sized businesses use social media of their choice.
  • 24 Must-Know SMS Marketing Statistics For 2022 | Swift Digital: 61% of businesses are expected to increase SMS marketing budgets due to the pandemic.
  • 60% of Australian adults in 2020 relied solely on a mobile phone for home telecommunication.
  • 60% of Australian Adults in 2020 relied solely on a mobile phone for home telecommunication.
  • 89 million mobile connections in Australia, equivalent to 130% of the population.
  • 61% of businesses were expected to increase their text marketing budgets in 2020.
  • Investment in SMS marketing is expected to increase by 50%, while spending on other channels is anticipated to decrease.
  • 5% and 20% in March and April 2020, respectively, in response to the Pandemic.
  • 83% of Millennials open SMS messages within 90 seconds of receiving them.
  • Consumers expect to interact with businesses via text, with 43% proactively texting companies.
  • 39% of business use SMS messaging in some form to communicate with customers.
  • SMS Marketing Statistics (Editors Choice) The SMS open rate for Australia is 94%.
  • 61% of businesses are expected to increase SMS marketing budgets due to the pandemic.
  • 54% of people claim significant frustration if they can’t send a business an SMS.
  • 60% of Australian adults in 2020 relied solely on a mobile phone for home telecommunication.
  • 60% of Australian Adults in 2020 relied solely on a mobile phone for home telecommunication.
  • Over 70% of Australians aged 18-44 don’t have fixed-line phone service at home and only use a mobile phone.
  • 89 million mobile connections in Australia, equivalent to 130% of the population.
  • Just 2% of the population of East Asia and the Pacific region don’t have mobile connectivity.
  • 61% of businesses were expected to increase their text marketing budgets in 2020.
  • Investment in SMS marketing is expected to increase by 50%, while spending on other channels is anticipated to decrease.
  • 5% and 20% in March and April 2020, respectively, in response to the Pandemic.
  • 83% of Millennials open SMS messages within 90 seconds of receiving them.
  • Consumers expect to interact with businesses via text, with 43% proactively texting companies.
  • 59% of users prefer a phone’s inbuilt communications features over third-party apps.
  • 39% of business use SMS messaging in some form to communicate with customers.
  • 75% of SMS recipients are frustrated if they can’t respond to a business on the same number.
  • 54% of people claim significant frustration if they can’t send an SMS to a business at all.
  • 2023 Digital Marketing Statistics – Boomcycle Digital Marketing: 72% of online marketers describe content creation as their most effective SEO tactic.
  • Mobile app marketing also plays a significant role, especially considering 94% of Facebook’s ad revenue comes from mobile.
  • SEO proves successful for 89% of marketers, while video is used as a tool by 86% of businesses.
  • Now, when it comes to PPC campaign strategies and display ad effectiveness, consider these stats:About 65% of small to mid-sized businesses engage in PPC (usually Google Ads) campaigns.
  • SEO’s impact on organic search rankings is undeniable, with 53% of all website traffic coming from organic searches.
  • Businesses that utilize blogging as part of their SEO strategy see 55% more traffic to their websites.
  • Furthermore, your lead generation efforts are likely to prosper with SEO, as it boasts a lead-to-close rate of nearly 15%.
  • Social media engagement is paramount for your brand’s visibility:91% of businesses use social media to reach their customers (effectively?
  • ) Influencer marketing has become a powerful strategy, with 93% of well-funded marketers finding it effective.
  • Personalized Subject LinesIncrease open rates by 50%Personalization grabs attention, boosting engagement.
  • Consider these figures:38% of people disengage with unattractive websites.
  • ”) Too bad for B2B, as the latest marketing stats reveal that video advertising boosts brand recall by 33%, demonstrating its effectiveness.
  • Furthermore, videos on landing pages can increase conversion rates by up to 80%.
  • com 73% OF MARKETERS BELIEVE THAT SOCIAL MEDIA MARKETING HAS BECOME ‘SOMEWHAT EFFECTIVE’ OR ‘VERY EFFECTIVE’ FOR THEIR BUSINESS GROWTH.
  • com 54% OF CONSUMERS USE SOCIAL MEDIA FOR RESEARCH ON BRANDS AND PRODUCTS.
  • com 68% OF CONSUMERS SAY THAT SOCIAL MEDIA ALLOWS THEM TO COMMUNICATE AND INTERACT WITH BRANDS.
  • com INCREASED BRAND VISIBILITY IS THE PRIMARY BENEFIT OF EMPLOYING SOCIAL MEDIA FOR ADVERTISING, ACCORDING TO 93% OF MARKETERS.
  • com 80% OF CONSUMERS HAVE PURCHASED SOMETHING AFTER IT WAS RECOMMENDED BY AN INFLUENCER.
  • com 49% OF CONSUMERS BETWEEN THE AGES OF 18 AND 29 HAVE ADMITTED TO PURCHASING SOMETHING IN RESPONSE TO SEEING A SOCIAL MEDIA AD.
  • com CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MARKETING OVER SOCIAL MEDIA ENCOURAGES CONSUMERS TO SPEND 20-40% MORE MONEY ON PRODUCTS AND SERVICES.
  • com 72% OF COMPANIES WILL UTILISE DATA COLLECTED THROUGH SOCIAL MEDIA TO MAKE WELL-INFORMED BUSINESS DECISIONS.
  • com 91% OF BUSINESSES ARE EXPECTED TO INCREASE THEIR SOCIAL MEDIA MARKETING BUDGETS WITHIN THE NEXT 3 YEARS.
  • com 41% OF GEN Z AND MILLENIALS MAKE AN IMPULSE PURCHASE ON SOCIAL MEDIA EVERY 2-3 WEEKS.
  • com View this post on Instagram A post shared by Creative Freelancer and Virtual Assistant | Amy (@onethreefourcreative) 43% OF CONSUMERS HAVE INCREASED THEIR USE OF SOCIAL MEDIA IN THE LAST 12 MONTHS TO DISCOVER NEW PRODUCTS AND BRANDS.
  • com 80% OF BUSINESS EXECUTIVES BELIEVE THAT IT IS VERY IMPORTANT OR EVEN ESSENTIAL TO INVEST IN SOCIAL MEDIA MARKETING.
  • 54 content marketing statistics (with key takeaways): Whether you’re refreshing a strategy or starting from scratch, these content strategy statistics may help you define your roadmap:69% of businesses plan to increase their content marketing budgets in 2023.
  • (Semrush, 2023) In 2020, 70% of marketers reported changing their targeting/messaging strategy.
  • (B2B Content Marketing, 2021) 64% of marketers have adjusted their editorial calendar in the past year.
  • (B2B Content Marketing, 2021) 53% of marketers have changed their content distribution/promotion strategy before 2021.
  • (B2B Content Marketing, 2021) Nearly 80% of B2B marketers report having a content marketing strategy, but only 43% have documented their strategy.
  • (B2B Content Marketing, 2021) 79% of marketers reported “generating more quality leads” to be their top content priority in 2021.
  • (Semrush, 2020) Only 31% of B2B marketers reported their organization was extremely or very successful with content marketing in the last 12 months.
  • Here’s how other content marketers are performing:Only 4% of marketers measure ROI over a six-month period or longer.
  • (LinkedIn, 2021) The top priority for 44% of marketers is to better measure the ROI of demand gen efforts.
  • (Google, 2020) Content marketing creates three times as many leads as traditional marketing and costs 64% less.
  • (Hubspot, 2023) A 2020 Ziflow survey found that the main priority for 55% of marketing agencies was to increase creative output and project bandwidth.
  • (Ziflow, 2020) Revisions also account for delays — 52% of marketing teams said an asset is revised between three and five times before it is considered final.
  • (Ziflow, 2020) 54% of marketing leaders attributed creative production delays to having more projects than their team could handle.
  • (HubSpot, 2021) 65% of marketers find it challenging to create engaging content that also ranks well in search results.
  • Over 50% of surveyed marketing leaders said they were busier than ever following the COVID-19 crisis in March 2020.
  • 82% of companies report using content marketing as a key strategy, up from 70% in 2020.
  • (Blogging Wizard, 2023) 57% of B2B marketers expect investment in social media/community building during 2023, up from 37% the previous year.
  • (Content Marketing Institute, 2023) 44% of B2B organizations have seen their sales cycles increase in the past year, and yet marketers continue to feel pressure to provide concrete proof of ROI.
  • (LinkedIn, 2020) 92% of B2B marketers now have an ABM program, and 68% of them use automation.
  • (Martech, 2020) 46% of B2B marketers planned to increase their marketing spend in 2020 vs the previous year, 12% of those by more than 9%.
  • (Statista, 2021) 95% of B2B customers view content as a marker of trust when evaluating a business.
  • (Ziflow, 2020) In 2020, 86% of B2B companies outsourced content creation, and 30% outsourced content distribution.
  • Use these blog content statistics to promote budget and team expansion in this area:A whopping 98% of marketers use written content as part of their content marketing strategy.
  • (Backlinko, 2023) 89% of content marketers used blog posts in their content creation strategy in 2020.
  • (MarketingProfs, 2020) 55% of marketers say blog content creation is their top inbound marketing priority.
  • (HubSpot, 2021) Desktop traffic accounts for 83% of all traffic to marketing blogs.
  • (HubSpot, 2021) 57% of marketers say that blogging has brought in new customers (OptinMonster, 2021) Takeaway:As you can see from the statistics above, blogging is a very influential form of content marketing.
  • (Adobe Experience Cloud, 2023) Around 40% of marketers say the pandemic affected their plans around video marketing.
  • (Wyzowl, 2021) 91% of marketers are satisfied with the ROI they’ve seen from video marketing on social media.
  • Audio Content Statistics From voice search to Google’s algorithms to tips on how to maximize your existing content, here’s what to pay attention to:52% of people who use voice assistants do so several times a day.
  • (Quora Creative, 2020) 17% of marketers plan to incorporate podcasts into their content marketing strategy.
  • Here’s the inside scoop:72% of marketers say content creation is their best SEO tactic.
  • (OptinMonster, 2023) 42% of marketers say improving their SEO is a concern.
  • (Semrush, 2020) The use of search engine marketing and pay-per-click ads have increased from 51% to 65%.
  • (HubSpot, 2021) In 2020, 75% of marketers reported SEO was the most effective content marketing tactic they implemented during the year.
  • That was followed by updating and repurposing existing content, a strategy used by 61% of respondents.
  • (Semrush, 2020) 72% of marketers say content creation is their best SEO tactic.
  • (IAB, 2021) 89% of marketers said social media was the most popular content distribution channel used in 2020.
  • (B2B Content Marketing, 2021) In the past year, the use of social media advertising and paid ad posts increased from 60% to 83%.
  • The Future of Content Marketing From budgets to performance, here are the trends worth paying attention to this year:94% of marketers in 39 countries are budgeting for content marketing.
  • (Semrush, 2020) 68% of marketers have planned on increasing their content marketing budget this year.
  • (Semrush, 2020) Digital ad spend grew 12% in 2020 and shows no sign of slowing down.
  • Powerful Digital Marketing Statistics and Facts for 2023: SEO Statistics 68% of all online interactions start with a search engine.
  • The organic search figure at 53% is up from the 51% found in the 2014 research.
  • 72% of online marketers consider high-quality content creation as the most efficient SEO tactic.
  • Based on the latest research carried out by GetResponse, welcome emails are opened at least 82% of the time.
  • The average number of people who open their emails via mobile devices is 49%.
  • 2 billion social media users who are active every day, which translates to about 42% of the population.
  • As research has shown, nearly 98% of sales representatives, who have over 5,000 LinkedIn connections find it easy to achieve or exceed their quota.
  • According to HubSpot research, at least 71% of customers who receive a good experience with a brand via social media, are likely to recommend it.
  • Here are some of their key findings:Over 74% of companies surveyed already have a website personalization program in place.
  • In 2020, retention (58%) has overtaken conversion (55%) and acquisition (45%) as the key goal for website personalization.
  • However, this was identified as an area of high potential growth, as 89% expected to be using it by the end of next year.
  • The three biggest obstacles that stand in the way of scaling a personalization strategy are:A lack of expertise (37%), limited functionality (36%), and a lack of time (35%).
  • Mobile Commerce Statistics A substantial portion of the population- at least 96% – own a mobile phone.
  • A study done by the Pew Research Center reveals that at least 96% of the American population owns a cellphone.
  • To break it down, 81% own a cellphone while 15% own a cellphone that is not a smartphone.
  • To illustrate just how important it is to make your marketing channels mobile-friendly, consider this – more than 40% of online transactions were performed on a mobile device within 4 months.
  • 51% of consumers make use of mobile devices to identify new brands and items on the market.
  • In a recent survey, up to 51% of consumers claimed that they now use their mobile gadgets to find new brands and products.
  • Based on research, 88% of customers don’t bother returning to a website if they’ve had an awful experience.
  • Similarly, 61% of users said that if they didn’t find what they were looking for right away on a mobile site, they’d quickly move on to another site.
  • The organic search figure at 53% is up from the 51% found in the 2014 research.
  • com/resources/reports/email-marketing-benchmarks), welcome emails are opened at least 82% of the time.
  • 2 billion social media users who are active every day, which translates to about 42% of the population.
  • com/20-shocking-social-selling-statistics/) has shown, nearly 98% of sales representatives, who have over 5,000 LinkedIn connections find it easy to achieve or exceed their quota.
  • aspx), at least 71% of customers who receive a good experience with a brand via social media, are likely to recommend it.
  • In 2020, retention (58%) has overtaken conversion (55%) and acquisition (45%) as the key goal for website personalization.
  • However, this was identified as an area of high potential growth, as 89% expected to be using it by the end of next year.
  • The three biggest obstacles that stand in the way of scaling a personalization strategy are:A lack of expertise (37%), limited functionality (36%), and a lack of time (35%).
  • org/internet/fact-sheet/mobile/) reveals that at least 96% of the American population owns a cellphone.
  • To break it down, 81% own a cellphone while 15% own a cellphone that is not a smartphone.
  • 10 Visual Content Marketing Statistics You Must Know: Content with relevant images gets 94% more views than content without images.
  • 35% of marketers say visual imagery is the most important form of content for their business.
  • It is said that a picture speaks a thousand words, and a video speaks ten times that amount According to this study from HubSpot, video can increase your brand recognition by 95%.
  • 85% of all consumers have watched videos online at least once per day, and 87% use their mobile devices every day.
  • Content with relevant images gets 94% more views than content without images.
  • 35% of marketers say visual imagery is the most important form of content for their business.
  • Mind-Blowing Digital Marketing ROI Statistics (2023): Key Digital Marketing ROI Statistics The average return on investment from email marketing stands at 4,200%.
  • realized a 60% returning customer rate simply from video content marketing.
  • 72% of companies attribute their success to keeping tabs on their content marketing ROI.
  • Based on a study done by Content Marketing Institute, 72% of the most prosperous companies compute the ROI of their content marketing compared to 22% of the least successful companies.
  • 89% of marketers claim that the ROI they get from influencer marketing is almost the same if not higher than that from other platforms.
  • 64% of Internet users are more likely to purchase a product online after watching a video.
  • According to HubSpot, at least 64% of individuals will proceed to buy an item once they’ve watched a video explaining more of the product’s details.
  • Based on research done by Treepodia, this marketing technique can increase your ROI by 49% and improve your CTR by 74%.
  • Videos incorporated on landing pages boost the conversion rate by up to 86%.
  • According to EyeView Digital, one such technique is to add videos that can boost the conversion rate by 86%.
  • Research shows that this marketing platform costs 62% less compared to traditional methods, yet it results in 3 times as many leads.
  • 60% of customers expect brands to provide consistent and precise information across online platforms – be it their website, third-party sites or social media platforms.
  • Top 10 Content Marketing Statistics | Semetrical: A survey by Semrush reveals that 91% of marketers achieved success with their content marketing activities in 2021.
  • According to Content Marketing Institute, an incredible 81% of marketers believe that content marketing is a core business strategy and a key driver for success.
  • Discover how we used content marketing to increase our client’s monthly organic traffic by 599% over a three-year period, and increased online revenue by 79% in just three months.
  • 62% of B2B decision-makers rely on practical content to guide their buying decisions.
  • DemandGen studies reveal one of the most impactful B2B content marketing statistics, which is that 62% of B2B decision-makers rely on practical content to guide their buying decisions.
  • So, if your brand isn’t creating the relevant content your B2B audience craves, you could be falling behind competitors and losing out on this 62% of customers – or even more!
  • Find out how we used content to drive organic growth for a leading office provider, increasing the number of B2B organic leads by 139% within a year!
  • The Content Marketing Institute reports that 67% of marketers experienced an increase in demand and leads off the back of their content marketing efforts, which presents a 7% rise from the previous year.
  • 64% of the most successful B2B marketers have a documented content strategy.
  • According to Content Marketing Institute, only 40% of B2B marketers actually have a documented content marketing strategy, yet 64% of the most successful B2B marketers have a documented content marketing strategy.
  • Content marketing generates 3x the number of leads than outbound marketing and costs 62% less.
  • Content marketing costs approximately 62% less than these methods, too.
  • Google data shows that 71% of B2B searches begin with a generic search, as opposed to a branded search.
  • And more generally, 68% of online experiences begin with a search engine.
  • Demand Metrics reveals that the majority of people (70%) would rather read blog articles to get information than do so through advertisements.
  • Content Marketing Institute reports that 72% of marketers are producing significantly more content than they did a year ago, which means the competition is rising!
  • 35 Interesting Infosys Stats and Facts [and More] 2023 – Learn Digital Marketing: As of 2022, Infosys’ top 5 clients contribute 13%, top 10 clients contribute 20.
  • Top 15 SaaS Content Marketing Statistics You Need to Know in 2023 (with pro tips💡): 75% of them expect to increase their content marketing budgets in 2023 — Source:SemrushIt’s not a surprise that 75% of SaaS companies want to increase their content marketing budgets.
  • Creating content is a key marketing strategy for 57% of SaaS companies — (Source:Gitnux)Content creation is a marketing strategy, not a tactic.
  • 42% of SaaS marketers said updating existing content has boosted their content marketing value — (Source:Insivia)One of the worst mistakes you can make when investing in content marketing is creating one piece of content and ignoring it forever.
  • 47% of SaaS companies find case study blog posts to be effective — Source:Uplift ContentPutting together a compelling case study is one of the most powerful strategies for showcasing your product and attracting future customers.
  • 64% of B2B buyers report that podcasts were helpful at the beginning of their buying journey — Source:SiegemediaPodcasting is an effective content marketing strategy for SaaS businesses in technical verticals.
  • 40% of hukwbuyers said they engaged with at least three pieces of content before they contacted a sales rep — Source:SiegemediaAs Louis Grenier says, “All people have pains and dreams, but there’s one missing ingredient to turn them into a buyer.
  • SaaS buyers spend 27% of their time during the buying process conducting independent online research — Source:Gartner.
  • 91% of SaaS businesses say that video as a marketing tool has helped increase their traffic — Source:Wyzowl state of marketing video reportVideo content marketing creates valuable and engaging videos that attract, nurture, and convert business leads.
  • 7% of SaaS marketing professionals say the most significant challenge with visual content is producing engaging visuals on a consistent basis — Source:Siegemedia.
  • Content marketing costs SaaS businesses 62% less than traditional marketing — Source:Demand metric.
  • ‍80% of B2B technology marketers report that writing is the most important of all content marketing skills, followed by digital media skills (77%) and data analysis skills (65%) — Source:SaaSPartners.
  • You can imagine that the SaaS industry has increased in size by around 500% over the past seven years.
  • 25+ Essential Digital Marketing Statistics (2024) – Intellipaat: Digital marketing is expected to expand at a compound annual growth rate of 10% between 2020 and 2026.
  • The digital display is expected to expand at a 15% CAGR, while the search is expected to rise at a 12% CAGR.
  • Just in the last year, 65% of firms boosted their digital marketing spending.
  • Digital marketing budget expenditure in firms increased by 15% between 2021 and 2022.
  • More than 20% of businesses believe that the quantity of insights generated is the key factor in deciding how effective their marketing platforms are.
  • By 2023, it is anticipated that more than 82% of web traffic will consist of video.
  • Business emails typically have a click-through rate (CTR) of roughly 3%.
  • The open rates of emails with customized subject lines might rise by 50%.
  • Commercial emails have an average 45% open rate and an average 18% click-through rate.
  • Required fields are marked *Comment * Name * Email * Looking for 100% Salary Hike ?
  • Digital Marketing Statistics to help skyrocket 2024 | Engati: In 2026, 69% of the overall advertisement spending will be generated via smartphones.
  • Roughly 87% of the Digital Advertising revenue will be generated via programmatic advertising in 2026.
  • Desktop takes 39% of ad spending as of 2023, while smartphones take 61%.
  • By 2026, desktops will have 31% of the ad spending share, and mobile phones will have 69%Non-programmatic ad spending holds a mere 16% share in 2023, while programmatic holds 84%.
  • 20% of businesses measure Digital Marketing’s success by counting the number of leads generated.
  • According to a survey from Gartner, 72% of the marketing budget goes towards Digital Marketing.
  • Google is the world’s biggest search engine, catering to 92% of global searches.
  • The marketing job demand is set to increase by 10% by 2026, as per a survey by the Bureau of Labor.
  • Customers spend 50% more with businesses that regularly respond to reviews.
  • Over 90% of people read reviews online before making a purchasing decision.
  • Digital Advertisements can increase a brand’s awareness by 80%62% of marketers use software for Customer Relationship Management.
  • 20% of marketing email campaigns need to be optimized for mobile phones.
  • Mondays have the highest opening rate – 22% while Sundays have the lowest with 20.
  • 82% of digital marketers implement email marketing globally, of which 65% use automated emails.
  • Nearly 70% of email recipients can simply tell if an email is spam by reading its subject line.
  • The conversion rate increases by 56% if an Email has an emoji in its subject line rather than plain text.
  • 46% of customers prefer to be contacted by brands via emails‍Content Marketing Statistics42.
  • 80% of those who considered themselves successful in content marketing have documented their content marketing strategies.
  • Nearly 80% of successful content marketers spend more than 10% of their marketing budgets on content.
  • 27% of marketers have a budget of less than $1000 monthly for content marketing.
  • 20% of marketers have a budget of 3 to 5K, while only 6% have a budget of over $20,00049.
  • 52% of marketers say social media and community building is a top priority, as is improving content quality, followed by audience research.
  • 45% of marketers say that Videos are the top-performing content for their brands.
  • Businesses allocate around 15% of their marketing budget toward social media marketing54.
  • 50% of small businesses on WhatsApp report increased customer engagement.
  • 69% of active WhatsApp users say the messaging app is their primary communication tool.
  • Messages sent via WhatsApp have a 70% higher response rate than SMS marketing.
  • Revenue increased 21% year-over-year (in constant currency) in Q1 of 202370.
  • Over 98% of Facebook’s audience login to the platform via mobile phones.
  • Nearly 56% of marketers from the United States and the United Kingdom use Instagram to collaborate with influencers120.
  • 76% of marketers in an insider intelligence survey said they use AI for basic content creation and to write copy.
  • Gartner forecasts that 30% of outgoing marketing messages from big businesses will be generated by AI by 2025.
  • According to Mailchimp, 50% of marketers believe inadequate adoption of AI is holding them back from achieving their goals.
  • 2% of marketers spend over 40% of their marketing budget on AI-driven campaigns.
  • 91% of Fortune 1000 companies are increasing their investment in artificial intelligence.
  • A Statista survey shows that the adoption of generative AI is highest in the marketing and advertising sector (37%).
  • Technology (35%) and consulting (30%) are the other two sectors showing increased use of AI.
  • 26% of businesses are applying AI techniques such as NLP to marketing and sales‍Future of Digital Marketing (2023 & Beyond)129.
  • It is predicted that 69% of the overall advertisement spending will be generated via smartphones.
  • One Statistic also reveals that 90% of mobile users need to be made aware of what they want to purchase.
  • As per the marketing insider group, over 50% of digital marketers will increase their content marketing budget in 2023.
  • 61% of shoppers prefer shopping from businesses with augmented reality offerings.
  • Why Content Marketing Matters:The Statistics, Evidence and Trends You Need to Know — 1827 Marketing: 71% of respondents to the Content Marketing Institute’s annual B2B survey stated that content has become more important to their organisation over the past year.
  • And according to Semrush, only 3% of the 1,700 marketers and business owners surveyed felt that content marketing was unsuccessful for their brand.
  • 50% of respondents expected their content marketing budget to increase.
  • This was down from 66% the previous year, suggesting caution in economically turbulent times.
  • (Content Marketing Institute, “B2B Content Marketing Budgets, Benchmarks, and Trends 2023”)33% of most successful marketers spend at least 50% of their total marketing budget on content marketing.
  • (Content Marketing Institute, “B2B Content Marketing Budgets, Benchmarks, and Trends 2023”)When asked what areas of demand generation would see budget prioritisation, 43% of respondents said content marketing.
  • (Hubspot, 2023 State of Marketing Report)44% of businesses surveyed plan to expand their content team in 2023, with a further 53% maintaining current staffing levels.
  • (Semrush, “State of Content Marketing 2023”)47% of respondents expect their business to hire content creators including writers, designers, photographers, videographers, etc.
  • 16% plan to hire subject matter experts to create unique, high-level content.
  • (Content Marketing Institute, “B2B Content Marketing Budgets, Benchmarks, and Trends 2023”)Content marketing costs 62% less than most other types of marketing while delivering 3 times the number of actual leads on average.
  • 66% of successful B2B content marketers said it helps nurture leads, subscribers, and their brand’s audience.
  • (Content Marketing Institute, “B2B Content Marketing Budgets, Benchmarks, and Trends 2023”)83% of B2B content marketers said it helped build brand awareness.
  • (Content Marketing Institute, “B2B Content Marketing Budgets, Benchmarks, and Trends 2023”)62% of successful B2B content marketers said that it generates sales and revenue for their business.
  • 1% of keywords were transactional indicating people were interested in buying a product or service.
  • (Semrush, State of Search 2023)59% for successful B2B content marketers said content marketing helps them build an audience of subscribers who may become leads.
  • (Content Marketing Institute, “B2B Content Marketing Budgets, Benchmarks, and Trends 2023”)Brands that publish original or primary research on their blog are 41% more likely to receive backlinks, higher search result rankings, media mentions, and leads.
  • ”)35% of business bloggers with strong results said lead magnets and gated content are among the most effective for their brand, tied with guides and ebooks.
  • (Semrush, “State of Content Marketing 2023”)Only 40% of all B2B content marketers have a documented B2B content marketing strategy, yet 64% who identify as highly successful do.
  • 81% of B2B content marketers report tracking their results in 2022 compared to 75% in 2021.
  • The top metrics they track include 86% website traffic, 83% engagement with marketing email messages, 83% website engagement, 79% conversions, 74% social media analytics, and 59% tie between search rankings and email subscribers.
  • (Content Marketing Institute, “B2B Content Marketing Budgets, Benchmarks, and Trends 2023”)Despite this, 65% of marketers say they can’t quantitatively show their impact (CMO and Semrush).
  • 47% believed that they owe their content marketing success to effective audience research.
  • (Semrush, “State of Content Marketing 2023”)33% audit their content twice a year.
  • A further 24% once a year, and just over 20% do it over three times a year.
  • 53% see an increase in engagement, and 49% see an increase in their rankings.
  • (Semrush, “State of Content Marketing 2023”)Effective marketers are 46% more likely to integrate automation into their workflow so they can focus on content creation, engaging prospects, and higher-level work.
  • 35% of marketers thought understanding their Return on Investment (ROI) for their campaigns is very or extremely important.
  • (Hubspot, 2020)But 48% of B2B marketers said their biggest challenge is measuring the performance of content across platforms.
  • (Content Marketing Institute, “B2B Content Marketing Budgets, Benchmarks, and Trends 2023”) 81% of marketers track KPIs, but only 49% felt confident that their organisation measures performance accurately.
  • 45% said setting the right Key Performance Indicators (KPI) was a challenge.
  • (Content Marketing Institute, “B2B Content Marketing Budgets, Benchmarks, and Trends 2023”) 86% said privacy concerns and losing cookies and other tracking data have made them adjust their marketing plan.
  • 58% company culture encouraging collaboration between the departments, 15% a clear content marketing plan, 12% an easy way for content marketing to communicate and share content with sales, 9% want more clarity about the buyer’s journey.
  • (LinkedIn and Content Marketing Institute, Content Marketing:Unlocking Sales & Marketing Performance)They also noted that the sales team did not use around 80% of content created by content marketers.
  • For example, 62% of B2B consumers read or engage with three to seven pieces of content before connecting with a salesperson.
  • 11% are super researchers who engage with over seven pieces of content first.
  • (Demand Gen Report 2022)B2B buyers shared their frustrations about content, 39% want marketers to tone down the sales pitch, 37% prefer shorter content, 36% like to see solid data and research, 36% don’t want to be overwhelmed with copy, 30% want more insights from thought leaders and experts.
  • (Hubspot, 2023 State of Marketing Report)On the question of what length of article or blog post yields the best results:39% said under 1,500 words and 32% blog posts or articles longer than 1,500 words.
  • Blog posts that include a video receive 70% more traffic, but only 8% of blog posts do.
  • While articles and blog posts remain popular, 41% of marketers reported to Hubspot that they were looking to shake things up in the marketing mix.
  • The other most effective content marketing tactics of 2022 included:48% in-person events, 47% virtual events, 46% research reports, 43% white papers or ebooks, 36% case studies and videos .
  • Types of content B2B prospects prefer to include 67% webinars, 55% reports featuring original research like survey results, 56% E-books, 54% articles or blog posts, 52% white papers, 49% case studies, and 41% newsletters.
  • The content they most appreciate early:62% want infographics, 58% blog posts, 56% podcasts, 55% white papers and 41% webinars.
  • 48% prefer webinars, 34% white papers, 31% tie between blog posts and infographics, and 27% prefer podcasts.
  • At the end of the buying process, preferences change with 17% preferring podcasts, 11% tie between white papers and webinars, 10% blog posts, and 7% infographics.
  • 69% of marketers use a newsletter to share their content and reach their audience.
  • Here’s how the other platforms stack up:76% Facebook, 70% Twitter, 65% YouTube, and 57% Instagram.
  • 42% of all marketers publish on TikTok, and 26% plan to start in 2023 despite concerns about privacy.
  • (Hubspot, 2023 State of Marketing Report) However, only 9% of B2B marketers publish on TikTok.
  • (Content Marketing Institute, “B2B Content Marketing Budgets, Benchmarks, and Trends 2023”)Only 35% of all marketers tailor content to each social media platform.
  • 46% of all marketers repurpose the same content across platforms without optimising it.
  • Effective marketers are 27% more likely to tailor their content to the platform and its audience.
  • (Hubspot, 2023 State of Marketing Report)Facebook has the top Return on Investment of social platforms at 22%, however this is down from 40% in 2021.
  • 29% of marketers plan to use targeted social media ads to help them reach specific audiences without the use of third-party cookies.
  • Their B2B survey shows that 67% of marketers plan to use ads like social media boosts to distribute their content.
  • 48% share social media content containing relevant links, while 42% prefer quick stats or insights.
  • 41% prefer a strong story that they believe resonates with their followers.
  • When asked which type of content delivers the highest return on investment, 25% of respondents said video, 12% said images, 9% said blog posts, 8% case studies, 7% tie between podcasts and infographics.
  • (Hubspot, 2023 State of Marketing Report)32% of B2B marketers are using a marketing automation system to help manage their content.
  • (Content Marketing Institute, “B2B Content Marketing Budgets, Benchmarks, and Trends 2023”)While 19% of businesses who use AI content generation tools reported success, 24% of businesses who do not use AI content generation reported the same showing no clear strategic advantage.
  • (Semrush, “State of Content Marketing 2023”)As customers grow increasingly concerned about privacy, 86% of marketers need to adapt to changing regulations, standards, and tools.
  • (Hubspot, 2023 State of Marketing Report)Only 36% of marketers currently include interactive content in their content marketing strategy, with 64% missing out on the links it can provide.
  • (Gitnux) 74% of B2B marketers say providing value is the top factor in content marketing success.
  • (Content Marketing Institute) 80% of B2B technology marketers report that writing is the most important of all content marketing skills, followed by digital media skills (77%), and data analysis skills (65%) (SaaSPartners.
  • io) 57% of the most successful B2B tech companies outsource their SaaS content marketing activities.
  • (Content Marketing Institute) 78% of Chief Marketing Officers (CMO) view custom content as the future of marketing.
  • Over 50% of SaaS platforms already make content an integral part of their online strategy, while 78% of CMOs insist that it’s importance to the growth of the industry is only going to grow in years to come.
  • Audience Behaviors Online users spend 20% of their online time consuming content.
  • (DemandMetric) 78% of users perceive a relationship between themselves and a company using custom content.
  • (DemandMetric) SaaS buyers spend 27% of their time during the buying process conducting independent online research.
  • (Gartner) More than 30% of SaaS subscribers cancel their subscription within the first three months.
  • (0101Marketing) Content marketing costs SaaS businesses 62% less than traditional marketing.
  • (DemandMetric) The average SaaS startup spends an average of 75% of revenue on sales and marketing in the first three years.
  • (Zipdo) SaaS businesses who use content marketing produce lead generation growth of up to 400%.
  • Blogging 98% of SaaS companies have blogs, and 42% of marketers said updating existing content has boosted their content marketing value.
  • (Insivia) B2B brands with regularly maintained blogs generate 67% more leads than those that don’t.
  • (DemandMetric) 90% SaaS companies post blogs as part of their online strategy.
  • (MailUp) SaaS landing pages with a strong CTA get an 80% increase in conversion rates, and sign-up forms can be increased by 34%.
  • (Content Marketing Institute) 47% of SaaS companies find case study blog posts to be effective.
  • Refine Content Strategy Video 91% of businesses say that video as a marketing tool has helped increase their traffic.
  • (Wyzowl State of Video Marketing 2023 Report) 57% of video marketers created screen recorded video in 2022.
  • (Wyzowl State of Video Marketing 2023 Report) More than 70% of sales professionals say custom-recorded video produces more opens, clicks and responses than text-based emails.
  • (Business Wire) 51% of B2B SaaS marketing professionals say webinars and webcasts were their most successful form of video content, followed by interviews with industry experts at 36%.
  • (Content Marketing Institute) 91% of SaaS apps find success with a webinar format that includes at least two speakers.
  • Use of video as a marketing channel is at an all-time high, its usage among businesses growing 30% in the last five years.
  • 5% of SaaS marketing professionals say infographics and other original visual graphics generate the most engagement.
  • (Venngage) People following directions that combine text with illustrations successfully follow those directions 323% better than those following directions that don’t feature illustrations.
  • 7% of SaaS marketing professionals say the biggest challenge with visual content is producing engaging visuals on a consistent basis.
  • Social Media YouTube is the top driver of social media traffic for 98% of leading SaaS companies, followed by Facebook (96%), LinkedIn (78%) and Twitter (72%).
  • (Mike Sonders) 86% of consumers looking to buy IT products (including SaaS subscriptions) use social media to help make a decision.
  • (SocialPilot) 76% of Internet users buy a product or service after seeing it on social media.
  • Content Promotion 81% of the most successful B2B content marketers promote their content using paid methods.
  • (Content Marketing Institute) Social media advertising is the most used form of paid content promotion in the B2B industry, used by 77% of top marketers.
  • This is followed by SEM (Search Engine Marketing) and PPC (Pay Per Click) at 65%.
  • (Content Marketing Institute) 75% of B2B content marketers using paid social media ads choose LinkedIn as their primary platform, while 79% said it produced the best results.
  • Challenges and Obstacles 59% of B2B technology marketers say creating content is a challenge.
  • (Content Marketing Institute) The top three reasons why businesses don’t use video content are lack of time (30%), lack of knowledge (18%), and inability to convince key decision makers to invest in video (10%).
  • 2% of marketers say their biggest challenge is sourcing data and statistics for their content.
  • (Venngage) 67% of B2B content marketing teams have been asked to produce more content without being allocated more resources.
  • While traditional approaches like blogging and social media remain pivotal, video is undoubtedly entering its zenith, with fewer than 10% of businesses not making use of video-based content to market their business.
  • – CMO 60% of all social media traffic to B2B websites comes from Facebook, Twitter and LinkedIn.
  • 93% of shoppers’ buying decisions are influenced by social media because 90% trust peer recommendations.
  • – #Socialnomics 2014 Just 18% of consumers trust posts by brands or companies on social sites like Facebook and Twitter.
  • Customer service requests through “eService” channels – including web, social and chat – are expected to grow to 53% in 2015.
  • – Bluewolf 90% of enterprises say they use social media to respond to customer service inquiries – yet 58% of consumers who have tweeted about a bad experience never received a response from the offending company.
  • – SteamFeed Instagram grew by 50% between March and December 2014, and exceeded the 300 million user mark.
  • – Simply Measured Today, 86% of top brands have Instagram accounts, up from 71% last year.
  • – Simply Measured Tweets with images receive 18% more clicks, 89% more favorites and 150% more retweets.
  • – BufferSocial When people follow a brand on Twitter, 72% are more likely to make a future purchase from that brand.
  • – Twitter Facebook posts with less than 250 characters get 60% more engagement – SteamFeed Posting to Facebook on Fridays is likely to result in better engagement:17% of weekly comments, 16% of weekly likes and shares, and 25% of videos played occur on that day.
  • 20+ B2B SEO Statistics to Inform Your Marketing Strategy in 2024 – Growfusely: B2B Purchase Journey Begins Online 27% of the B2B purchase journeys begin with online searches.
  • Furthermore, 41% of B2B buyers go through at least three websites before approaching for sales.
  • 49% of B2B companies are using SEO to achieve various marketing objectives.
  • Content marketing, which also contributes to SEO, is second with 43% votes.
  • 34% of B2B marketers said that SEO was responsible for most of their leads and sales.
  • While in-person trade shows and events (highest in budget spent) ranked 4th with 27% votes.
  • 2% of marketers use 3 to 5 different metrics to measure SEO success while 40.
  • An analysis of 912 million web pages shows that 93% of B2B content does not get any backlinks.
  • Out of the remaining 7%, only 3% of content gets backlinks from one or more sources.
  • 2% More Backlinks The analysis of 912 million web pages shows that longer articles are more likely to get backlinks and social shares.
  • When compared, listicles received 203% more social shares than infographics and 218% more shares than how-to posts.
  • 6% Organic Traffic The goal of most B2B SEO campaigns is to rank first in search engine results for relevant keywords.
  • 160+ Digital Marketing Statistics of 2024:Trend, Data, and Fun Facts: 5% of company revenue across almost all industries in 2022, according to Gartner’s annual CMO Spend and Strategy Survey.
  • In 2022, technical SEO was the highest priority for SEO professionals at 15%.
  • 77% of people use search engines (Google) to start their patient journey.
  • Updating an existing title tag with an SEO optimized one can increase page clicks by more than 437%.
  • Longtail keyword searches enjoy a 3-5% higher CTR in the organic search results8.
  • 56% of businesses allocate less than one-quarter of their marketing budget to link building.
  • 92% of marketers continue to value video as an ‘important part’ of their marketing strategy.
  • 70% of clicks in Google search results go to organic, with 30% going to AdWords.
  • 5% of businesses say that PPC campaigns help inform/assist their SEO efforts.
  • Search engine optimization can increase the business value of a blog visit by 429%.
  • Updating an existing title tag with an SEO optimised one can increase page clicks by more than 437%.
  • 76% of American consumers purchased a product after seeing a brand’s social post.
  • 49% of social media users depend on and trust influencers for product recommendations.
  • 90% of brands want to build brand awareness through social media, 77% of them use it to maintain brand reputation, while 71% of them use it for building and managing an engaged community.
  • Brands have seen a 33% increase in purchase intent resulting from ad exposure on LinkedIn.
  • On mobile and desktop SERPs, the first page that ranks for a domain on a search is different 35% of the time.
  • 40% of users that have a bad experience with the mobile version of your website go directly to your competitor shortly after.
  • When searching on mobile, Google is the preferred choice of 96% of smartphone users.
  • 69% of smartphone users said they would make purchases from businesses if their mobile websites addressed their queries or concerns.
  • 40% of shoppers consult 3 or more channels (often while shopping) before making a purchase.
  • 82% of marketers are actively investing in content marketing, 10% report not using content marketing, and 8% are unsure if their company uses content marketing.
  • 40% of B2B marketers have a documented content marketing strategy, and 64% of the most successful B2B marketers have a documented content marketing strategy.
  • 73% of people admit to skimming blog posts, while 27% consume them thoroughly.
  • 51% of the businesses that invest in content marketing publish content every day.
  • 6% more engagement than static content, with buyers spending an average of 8.
  • Short articles/posts of fewer than 3,000 words (83%) and videos (61%) are the top two content types that B2C marketers used in the last 12 months.
  • In addition to using their organization’s website to distribute content in the last 12 months, more than 50% of B2C respondents used blogs, email newsletters, and email.
  • 93% of content marketers believe that video converts the same or better than other forms of content.
  • Among the B2C marketers who used paid social media platforms, the majority chose Facebook (91%) and Instagram (59%).
  • 44% of users consume 3-5 pieces of content before engaging with a business.
  • At least one piece of content is created every day by 60% of marketers.
  • 76% of content marketers use organic traffic as a key metric to measuring content success.
  • 94% of content marketers are using social media as a distribution channel for their content.
  • The majority of marketers (62%) look at page views to know how well their content is performing.
  • The top technologies used by content marketing teams are social media posting (65%), website analytics tools (50%), and email marketing software (44%).
  • 33% of marketers send weekly emails and 26% send emails multiple times per month.
  • 77% of marketers have seen an increase in email engagement over the last 12 months.
  • 81% of B2B marketers say their most used form of content marketing is email newsletters.
  • When evaluating content performance, 47% of B2B marketers rely on email engagement.
  • Globally, Mondays see the highest email open rates (22%), compared to the lowest open rates on Sundays (20-3%).
  • 92% of adults that are online use email, with 61% using it on an average day.
  • 45% of marketers send emails for their email marketing campaigns on a weekly basis.
  • 30% of marketers still send the same volume of emails to users regardless of engagement.
  • 99% of email users check their inbox every day, with some checking 20 times a day.
  • 55% of respondents say email marketing is the most often automated channel.
  • Segmented emails make readers 50% more likely to click on a link within the email.
  • 99% of email users check their email every day, some as much as 20 times a day.
  • 86% of business professionals prefer to use email when communicating for business purposes.
  • Adding a blog to your existing website can increase traffic by as much as 434%.
  • The most popular types of content produced are blog posts (85%) and infographics (61%), followed by social sharing assets (56%).
  • 65% of companies who say their content marketing is very successful, do content audits more than twice a year.
  • Having content that’s backed by data is 73% more persuasive than publishing a post without one.
  • 23% of bloggers reported that they need 2–3 hours to write a blog post.
  • 82% of marketers who blog consistently see positive ROI from inbound links and increased rankings in search engines.
  • 60% of consumers feel connected to a brand after reading custom content.
  • 72% of overall marketing budgets get put towards digital marketing channel161.
  • 181 interesting digital marketing statistics for 2024: 69% of businesses plan to increase their content marketing budgets in 2023.
  • (Semrush, 2023) 82% of companies report using content marketing, up from 70% in 2020.
  • (Blogging Wizard, 2023) 65% of content marketers can’t consistently measure content ROI.
  • (Content Marketing Institute, 2022) Content marketing creates three times as many leads as traditional marketing and costs 64% less.
  • (Showpad, 2020) Only 31% of B2B marketers reported their organization was extremely or very successful with content marketing in the last 12 months.
  • (B2B Content Marketing, 2021) 37% of small organizations, 54% of medium-sized organizations, and 75% of large organizations report outsourcing part of their content marketing efforts.
  • (Content Marketing Institute) 47% of B2B marketers don’t measure ROI from their content marketing efforts.
  • (Point Visible) B2C marketers dedicate an average 26% of their total marketing budget towards content marketing.
  • (Content Marketing Institute) Generating quality leads is the main goal of 79% of marketers in 2021 (eMarketer, 2020) 46% of B2B marketers planned to increase their marketing spend in 2020 vs the previous year, 12% of those by more than 9%.
  • 9% for Twitter in 2020 (eMarketer, 2021) Video is the #1 form of media used in content strategy, overtaking blogs and infographics.
  • (HubSpot) In 2020, US adults spent 7 hours 50 minutes consuming digital media per day, up 15% (59 minutes) over the average daily time spent in 2019.
  • (Hubspot, 2020) 70% of marketers are actively investing in content marketing.
  • (HubSpot, 2020) 75% of B2C marketers think their organization is successful with content marketing.
  • By 2022, over 80% of all global internet traffic will come from streaming and downloading videos (Cisco).
  • (Digiday) 87% of video marketers report a positive ROI — a number that is also trending upwards over time (Wyzowl).
  • 78% of video marketers say that video marketing has improved their company’s bottom line (Wyzowl).
  • 51% of B2B decision-makers use YouTube videos to research purchases (Hootsuite) 96% of current video marketers plan to increase or maintain their video spend, a number that is up from last year (Wyzowl).
  • 85% of marketers rank short-form videos as the most effective type of social media content in 2021 (HubSpot) 64% of marketers plan to invest more in short-form video in 2022.
  • (HubSpot) US adults spend 2 hours 13 minutes watching videos per day, up from 1 hour 46 minutes in 2019 (eMarketer, 2021) The most commonly-created types of videos are explainer videos (73%), social media videos (67%), presentation videos (51%), sales videos (41%), and video ads (41%).
  • (Wyzowl, 2021) In a 2018 HubSpot survey, 54% of consumers wanted to see more video content from a brand or business they support.
  • 96% of global traffic comes from Google search, Google Images, and Google Maps.
  • (Think With Google) CTR of emails with emojis in subject line is 56% higher.
  • 7% of pages will rank in the top 10 search results within a year of publication.
  • (Ahrefs) 75% of people never scroll past the first page of search engines.
  • (AdBadger, 2019) 74% of brands say PPC is a huge driver for their business.
  • (State of PPC 2019/2020, 2019) 64% of brands are planning to increase their PPC budget in the next 12 months.
  • (State of PPC 2019/2020, 2019) PPC visitors are 50% more likely to purchase something than organic visitors.
  • (Unbounce, 2019) 62% of marketers stated they will increase their PPC budgets for the following year.
  • (Hanapin) Google Ads’ Display Network reaches 90% of internet users via 2 million websites.
  • 22 billion on search in 2024 (eMarketer) 75% of users never scroll past the first page of search results.
  • (AdBadger, 2019) 74% of brands say PPC is a huge driver for their business.
  • (State of PPC 2019/2020, 2019) 64% of brands are planning to increase their PPC budget in the next 12 months.
  • (State of PPC 2019/2020, 2019) PPC visitors are 50% more likely to purchase something than organic visitors.
  • (Unbounce, 2019) 62% of marketers stated they will increase their PPC budgets for the following year.
  • (Hanapin) Google Ads’ Display Network reaches 90% of internet users via 2 million websites.
  • (PowerTraffick) 56% of digital media professionals think programmatic advertising will be the most vulnerable to brand risk incidents in 2021.
  • 32% of e-commerce website visits via tablet devices were converted into purchases in Q2 2020.
  • (Statista, 2020) Longer landing pages can generate up to 220% more leads.
  • (Marketing Experiments) 50% of shoppers will abandon carts because of high extra costs like shipping, tax, and fees.
  • 42% for every extra second of page-load time (Portent, 2019) Companies spend just $1 on conversion rate optimization for every $92 spent on customer acquisition.
  • Relatable content will grow significantly in 2023 as 46% of social media marketers will leverage it for the first time.
  • (HubSpot Blog, 2023) 47% of social media marketers say their brand sells directly within social media apps.
  • (Statista) 81% of businesses prefer to use video marketing on Facebook.
  • (Buffer) 96% of B2B marketers use LinkedIn for organic content distribution and 83% for paid social ad campaigns (Sprout Social) Instagram has a higher order value than Facebook despite having fewer users.
  • (Shopify) 873% of Gen Z uses TikTok according to our consumer trends survey.
  • 85% of them use Instagram, but TikTok is the platform Gen Z spends the most time on.
  • (Hubspot, 2023) 88% of consumers are more likely to purchase from a company after reading reviews from other customers on social media.
  • (Sprout Social Index) Online 15% of marketers use social media data to measure ROI.
  • (GlobalWebIndex) In 2019, over 87% of video marketers on LinkedIn described the platform as an effective video marketing channel.
  • (HubSpot, 2020) When examining B2B advertising, social media advertising was used by 83% of marketers and ranked second in success (29%) behind search engine marketing (33%).
  • Not optimizing for the mobile user is akin to neglecting around 50% of your potential customer base.
  • (DataReportal) 63% of mobile traffic is reported to come from video content.
  • (Ericsson) Nearly 50% of buyers start product searches from their mobile devices.
  • (Statista) 64% of global marketers feel confident in their ability to measure and optimize platform-specific and channel-specific marketing ROI.
  • (Nielsen) Ericsson Mobility Report predicting a 25% increase in mobile traffic by 2025.
  • (Ericsson, 2020) Mobile devices are used for over 40% of online transactions.
  • More than 60% of B2B buyers report that mobile played a significant role in a recent purchase.
  • (JoshMDawson) 46% of people would not purchase from a brand again if they had an interruptive mobile experience.
  • (LinkedIn) 50% smartphone users are more likely to expect to purchase something immediately while using their smartphone.
  • (Statista, 2021) If the mobile page takes longer than 3 seconds to load, 53% of people will leave it.
  • 5% compound annual growth rate (CAGR) until 2024, and account for 44% of all eCommerce transactions.
  • 6% of consumers perform price comparison in-store on their mobile device.
  • (Statista, 2019) 28% won’t buy when they are required to create an account to checkout.
  • 52 billion (eMarketer, 2020) Amazon will account for 50% of all US eCommerce sales by 2021 (Statista, 2020) Search and navigation are the most important site elements for online shoppers (Statista, 2020) In 2019, e-retail sales accounted for 14.
  • (Marketing Charts) Over 70% of B2B decision makers prefer remote human interactions.
  • (McKinsey) Product specs (67%) and product comparisons (65%) were cited as the most useful types of content during the B2B decision-making process.
  • (Marketing Charts, 2020) 89% of B2B researchers gather information about potential purchases through the internet (Google) Of the average 13 pieces of content buyers reported consuming, an average of 8 came directly from the vendor, with the remaining 5 being from third-party sources.
  • (Marketing Charts, 2020) 60% of B2B marketers say they are facing reduced or stagnant budgets for 2023.
  • (LinkedIn) B2B marketers are expected to personalize their content to more than one decision-maker, with almost two-thirds (63%) of teams being composed of at least 3 decision-makers.
  • (Marketing Charts, 2020) Between February and March 2020, the number of B2B brands offering webinars grew by 36%, from 245 to 332.
  • (Statista, 2020) During a 2019 survey conducted among B2B marketing professionals in the United States, it was found that 50% of respondents believed e-mail to be the most effective channel in producing a high return on investment.
  • (Statista, 2020) 46% of marketers stated that they were planning to increase their B2B content marketing spending in the following 12 months, out of which 12% planned to increase it by more than 9%.
  • 10 Key Visual Content Marketing Statistics for 2023: Users are 30% more likely to send payment when visuals are involved with your marketing (Xerox)Visual content marketing describes the use of visual content, such as images, videos, infographics, and even memes, to inform, engage, and connect with your audience in service of growing your business.
  • In fact, users are 30% more likely to send payment when visuals are involved with your marketing.
  • 84% of consumers agree that watching promotional videos have convinced them to purchase a product or service.
  • On average, people retain 55% more information when it is paired with an image (bloggingwizard)6.
  • Personalized imagery has been shown to decrease cart abandonment rates by 17% and improve conversion rates by 200% (Hyperise)For those without the time and money for video marketing, images provide an easier avenue to engagement than their motion-based counterparts.
  • Personalized imagery has even been shown to decrease cart abandonment rates by 17% and improve conversion rates by 200% (Hyperise).
  • Almost 41% of survey respondents said infographics and illustrations are the most effective for achieving their marketing goals (Venngage) 9.
  • The click-through-rate of a meme campaign is 14% higher than email marketing (Forbes council)Memes often rely on humor and timely events, so they aren’t likely to be as effective or popular as videos, images, and infographics when it comes to your overall visual content marketing strategy.
  • Access seodashboard.hibu.com. Hibu Performance Dashboard | Hibu digital marketing results, stats and tools: We found that 89% of them (8 requests) were addressed to the original Seodashboard.
  • Social media advertising and marketing in the United States – statistics & facts | Statista: 53% Detailed statistics Revenue growth of social media advertising in the U.
  • 2022, by generation Share of consumers who think Photoshop and generative AI are acceptable for use in social media marketing 25% Detailed statistics Attitudes towards the usage of generative AI for social media ads in the U.
  • Digital Marketing Industry Statistics [Fresh Research] • Gitnux: 82% of marketers are actively investing in content marketing, with 40% of B2B marketers having a documented content marketing strategy and 69% actively investing time in SEO.
  • By 2026, the Digital Marketing industry is predicted to reach $807 billion, with desktop taking 31% of the ad spending share and mobile phones taking 69% The global digital advertising and marketing market is estimated to grow from $350 billion in 2020 to $786.
  • 96% of global traffic comes from Google Search, Google Images, and Google Maps, with SEO driving 1,000%+ more traffic than organic social media.
  • 82% of marketers are actively investing in content marketing, with 40% of B2B marketers having a documented content marketing strategy and 69% actively investing time in SEO.
  • Content marketing revenue is set to double by 2026, with 37% of industry professionals spending $10K or less, 42% of marketers planning to increase their budgets, and 61% of companies measuring ROI.
  • 9% of survey respondents have made a purchase after seeing a social media advertisement.
  • Facebook is the most popular platform for digital marketers, with 93% of them using it, and it is responsible for 25% of all digital ad spending.
  • There are 10 million active advertisers on Facebook, and 44% of users shop for products on Instagram weekly.
  • Digital Marketing Industry:The Most Important Statistics By 2026, the Digital Marketing industry is predicted to reach $807 billion, with desktop taking 31% of the ad spending share and mobile phones taking 69%.
  • 82% of marketers are actively investing in content marketing, with 40% of B2B marketers having a documented content marketing strategy and 69% actively investing time in SEO.
  • Digital Marketing Industry:Statistics Overview By 2026, the Digital Marketing industry is predicted to reach $807 billion, with desktop taking 31% of the ad spending share and mobile phones taking 69%.
  • 96% of global traffic comes from Google Search, Google Images, and Google Maps, with SEO driving 1,000%+ more traffic than organic social media.
  • 82% of marketers are actively investing in content marketing, with 40% of B2B marketers having a documented content marketing strategy and 69% actively investing time in SEO.
  • Content marketing revenue is set to double by 2026, with 37% of industry professionals spending $10K or less, 42% of marketers planning to increase their budgets, and 61% of companies measuring ROI.
  • Email campaigns offering coupons have a five times higher purchase rate than regular emails, and 64% of small businesses leverage email marketing to build awareness and connect with their audience.
  • 92% of marketers in companies with more than 100 employees in the US are expected to use social media for marketing, 67% of consumers expect brands to have a social media presence, and 37.
  • 9% of survey respondents have made a purchase after seeing a social media advertisement.
  • Facebook is the most popular platform for digital marketers, with 93% of them using it, and it is responsible for 25% of all digital ad spending.
  • There are 10 million active advertisers on Facebook, and 44% of users shop for products on Instagram weekly.
  • Key B2B Content Marketing Statistics You Need to Know in 2023 – SEOmator: 73% of B2B marketers use content marketing while 70% of B2C do it as their overall strategy.
  • In 2023, 91% of B2B marketers use content marketing, up from 82% in 2022.
  • 63% of B2B marketers say content marketing is effective in driving sales.
  • 58% of B2B marketers say content marketing is effective in improving brand awareness.
  • 55% of B2B marketers say content marketing is effective in building relationships with customers.
  • 86% of effective content marketers have someone overseeing their content marketing strategy.
  • On average, businesses allocate 30% of their marketing budget to content marketing.
  • 74% of B2B firms utilize content marketing for lead generation, while the primary goal is to enhance brand awareness (82%).
  • me)59% of B2B marketers say content marketing has helped them increase their website traffic.
  • (Source:Content Marketing Institute)57% of B2B marketers say content marketing has helped them improve their brand awareness.
  • (Source:Content Marketing Institute)Here are some additional statistics from 2023 on the effectiveness of B2B content marketing:69% of businesses plan to increase their content marketing budgets in 2023.
  • (Source:Content Marketing Institute)71% of B2B marketers say content marketing has become more important to their organization in the last year.
  • 82% of B2B marketers say content marketing is an effective way to build relationships with customers.
  • (Source:Content Marketing Institute)72% of B2B buyers say they are more likely to do business with a company that provides them with valuable content.
  • (Source:DemandGen Report)60% of B2B buyers say they have purchased from a company after reading their blog.
  • (Source:HubSpot) -58% of B2B buyers say they have shared content from a company with their colleagues.
  • (Source:DemandGen Report)54% of B2B buyers say they have contacted a company after reading their content.
  • Blog posts:61% of B2B marketers say blog posts are their most effective content format.
  • Infographics:55% of B2B marketers use infographics in their content marketing efforts.
  • eBooks:48% of B2B marketers use eBooks in their content marketing efforts.
  • White papers:46% of B2B marketers use white papers in their content marketing efforts.
  • Videos:44% of B2B marketers use videos in their content marketing efforts.
  • Podcasts:39% of B2B marketers use podcasts in their content marketing efforts.
  • Social media:92% of B2B marketers use social media to distribute their content.
  • Email:Email content is widely loved by B2B businesses, with 93% of B2B marketers using it.
  • Webinars:55% of B2B marketers use webinars in their content marketing efforts.
  • Events:56% of B2B marketers use events in their content marketing efforts.
  • (Source:Harvard Business Review)Only 14% of large B2B companies have a customer-centric culture.
  • 83% of B2B marketers believe that content quality is the most important factor in differentiating themselves from the competition.
  • 72% of B2B marketers believe that covering untapped topics/stories is a great way to differentiate themselves from the competition.
  • The majority of SaaS businesses (99%) believe that a 14-day free trial is the best length of time to allow potential customers to try their product or service.
  • 57% of B2B marketers plan to increase their content marketing budget in 2023.
  • 3%By 2023, video production costs are expected to account for 62% of the total marketing budget, making video one of the most popular content formats.
  • Video Marketing Statistics:Websites with Video Do Better in SEO: ROI of Video Marketing In their 2020 report, Wyzowl found:89% of video marketers say video gives them a good ROI.
  • Animoto‘s Social Video Forecast also suggests that 91% of marketers are satisfied with the ROI of video on social media.
  • Both its B2B and B2C research for 2020 showed that:71% of B2B marketers use marketing videos.
  • And videos on average get 135% more interaction than posts with just images.
  • Also keep in mind that on Facebook, square videos get about 30% more views than videos in landscape.
  • 13 Striking Social Media Marketing Statistics for 2021: 73% of marketers evaluate their social media marketing campaign as “somewhat effective” or “very effective.
  • ” 37% of consumers find inspiration to buy a product on social media platforms.
  • 48% of social media users claim responsiveness increases their willingness to purchase from a brand or company.
  • In 2021, social media gained 400 million new users, marking a 10% growth in just one year.
  • Social networks stats show that 54% of social media users research products online.
  • In addition, 37% have visited a brand’s social media page, and 36% have liked or followed the account.
  • According to social media statistics, 36% of millennials are online almost constantly.
  • As of January 2021, over 40% of internet users are on social media for work-related purposes.
  • 50% of people who have visited a company’s website buy their product or service.
  • 73% of marketers consider their social media marketing campaign somewhat or very effective.
  • Well, data shows that YouTube channels earning over $10,000 per year have increased by 50% year over year.
  • Data suggests that 70% of viewers purchased a product after seeing the brand on YouTube.
  • Social media data also shows that creating ads that target users by intent instead of demographics result in a 100% higher purchase intent.
  • Social media research shows that the majority of users (70%) don’t search for specific brands on the platform.
  • 74% of people who follow small or medium businesses on social media expect updates on future products.
  • For example, 74% of people who follow small and medium businesses on Twitter expect updates on future products.
  • 49% of consumers depend on influencers’ recommendations on social media platforms.
  • 39 Content Marketing ROI Statistics You’ll Want to Share: Content Marketing and Digital Marketing Statistics 2022 Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing but drives 3 times as many leads.
  • Content marketing has made 70% of consumers feel closer to companies The top three ways marketers measure the success of content marketing strategy are social media analytics (67%), website traffic (63%), and website engagement (49%).
  • The primary goals for running marketing campaigns are brand awareness (88%) and building loyalty among existing customers (50%).
  • Companies with blogs create 67% more leads per month than companies without.
  • Source Content Creation Statistics 2022 82% of marketers actively use content marketing in 2021, up from 70% in 2020.
  • The most popular technologies used in content strategy are analytics tools (83%), social media analytics (80%), and email marketing (75%).
  • Almost 40% of marketers say content creation is a very important part of their overall marketing strategy.
  • The top areas of content marketing investment in 2022 are video (69%) and events (61%).
  • B2B Marketing ROI Benchmarks B2B marketers with blogs gain 67% more leads B2B companies spend 26% of their total marketing budget on content marketing.
  • If the sales as a result of the campaign are $30,000, the formula would be ($30,000-$5,000) ÷ $5,000 = 500%, or 5:1.
  • However, 5:1 or 500% is considered a good general benchmark for a marketing ROI.
  • How to Set Up Content Marketing Attribution Only 52% of marketers currently use marketing attribution reporting, so there’s a lot of room for improvement in the industry.
  • HubSpot reported that 88% of those marketing said that videos gave them a positive ROI.
  • That’s because they noticed an 87% increase in website traffic and an 80% increase in sales due to video.
  • Pandemic Changes Are Here to Stay 70% of B2B marketers reported that the pandemic made a moderate to major impact on their content marketing strategy.
  • 85% expect that some of the changes will stay in effect for the foreseeable future.
  • While the use of in-person events decreased drastically (down to 42% in 2021 from 73% in 2020), they are back on the rise.
  • 52% of businesses are expected to increase in-person events, and 39% say they will do more hybrid events.
  • 25 Digital Marketing Stats You Need to Know In 2023 – SocialToaster: According to Smallbizgenius, 84% of consumers expect brands to create their own content.
  • Social Media has taken over the globe, and our free time, with 59% of the world population using social media.
  • It’s critical that you invest in ads that engage your users, “70%-80% of users ignore sponsored search results.
  • Through paid ads, 28% of internet users have found new products and services – making paid media a necessary component of any successful marketing effort.
  • “Email collection forms were the most successful at converting viewers, with a 15% conversion rate in 2020.
  • 44% of B2B website traffic is directed to the homepage, as opposed to the landing page.
  • “88% of online shoppers won’t return to a site after a bad user experience.
  • For instance, 70% of people look at a bulleted list and only 55% look at a list without bullets.
  • 70% of users abandon their cart before checkout because of poor or unoptimized UX.
  • 49% of businesses say that the best marketing ROI was through organic growth.
  • A recommendation from family and friends can make 83% of Americans more likely to complete a purchase.
  • Social Media Statistics in the UK – Red Rag Marketing: Currently, there are 53 million active users in the UK, which equates to 78% of the entire British population.
  • However, this figure rises slightly to 81% when you include those who do not actively use social media but still use it for passing information to friends, clients, or family members.
  • However, the number of social media users from that age group went up from 35% in 2015 to 59% in 2020.
  • Gender In the United Kingdom, female respondents who reported creating a profile on any social media site rose from 56% to 84% between 2010 and 2020.
  • Similarly, a survey conducted at the end of 2020 revealed that 80% of male respondents said they had a profile on social networking platforms.
  • Home Internet and Social Media Usage Internet access has become far more widespread in the UK, reaching 96% of British households from January to February 2020.
  • The percentage of households with internet connections remained low among those households in which an adult aged 65 years and over lived, accounting for only 8% on average.
  • Still, the proportion had increased steadily from 4% at the beginning of the century.
  • For example, the percentage of adults who shopped online in January and February of 2020 was 87%, more than double that of 2008.
  • 15 Key SEO Statistics to Know When Building Your Marketing Plans – Lumar: 17% CTR for paid) 3) Ranking matters:pages in position 1 on Google search receive 81.
  • 5% more clicks than pages in position 2 — and 10x the clicks of position 10 results.
  • In a Vodafone case study, they found a 31% improvement in LCP was tied to an 8% increase in sales.
  • 9) Case Study:A 300ms reduction in load time correlated to 12% more user engagement and 9% more pageviews per session.
  • 13) 53% of marketers who use SEO have a strategy for optimizing videos and images 14) 66% of enterprise website teams employ 6 or more in-house SEOs (for websites with 10k+ URLs) 15) The biggest SEO challenge for enterprise businesses?
  • Executing improvements and monitoring large sites at scale, according to 60% of executives surveyed.
  • ) [Source:Sistrix study] 89% of marketing leaders surveyed believe organic search will drive more revenue in the years to come.
  • [Source:Lumar & Econsultancy research] Organic search & the buyer’s journey:51% of shoppers surveyed use Google to research the purchases they plan to make online.
  • [Source:Google/Ipsos Global Retail Study] How your website’s technical health influences business goals:Even a one-second delay in mobile load times can reduce conversion rates by up to 20%.
  • (In a Vodafone case study, they found a 31% improvement in LCP correlated to an 8% increase sales.
  • dev] Case Study:A 300ms reduction in load time correlated to 12% more user engagement and 9% more pageviews per session.
  • [Source:Google Search Central] Case Study:Utilizing website intelligence tools contributed to a 17% YoY increase in organic traffic and a 50% increase in digital conversions for Lumar users.
  • [Source:Lumar case studies] Staying competitive with your brand’s website efforts in 2023:20% of marketers surveyed saw a significant increase in their budget for organic marketing last year.
  • [Source:Search Engine Journal] 88% of marketers who have an SEO strategy in place expect to maintain or increase their investment in 2023.
  • [Source:HubSpot] 53% of marketers who use SEO have a strategy for optimizing videos and images.
  • [Source:HubSpot] 66% of enterprise website teams employ 6 or more in-house SEOs (for websites with 10k+ URLs).
  • Executing improvements and monitoring large sites at scale, according to 60% of digital leaders surveyed.
  • 25 billion website visits, GrowthBadger found that more than 50% of this website traffic, for most industries, came from organic search.
  • 17% CTR for paid) The top result in Google’s organic search results has an average click-through rate (CTR) of 27.
  • 6% percent, according to Backlinko data — compare this to the average 3.
  • 17% CTR for paid search ads (across all industries studied) on Google, according to WordStream data.
  • 5% more clicks than pages in position 2 — and 10x the clicks of position 10 results.
  • 8% As we’ve noted above, research looking at 4 million Google search results conducted by Backlinko, found that pages in the number 1 spot in Google’s organic search results generally have a click-through rate of 27.
  • 9% – notably higher than ‘standard’ organic results) The CTR of organic search results can also be influenced by whether or not your content is displayed in the search engine results pages (SERPs) with or without certain ‘enhanced SERP features’.
  • ) 5) 89% of marketing leaders surveyed believe organic search will drive more revenue in the years to come 89% of marketing leaders surveyed in our report with Econsultancy felt that organic search would drive more revenue for their organizations in the years to come.
  • In the survey, nearly half (46%) of respondents estimated that organic search influenced more than a quarter of their organization’s revenue.
  • And more than a quarter (26%) felt it influenced 50% of their organization’s revenue.
  • Furthermore, of the top performers surveyed, 42% strongly agreed that performing well in organic search results is a key indicator of the overall health of a business.
  • 6) Organic search & the buyer’s journey:51% of shoppers surveyed use Google to research the purchases they plan to make online According to the Google/Ipsos Global Retail Study, more than half of consumers research their purchases using a search engine before hitting ‘buy’.
  • Take the ‘awareness’ stage of the customer’s journey — even before a potential customer reaches that ‘consideration’ stage mentioned above, 65% of consumers surveyed said they use search in “I Want to Buy” moments — and 39% said they were influenced to make a purchase by a relevant search.
  • How your website’s technical health influences business goals:7) Even a 1-second delay in mobile load times can reduce conversion rates by up to 20%.
  • Even a one-second delay in mobile load times can reduce conversion rates by up to 20%, according to Mary Ellen Coe, the president of Google Customer Solutions.
  • In a Vodafone case study, they found a 31% improvement in LCP was tied to an 8% increase in sales.
  • dev, they report that Vodafone, a major European telecom company, found that a 31% improvement in LCP was tied to an increase in sales by 8%.
  • 9) Case Study:A 300ms reduction in load time correlated to 12% more user engagement and 9% more pageviews per session.
  • A 300-millisecond reduction in Largest Contentful Paint (LCP) correlated to 12% more user engagement and a 9% increase in pageviews per session.
  • The Cox team achieved a 17% YoY increase in organic traffic after leveraging Lumar’s Analyze app.
  • For Arriva Bus in the UK, using the right website intelligence tools also contributed to a 50% increase in digital conversion alongside an increase in search engine visibility.
  • Staying competitive with your website efforts in 2023:11) 20% of marketers surveyed saw a significant increase in their budget for organic marketing last year Companies are investing more in organic marketing.
  • Last year, 20% of marketers surveyed saw a significant increase in their budget for organic marketing (including website and SEO efforts), according to Search Engine Journal.
  • (The number of marketers who saw a significant increase in paid channel budgets, meanwhile, was 13%.
  • ) 12) 88% of marketers who have an SEO strategy in place expect to maintain or increase their investment in 2023.
  • According to HubSpot data, a majority (88%) of marketers with SEO strategies in place expect to either increase or maintain their current level of investment in this key marketing tactic.
  • 13) 53% of marketers who use SEO have a strategy for optimizing videos and images SEO is not about only keywords and content in 2023.
  • According to HubSpot survey data, 53% of marketers who leverage SEO as part of their marketing strategy have processes in place specifically to optimize their videos and images.
  • For these very-large websites, 66% of respondents reported that they employed at least 6 in-house employees who worked on SEO.
  • 5% of respondents had no dedicated team member in-house who worked on SEO.
  • Executing improvements and monitoring large sites at scale, according to 60% of executives surveyed.
  • Best B2C Content Marketing Statistics: In fact, only 63% of B2C marketers are using paid media now, compared with 78% the previous year.
  • That may well be justified as just 9% of website visitors come from paid search compared with 17% of traffic coming from organic (unpaid) search.
  • But not only is it an easy marketing output, in some ways it has become necessary, as 43% of businesses said video was made essential by new challenges like the COVID-19 pandemic.
  • 55% of video marketers create their own videos in house, and 40% of businesses spend $0 to $450 on a typical video – with an in-house team of video content producers and a low average spend, you should be able to embed quick and cheap video into your marketing game plan and work at scale.
  • 117 Content Marketing Statistics, Trends, and Data Every Marketer Should Know
  • Source Here are more stats on content marketing teams:Only 5% of marketing pros said their content team was structured for future success — the majority (50%) said their team “needs work.
  • ” (Knotch) 30% of companies outsource content creation, but 70% keep it in-house.
  • (Semrush) Among B2B brands, 44% of top performers have a centralized content team that works on brands and initiatives across the organization.
  • (Content Marketing Institute) Nearly all marketing pros say their content teams will either grow (48%) or stay the same (49%) — just 2% say they plan to downsize.
  • (Semrush) Content marketers love their jobs — 85% say it offers them a meaningful career path.
  • More than 80% of people are online at least once a day, while more than 30% say they spend most of their time online.
  • (Pew Research) 91% of B2B marketers are using content marketing to achieve their goals.
  • (CMI) Fewer B2C brands (86%) say they’re using content marketing as a top strategy.
  • (CMI) A large percentage (40%) of marketing pros said they do not have a content marketing strategy.
  • Here’s what we can learn about content marketing success:A majority (55%) of marketers who reported their content marketing strategy was a success focused primarily on improving content quality.
  • (Semrush) Among tech marketers, 32% said their content marketing efforts in 2022 were “extremely” or “very” successful, while a majority (53%) said they were “moderately” successful.
  • (CMI) B2B marketers are slightly less likely to say their content marketing efforts were extremely or very successful (29%) but more likely to say they were moderately successful (56%).
  • (CMI) 65% of marketers do not regularly evaluate the success of their content strategy.
  • (CSR) Over 60% of marketers measure content marketing success through sales.
  • Source Other goals and challenges of content marketing include the following:Using content to attract leads is the biggest challenge (41%) for marketers.
  • (Semrush) Among B2C marketers, creating engaging content is the biggest challenge for 56%.
  • (CMI) The biggest challenge to creating effective content articles is budget, according to 47% of marketers.
  • (Marketing Charts) 58% of marketers say the biggest barrier to strategic content management is communication across teams.
  • (Marketing Charts) Among marketers, 70% say their top goal for social media content is to increase brand awareness.
  • (CMI) The top three content assets used by B2B brands in the last 12 months include short articles (89%), videos (75%), and case studies (67%).
  • (CMI) In-person events are back, with 48% of B2B marketers saying they were the most effective content asset in the last 12 months.
  • (CMI) Among B2B buyers, 95% said they view content as a marker of trust when entering the decision stage.
  • (Ziflow) 84% of B2B marketers say content creation is what they’re most likely to outsource.
  • Here’s the data:65% of B2C marketers say they prioritize the audience’s needs over their sales goals.
  • (CMI) The top three types of content assets created by B2C marketers in the last year include short articles (83%), videos (61%), and infographics (51%).
  • (CMI) Of video content, the most successful types were how-tos (38%) and expert interviews (37%).
  • (CMI) Facebook was the top social media platform for B2B brands, at 88% usage.
  • (CMI) 62% of B2C marketers plan to use influencer marketing in their content strategy in the coming year.
  • (HubSpot) Over 80% of B2C marketers are investing more of their budget into inbound content marketing this year.
  • Source Here’s more of what you should know about user-generated content:79% of consumers say UGC impacts their purchasing decisions.
  • (Oberlo) 62% of consumers say they’re more likely to click on content that’s been created by a customer.
  • (Tint) 60% of consumers say they wish brands would tell them what kind of content they should create.
  • (Tint) When it comes to authenticity, 60% of consumers believe UGC is more genuine than content created by brands.
  • (Taggbox) Brands that include UGC on their website notice a 90% increase in the time spent on the site.
  • Just 4% of marketers actually measure ROI over a period greater than six months.
  • (HubSpot) 72% of marketers say they see content marketing ROI in increased customer engagement and increased number of leads.
  • (CMI) Marketers struggle to prove the ROI of content marketing, with only 35% saying they can do so quantitatively — 44% only have qualitative or anecdotal evidence, and 21% can’t show the impact at all.
  • Here are some of the details on content audits:Among successful content marketing brands, 65% conduct a content audit more than twice a year.
  • (Semrush) Of unsuccessful brands, 46% never ran a content audit in the previous year.
  • (Semrush) Most brands who conduct a content audit combine it with SEO, with around 70% looking at on-page, off-page, and technical SEO.
  • 70% of marketers are actively investing in their content marketing strategy.
  • (HubSpot) Most brands are allocating around 26% of their marketing budget to content.
  • (BloggingWizard) A majority of brands expect to increase their content budget in the next 12 months, with 32% projecting a medium increase, 25% planning a small increase, and 15% gearing up for a large increase.
  • (Semrush) Marketers are investing more in the following content assets:social media content (41%), high-quality written content (40%), and content promotion and distribution (40%).
  • Here’s some of the hottest data on SEO and content:72% of marketers report that content creation is their best-performing SEO tactic.
  • (OptinMonster) Conversely, 75% of marketers also said that SEO is their best-performing content tactic.
  • (Semrush) Over 90% of web pages get zero organic search traffic on Google.
  • (Ahrefs) Over half (53%) of online shoppers search for content on a brand/product before they buy.
  • (Google) SEO was cited as the #2 most effective tactic (46% of respondents) for improving content marketing in the last year.
  • In fact, among SaaS brands, it’s a key indicator of success:To break it down:That’s 98% of top-performing SaaS brands that have a blog.
  • (WordPress) 55% of B2B marketers say blogging works the best for moving prospects through the sales funnel.
  • (Orbit Media) The most effective content formats within a blog are gated content (35%) and downloadable guides.
  • (35%) (Orbit Media) 73% of marketers say updating old blogs is part of their content marketing strategy.
  • 82% of marketers are increasing their podcasting budget or keeping it at the same level in the next year.
  • (Statista) Over half (54%) of podcast listeners say they’re more likely to purchase from brands they’ve heard advertise on a podcast.
  • (Edison) 38% of B2C marketers claim that the highest content marketing ROI comes from podcasting.
  • (HubSpot) Branded content in podcasts grew by 82% between 2020 and 2021.
  • Here’s what you need to know about content images and infographics:45% of content marketers use infographics as part of their content marketing strategy.
  • (HubSpot) Marketers said that over half (51%) of their content in 2021 contained visual content.
  • (Venngage) Original graphics were the most widely used type of visual content (36%) in 2021.
  • (Venngage) When asked which type of visual content performed the worst, the biggest group of marketers (41%) said stock photos.
  • (Venngage) Only 10% of auditory information is retained, but when a visual is added, 65% is retained.
  • (HubSpot) Visual content, like infographics, can boost readership by up to 80%.
  • Here are the stats that matter:The main goal of video marketing, according to 36% of marketers, is to increase brand awareness.
  • (HubSpot) 37% of brands using video content produce it in-house, compared to just 14% that outsource to an agency.
  • (Statista) The largest group of marketers make videos a few times a week (36%), while 14% do so daily.
  • (Biteable) 32% of businesses are using video content to increase sales.
  • (Biteable) 74% of marketers believe that video content has a better ROI than standard visual imagery, while 68% say it has a better ROI than Google Ads.
  • (On24) Audience engagement is cited as the biggest challenge of virtual events, but it’s also the biggest predictor of success, according to 49% of marketers.
  • (Markletic) 84% of marketers say running virtual events costs them less than hosting an in-person event.
  • (Wild Apricot) Over half (52%) of those hosting virtual events saw the same attendance or even greater than they’d expect at an in-person event.
  • We’ve got you covered:88% of marketers say they have plans to make anywhere from 10%-30% of their content interactive in the next year.
  • (OptinMonster) When it comes to engagement, most marketers say that quizzes (69%) and contests/games (75%) are the most effective.
  • (CMI) 79% of marketers say that interactive content helps consumers retain brand messaging better than standard content.
  • You’ve got to be ready for what’s ahead, so here’s the data you need:More searches now happen on phones (59%) compared to computers (39%) and tablets (2%).
  • (Statcounter) 83% of the digital audience now accesses social media exclusively on their mobile device.
  • ” (Convince and Convert) 96% of smartphone users searching with Google.
  • (Oberlo) 90% of marketers rely on email marketing for organic content distribution.
  • (Oberlo) Using A/B marketing for marketing emails can ramp up conversion rates by 49%.
  • (Campaign Monitor) Adding a personalized subject line to your marketing emails can increase open rates by 50%.
  • (Oberlo) Including video content in your emails can increase click rates by 300%.
  • 35%, but the very top-performing websites usually see conversion rates around 11%.
  • (Statista) The highest converting industry in B2B is finance and professional services at around 10%.
  • (MarketingSherpa) 68% of businesses do not have a CRO strategy in place.
  • (Hotjar) Websites with over 40 landing pages convert more, but 62% of B2B brands only have fewer than six pages.
  • Here’s the list:Over half (54%) of social media users utilize their platforms to research products.
  • (GWI) 90% of online shoppers look up brand reviews before visiting that brand’s social media profile.
  • (Bright Local) Close to 60% of brands rely on social media Stories and say they have been effective in their content marketing efforts.
  • (Buffer) 88% of marketers say that social media is very important or somewhat important to their overall content marketing strategy.
  • (Buffer) 73% say that it’s not only important but it’s also an effective part of content marketing.
  • We’ve got you covered:Globally, 94% of marketers are now budgeting for content marketing.
  • (Visual Oak) 45% of B2B brands have upped their content marketing budget in the last 12 months, and that number will trend upward.
  • (StartupBonsai) 86% of marketers report that their website traffic grows when they share and prompt video content.
  • (StartupBonsai) 81% of marketers use email marketing software to share their content.
  • (Visme) Many marketers use paid promotion channels to share their content, including 72% on Facebook, 61% on paid search, 46% on banner/display ads, and 32% on email partnerships.
  • (Oberlo) Therefore, it’s not surprising that 63% of marketers list content creation as their biggest challenge.
  • (CMI) 69% of marketers describe trouble finding outside partners with the right expertise as their main concern with outsourcing.
  • Digital Marketing Statistics for 2022 – inSegment Digital Marketing Blog: (Statista) Relative to Q3 2021, Q3 2022 has a 12% increase in social spending.
  • (Hootsuite) Annual social media advertising spending will increase an estimated 17% from the previous year.
  • (Hootsuite) Shoppable images and videos push consumers towards completing a purchase the most, accounting for 24% of all respondents.
  • Here are some of the most important changes in social media trends we witnessed during the pandemic:43% of internet users aged 16-64 spent more time on social media.
  • (Smart Insights) 16% created and uploaded more videos (Smart Insights) The most popular social media sites each offer something unique to consumers.
  • (Hootsuite) Almost 60% of the world’s internet users log into Facebook each month.
  • (Hootsuite) The equivalent of 36% of the world’s population has a Facebook account.
  • (Hootsuite) Less than 1% of users use Facebook alone and no other social media platforms.
  • (Pew Research Center) 99% of the time, YouTube is being used in parallel to another, or multiple, social media platforms.
  • (Pew Research Center) The male/female split of YouTube viewers comes out at 54% men and 46% women.
  • (Statista) 70% of viewers bought from a brand after seeing it on YouTube.
  • (Hootsuite) Intent-driven targeted ads cause a 100% lift in purchase intent when compared to demographic targeting.
  • (Vox) The US population’s overall feeling towards TikTok online is positive, at about a 57% positive sentiment.
  • (Statista) Venezuela, Sri Lanka, Kenya, and Mexico also saw an increase of over 20% on iOS devices during the same period.
  • (Statista) Over 63% of all videos with the highest CTR highlight their key message or product within the first 3 seconds.
  • (9 Creative Tips | Auction Ads on TikTok) Shooting vertical TikTok videos give you a 25% higher watch-through rate.
  • (Statista) 50% of Instagram users admit to clicking on a brand’s website after viewing one of their stories.
  • (Hootsuite) Instagram Usage Over 90% of users watch videos on Instagram each week.
  • (Meta) 92% of users claim to have acted instantaneously after seeing a product advertised on Instagram.
  • (Meta) As well as this, 50% of respondents are most interested in a brand after seeing it on Instagram.
  • (Meta) Source:Statista SNAPCHAT Snapchat Users 23% of US adults use Snapchat.
  • (Statista) LinkedIn had a 26% year-over-year growth in revenue in Q4 of 2022.
  • Here are some of the latest account-based marketing statistics for 2022:67% of brands employ ACM strategies.
  • (Spice Works) ACM was up 15% to 70% in 2021 when compared to 2020 (50%).
  • (ITSMA) Companies implementing account-based marketing strategies have seen up to 208% growth in their market revenue.
  • (Terminus) 55% of ABM users tailor content to target accounts in specific roles.
  • (Spice Works) Advanced data management is key to successful ABM, according to 43% of marketers.
  • Here are the all-important audience marketing statistics for 2022:There’s been a 36% increase in the number of Americans doing the majority of their household and grocery shopping online.
  • (GWI Gen Z Report) A quarter of B2B organizations allocate only 5% of their total budget to marketing.
  • (Statista) 41% of B2B businesses conduct their marketing activities in-house (Statista) Spending on 3rd-party audience data has ground year-on-year in the US.
  • (Statista) 45% of Pinterest users have a household income of over $100,000.
  • (StatCounter) Organic searches from Google account for 43% of all eCommerce traffic.
  • (Statista) 62% of marketers worldwide consider SEO and search algorithms crucial in 2022.
  • (Statista) 70% of digital marketers consider SEO better than PPC for generating sales.
  • Here are some important PCC marketing stats for 2022:Between 2019 and 2024, US digital ad spending will grow from 132 to 279 billion dollars, representing 53% of global digital ad spending.
  • (Statista) 17% of global online buyers spend money in e-grocers and supermarkets.
  • (Statista) 54% of US shoppers bought an item online because it could be delivered straight to their homes.
  • (Statista) 70% of consumers in the US receive mistargeted ads at least once a month.
  • (Statista) 40% of global Instagram users engage with the mobile app daily.
  • (Statista) 72% of all internet users will exclusively use mobile devices by 2025.
  • (Bankmycell) 92% of worldwide users accessed the internet through a mobile device in 2022.
  • Check out our top content marketing statistics for 2022 right here:59% of digital marketers consider video as their preferred media format.
  • (Hubspot) 69% of B2B marketers worldwide would invest in video content marketing.
  • (Statista) 50% of marketers in the US hired content creators to produce educational content.
  • (Statista) 84% of consumers in the US stated that they were more likely to trust brands if they included user-generated content in their marketing initiatives.
  • (Statista) 69% of B2B marketers worldwide said they would invest in video marketing in 2022.
  • (Statista) 64% of marketers are interested in 2022 to invest more in interactive content (polls, augmented reality, etc.
  • (Hubspot) 80% of marketers consider funny content as being the most effective type of content used on social media.
  • Blogging Statistics for 2022 Blogs with a video can increase organic search results by 157%.
  • (Orbit Media) A company’s inbound link total can increase by up to 97% by simply having a blog.
  • (Hubspot) 35% of marketers plan to use video format for the first time in 2022.
  • (Hubspot) 53% of marketers optimize their video content for visual search engines.
  • (Hubspot) 65% of marketers worldwide use videos on Facebook for marketing purposes.
  • (Hubspot) 33% of video marketers worldwide consider revenue growth and sales as their primary marketing goal for 2022.
  • (Statista) 51% of marketers plan to invest more in short-form video content.
  • 4% of companies want to create new types of video content, including original branded series.
  • (Hubspot) 27% of consumers in the US stated that it was very likely that a brand’s newsletter would influence them to purchase products.
  • (Statista) In 2022, 52% of email opens worldwide went through Apple Mail Privacy Protection services.
  • (Statista) Email marketing continues to be the most effective online marketing tactic, with 45% of e-shoppers being influenced by it.
  • (Statista) Over 68% of US consumers prefer to be contacted by brands via email.
  • (Hubspot) 79% of marketers ranked email in their top three channels for effectiveness.
  • (Hubspot) 40% of US millennials stated that a brand’s regular email newsletter would influence them to buy a product.
  • 21 Digital Marketing Statistics for Small Businesses in 2024: Websites that invest in SEO get 86% of all online clicks If you’ve ever wondered why SEO is such a pillar in digital marketing, it’s because so much of the online population only interacts with the front page of the internet—i.
  • A study by Backlinko found that the first 10 websites on Google’s search engine results get 86% of all organic clicks on average, while a paltry 14% goes to all the websites on the second page and beyond.
  • 43% of users use the internet mainly for brand & product research When potential customers are in the stage of deciding whether or not to purchase from your business, a good number of them will use the internet to find out more about your brand.
  • For over 43% of internet users, researching brands and products is the main reason they use the internet at all.
  • 45% of audiences will visit a local business with a strong online presence Your online presence can directly influence your physical store’s foot traffic too.
  • Studies found that out of all consumers who research brands online, 45% will proceed to visit a store’s physical location if it has a strong online presence.
  • The digital marketing industry is set to grow by 13% in 2028 Digital marketing plays such a substantial role in businesses’ growth, so it’s no surprise that its industry is also set to grow in the next few years.
  • Experts say that the digital marketing industry is projected to grow by 13% in 2028, and it’s currently worth $320 million in 2023.
  • 43% of business owners say digital marketing is most effective for brand awareness While different digital marketing strategies work better for some businesses than others, most agree on one thing:digital marketing is best for building brand awareness.
  • A recent study by Mailjet found that nearly 43% of business owners and marketers set brand awareness as their biggest area of opportunity in digital marketing, closely followed by improving customer relationships (41%).
  • Only 23% of websites rank in the top three Google search results SEO can often be a fierce competition.
  • According to HubSpot, only 23% of websites rank in the top three search results.
  • This means over 75% of all websites still struggle to gain traffic—a substantial number, given that there are about 1.
  • Digital ads have an average ROI of 200% According to digital marketing stats from Google, every dollar advertisers spend on digital advertising earns them $2 back, which equates to a 200% average return on investment (ROI).
  • Online advertising revenue has grown by 50% since 2020 If there’s ever been a time to try online advertising, it’s right now.
  • jumped from $139 billion in 2020 to over $209 billion in 2022—a 50% growth in just two years.
  • 33% of small businesses use social media as their main digital marketing strategy post-pandemic The COVID-19 pandemic undoubtedly increased social media activity for businesses and consumers alike.
  • A recent study by UpCity found that 33% of businesses focus most of their digital marketing efforts on social media—an increase of 6% from before the pandemic.
  • 39% of consumers are likely to purchase directly from social media When it comes to marketing your small business digitally, social media is one of the key players, and with good reason.
  • A study found that over 39% of consumers said they were likely to purchase directly from brands on social media, a 3% increase from just last year.
  • Over 90% of consumers research on social media when making purchase decisions While not all customers purchase directly on social media, you can bet a good majority of them will use it to research your brand.
  • A survey found that over 90% of customers regularly used social media to research a brand when deciding whether or not to continue with a purchase.
  • Of the number above, nearly 25% said they always turned to social media when making purchase decisions.
  • In contrast, only 8% of customers rarely or never use social media at all.
  • 50% of B2B marketers find social media the most effective digital marketing strategy Here’s probably one of the more surprising digital marketing stats from this year—for 50% of B2B marketers, social media marketing was the most effective digital marketing strategy for driving revenue.
  • It was even ahead of content marketing and email marketing, which garnered 47% and 41% of votes, respectively.
  • The average email open rate in 2022 was 18% Email marketing is a staple in small business digital marketing—it’s not as cluttered as social media, and it’s more personal than digital ads.
  • In 2022, the average open rate for marketing emails across all industries was just under 18%, with nonprofit email organizations on the upper end of the statistic (31%) and the health and fitness industry on the lower (10%).
  • Over 47% of small businesses found success with email campaigns Email marketing offers many benefits for small businesses.
  • In a 2022 survey, around 47% of small business owners said they found success with their email marketing campaigns.
  • And, on average, 60% of businesses of all sizes found some success with email.
  • 42% of small businesses say email marketing will have the highest ROI in a recession Email marketing has proven its effectiveness in returning revenue, and not just for large enterprises.
  • A survey found that nearly 42% of small business owners chose email marketing as the best digital marketing strategy for ROI during a recession.
  • The influencer marketing industry is set to grow by 28% in 2025 If there’s one major emerging player in the digital marketing field, it’s influencer marketing.
  • According to digital marketing statistics from Statista, the influencer marketing industry is set to grow by nearly 28% in 2025.
  • Around 32% of businesses find influencer marketing most effective for generating online engagement.
  • 26% of small businesses have a monthly digital marketing budget of less than $500 Digital marketing can be one of the most cost-effective strategies for growing small businesses.
  • In fact, a survey found that 26% of small businesses had a monthly digital marketing budget of less than $500 in 2022.
  • Small businesses spend an average of $534 a month on digital ads On average, most small businesses spend around 8% of their budget on marketing.
  • However, that figure is likely to increase:the study also found that 93% were planning to spend more on digital advertising in the following years.
  • Only 19% of small businesses work with a digital marketing agency Digital marketing encompasses many tasks, which can often be overwhelming for any small business owner—especially when you have a dozen other responsibilities to juggle.
  • Despite this, only 19% of small business owners work with a full-time digital marketing agency, according to digital marketing agency statistics from UpCity.
  • Over 80% of marketers use AI in digital marketing It’s no exaggeration that artificial intelligence (AI) has exploded in this year alone, and you may have even tried using it for simple tasks like research or task organization.
  • And if you have, you’re definitely not alone:Over 80% of marketers have integrated AI into their digital marketing strategies, according to research by Statista.
  • Consider these digital marketing stats:over 30% of customers1 discover brands via top-ranking websites on search engines.
  • Meanwhile, digital ads can generate up to 200% ROI2, and search-optimized websites get over 80% of all online clicks3.
  • 47 PPC Stats to Empower Your Marketing Strategy in 2024: Editor’s Choice As of 2021, Google owns 92% of the global search market share.
  • Customers are up to 70% more likely to buy your product when you use retargeting.
  • (Web FX) Over 40% of online transactions now happen on mobile, so more businesses must pay more attention to mobile optimization and PPC strategies as they go hand in hand.
  • Combining audience with remarketing campaigns boosts conversion rates by 40%.
  • Lunio reported that 40% of brands don’t allocate much money for pay-per-click ads—which may keep you from generating the desired results.
  • It’s also worth noting that Google owns 92% of the search engine market, including paid and organic search.
  • Display campaigns alone reach over 90% of all internet users worldwide.
  • When exposed to display ads, customers are 155% more likely to search for brand-specific terms.
  • (SERP Watch) About 40% of all clicks on the first page of a search engine are for the top 3 ads at the top, according to recent PPC statistics in 2022.
  • 21% of Facebook ads convert, making it the highest converting platform available.
  • (One PPC, Outreach Monks) Outreach Monks reported that 70% of marketers find SEO better than PPC, while the remaining 30% disagree.
  • (BetterSEO, Search Engine Journal) When the pandemic hit, the world consumed 207% more content due to time spent indoors—boosting online marketing.
  • About 94% of users head straight to the organic results and skip search ads.
  • (Search Engine Land, Start-up Bonsai)Start-up Bonsai reports that 79% of brands rely on PPC to drive their businesses forward.
  • (Search Engine Land) The 2022 Google data states that the company released its earnings report from the previous year, revealing that Google Ads contributed 82% of its Q4 2021 revenue.
  • With about 89% of marketers saying that remarketing is the best option to reach customers, PPC is something to look into.
  • Digital ad spending will account for over 60% of the global ad revenue in 2022.
  • (Valve+Meter) About 89% of marketers confirmed building a brand helps attract customers.
  • Incorporating PPC ads into your campaign can increase brand awareness by 80%.
  • (WordLead) According to PPC stats, paid advertisements redirect 65% of the traffic, while organic search results only get 35% of the clicks.
  • It wouldn’t be a surprise also to report that 54% of people search the internet for local listings every month, while 12% use it daily.
  • It also helps that Google Chrome is the most popular browser in the world, with a 76% market share.
  • (PPC Resellers, Word Stream) According to Word Stream, consumers are 155% likelier to look up brand names and items once they see displayed ads like search results or social media posts.
  • PPC traffic has a 50% greater conversion rate than visitors from organic links.
  • 92% of Instagram users followed a brand, clicked on their website, or purchased on the platform.
  • 84% of users are open to discovering local and small businesses or new products.
  • With its size, the Silicon Valley giant will continue to get the lion’s share of the profits from social media ads, with 80%.
  • At least 40% of internet shoppers use social networking platforms to get information about products and services.
  • For example, Facebook businesses report an ROI of 152% from social media marketing.
  • (Search Marketing) Although most companies agree that PPC helps them a lot, 49% only see the need to spend less than $50 thousand per month for PPC traffic.
  • Brands and agencies make up 40% of those who believe that their PPC expenditure should be more significant than it is.
  • (Search Engine Land) The number was up 22% from the previous quarter’s still impressive $44.
  • (LyfeMarketing, Word Stream) Word Stream reports that 96% of Google’s revenue comes from Google Ads—simple proof that advertising on the platform leads to gains for both Google and business owners.
  • The Mobile PPC Stats With 47% of smartphone users unable to live without their phones, the mobile space has become a field of interest for marketing, SEO, and gaming executives.
  • (Power Traffick, Luisa Zhou)With 51% of worldwide ad spending directed to mobile devices, marketing methods must also adapt for such devices.
  • Almost two-thirds of users click on an ad, and 20% make at least one purchase per week.
  • Recent statistics on mobile marketing show that 70% of mobile clients who discover your company online will take action within an hour.
  • Also, 69% of mobile users call the business directly from Google search.
  • (The Guardian) Google boasted a 35% income increase from 2020 to 2021—$61.
  • Experts predict that by the end of 2022, the tech giant will grab 29% of the entire $602 billion global digital ad market.
  • Ads statistics reveal that 81% of people use ad-blockers to filter out the most irritating of them.
  • However, results displayed at the top of the page can be as high as 8%.
  • However, results displayed at the top of the page can be as high as 8%.
  • Digital Marketing Statistics in Canada for 2024 | Made in CA: 1%Audio, including podcasts and streaming, grew its revenue the most by 59%.
  • Google is the dominating search engine, with almost 92% of Canadians reporting they use it as their main search engine.
  • 94% of small businesses in Canada use social media for marketing at least once a month and 52% do so daily.
  • 3% of the revenue came from consumer products and goods while wellness services represented only 1.
  • 2% of the revenue, the biggest increase was in audio, where the revenue was up 59% from the previous year.
  • With a 50% share, Google is the dominating force in the digital advertising market, followed by Facebook with 33%.
  • Search engine market share in CanadaAccording to Statista, in September 2021, Google was by far the leader of the search engines with a nearly 92% share of the market.
  • 94% of small businesses in Canada post on social media monthly and 79% weekly.
  • Only just over half of the small business post daily and 6% does it less often than once per month.
  • Companies are most likely to use Instagram and Facebook with both platforms used by around 80% of businesses.
  • Many Canadian companies are planning to increase their spending on social media advertising with 84% saying they will spend more on Facebook adverts, nearly 60% investing more on YouTube, and 48% on LinkedIn.
  • All genders are active on Facebook, with a small majority being women (53%).
  • Stories on Facebook get around 500 million viewers and 74% of Facebook users log in every day.
  • 2% more interactions than pictures on Instagram and engagement with brands is 10 times higher than on Facebook.
  • 85 billion active monthly users by the end of 2023 and 62% of those are men.
  • 83% of the users who sent a tweet to a company said they were more likely to do business with companies that replied to them.
  • 53% of Twitter users have made a purchase of products they first saw on Twitter.
  • It has more affluent users than the other platforms, with 44% of the users earning over 75,000 USD per year.
  • Since LinkedIn is a platform for professionals, it is a useful tool for business-to-business sales and is 277% more effective than Facebook.
  • 4% say they will check a new email as soon as they receive it and over half of the population checks their email over fifteen times per day.
  • People aged 35 or younger were the most likely to trust online advertising, with 40% perceiving them as trustworthy.
  • According to Statistics Canada, in 2020, 82% of Canadians shopped online compared to 77% in 2018.
  • The biggest age group for online shopping is the 25-44-year-olds where 95% said they shopped online in a Statistics Canada survey on online shopping.
  • People aged 15-25 group were the second biggest consumers, with 90% shopping online in 2020.
  • The group that was least engaged with online shopping was the over-65 group where only 55% said they had shopped online.
  • In 2020, 76% of the people who answered the survey said they had bought physical goods online and 68% had bought digital goods and services.
  • Only 9% had bought accommodation services, but that figure was likely impacted by the pandemic.
  • Out of the 18% who had not bought online, 73% said they had not shopped online because they had no need or interest to do so.
  • 23% said they had concerns over the security of online shopping and 18% said they wanted to see the product in person before parting with their money.
  • 5% of Canadians using the internet in some capacity and six daily hours spent on the Internet, companies cannot underestimate the power of digital marketing.
  • 94% of small businesses in Canada use social media for marketing at least once a month and 52% do so daily.
  • Audio, including podcasts and streaming, grew its revenue the most from 2020 to 2021 by 59%.
  • Essential Digital Marketing ROI Statistics in 2024 • ZipDo: This 122% average ROI serves as a beacon of promise, instilling confidence in businesses seeking to maximize their returns and make informed marketing decisions.
  • One statistic that holds paramount importance in this domain is the predominance of revenue per dollar spent, with a staggering 49% of professionals adopting this measurement to analyze their marketing ROI.
  • One intriguing insight garnering attention in the blogosphere is the finding that nearly half of all marketers (46%, to be precise) rely on a purchase funnel model to gauge the effectiveness of their digital marketing efforts.
  • 07% average ROI for Search Engine Optimization (SEO) illuminates the path towards potential success.
  • Soaring to an astounding 300%, this figure sheds light on the immense rewards that a well-executed content marketing strategy can unleash.
  • However, measuring the fruits of one’s labor is of utmost significance, as demonstrated by the fact that a whopping 74% of marketers grapple with gauging the return on investment (ROI) of their content marketing efforts.
  • Within this blog post, we unravel an eye-opening statistic that is sure to capture marketers’ attention:a staggering 63% of marketers are boosting their Google Ads budgets, resulting in a 20%-50% surge in ROI.
  • Amidst this vast ocean, LinkedIn emerges as a phenomenal treasure trove, boasting an astounding 171% average ROI on lead-generation campaigns.
  • 9% average ROI, a testament to the indomitable prowess of the digital marketing kingdom.
  • Plunge into the fascinating realm of ROI statistics, and watch as the compelling 16% average return on investment for display ads takes center stage.
  • This revelation of over 40% of marketers lacking web analytics tools in their arsenal serves as a stark reminder of the importance of staying informed on all aspects of campaign performance.
  • A compelling insight that commands attention is that a striking 98% of marketers witness a surge in digital marketing ROI when they strategically emphasize location-based marketing tactics.
  • This 122% average ROI serves as a beacon of promise, instilling confidence in businesses seeking to maximize their returns and make informed marketing decisions.
  • One statistic that holds paramount importance in this domain is the predominance of revenue per dollar spent, with a staggering 49% of professionals adopting this measurement to analyze their marketing ROI.
  • One intriguing insight garnering attention in the blogosphere is the finding that nearly half of all marketers (46%, to be precise) rely on a purchase funnel model to gauge the effectiveness of their digital marketing efforts.
  • 07% average ROI for Search Engine Optimization (SEO) illuminates the path towards potential success.
  • Soaring to an astounding 300%, this figure sheds light on the immense rewards that a well-executed content marketing strategy can unleash.
  • However, measuring the fruits of one’s labor is of utmost significance, as demonstrated by the fact that a whopping 74% of marketers grapple with gauging the return on investment (ROI) of their content marketing efforts.
  • Within this blog post, we unravel an eye-opening statistic that is sure to capture marketers’ attention:a staggering 63% of marketers are boosting their Google Ads budgets, resulting in a 20%-50% surge in ROI.
  • Amidst this vast ocean, LinkedIn emerges as a phenomenal treasure trove, boasting an astounding 171% average ROI on lead-generation campaigns.
  • 9% average ROI, a testament to the indomitable prowess of the digital marketing kingdom.
  • Plunge into the fascinating realm of ROI statistics, and watch as the compelling 16% average return on investment for display ads takes center stage.
  • This revelation of over 40% of marketers lacking web analytics tools in their arsenal serves as a stark reminder of the importance of staying informed on all aspects of campaign performance.
  • A compelling insight that commands attention is that a striking 98% of marketers witness a surge in digital marketing ROI when they strategically emphasize location-based marketing tactics.
  • 20+ Latest Content Marketing Statistics To Improve Your Strategy: (Content Marketing Institute) 79% of companies use content marketing to generate quality leads.
  • Surprisingly, only 35% of organizations have a dedicated person or team that works on content marketing full time.
  • For large organizations (1,000+ employees), 40% of them would have two to five people working on their content.
  • Source:Content Marketing Institute 84% of organizations have a content marketing strategy.
  • However, only 11% said that they consider their strategy to be an excellent one.
  • For instance, 49% of those surveyed reported social media as the hardest skill to master.
  • Breaking down the numbers, 5% said that their organizations were extremely successful.
  • 24% believed they were very successful while 46% reported being moderately successful.
  • Source:2020 B2C Content Marketing Benchmarks, Budgets & Trends 79% of companies use content marketing to generate quality leads.
  • It doesn’t appear to be a changing goal either as this is also the goal that topped in 2019 at 75%.
  • Other goals for 2020 included improving brand reputation (57%), improving customer engagement and loyalty (47%), promoting the positioning of new products (26%), increasing the number of payments (17%), and others (2%).
  • 73% in 2021 and is expected to grow further in the next couple of years.
  • During the 2021 Content Marketing World conference, Sitecore Product Marketing Director (Experience Platform) Jill Grozalksy Roberson stated that 59% of consumers feel like companies have lost touch with the human element of customer experience.
  • She then went on to say that 47% of people are seeking downtime from the internet due to digital fatigue.
  • 50% of marketers said that a desire for perfection is one of the biggest hurdles to their content production.
  • However, less than 40% of those marketers document their marketing strategy.
  • In a survey, 79% of B2B marketers stated that their organizations have a content marketing strategy.
  • And of those organizations, 70% reported making moderate to major changes in their strategy due to the pandemic.
  • Interestingly, a significant part of these organizations—about 36%—do not document their content marketing efforts.
  • Only 43% said that they do keep track of their content marketing strategy.
  • Source:Content Marketing Institute 78% of B2B consumers prioritize the content source’s trustworthiness.
  • On the other hand, 65% prefer that their content come from industry influencers.
  • 51% of respondents said that they find themselves overwhelmed by the amount of content available online.
  • For 50% of users, they prefer their content to be mobile-optimized so that they can access information through a smartphone or a tablet.
  • According to the 2018 Content Preferences Survey Report, 71% of survey respondents said that they check a blog as they went through their buying journey.
  • People also listened to podcasts (64%), looked at infographics (76%), read case studies (79%), attended webinars (66%), and watched videos (49%).
  • 5% of respondents even said that they started blogging more during this time while only 27.
  • In a survey of 1,024 people in the United States, 75% of respondents said that they prefer blog posts or articles to come in under 1,000 words.
  • In a survey of bloggers, marketers, and business owners, 30% said that having quality content is the most important factor if you want to be viewed with credibility.
  • These include designing a good blog site (17%), posting consistently (15%), being active on social media (13%), having great authors (12%), and getting positive testimonials or comments (5%).
  • 96% of respondents said that having multiple authors on a site also generates credibility.
  • 66% of buyers said that blog posts were instrumental in their buying process.
  • 93% of marketers who use videos said they’re very important to their marketing strategy in 2021.
  • This is also up from the previous year wherein 85% said they use video.
  • The most common type of video they have are explainer videos (73%), social media videos (67%), presentation videos (51%), sales videos (41%), and video ads (41%).
  • Source:Wyzowl 86% of marketers said video content drives traffic to their sites.
  • 86% of marketers said that thanks to video content, traffic to their sites have increased.
  • Not only that, 83% added that videos helped increase the average time that users spend on their landing pages.
  • What’s even better is that 94% of marketers claimed that their videos helped customers and potential buyers understand what their product or service is all about.
  • 84% went on to say that videos helped them generate new leads for their business.
  • And thanks to videos, 43% of video marketers experienced a reduction of calls for customer support.
  • According to a Renderforest survey, 78% of site owners experienced increased traffic to their website after adding videos.
  • 71% also said that the average time that people spent on their pages increased after offering video content.
  • Furthermore, 69% of users generated more leads after the changes were made.
  • The most common video assets used were explainer videos (62%), logo animations (46%), presentations (43%), advertisements (38%), demos (33%), slideshows (30%), and others (17%).
  • The survey also points out that user-generated content makes up 60% of all videos created and posted online.
  • TikTok Statistics In Malaysia That You Need To Know – Resolute – Digital Marketing Agency Malaysia: •Females account for 54% of TikTok Malaysia users, while males account for 45.
  • Essential Content Marketing ROI Statistics in 2024 • ZipDo: The Latest Content Marketing ROI Statistics Unveiled 89% of marketers claim that content marketing provides a better ROI than traditional marketing methods.
  • Enter content marketing, taking center stage like a maestro, as it commands the attention of an astonishing 89% of marketers who vouch for its superior ROI compared to traditional marketing methods.
  • 92% of marketers consider content to be a valuable business asset for driving long-term ROI.
  • Diving into the world of content marketing ROI statistics, one cannot ignore the striking revelation that a whopping 92% of marketers view content as a valuable business asset for driving long-term ROI.
  • Small businesses that use content marketing experience a 126% increase in lead generation compared to businesses that don’t.
  • Imagine raising your leads by an astonishing 126%, merely by implementing content marketing strategies.
  • 52% of marketers believe content marketing had a positive impact on their search rankings on the SERPs.
  • As we dive into the sea of Content Marketing ROI Statistics, we stumble upon a striking revelation:a remarkable 52% of marketers have experienced the perks of content marketing, as it bolstered their search rankings on the SERPs.
  • Diving into the realm of Content Marketing ROI statistics, one cannot help but marvel at the astonishing revelation that content marketing incurs 62% fewer expenses compared to its traditional counterparts.
  • In the realm of content marketing ROI, the revelation that a striking 70% of B2B marketers attribute an upsurge in leads to blogging paints a compelling picture.
  • 47% of buyers viewed 3-5 pieces of content before engaging with a sales rep.
  • 59% of B2C marketers say that creating high-quality content is their most effective SEO tactic.
  • In the realm of content marketing ROI statistics, the nugget of insight revealing 59% of B2C marketers identifying high-quality content creation as their most effective SEO tactic carries substantial weight.
  • Delving into the realm of Content Marketing ROI Statistics, one cannot overlook the significance of the compelling data point revealing that whitepapers sway the judgment for a striking 76% of B2B buyers.
  • 55% of B2B marketers say they are unclear on what content marketing effectiveness looks like.
  • Take, for instance, the intriguing revelation that organic search fuels 51% of content consumption.
  • 92% of marketers consider content to be a valuable business asset for driving long-term ROI.
  • Small businesses that use content marketing experience a 126% increase in lead generation compared to businesses that don’t.
  • 52% of marketers believe content marketing had a positive impact on their search rankings on the SERPs.
  • 47% of buyers viewed 3-5 pieces of content before engaging with a sales rep.
  • 59% of B2C marketers say that creating high-quality content is their most effective SEO tactic.
  • 55% of B2B marketers say they are unclear on what content marketing effectiveness looks like.
  • The Latest Content Marketing ROI Statistics Unveiled 89% of marketers claim that content marketing provides a better ROI than traditional marketing methods.
  • Enter content marketing, taking center stage like a maestro, as it commands the attention of an astonishing 89% of marketers who vouch for its superior ROI compared to traditional marketing methods.
  • 92% of marketers consider content to be a valuable business asset for driving long-term ROI.
  • Diving into the world of content marketing ROI statistics, one cannot ignore the striking revelation that a whopping 92% of marketers view content as a valuable business asset for driving long-term ROI.
  • Small businesses that use content marketing experience a 126% increase in lead generation compared to businesses that don’t.
  • Imagine raising your leads by an astonishing 126%, merely by implementing content marketing strategies.
  • 52% of marketers believe content marketing had a positive impact on their search rankings on the SERPs.
  • As we dive into the sea of Content Marketing ROI Statistics, we stumble upon a striking revelation:a remarkable 52% of marketers have experienced the perks of content marketing, as it bolstered their search rankings on the SERPs.
  • Diving into the realm of Content Marketing ROI statistics, one cannot help but marvel at the astonishing revelation that content marketing incurs 62% fewer expenses compared to its traditional counterparts.
  • In the realm of content marketing ROI, the revelation that a striking 70% of B2B marketers attribute an upsurge in leads to blogging paints a compelling picture.
  • 47% of buyers viewed 3-5 pieces of content before engaging with a sales rep.
  • The significance of the statistic – “47% of buyers viewed 3-5 pieces of content before engaging with a sales rep” – within the realm of a blog post about Content Marketing ROI Statistics lies in its astounding revelation about buyers’ behavior.
  • 59% of B2C marketers say that creating high-quality content is their most effective SEO tactic.
  • In the realm of content marketing ROI statistics, the nugget of insight revealing 59% of B2C marketers identifying high-quality content creation as their most effective SEO tactic carries substantial weight.
  • Delving into the realm of Content Marketing ROI Statistics, one cannot overlook the significance of the compelling data point revealing that whitepapers sway the judgment for a striking 76% of B2B buyers.
  • 55% of B2B marketers say they are unclear on what content marketing effectiveness looks like.
  • However, one statistic stands out like a beacon:“55% of B2B marketers say they are unclear on what content marketing effectiveness looks like.
  • Take, for instance, the intriguing revelation that organic search fuels 51% of content consumption.
  • Digital Marketing Statistics:How Is Digital Marketing Changing In 2024?: Mobile devices now account for 55% of the global market share of online access with desktops coming in second place at 43%.
  • 62% of marketers plan to increase content marketing budgets within the next fiscal year.
  • The top 3 results on Google get over 75% of all organic search traffic.
  • 84% of consumers purchased a product because they watched a marketing video.
  • 53% There is no doubt that Google is more popular than any other search engine.
  • 09% Over 75% of all searchers only click on the first 3 search results.
  • The bottom 7 results end up fighting out for less than 25% of organic traffic.
  • 63% of websites get no organic search traffic from Google within the first year.
  • This might seem like a lot of money but the average SEO campaign generates an ROI of 275%.
  • B2B blogs with educational content get 52% more organic traffic than B2B blogs with company-focused content.
  • Mobile devices now account for 55% of the global market share of online access with desktops coming in second place at 43%.
  • In fact, 25% of all internet users access the internet solely on a mobile device.
  • 59% of online shoppers say that being able to buy on a mobile device is very important when deciding where to buy.
  • About half (50%) of all website traffic globally is generated on mobile.
  • If you just optimise marketing for desktop devices, you are neglecting at least 50% of online traffic – possibly even more.
  • Mobile ecommerce (also called m-commerce) increased by more than 30% worldwide throughout 2020.
  • 77% of mobile internet users said that they found targeted mobile ads annoying rather than helpful.
  • 13% of business social media accounts are managed by the owners of the business.
  • 75% of marketers say that their social media marketing efforts lead to increased traffic.
  • 97% of people who buy products online have used social media at least once in the last month.
  • 7% of social media users spent an additional one to two hours per day on social media during 2020.
  • 7% of marketers increased their social media activity when the pandemic began.
  • The truth is it works… About 80% of online buyers have made a purchase from a social media ad.
  • 73% of social media marketers’ main goal is to acquire customers using social ads.
  • Facebook is the most popular social media platform used by 94% of B2B and B2C marketers.
  • LinkedIn is the top B2B social media marketing platform with 95% of B2B marketers using LinkedIn.
  • This is more than double Instagram where only 32% of US internet users have a profile.
  • Only 7% of businesses that use Twitter said that they saw an improvement in brand preference.
  • 91% of marketing executives list LinkedIn as the top place to find quality content.
  • 57% of traffic on LinkedIn is from mobile devices, which means there is a good chunk of LinkedIn users (43%) accessing LinkedIn from a desktop device.
  • 83% of online consumers said they preferred YouTube as their main video platform.
  • 62% of marketers plan to increase content marketing budgets within the next fiscal year.
  • An overwhelming 77% of online users said they regularly read blog posts.
  • 59% of B2C marketers increased their content marketing budgets in 2020 compared to 2019.
  • 83% of B2C content marketers use blog posts or short articles as an essential part of their content marketing strategy.
  • 88% of the most successful content marketers prioritise valuable information over sales messages.
  • This is in stark contrast to the 50% of least successful content marketers who are more sales-focused.
  • 96% of online consumers have watched a video about a product or service.
  • 84% of consumers purchased a product because they watched a marketing video.
  • 78% of online video marketers say video has directly increased their sales.
  • 74% of marketers said the pandemic made them more likely to use video for marketing.
  • 48% of marketing professionals said email marketing was highly effective to drive more conversions.
  • 74% of B2C marketers said that they regularly use their email newsletters for content marketing as well.
  • 85% of B2B use email marketing software to manage and distribute all of their content.
  • Mobile video ad spend made up about 72% of the digital ad spend in 2021.
  • Research shows that retargeting can lift ad engagement rates by over 400%.
  • But 54% of customers said they get annoyed when targeted with an ad for something they’ve already bought.
  • The truth is that even a 1-second delay reduced customer satisfaction by 16%.
  • 70% of websites in Google’s search results now have mobile-first indexing.
  • Make sure that your site:Loads fast on both desktop & mobile Provides a good user experience Google has said that they remove ​​37% of URLs from their top 10 when the search query is made from a mobile device.
  • On top of that, mobile commerce (or m-commerce) grew by more than 30% worldwide during 2020.
  • 77% of mobile internet users said that targeted mobile ads are annoying rather than helpful.
  • 52% of European ecommerce retailers say influencer marketing offers the best ROI for their business at the moment.
  • ” This year, 75% of ecommerce stores say that they are actively working or plan to work with social media influencers.
  • 46 Content Marketing Statistics That Matter in 2024: Hopefully, by now, your company is one of the 91% of B2Bs and 86% of B2Cs that are currently using content marketing.
  • Content marketing is an important area of active investment for 97% of marketers.
  • 97% is a very large proportion of the marketing community, which means that a solid content marketing strategy is absolutely essential.
  • 46% of businesses plan to increase their content creation spend this year.
  • 62% of marketing agencies saw an increase in the number of clients seeking content marketing services Why?
  • Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional outbound methods, yet it generates three times the number of leads.
  • 90% of customers see a benefit from content marketing Of course, it would be interesting if we had a specific reason why this is the case.
  • Most of us view traditional advertisements as transactional:say, 30% off the whole site for Black Friday.
  • It is easy for a customer to ask why they should accept that 30% off from your company instead of another one.
  • Among buyers of B2B products and services, 95% consider content to be a worthwhile way to evaluate any business.
  • 82% of customers report a preference for brands with a content presence.
  • Using content marketing to build customer loyalty is the goal of 52% of content marketing clients Many industries are very competitive, and for most businesses, it is better to retain customers than to constantly be replacing the same ones.
  • 66% of marketers are increasing investment in branded content creation.
  • For 42% of companies, the content specialist team is between one and three people.
  • 55% of content marketing strategies focused on improving the quality of content To me this means that companies have already built out their content, measured the ROI, and now know that they need to up their game as competition increases and the industry matures.
  • 85% of American adults go online at least once a day Furthermore, when you break these statistics down into different age brackets, it shows that:16.
  • Young adults aged 18-29, the proportion who are ‘almost constantly’ online, is a staggering 48% What does this mean for marketers?
  • According to one survey, “72% of marketers say content marketing increases engagement.
  • Interestingly, 20% of survey respondents said that they are looking to add messaging apps as a distribution channel for their content.
  • 53% of website traffic originates from search engines, and blogs are one of the best tactical ways that marketers can improve their search engine optimization, including through organic search.
  • 75% of marketers said that SEO was their most efficient content marketing tactic.
  • For 71% of B2B industry professionals, purchasing decisions are influenced by reading a corporate blog at some point.
  • Demand for video content is increasing:54% of consumers want to see more original content in video format 37.
  • Video is a powerful marketing tool:86% of marketing professionals use video as a marketing tool 38.
  • The power of YouTube:As the second largest search engine, YouTube was estimated to be utilized by 89% of marketers.
  • 86% of businesses now use video as a marketing tool, a sharp rise from 63% and 81% in previous years.
  • 51% of companies have used Instagram in their video marketing efforts and this is up from 41% in the previous year.
  • Perhaps most importantly, the survey found that 68% plan to use it this year.
  • Of the people surveyed, 73% said that video would be their preference for learning about a new product.
  • 41% of Americans listen to podcasts at least monthly This is what makes them so attractive.
  • As the chart above shows, it is estimated that 32% of the US population listen to at least one podcast each month.
  • 93% of people will listen to most of a podcast episode, with 52% listening to an entire episode Of course, there are many more forms of content marketing than just blogging, video and podcasts.
  • 80 SEO Statistics That Prove the Power of Search [2022 Update] – SMA Marketing: 68% of all trackable website traffic is sourced from organic and paid search.
  • 67% of clicks go to the top five websites in search engine results and the results from 6 to 10 yield less than 4% of the clicks.
  • 50% of visitors are more likely to click a result if the brand appears multiple times in search engine results.
  • Inbound leads, such as SEO, cost 61% less than outbound leads, such as direct mail or cold calling.
  • Marketers using both organic SEO techniques and pay-per-click ads see an average of 25% more clicks and 27% more profits compared to using a single technique.
  • 57% of B2B marketers stated that SEO generates more leads than any other marketing initiative.
  • 88% of people perform some type of online research before making a purchase online or in-store.
  • 70-80% of people ignore paid search results, choosing to only click on organic listings.
  • 55% of searchers don’t know which links in the Search Engine Results pages are PPC ads.
  • And up to 50% of users shown a Search engine Results page screenshot could not identify paid ads.
  • 40% of people abandon a website that takes 3 seconds or longer to load.
  • A 1-second delay in page response can result in a 7% reduction in conversions.
  • Marketers see SEO as becoming more effective, with 82% reporting effectiveness is on the rise, and 42% of this group stating effectiveness is increasing significantly.
  • Approximately 55% of searches are done on mobile, 43% are done on desktop, and 3% are done on a tablet.
  • 93% of consumers use the internet to find a local business, with 34% searching every day.
  • 72% of consumers who perform a local search visit a store within 5 miles of their current location.
  • 61% of mobile searchers are more likely to contact a local business if they have a mobile-friendly site.
  • 88% of consumers trust online reviews as much as they trust personal recommendations.
  • Companies that blog have 434% more indexed pages than those that don’t.
  • Updating and republishing old blog posts can increase traffic by more than 100%.
  • 72% of marketers say the single most effective SEO tactic is relevant content creation.
  • 47% of consumers view 3-5 pieces of content created by a company before talking to a salesman from that company.
  • 62% of B2B marketers and 51% of B2C marketers have optimized their blogs for mobile in order to improve SEO.
  • A page that is ranking in the top 3 search results has a 75% chance of also ranking for the same query done via voice search.
  • Google has 78% of desktop/laptop search market share and 92% of total search engine market share for mobile devices.
  • 11% account for most of the remaining desktop/laptop search engine market share.
  • Google “near me” mobile searches that contain a variant of “can I buy” or “to buy” grew 500% between 2015 and 2017.
  • On Google, 18% of organic clicks go to the first search result, 10% go to the second, and 7% go to the third.
  • 49% of Google searches don’t result in a click, demonstrating the increasing emphasis on optimizing for SERPs.
  • Three-fourths of people (75%) say paid search ads make it easier to find the information they are searching for on a website or search engine.
  • More than one-quarter of people (26%) click on a paid search ad because it mentions a brand they are familiar with.
  • 5% of people couldn’t identify ads vs organic results if there were no ads in the right column.
  • 49% of businesses receive more than 1,000 average Search views of their Google My Business listing per month, and 33% receive 1,000+ views on Maps.
  • On average, the return on ad spend for Google Ads is 200% or $2 for every $1 spent.
  • 87% of people who own a smartphone use a search engine at least once a day.
  • 40% of mobile website visitors will leave the site if it takes more than 3 seconds to load.
  • 60% of smartphone users have contacted a business directly using the search results (e.
  • 4 Stats That Prove You Should Use Infographic For Marketing Right Now | Content Marketing Design Agency With Pro Infographic Designers: ) People remember 65% of information when presented in visual formTips:Conclusion We have entered a very competitive era in online marketing.
  • A professional designer, however, is recommended if you want a 100% unique and branded infographic.
  • ) Infographics can increase web traffic by 12% In an internet-driven economy, traffic is the lifeblood of any online business.
  • With infographics, you can boost traffic to your content by up to 12%, according to Demand Gen Report.
  • ) People remember 65% of information when presented in visual form A study by the European Journal of Cognitive Psychology revealed that people remember 65% of information if it’s presented in visual form.
  • In comparison, they’ll only remember 10% of that information if they received it through hearing or plain text.
  • Here’s Why Infographics are Surviving the Test of Time as a Great Marketing Tool Jan 9, 2024 | Infographic BlogsDid you know that infographics have the potential to increase website traffic by 12% and are 30 times more likely to be read fully than text?
  • An amazing product and a humorous take on office life, resulted in a stunning 89% completion rate on average.
  • 37 Must Know Digital Marketing Statistics for 2024 [Infographics] – RebelMouse: 58% of marketing professionals indicated they used social media posting tools to leverage their content marketing efforts in a 2022 poll.
  • According to a global survey conducted in 2022, 27% of marketers spent less than $1,000 per month on content marketing, while 10% paid $10,000 to $20,000 per month.
  • As of 2023, mobile accounted for over 50% of all web traffic globally in the first quarter of 2023.
  • The global marketing automation industry’s revenue increased by an expected 22% to $5.
  • Facebook was the most popular platform among international marketers in January 2023, with 89% of users, closely followed by Instagram with 80%.
  • In 2022, 23% of American B2B marketers aimed to incorporate AI and automation into their strategies to enhance customer data analysis.
  • An international survey conducted in 2022 revealed that, compared to 88% in 2021, 90% of marketing professionals in 35 countries employed AI solutions to automate client interactions.
  • Furthermore, the same proportion of marketers as last year, 88% — reported that AI continued to help with personalizing the consumer journey across several channels.
  • A global poll of marketing professionals conducted in 2022 revealed that 39% of respondents trusted AI to expedite email send times, and 42% trusted AI for real-time content and offers customization.
  • survey, 16% of respondents aged 35–44 found brand/advertiser-generated AI images highly appealing.
  • survey, 12% of respondents aged 18–34 found generative AI images in influencer-created social media advertising highly appealing.
  • In 2022, 32% of marketers employed AI and marketing automation for offers, email personalization, and paid advertising.
  • Furthermore, for product and content recommendations, content ideas, and email subject line personalization, 22% of respondents coupled AI with marketing automation.
  • survey conducted in October 2022, B2B marketers who used chatbots had notable increases in lead generation:26% saw increases of 10–20%, 25% saw increases of 5–10%, and 15% saw increases of more than 30%.
  • In a 2022 poll, 30% of marketers claimed they used a CMS over social media to leverage their content marketing activities.
  • Over 34 million (45%) of the 77 million websites in the world are powered by WordPress.
  • 36% of websites do not use popular CMS platforms like Squarespace, Wix, and WordPress.
  • Enterprise companies spend about 28% of their marketing budget on CMS platforms.
  • 64+ Social Media Marketing Statistics (2024 Research): 77% of marketers retarget Facebook/Instagram advertising as a marketing strategy.
  • 71% of businesses plan to create more videos for social media marketing in 2024.
  • Over 90% of users regularly engage with influencers on YouTube, Instagram, TikTok, and Snapchat.
  • 33% of marketers say Instagram offers all social media platforms the highest ROI.
  • The average annual growth rate from 2023 to 2027 is forecasted to be 5%.
  • 48%Facebook Messenger-24% In the United States, Social media users have an average of 7.
  • Around 84% of people aged 18-29 use at least one social media platform.
  • According to Forbes, social media usage has been more common among the younger generation, with 84% of those aged between 18 and 29 and 81% of people aged between 30 and 49 actively using at least one social media platform.
  • Age groupThe percentage of people who use at least one social media platform18 to 29 years old84%30 to 49 years old81%50 to 64 years old73%More than 65 years old45% 99% of users access social media through mobile or tablet.
  • However, you may find the statistics surprising:99% of users connect to social media through a tablet or smartphone, with 78% using their phones exclusively for this purpose.
  • 8 million 77% of marketers retarget Facebook/Instagram advertising as a marketing strategy.
  • Also, 69% of marketers retarget Google advertising, while 55% retarget email marketing.
  • Businesses often adopt new technology, so it is no surprise that in today’s digital business, 77% of small businesses use social media to connect with their audiences.
  • Additionally, 44% of companies use it to build brand awareness, and many small businesses (41%) rely on social media to generate revenue.
  • This is evidenced by 90% of social media users following at least one brand on it.
  • The purchase process can differ among customers who bought products they saw on social media, with 11% buying immediately, 44% postponing their online purchase later, and 21% buying in-store.
  • However, it is notable that 76% of users have purchased being influenced by a brand’s social media post, indicating the significant impact of social media on the retail industry.
  • 5% Facebook’s overall social commerce add-to-cart conversion rate is 34.
  • On social media, short-form videos, typically less than a minute in length, are gaining attention from 66% of consumers due to their brevity and authenticity.
  • Additionally, 34% of consumers appreciate the more genuine nature of the shorter form.
  • According to Wyzowl, video marketing was the most popular among businesses in 2023, with 91% of them using it–a 5% increase from the previous year.
  • In fact, since 2019, over 90% of marketers believe video marketing is a vital element of their overall marketing strategy.
  • However, one of the most popular categories is social media videos, with 71% of companies utilizing them.
  • Other popular types include explainer videos, presentation videos, testimonial videos, and video ads, with usage rates of 70%, 50%, 46%, and 46%, respectively.
  • Additionally, 91% of marketers report that video marketing can boost website traffic.
  • Here are some of the key statistics regarding influencer marketing:50% of millennials believe in influencers’ product recommendations.
  • A significant proportion of Millennials (50%) now trust product recommendations from social media influencers more than their favorite celebrities (38%).
  • The main reason behind this trust is authenticity:88% of millennials value authenticity in the influencer they follow.
  • 1 billion *Projected 28% of affiliate marketers use bloggers as influencers for marketing.
  • Based on a study by Influencer Marketing Hub, bloggers are the top choice for affiliate campaigns, with 28% of affiliate marketers utilizing them.
  • Review and coupon sites are preferred by 19% and 15% of affiliate marketers, respectively.
  • 62 billion Over 90% of users regularly engage with influencers on YouTube, Instagram, TikTok, and Snapchat.
  • However, most people (95%) primarily engage with influencers on YouTube and TikTok, while 94% of users engage with influencers on Instagram weekly.
  • Social Media PlatformThe percentage of users who engage with influencers weeklyYouTube95%TikTok95%Instagram94%Snapchat92%Pinterest87%Twitch83%Triller75% 79% of influencer marketers in the United States say measuring campaign performance is their biggest challenge.
  • The foremost obstacle is measuring campaign performance, followed by determining influencer ROI, which 76% of marketers reported as challenging.
  • In addition, 68% of marketers prefer Facebook, while 48% choose YouTube.
  • Facebook Statistics Around 90% of marketers use Facebook for their marketing campaigns.
  • Moreover, 25% of Facebook users in the United States fall within the age range of 25 to 34.
  • Instagram Statistics 33% of marketers say Instagram offers the highest ROI of all social media platforms.
  • According to HubSpot, the most popular selling feature is Instagram Shops, used by 22% of social media marketers, followed by Facebook Shops at 21% and Instagram Live Shopping at 19%.
  • Facebook came in second place, with 25% of marketers voting it as the highest generator of ROI.
  • Due to these factors, 29% of social media marketers plan to invest in Instagram over other social media platforms.
  • The countries with the highest LinkedIn ad reach rates are the United Arab Emirates at 88% and the Netherlands at 76.
  • 45% of Pinterest users have a household income of over $100K, while 21% earn $30K or less.
  • Sprout Social reports that 53% of Twitter users utilize the platform to stay up-to-date with the latest news.
  • Additionally, men account for 63% of Twitter users, while women account for 37%.
  • However, despite its wide use, 71% of marketers desire to decrease their time spent on Twitter by 2023.
  • Users spend an average of 19 minutes daily on the platform, with 90% of this time coming from mobile devices.
  • Ecommerce Marketing Statistics 2023 | Digital Third Coast: To get you started with your ecommerce marketing strategy, we’ve gathered together the latest statistics about the industry:Ecommerce Statistics US ecommerce statistics 80% of Internet users in the US have made at least one purchase online (99firms) Ecommerce sales were up 7.
  • 52 billion (eMarketer) 61% of online shoppers made an online purchase related to fashion, which is higher than any other product category (99firms) On average, only 2.
  • 8 trillion globally in 2023 (Statista) The US ranks second in ecommerce sales globally, with ecommerce being a 19% share of the total retail sales and $843 billion in annual sales.
  • 1% of global retail sales in 2019 (99firms) Ecommerce Marketing & Research How do ecommerce businesses earn loyal customers?
  • Research reveals 64% of US cardholders do it anyway (Let’s Talk About Money) Credit cards are the preferred method of ecommerce payment, globally.
  • After Covid-19 hit, forecasters estimated retail sales will decrease by 10%, which equates to a $190.
  • 89 billion spent in the first quarter of 2019 (Digital Commerce 360) In April 2020, US retailers’ online revenue growth was up 68%, year-over-year (Forbes) US and Canadian ecommerce orders increased 129% year-over-year in 2020 (Forbes) Online conversion rates increased 8.
  • 8% in February, reflecting a level of shopping urgency typically seen during Cyber Mondays (Forbes) The portion of people shopping for food online has increased 24.
  • 7% year-over-year (PYMNTS) The portion of consumers shopping online for retail purchases is up 34.
  • The State of Content Marketing in 2023 [Stats & Trends to Watch]: Instagram is used by 65% of social media marketers, just behind Facebook at 67%.
  • 22% of marketers say Instagram has the most growth potential in 2023 than any other platform.
  • 44% of marketers say the most significant benefit of working with small influencers is that it’s less expensive.
  • In fact, 90% of marketers using short-form videos will increase or maintain their investment in 2023, and 21% plan to leverage short-form videos for the first time in the same year.
  • This coincides with the videos consumers prefer to watch, as 73% of consumers prefer to watch short-form videos to learn about a service or product.
  • A recent study commissioned by Google Cloud found 82% of shoppers want a brand’s values to align with theirs.
  • Furthermore, the same study found 75% of consumers would part ways with a brand over conflicting values.
  • So, it’s no wonder 30% of marketers are creating content that reflects their brand’s values, making it one of the most popular trends in marketing.
  • According to Google Cloud’s study, sustainability is a value most consumers (52%) are interested in.
  • Influencer marketing is expected to see significant growth in 2023 with 17% of marketers planning to invest in it for the first time.
  • According to Nielsen Scarborough, 42% of Americans seek the advice of others for purchase decisions and they want advice from relatable sources.
  • Relatable content will grow significantly in 2023 as 46% of social media marketers will leverage it for the first time.
  • Among those using it, 49% plan to increase their investment, and 43% keep investing the same amount.
  • Additionally, funny content will see the 2nd most investment of any content type in 2023, and 33% of social media marketers plan to use it for the first time next year.
  • We found that 93% of Gen Z spend an average of four hours daily on social media, and 57% of Gen Z have discovered a new product on social media within the past three months.
  • Furthermore, 28% of Gen Z consumers bought a product through a social media app.
  • When surveying a mix of B2B and B2C marketers, SEO has the fourth largest ROI, and most marketers using it (88%) will increase or maintain their investment in 2023.
  • ) In a recent survey of 600+ bloggers and SEOs, 75% of respondents believe these changes will improve search experiences, leading to more use of search platforms.
  • Content Marketing Statistics For 2024 (Must Know Data): Content Marketing Statistics 2024:Top Picks 73% of B2B marketers and 70% of B2C marketers use content marketing.
  • 72% of marketers believe their content marketing strategy has increased engagement and traffic.
  • 83% of marketers say focusing on quality rather than quantity of content is better, even if it means posting less often.
  • 40% of marketers believe creating more visual and video content improves their content marketing.
  • 73% of B2B and 70% of B2C marketers use content marketing as part of their marketing strategy.
  • Meanwhile, 61% of content marketers have created or used videos in 2023.
  • The usage of long-form articles increased from 22% in 2022 to 42% in 2023.
  • Content Marketing Strategy 83% of marketers say it’s better to focus on quality rather than quantity of content, even if it means posting less often.
  • Over 41% of marketers measure the success of their content marketing strategy through sales.
  • 42% of the marketers use content automation, 82% use SEO tools, and 88% use web analytics tools.
  • Types Of Content 83% of the content marketers create articles and posts, while 61% create videos.
  • The usage of long-form articles, including videos, blogs, and infographics, increased to 42% from 22% recorded last year.
  • Short content of 300 to 900 words attracts 21% less traffic and 75% fewer backlinks than articles of average length (900–1200 words).
  • 87% of marketers say that video has increased traffic to their websites.
  • According to 67% of marketers, video content has gained the most importance in the last year.
  • 38% of the marketers say that the video content produces the best results.
  • Content Consumption 51% of the content consumption comes from organic searches.
  • 91% of the people wanted to see more video content from their favorite brands.
  • Benefits of Content Marketing Content marketing generates over three times as many leads as outbound marketing and costs 62% less.
  • Plus, 63% of marketers say that content marketing helps to nurture the leads, and 50% say that it helps build loyalty with existing clients.
  • Websites with blogs have 434% more indexed pages than those without a blog.
  • 81% of marketers reported that content marketing helped them create brand awareness.
  • Meanwhile, 63% of the respondents reported success in building a growing loyalty with existing clients and customers.
  • 70% of the people said that they would rather get to know a company through an article rather than an advertisement.
  • Challenges Of Content Marketing 57% of the content creators cited that creating the right content for the audience is one of the major challenges of content marketing.
  • Scaling content production is one of the most common challenges cited by 48% of content marketers.
  • 48% of content marketers think aligning content with the buyer’s journey is challenging.
  • Meanwhile, 45% of marketers think aligning content efforts across sales and marketing is a huge challenge.
  • Meanwhile, 53% and 48% of them say that changes to the social media algorithm and data management and analytics are one of their biggest concerns.
  • 69% of the marketers said that the time required to produce video content is a challenge.
  • 46% use it to research headlines and keywords, and over 36% use AI tools for writing.
  • 48% of content writers cited that working with new technology, such as AI, was the most popular skill of interest in 2023.
  • It was followed by interests like improving data analytics/data science skills (42%), and leadership skills (42%).
  • 58% of marketers using generative AI for content creation said increased performance is the top benefit.
  • 62% of content marketers are concerned that AI will result in less respect for skilled writers/editors.
  • Less respect for skilled writers and editors:62% Writing/editing is viewed as a commodity:55% Lower compensation for writers/editors:46% Fewer jobs for content marketers:45% Large workload for writers/ editors:17% Not concerned about AI-related impacts:17% 19.
  • 2% of marketers spend over 40% of their marketing budget on AI-driven campaigns.
  • 53 Social Media Marketing Statistics for 2024 | SMM Facts & Stats: 9% of the world’s population (The University of Maine) 6 billion people are projected to use social media in 2027 (Statista) Channel-Specific Social Media Statistics The follow statistics are broken down into the different social media marketing channels.
  • 562 billion adults each month (Data Reportal) 80% of people who are on TikTok are looking for funny or entertaining content (Data Reportal) YouTube Statistics YouTube’s user base is expected to hit 1.
  • 20+ Content Marketing Statistics that Show the Power of Content – Gist: For medium- and large-sized businesses, content marketing cost up to 41% less per lead than paid search.
  • According to Hubspot, companies that blog have 434% more indexed pages than businesses without blogs.
  • Since 77% of Internet users read blogs, these tidbits of information are a subtle way to gain your audience’s attention.
  • After all, 70% of people would prefer to learn about a company through an article than an ad — so just start writing!
  • 47% of buyers view at least 3–5 pieces of content before they contact a sales representative.
  • 96% of B2B buyers look for more information from industry thought leaders before buying.
  • Furthermore, 82% of customers have a more positive outlook on a company after reading custom content, and 70% of customers feel closer to a business after engaging with their content.
  • As a result, 74% of companies find that lead quality and quantity went up as they introduced a content marketing strategy.
  • In 2017, 53% of marketers claimed that content marketing was their top inbound strategy.
  • B2B marketers, in particular, allocate up to 28% of their budget to content creation.
  • However, 87% of content writers are still struggling to produce material that engages their buyers.
  • 49% of marketers are now focusing on using a buyer’s journey map to organize their content strategy.
  • Only 8% of marketers consider themselves effective or very effective at measuring content ROI.
  • However, 87% of brands use sales lead quality, 71% of companies use website traffic, and 67% use SEO ranking to measure the effectiveness of their content marketing.
  • 17+ Must Know Digital marketing facts and Stats – Blog: Searching Vs Buying Behaviour According to statistics, 80% of the people in United States are using internet regularly.
  • Out of these, 97% uses it to search for products that they eventually end up buying.
  • Email Optimization Importance It is estimated that over 55% of emails are now opened on a mobile device which means that email optimization for mobile devices is necessary.
  • Internet Users on Social Media It is reported that over 70% of internet users are present on at least one social media platform, which means that a majority of users can in fact be reached through social media.
  • Results revealed that about 90% of marketers said that social media is important for their businesses.
  • Social Media Marketer Social Media Usage 66% of online marketers are using social media for approx 7 hours or more and 39% for 10 or more hours in a week.
  • Mobile Users Stats According to the reports from Google’s ‘The Mobile Playbook’, 94% of users uses smartphone for local information online.
  • Based on the same report, 51% of those users visited the store they found online.
  • with around 80% of searches being conducted through this search engine alone.
  • Google handles 79% of Queries Data for the August 2016 shows that Google holds the highest market share of all the desktop searches, with over 79%, followed by Bing (9.
  • In a survey conducted with SEO industry leaders, 94% of the participants shared that the title tag was the best place to insert keywords in order to pursue higher rankings on search engines But The recent algorithm has changed everything.
  • That simply mean that even if you could somehow dominate the top 1000 keywords on search engines, you would be losing out on about 90% of the total search traffic in play.
  • Different Result for Mobile Mobile With about roughly 50% of the internet’s traffic originating from mobile devices, Google rewards websites, which are designed to respond to the user’s device and load themselves accordingly.
  • According to the comScore results for February 2016, approximately 64% of searches have been conducted through Google search engine.
  • Bing’s share in the total number of searches is approximately 21%, followed by Yahoo!
  • Search Query Statistics Google’s market share on mobile devices is over 90%, followed by Yahoo!
  • with approximately 5% and Bing with approximately 6% of the market share.
  • While Google takes up the largest part of search engine market share in the USA and India, Baidu takes up over 60% market share in China, where Google falls behind with less than 5%.
  • Most Popular Analytics Google Analytics is most popular analytics tool which is used by 87% of Analytic Agencies who provide professional web trafficking services to other businesses.
  • Using a good workstation improves your productivity Using double screen improves work productivity by 16% In Work from home environment, Having a good workstation encourages employees and end up performing 160% in productivity compare to the people who work on bed 19.
  • TOP DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS IN 2023 | Amra And Elma LLC: 1 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #1 – digital marketing generates 50% more interactions with customers than traditional marketing 2.
  • 55% in the next 12 months, while digital marketing spending is projected to increase by 13.
  • 4 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #4 – content marketing costs 62% less than traditional methods and it generates 3x more leads 2.
  • 5 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #5 – 70% of consumers want to learn about products through content, such as articles or blog posts, as opposed to traditional ad methods 2.
  • 6 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #6 – 44% of respondents could recall a brand immediately after seeing a digital ad and 75% of people who received direct mail were able to remember the brand 2.
  • 7 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #7 – 41% of marketers believe that events are more effective than digital advertising, email, and content marketing 2.
  • 8 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #8 – 64% of consumers say watching a marketing video on Facebook has influenced their purchase decision in the last month 2.
  • 9 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #9 – 79% of households say they read or scan direct mail ads 2.
  • 10 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #10 – 60% of marketers across various industries have already shifted their efforts toward digital marketing 2.
  • 11 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #11 – 56% of customers find print marketing to be the most trustworthy type of marketing 2.
  • 12 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #12 – 39% of customers say they try a business for the first time because of direct mail advertising 2.
  • 13 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #13 – 49% of all consumers aged between 18 and 29 have made a purchase after viewing a social media ad 2.
  • 15 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #15 – 81% of consumers go online to do research before heading out to the store and making a purchase 2.
  • 16 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #16 – Facebook is used by more than 60% of all Americans on a regular basis 2.
  • 17 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #17 – 90% of businesses said that social media was their primary or secondary channel for promoting content 2.
  • 18 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #18 – TV advertising is responsible for as much as 72% of all brand awareness 2.
  • 19 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #19 – print advertising is the most trusted format, with 82% of respondents saying that they trust it when making purchasing decisions 2.
  • On the other side, TV advertising is responsible for as much as 72% of all brand awareness.
  • In fact, 90% of businesses said that social media was their primary or secondary channel for promoting content.
  • According to a recent study, digital marketing generates 50% more interactions with customers than traditional marketing.
  • 55% in the next 12 months, while digital marketing spending is projected to increase by 13.
  • DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #4 – content marketing costs 62% less than traditional methods and it generates 3x more leads Traditional marketing methods can be quite costly, often eating up a large portion of the budget.
  • As per DemandMetric, content marketing costs 62% less than traditional methods and it generates 3x more leads.
  • According to Marketing Profs, only 44% of respondents could recall a brand immediately after seeing a digital ad.
  • In contrast, 75% of people who received direct mail were able to remember the brand.
  • DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #9 – 79% of households say they read or scan direct mail ads According to the US Postal Service’s (USPS) Certified Direct Mail Professional (CDMP) program, direct mail remains an effective way to reach potential customers.
  • In fact, survey found that 79% of households say they read or scan direct mail ads.
  • This means they’re not only likely to read direct mail, but nearly 80% of households actually do it.
  • DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #10 – 60% of marketers across various industries have already shifted their efforts toward digital marketing With the advent of digital media, businesses have been forced to adapt their marketing strategies to keep up with the times.
  • According to research, 60% of marketers across various industries have already shifted their efforts toward digital marketing.
  • DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #11 – 56% of customers find print marketing to be the most trustworthy type of marketing In a world full of different marketing messages, it can be hard to know who to trust.
  • The study found that 56% of customers find print marketing to be the most trustworthy type of marketing.
  • DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #12 – 39% of customers say they try a business for the first time because of direct mail advertising According to US Data Corporation, 39% of customers say they try a business for the first time because of direct mail advertising.
  • DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #13 – 49% of all consumers aged between 18 and 29 have made a purchase after viewing a social media ad According to Statista, nearly half (49%) of all consumers aged between 18 and 29 have made a purchase after viewing a social media ad.
  • DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #16 – Facebook is used by more than 60% of all Americans on a regular basis According to a research, Facebook is used by more than 60% of all Americans on a regular basis.
  • Seven in ten Facebook users say they use the site daily, and 49% who say they use the site several times a day.
  • 90% of businesses said that social media was their primary or secondary channel for promoting content, and nearly 80% said that it was their most effective channel.
  • DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #19 – print advertising is the most trusted format, with 82% of respondents saying that they trust it when making purchasing decisions A recent survey by MarketingSherpa found that the most trusted advertising formats are all traditional media.
  • Print advertising, such as newspaper and magazine ads, is the most trusted format, with 82% of respondents saying that they trust it when making purchasing decisions.
  • Television advertising is the second most trusted format, with 80% of respondents saying that they trust it.
  • Direct mail advertising, such as flyers and coupons, is the third most trusted format, with 76% of respondents saying that they trust it.
  • Radio advertising is the fourth most trusted format, with 71% of respondents saying that they trust it.
  • Finally, outdoor advertising, such as billboards and bus stop ads, is the fifth most trusted format, with 70% of respondents trusting it.
  • A recent study found that 49% of consumers aged 18-29 have made a purchase after viewing a social media ad.
  • However, the study also found that 39% of customers say they try a business for the first time because of direct mail advertising.
  • A recent study found that 78% of Americans now own a smartphone, making it the most common device for accessing the internet.
  • 1 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #1 – digital marketing generates 50% more interactions with customers than traditional marketing 2.
  • 55% in the next 12 months, while digital marketing spending is projected to increase by 13.
  • 4 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #4 – content marketing costs 62% less than traditional methods and it generates 3x more leads 2.
  • 5 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #5 – 70% of consumers want to learn about products through content, such as articles or blog posts, as opposed to traditional ad methods 2.
  • 6 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #6 – 44% of respondents could recall a brand immediately after seeing a digital ad and 75% of people who received direct mail were able to remember the brand 2.
  • 7 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #7 – 41% of marketers believe that events are more effective than digital advertising, email, and content marketing 2.
  • 8 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #8 – 64% of consumers say watching a marketing video on Facebook has influenced their purchase decision in the last month 2.
  • 9 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #9 – 79% of households say they read or scan direct mail ads 2.
  • 10 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #10 – 60% of marketers across various industries have already shifted their efforts toward digital marketing 2.
  • 11 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #11 – 56% of customers find print marketing to be the most trustworthy type of marketing 2.
  • 12 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #12 – 39% of customers say they try a business for the first time because of direct mail advertising 2.
  • 13 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #13 – 49% of all consumers aged between 18 and 29 have made a purchase after viewing a social media ad 2.
  • 15 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #15 – 81% of consumers go online to do research before heading out to the store and making a purchase 2.
  • 16 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #16 – Facebook is used by more than 60% of all Americans on a regular basis 2.
  • 17 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #17 – 90% of businesses said that social media was their primary or secondary channel for promoting content 2.
  • 18 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #18 – TV advertising is responsible for as much as 72% of all brand awareness 2.
  • 19 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #19 – print advertising is the most trusted format, with 82% of respondents saying that they trust it when making purchasing decisions 2.
  • 30 Digital Marketing Statistics for Marketers in 2022: Engaging email subscribers remains the most difficult challenge for 45% email marketers.
  • Recent statistics indicate that 75% of Gmail users access their emails via mobile devices.
  • Blog posts are the top B2C marketing content format, with 83% of companies using it within the last 12 months.
  • Quality content is the most important design element that contributes to creating an effective customer experience, say 58% of marketers.
  • The use of video for marketing needs has increased by 23% over the last three years.
  • 94% of video marketers claim video has helped to increase user awareness.
  • Video marketers say video has directly helped to boost their sales by 78%.
  • 83% of marketers reported feeling confident in their social media efforts.
  • 71 billion in revenues in 2021, accounting for 30% of all internet ad revenues.
  • 64% of people said they now prefer to message rather than call a business.
  • 59% of marketeers agree that customer service via social media channels has increased in value for their businesses.
  • Mobile share of organic Google visits to business websites increased to 61%.
  • Smartphones combined for 61% of organic Google visits in the first quarter of 2021, which represents a 2% increase from Q1 2021.
  • 73% of all e-commerce sales this year coming from mobile Shopping through smartphones and tablets will expand further.
  • Here’s why it matters:Pinners (85% of which use mobile devices to access the platform) are open to finding new products and ideas.
  • 82% of marketers reported major investments to improve their SEO strategy.
  • It was reported that 93% of online experiences begin with a search engine.
  • Next year, businesses should keep up with optimizing their website for local search results considering that 75% of consumers search for local stores and locations.
  • In 2021, 70% of businesses altered their SEO content strategy to generate better results.
  • SEO stats predict that altering strategy and content can be effective in increasing organic traffic by 111%.
  • Essential Visual Content Marketing Statistics in 2024 • ZipDo: Painting a vivid picture with the colors of data, the captivating statistic reveals that infographics have the prowess to amplify web traffic by an impressive 12%.
  • Having a featured image increases the odds of getting your content shared by 80%.
  • Visual Content Marketing Statistics reveal astounding insights such as an 80% increase in content sharing rates when featuring an image.
  • The potency of tweets embellished with images is undeniable, as they garner a staggering 150% more retweets compared to their unadorned counterparts.
  • Undoubtedly, the realm of visual content marketing is on an upward trajectory, and the staggering figure of 74% of marketers incorporating visuals into their social media articles stands as a testament to this phenomenon.
  • Illuminating the power of visual storytelling in the realm of content marketing, the captivating statistic, ‘Visual content is 43% more persuasive than text alone,’ weaves a tale of the undeniable impact that visuals play in engaging and influencing consumer behavior.
  • 60% of consumers are more likely to consider or contact a business when they see an image in search results.
  • Yet a gleaming treasure trove of data reveals that an astonishing 60% of consumers are more likely to pursue or interact with businesses that flaunt eye-catching images in search results.
  • Articles with relevant images receive 94% more views than those without images.
  • Painting a vivid picture with the power of numbers, the astounding revelation that articles adorned with relevant images captivate 94% more views than their imageless counterparts truly highlights the magnetic allure of visual content.
  • 91% of consumers aged 18-34 trust online reviews and visual content as much as personal recommendations.
  • Diving into the world of visual content marketing, one cannot ignore the profound impact of a captivating statistic:a staggering 91% of consumers aged 18-34 place their trust in online reviews and visual content at a level equal to personal recommendations.
  • Diving into the world of visual content marketing, one cannot ignore the jaw-dropping surge of visual content on Facebook, boasting an astronomical 130% yearly increase.
  • In the realm of visual content marketing, the fact that a mere 20% of a 600-word webpage captures the average reader’s attention serves as a testament to the sheer power of visuals.
  • In the dynamic realm of visual content marketing, the statistic revealing users spending 88% more time on web pages showcasing videos serves as a testament to the captivating power of this multimedia format.
  • Having a featured image increases the odds of getting your content shared by 80%.
  • 60% of consumers are more likely to consider or contact a business when they see an image in search results.
  • Articles with relevant images receive 94% more views than those without images.
  • 91% of consumers aged 18-34 trust online reviews and visual content as much as personal recommendations.
  • Painting a vivid picture with the colors of data, the captivating statistic reveals that infographics have the prowess to amplify web traffic by an impressive 12%.
  • Having a featured image increases the odds of getting your content shared by 80%.
  • Visual Content Marketing Statistics reveal astounding insights such as an 80% increase in content sharing rates when featuring an image.
  • The potency of tweets embellished with images is undeniable, as they garner a staggering 150% more retweets compared to their unadorned counterparts.
  • Undoubtedly, the realm of visual content marketing is on an upward trajectory, and the staggering figure of 74% of marketers incorporating visuals into their social media articles stands as a testament to this phenomenon.
  • Illuminating the power of visual storytelling in the realm of content marketing, the captivating statistic, ‘Visual content is 43% more persuasive than text alone,’ weaves a tale of the undeniable impact that visuals play in engaging and influencing consumer behavior.
  • 60% of consumers are more likely to consider or contact a business when they see an image in search results.
  • Yet a gleaming treasure trove of data reveals that an astonishing 60% of consumers are more likely to pursue or interact with businesses that flaunt eye-catching images in search results.
  • Articles with relevant images receive 94% more views than those without images.
  • Painting a vivid picture with the power of numbers, the astounding revelation that articles adorned with relevant images captivate 94% more views than their imageless counterparts truly highlights the magnetic allure of visual content.
  • 91% of consumers aged 18-34 trust online reviews and visual content as much as personal recommendations.
  • Diving into the world of visual content marketing, one cannot ignore the profound impact of a captivating statistic:a staggering 91% of consumers aged 18-34 place their trust in online reviews and visual content at a level equal to personal recommendations.
  • Diving into the world of visual content marketing, one cannot ignore the jaw-dropping surge of visual content on Facebook, boasting an astronomical 130% yearly increase.
  • In the realm of visual content marketing, the fact that a mere 20% of a 600-word webpage captures the average reader’s attention serves as a testament to the sheer power of visuals.
  • In the dynamic realm of visual content marketing, the statistic revealing users spending 88% more time on web pages showcasing videos serves as a testament to the captivating power of this multimedia format.
  • 24 Statistics That Should Influence Your Digital Marketing Strategy in PH: It’s such a strong force that’s driving massive changes with over 38% or $77 billion of the total ad spending expected to go to digital next year, whereas TV ad spending only stands at 35.
  • Demographics of Filipino Internet Users 65% of the Filipinos aged 15-19 years old use the Internet.
  • In the same age bracket, 75% of access the Internet through various devices (e.
  • Other age groups use the internet fairly lower at 48% (20-29 years old), 40% (30+ years old), 13% (40+ years old), and 4% (50+ years old).
  • Others access the Internet through mobile broadband subscription (55%) and broadband subscription (less than 10%).
  • In the Philippines, the internet is accessed through mobile at 38%.
  • Online shopping comes in at second place with 29% of the total Filipino Internet users.
  • Other online activities are watching videos (19%), playing online and mobile games (15%), d searching based on location (13%).
  • Filipinos pay their online purchases in different ways:cash (53%), credit cards (36%), and bank transfers (10%).
  • 64% of online Filipinos check information first online before making a purchase.
  • Also, they value other people’s brand review and opinion at 89%.
  • According to Nielsen, Filipinos are okay with getting targeted by online ads at 35%.
  • 83% of them appreciate online ads because they said it made their lives better.
  • Furthermore, 43% of them don’t bother that their online activity is being tracked as long as they see ads that are relevant.
  • Essential content marketing statistics for 2020 | Smart Insights: 69% of B2B marketers have a documented content strategy More B2B marketers than ever before are documenting their content strategies, with 41% saying this is the case this year.
  • This figure has been increasing slightly over the last couple of years, rising from 39% in 2019 and 37% in 2018.
  • When looking at B2B marketer with successful strategies, 69% document them compared to just 16% of the companies who are least successful with their marketing.
  • 76% of marketers use organic traffic as a measure of content success Organic traffic and the positive impact on SEO are the main measures of content marketing success for businesses.
  • Some 76% of marketers said that organic traffic is the key metric they use to measure the success of their content, showing that although other channels are driving traffic, organic is still very much king when it comes to content.
  • Instead, 62% said that the number of leads they get is a sign that their content is working.
  • This is compared to the 60% who look at sessions and pageviews – signs of good engagement – and the 47% who use conversion rate as a key content success metric.
  • Bounce rate is also low on the list, with just 31% naming it as a metric.
  • It takes 65% more time to write a blog than in 2014 It is now taking more time to create blogs, with the average writing time in 2019 hitting three hours and 57 minutes – a 65% increase from 2014’s two hours and 24 minutes.
  • Last year saw 19% of bloggers spending six hours or more writing blogs, whereas, in 2014, just 4.
  • 84% of B2B marketers are outsourcing content creation The fact that blogs now take so much time to create could be a factor in the decision for many organizations to outsource content creation.
  • In B2B companies, 84% of marketers outsource their content creation activities, suggesting that fewer businesses are opting to have any content capabilities managed in-house.
  • 26% of blogs include videos but 41% of bloggers report strong results from videos Content is no longer about written content.
  • For example, although 93% of blogs contain images, only 30% of bloggers say they get “strong results” from this content format.
  • In comparison, 26% of blogs contain videos, which 41% say deliver strong results.
  • On top of this, just 7% of blogs contain some form of audio content – such as podcasts – however, a third (33%) of bloggers say this is effective, showing that alternative forms of content need to be included in your content marketing strategy.
  • 67% of marketers say SEO is the most effective marketing tactic Despite alternative content delivering strong results, the most efficient content marketing tactic continues to be search engine optimization.
  • Around 67% of marketers say that SEO was the most efficient tactic that was implemented last year, and it is likely that this will continue into 2020.
  • Other tactics that proved to be particularly successful last year that marketers should bear in mind for 2020 included updating and repurposing existing content (51%), creating more video/visual content (37%) and optimizing the customer journey (35%).
  • 45 Statistics That Prove the Long-Term ROI of Content Marketing: 71% of B2B buyers said that they consume blog content during a purchase.
  • 64% of respondents stated that they consider podcasts a valuable type of content in the early stage of their buyer’s journey.
  • 47% of respondents stated that they value webinars in the mid-stage of their buyer’s journey.
  • 40% of respondents stated that they consume 3–5 pieces of content before reaching out to a salesperson.
  • 65% of content consumers stated that they prefer content from prominent industry influencers.
  • Case studies (79%), webinars (66%), video (49%), and interactive content (36%) are the most preferred types of content for B2B buyers.
  • Nearly 50% of buyers watch product videos before making a purchasing decision.
  • 67% of respondents reported that the quality of a product image influences their purchasing decision.
  • The stats below prove that B2B marketers are becoming more confident with their content strategy, with 95% of them stating that their organization represents a valuable and trusted content resource to their audience.
  • What’s more, the Content Marketing Institute’s report for 2018 showed that 89% of the most successful B2B marketers have a content marketing strategy.
  • 91% of interviewed B2B marketers said that their organization uses content marketing.
  • 35% of interviewed B2B marketers stated that they measure content marketing ROI.
  • 47% of B2B marketers stated that they don’t measure content marketing ROI.
  • 70% of interviewed marketers said that they can demonstrate how content marketing has grown their number of leads and increased customer engagement.
  • Social media posts (95%), blog posts (89%), and email newsletters (81%) are the top three types of content B2B marketers have used in the past 12 months.
  • 34% of interviewed marketers expect their content marketing budget to increase in 2020.
  • 43% of respondents stated that their company is in the mature state of content marketing maturity.
  • Cultivating relationships with customers is another great concern, with 82% of marketers stating that their organization is interested in creating content that builds loyalty with customers.
  • In 2018, 57% of the interviewed B2C marketers stated that they expected to boost their content marketing budget in 2019.
  • Content creation (56%) and paid content distribution (37%) are the two areas in which B2C marketers increased their budget in 2018.
  • 68% of interviewed marketers stated that they use paid methods to distribute content.
  • 64% of B2C content marketers stated that their company is extremely committed to content marketing.
  • 40% of B2C marketers think that their company’s ability to make use of content marketing technologies is intermediate.
  • Social media analytics (85%), email marketing software (77%), and analytics tools (71%) are the top three technologies that B2C marketers are using to manage their content marketing efforts.
  • 68% of B2C marketers that use content marketing technologies stated that they help them gain a better insight into how content is performing.
  • And 58% of the interviewed marketers stated that they expected that their ROI would continue to increase.
  • The DMA Marketer Email Tracker for 2019 showed that 62% of interviewed marketers were measuring the ROI of their email marketing campaigns.
  • 71% of B2B marketers were satisfied with their ability to calculate ROI, whereas B2B organizations (48%) needed a longer time to measure their performance.
  • 76% of marketers reported an increase in open rates and 75% said click-throughs have been higher over the last 12 months.
  • 67% of marketers stated that 20% of their marketing budget was spent on email marketing in 2018.
  • Email marketing campaigns that contain video content generate 96% higher click-through rates than campaigns that don’t use video content.
  • 75% of content marketers stated that they drive better ROI when they add visuals in their content.
  • Animoto’s Social Media Report for 2020 showed that 91% of marketers are satisfied with the ROI of video marketing on social media.
  • 93% of brands landed a new customer by posting a video on social media.
  • Adding video content on your website can drive an 80% increase in conversion rates.
  • 83% of interviewed marketers were satisfied with the ROI of video marketing.
  • 82% of them stated that video marketing is their key marketing strategy.
  • – 71% of B2B buyers said that they consume blog content during a purchase.
  • 64% of respondents stated that they consider podcasts a valuable type of content in the early stage of their buyer’s journey.
  • 47% of respondents stated that they value webinars in the mid-stage of their buyer’s journey.
  • 65% of content consumers stated that they prefer content from prominent industry influencers.
  • Case studies (79%), webinars (66%), video (49%), and interactive content (36%) are the most preferred types of content for B2B buyers.
  • Nearly 50% of buyers watch product videos before making a purchasing decision.
  • pdf) showed that 89% of the most successful B2B marketers have a content marketing strategy.
  • 91% of interviewed B2B marketers said that their organization uses content marketing.
  • 35% of interviewed B2B marketers stated that they measure content marketing ROI.
  • 47% of B2B marketers stated that they don’t measure content marketing ROI.
  • 70% of interviewed marketers said that they can demonstrate how content marketing has grown their number of leads and increased customer engagement.
  • Social media posts (95%), blog posts (89%), and email newsletters (81%) are the top three types of content B2B marketers have used in the past 12 months.
  • 34% of interviewed marketers expect their content marketing budget to increase in 2020.
  • Cultivating relationships with customers is another great concern, with 82% of marketers stating that their organization is interested in creating content that builds loyalty with customers.
  • – In 2018, 57% of the interviewed B2C marketers stated that they expected to boost their content marketing budget in 2019.
  • Content creation (56%) and paid content distribution (37%) are the two areas in which B2C marketers increased their budget in 2018.
  • 68% of interviewed marketers stated that they use paid methods to distribute content.
  • 64% of B2C content marketers stated that their company is extremely committed to content marketing.
  • 40% of B2C marketers think that their company’s ability to make use of content marketing technologies is intermediate.
  • Social media analytics (85%), email marketing software (77%), and analytics tools (71%) are the top three technologies that B2C marketers are using to manage their content marketing efforts.
  • 68% of B2C marketers that use content marketing technologies stated that they help them gain a better insight into how content is performing.
  • And 58% of the interviewed marketers stated that they expected that their ROI would continue to increase.
  • – The DMA Marketer Email Tracker for 2019 showed that 62% of interviewed marketers were measuring the ROI of their email marketing campaigns.
  • 71% of B2B marketers were satisfied with their ability to calculate ROI, whereas B2B organizations (48%) needed a longer time to measure their performance.
  • 76% of marketers reported an increase in open rates and 75% said click-throughs have been higher over the last 12 months.
  • 67% of marketers stated that 20% of their marketing budget was spent on email marketing in 2018.
  • – 75% of content marketers stated that they drive better ROI when they add visuals in their content.
  • 82% of them stated that video marketing is their key marketing strategy.
  • Top 28 Digital Marketing Stats to Blow Your Mind: The average open rate across all industries is 80%, and the average click-through rate is 2.
  • 89% of PR Pros Highlight the Importance of Personal Relationships With Journos21.
  • 8%First Page Sage has calculated the click-through rates (CTR) for the various positions in Google’s search engine.
  • 2% These CTRs compared favorably to those for the top four ad positions:Ad Position 1:2.
  • Even less unsurprisingly is that the vast majority (90%) will either maintain or increase their investment in short-form video.
  • In 2022, both pre-produced and livestream video enjoyed a growth rate of 89%.
  • What makes this even more impressive is that livestream video’s growth rate was up by nearly 20% from the previous year.
  • According to HubSpot’s data on consumer trends, 20% of Gen Zers and 25% of millennials have contacted a brand about customer service via social media.
  • Their 2023 State of Marketing Report found that 29% of marketers are already using social media direct messages (DMs) for customer service, while 15% plan to use it for the first time in 2023.
  • Considering that 30% of millennials and Generation Z consumers have purchased a product directly via social media recently, we can also expect to see a lot more brands starting to sell their products on social media channels like Facebook, TikTok, and Instagram.
  • 64% of the marketers surveyed used Facebook, followed closely by Instagram with 58% and YouTube 57%.
  • That said, HubSpot’s study found that more than half of marketers (56%) will increase their investment in TikTok in 2023.
  • 78% of B2B Brands Use Email NewslettersAlthough email marketing is a comparatively old style of digital marketing, it is still seen as valuable by many firms, coming in as the third most popular content marketing activity in the Content Matters 2022 Report.
  • That said, HubSpot’s report found that email open rates decreased across the board by more than 12%.
  • Nearly 80% of Brands List Accessibility as a PriorityHubSpot’s data found that 77% of brands feel that making their emails more accessible is important.
  • However, fewer than 10% admit that they implement best practices to make their email messages more accessible.
  • For example, 75% of the respondents said they trust editorial sites compared to 54% who trust social media sites.
  • Consumers Prefer to See Their Recommendations Personalized with HeadlinesAnother finding of the Outbrain-Savanta study was that household decision-makers are significantly more likely to prefer personalized recommendations (59%) and headlines (58%) than non-decision makers (54% and 52%).
  • 18% Monetize Content by Selling Ad SpacesAccording to a study completed at the end of 2022 among professionals working in content marketing, 18% monetized their content by selling ad spaces.
  • 89% of PR Pros Highlight the Importance of Personal Relationships With JournosResearch completed by PRophet and The Harris Poll reveals that 89% of PR professionals feel that personal relationships with journalists are more important than ever.
  • However, more than half (53%) feel that they lack the capacity to maintain these relationships.
  • Content Creation Is the Most Important PR TaskCision found in their 2023 Comms Report that 22% of their respondents considered content creation to be their single most important PR task.
  • This was followed by analytics and reporting (21%) and attribution and ROI (17%).
  • However, three years later and only 14% indicated media outreach and influencer management as their second most important concern.
  • More Than Nine in 10 PR Pros Believe AI Will Transform Their ApproachAccording to the research completed by PRophet and The Harris Poll, 92% of PR pros feel that AI is worth exploring.
  • What’s more, 90% believe that it will leave them with more time to dedicate to higher value tasks.
  • Effective Marketers Are 46% More Likely to Use AutomationHubSpot has found that effective marketers are 46% more likely to use automation than marketers that have admitted that their strategies are ineffective.
  • Salesforce’s data suggests that this could even be higher and, according to their stats, 70% of top-performing marketers have a fully defined AI strategy in place.
  • Considering that the HubSpot’s research found that 42% of marketers stated that their workload has increased from 2021 to 2022 and that it’s expected that they’ll run nine campaigns per quarter in 2023, embracing automation and AI tools will be the smart move.
  • 62% of Marketers Have Invested in AISalesforce research reveals that 62% of marketers have invested in AI to help them deliver more data-driven, personalized experiences.
  • To put this number into better perspective, 90% have invested in a CRM system, while 89% have invested in an account-based marketing (ABM) platform.
  • 90% of Marketers Use AI for Customer InteractionsWhen Salesforce asked marketers how they are using AI, the vast majority (90%) revealed they use it for automating customer interactions.
  • A Quarter Will Use Interviews for the First TimeHubSpot’s research found that 25% of marketers plan to use interviews for the first time in 2023.
  • Half Have a Web3 StrategyJust over half (51%) of marketers have a Web3 strategy in place.
  • Of the 49% that don’t have a strategy yet, 46% plan to create one in the future.
  • The average open rate across all industries is 80%, and the average click-through rate is 2.
  • 6% Snippets Have a Very High CTR on Google Image and Videos Have Less of an Impact on CTRs in Google Than You’d Expect 91% of Brands Use Social Media What percent of marketing is digital?
  • 95+ Mind-Blowing Digital Marketing Statistics to Learn From: (Statista) Buyers spend 138% more when marketed via email as compared to those who don’t receive email offers.
  • 5% of brands say email marketing is critical to their company’s success and brand awareness.
  • (GetResponse) Sales emails with 200-250 word length have the highest response rate of 19%.
  • (Reply) 77% of B2B marketers utilize email marketing to drive sales and website visits.
  • (SuperOffice) B2C email campaigns experience 8% more unique opens than B2B campaigns.
  • (emfluence) Sending 3 abandoned cart emails results in 69% more orders than just one email.
  • (Omninsend) Emails with personalized subject lines tend to generate 50% higher open rates.
  • (Marketing Dive) 95% of marketing teams who use AI for email creation say it’s “effective,” and 54% rate it “very effective.
  • (LinkedIn State of Sales Report) Social selling provides 45% more sales opportunities than traditional sales.
  • (LinkedIn) Salespersons who use social selling close 40-50% more new business than those who don’t.
  • (Sales for Life) IBM boosted its sales by 400% by implementing a social selling program.
  • (IBM) 75% of B2B buyers utilize social networks (like Facebook and Instagram) to be more informed about vendors they’re interested in.
  • (Startup Bonsai) About 70% of sales professionals use social selling tools for lead generation.
  • 6% of online users between the ages of 16 and 24 prefer to use social media platforms for online brand research.
  • (Hootsuite) 39% of B2B professionals say social selling reduces their lead search time, and 33% say it increases their leads.
  • (Statista) 24% of retail purchases are expected to take place online by 2026.
  • (Oberlo) China is the largest eCommerce market globally, generating almost 50% of the world’s transactions.
  • (Statista) Nearly 9 out of 10 (88%) consumers read reviews when discovering a local business.
  • (Podium) 52% of eCommerce consumers worldwide consider sustainability important.
  • (Pew Research) Mobile commerce alone is expected to make up 44% of all eCommerce sales by 2024.
  • (Insider Intelligence) More than 61% of Google Search visits come on mobile devices.
  • (Statista) Over 90% of mobile phone users check their smartphones within the first hour of waking up.
  • (BrightEdge) 60% of marketers consider inbound strategies (like SEO, blog content, etc.
  • (HubSpot) SEO generates 1,000%+ more traffic compared to organic social media.
  • (Backlinko) 39% of buyers are influenced by a relevant search when making a purchase.
  • (Internet Live Stats) 28% of searches for local businesses result in a purchase.
  • (Think With Google) 50% of search queries consist of 4 or more words (WordStream) “Where to buy” and “near me” mobile queries have experienced a growth of over 200% between 2017 and 2019.
  • (HubSpot) 51% of businesses investing in content marketing publish content daily (The Manifest).
  • A survey revealed that 44% of respondents consume 3 to 5 pieces of content on average before engaging with a vendor.
  • (EarthWeb) 73% of respondents like to learn about a product or service through short-form videos.
  • (Wyzowl) 81% of marketers consider content as a core business strategy.
  • (CMI) Content marketing generates over 3 times as many leads as outbound marketing, costing 62% less.
  • (Reuters) (SensorTower) Most B2B marketers try to stay ahead of the competition by focusing on content quality (83%) and covering untapped topics/stories (72%).
  • (CMI) 87% of B2B and 65% of B2C marketers prioritize fulfilling their audience’s informational needs over-delivering sales or promotional messages.
  • 5% of brands using it for their campaigns, Tiktok is the most popular platform for influencer marketing.
  • (Influencer Marketing Hub) 70% of people prefer to get information from blogs rather than traditional advertisements.
  • (Demand Metric) The most popular types of content formats are “how-to” articles, with a 77% preference among readers.
  • Following closely are news and trends articles, which are favored by 49% of readers.
  • (Statista) 70% of people have made a purchase from a brand after seeing it on YouTube.
  • (Edison Research) Companies that apply inbound marketing tactics can generate 126% more leads than those that don’t.
  • (Weave) 88% of consumers trust user reviews to the same extent as personal recommendations.
  • (Invesp) 70% of individuals are willing to trust recommendations from unknown individuals, while 92% trust recommendations from peers.
  • (Nielsen) 87% of consumers won’t use a business with less than a 3-star rating.
  • (Retail Touchpoints) 96% of users actively seek out negative customer reviews.
  • (PowerReviews) Testimonials can increase conversions on sales pages by 34%.
  • (VWO) After reading a positive review about a company, 50% of consumers visit the company’s website, getting closer to making a purchase or joining their email list.
  • (HubSpot) Customers are ready to spend 31% more on a business that has outstanding reviews.
  • (Invesp) A one-star increase in Yelp rating results in a 5-9% increase in revenue.
  • (Harvard Business School) 56% of users experience FOMO or “fear of missing out.
  • (Zuko) Utilizing visual content such as videos on landing pages can result in an 86% improvement in conversions.
  • (Eyeview) Approximately 74% of conversion rate optimization programs lead to increased sales.
  • (MarketingSherpa) Personalized call-to-actions (CTAs) can potentially convert 42% more visitors than generic ones.
  • (HubSpot) High-performing companies allocate at least 5% of their budget to Conversion Rate Optimization (CRO).
  • (Adobe) Conducting A/B testing for landing page designs can increase conversions by 12%.
  • (Blogging Wizard) Conversion rates increased by 77% for marketers who used marketing automation solutions.
  • (VentureBeat) Even a 1-second delay in site speed can reduce conversions by up to 7%.
  • (Akamai) Implementing multi-step forms in WordPress can lead to a significant increase of 300% in conversions.
  • (Venture Harbour) Asking for telephone numbers in lead generation forms can cause a 5% decrease in conversions.
  • (Unbounce) Marketers using optimization software witness an average boost of 30% in conversions.
  • Top Digital Marketing Statistics & Insights Driving ROI in 2023: About 25% of marketers chose to put their marketing dollars into video — with podcasts coming in a distant second at 10%, and investments in images, blog posts, and case studies registering single-digit percentages.
  • Comparatively, long-form videos ranging anywhere from 6 to 60+ minutes engage at rates from 36% down to 16%.
  • Nearly 30% of marketers use social engagement as a benchmark for understanding content effectiveness, and 25% of primarily B2C marketers rely on influencer marketing to boost sales.
  • About 42% of email recipients skim messages instead of reading them, which means messaging needs to be concise, relevant, and high-quality to get their attention.
  • 1 What’s more, customers want a hyper-personalized experience — and 83% are willing to exchange their information to get it.
  • About 42% of email recipients skim messages instead of reading them, which means messaging needs to be concise, relevant, and high-quality to get their attention.
  • 1 — HubSpot State of Marketing 2023 Content marketing remains impactful The potential for an economic downturn in 2023 saw 55% of marketers rethinking their marketing strategies and 25% actively adjusting their marketing goals.
  • Nearly half (46%) of marketers attribute better personal effectiveness and more successful plan strategies to these tools.
  • As a result, 86% of marketers have adopted new strategies for reaching customers, including social media and targeted ads, universal identifiers, and contextual advertising.
  • Content Marketing—Statistics, Evidence and Trends — 1827 Marketing: Companies using content marketing generated 97% more backlinks and landed 434% more search engine results pages (SERPs) than those that didn’t.
  • It cost 62% less and resulted in 5X as many sales leads (SEMrush, 2019).
  • 36% of enterprise marketers say they’ve shifted paid advertising budget dollars to content marketing in the last 12 months (Content Marketing Insititute/MarketingProfs, 2020).
  • 98% of B2B marketers now believe that content performance justifies its cost (Walker Sands, 2019).
  • A content marketing ROI case study by Tiger Fitness showed the got a 60% returning customer rate with video content marketing (Marketing Sherpa, 2017).
  • 72% of marketers reported their business views content as a core business strategy (Content Marketing Institute/Informa Connect, 2020).
  • 45% of marketers said that at least 50% of their campaigns are content-led (World Media Group, 2019).
  • 48% of business buyers said they engaged with between three and five pieces of content before connecting with a salesperson.
  • 30% said they consume five or more pieces of content before even engaging with a salesperson (Demand Gen Report, 2020).
  • 52% of buyers said they were definitely more likely to buy from a vendor after reading its content (MarketingCharts, 2020).
  • 70% of marketers said that SEO was better than PPC for generating sales (Databox, 2019).
  • 67% stated that SEO is the most effective tactic they implemented in 2019.
  • 51% considered updating existing content to be the second most effective tactic (SEMrush, 2019).
  • 7%) in the UK have slashed their social media usage in the last 12 months.
  • 29% cited feeling overloaded as their reason for deleting or suspending their social media account.
  • 50% of marketers say that personalizing content and experiences is a key challenge for social media from now on (Hootsuite, 2019).
  • Only 57% of personal emails are now being opened by recipients, while only 37% are viewed as being useful (Adobe, 2019).
  • 27% of marketers report an average email open rate for bulk sends of only 11-15% (Validity, 2019).
  • 72% of consumers now only engage with personalised marketing messages (SmartInsights, 2019).
  • Triggered email open rates are 76% higher, on average than non-triggered email open rates (Epsilon, 2019).
  • 86% of B2B marketers have used content marketing in the year to raise brand awareness (Content Marketing Institute, 2019).
  • 81% of B2B respondents say they share business-related content with their LinkedIn network.
  • 70% say they pass along content to peers and colleagues via email (Demand Gen Report, 2020).
  • 63% of marketers have successfully used content marketing to build loyalty with existing customers in the past year (Content Marketing Institute/MarketingProfs, 2019).
  • 74% of companies found that content marketing increased lead generation, both in quality and quantity (Curata, 2017).
  • 1% higher quota attainment than those without a content strategy (CSO Insights, 2019).
  • 88% of purchase decision-makers believed that thought leadership was effective in enhancing their perceptions of an organisation (Edelman, 2019).
  • 49% of respondents used content marketing successfully in the last 12 months to generate sales/revenue (up from 39% reported in 2019) (Content Marketing Institute/MarketingProfs, 2020).
  • 50% of marketers ranked the ability to understand and connect with the audience’s values, interests, and pain points as the top success factor for their strategy (Content Marketing Institute, 2020).
  • 65% of B2B buyers cited vendor websites as one of their most highly influential content sources.
  • 48% said third-party websites were the most important and 39% found third-party articles by independent publishers most influential (MarketingCharts, 2020).
  • Over half (51%) of consumers say that email is the best way for brands to contact them (SmarterHQ, 2019).
  • When asked how their content consumption habits have changed over the past 12 months, 51% of B2B buyers placed a higher emphasis on trustworthiness of the source.
  • 44% prefer content optimised for mobile devices, 43% prefer content from industry influencers, 43% prefer shorter formats, 39% get more content from social/peers, and 34% prefer more interactive content (Demand Gen Report, 2020).
  • Content marketing growth statistics show that 77% of marketers say that their company has a content marketing strategy.
  • Meanwhile, 69% of successful B2B marketers now have a documented content marketing strategy (up from 62% in 2018).
  • In 2020, the global artificial intelligence (AI) software market is expected to grow approximately 154% year-over-year (Statista, 2020).
  • 75% of marketers say they use at least one type of marketing automation tools (Social Media Today, 2019).
  • 51% of marketers agree that using more data to create customised content around their customer journey is a top priority for the next 12 months (Altimeter, 2019).
  • 54% of B2B marketers use marketing automation software to assist them with their content marketing efforts.
  • 75% of B2B marketers say marketing technology provides better insight into how content is performing (Content Marketing Institute/MarketingProfs, 2019).
  • According to B2B marketers, the top advantages of marketing automation are improved user experience and relevance of communications (60%).
  • Higher conversion rates (59%), better quality leads (57%), and generating more leads (57%) are other top advantages (Emailmonday, 2020).
  • Top content formats B2B purchasers engage with during their buying process include video (65%), white papers (60%), blog posts (56%), webinars (54%), case studies (54%), research/survey reports (54%) and e-books (48%) (Demand Gen Report, 2020).
  • Nearly 90% of marketers find repurposing content to be more effective (and cost-efficient) than creating new content from scratch.
  • Video content marketing statistics show 95% of marketers say video has helped increase user understanding of their product or service.
  • 68% of all B2B marketers say they’ve used content marketing successfully to build credibility with their audience (CMI).
  • Law Firm SEO Stats 2024 (Actually Updated!) – On The Map Marketing: As per data from 2021 from Ruler Analytics (as you’ll see later in the article), search generates 66% of call conversion in the legal sector.
  • 4% rate of seven channels (it was benchmarked against by Ruler Analytics).
  • In a 2020 research by Brandmuscle, SEO was rated as the most effective channel by 79% of surveyed participants.
  • 84% of their law firms planned to increase their spending on digital marketing technology and programs:However, law firm SEO is challenging.
  • An analysis of 500 location-based websites by the Milestone Research department found that local and organic searches together make up to 69% of digital traffic:Paid search traffic dwarfs at 8% in comparison.
  • Ruler Analytics 2021 analysis of 100M data points found that:Organic search generates 66% of the call conversion in the legal sector, Further, it had a conversion rate of over 4% compared with the overall 2.
  • Only 27% of law firms maintain a blog, and a measly 5% of lawyers maintain a personal blog.
  • Further, 46% of all bloggers state that clients retained their services because of their blogs.
  • Site design (36%), search engine optimization (27%), and social media (24%) are among the tasks most likely to be handled by external marketing consultants.
  • Only 46% of respondents in the ABA survey above reported having a marketing budget.
  • 13% of respondents said that “no one” at their law firm is responsible for marketing in their firms.
  • Then, it’s time to dedicate up to 15% of your revenue to marketing (depending on your business goals and current growth stage).
  • However the overall utilization rate (as visible in the screenshot above) remains low at 31% — indicating an industry-wide problem faced by law firms.
  • It found that:64% of organic clicks went to directories, review sites, and non law-firm websites, But 31% of all map clicks went to the firm’s website link, highlighting its importance.
  • A Reboot Online 2020 study found that:A lack of internal linking (at 73%) and not investing in proper keyword research (at 67%) are the top two issues in law firm SEO, The next issues include incorrect page indexation, low-value thin content, and poor backlink profile.
  • 58% of visitors looking for legal services come from paid search visits.
  • iLawyerMarketing 2020 survey found that:85% of respondents prefer using Google as a primary source for research when looking for a lawyer, The majority would like to talk to three law firms before choosing a lawyer, And 98% would read online reviews of the attorney before hiring them.
  • 5% of ranking pages from law firm sites use relatively recent and professional photos, WordPress is the default content management system, with 62.
  • 2% of law firm sites on page 1 using it, Law firms that frequently update and add more content pull in 400% traffic than firms with inactive blogs.
  • 29% of lawyers said a client retained their legal services due to social media use.
  • The Good2bSocial 2021 Social Law Firm Index found that:100% of its surveyed law firms are on LinkedIn, and 75% had podcasts.
  • 4% rate of seven channels (it was benchmarked against by Ruler Analytics).
  • Australian SEO and Content Marketing Statistics [Updated 2023]: (Search Engine Journal) 75% of users never scroll past the first page of search results.
  • (HubSpot) 88% of shoppers trust online reviews as much as personal recommendations.
  • (New Media Campaigns) Including a video in a post increases organic traffic from search results by 157%.
  • (US statistics) (Search Engine Land) Voice Search 57% of Australians use Voice Search (B&T) 20% of mobile queries are voice searches (Google) 16% to 20% of queries that get asked every day have never been asked before.
  • (read-write) The number of voice queries increased by 3,400% between 2008 and 2017.
  • (HubSpot, 2017) Google claims its voice recognition accuracy is now at 92%.
  • (CNBC, 2018) Blogging 55% of marketers say blog content creation is their top inbound marketing priority.
  • (Content Marketing Institute) 42% of companies have hired a designated content strategist executive.
  • 52% Google continues to be the powerhouse of the search world and even increased its market share by around 1% in 2018.
  • Bing on the other hand saw a decline of about 1% and new player DuckDuckGo is slowly making growth that’s worth keeping an eye on.
  • 94% Even as Google moves to mobile-first indexing, the majority of Australian users are still on desktop.
  • According to the Content Marketing Institute 2018 survey, 90% of Australian marketers use social media posts for marketing purposes with 56% of marketers agreeing that social media is the most effective in helping their organization achieve specific goals.
  • Here’s the breakdown:Facebook:93%LinkedIn:87%Twitter:74%YouTube:64% Source:Content Marketing Institute The above groups of statistics clearly show why marketers are focusing on social media platforms and specifically Facebook.
  • State of Visual Content Marketing:The Statistics | Crackitt: Marketing, SEO & Traffic 37% of marketers said visual marketing was the most important form of content for their business, second only to blogging (38%).
  • 51% of B2B marketers prioritized creating visual content assets in 2016.
  • 74% of social media marketers use visual assets in their social media marketing, ahead of blogs (68%) and videos (60%).
  • Cisco projects that global internet traffic from videos will make up 80% of all internet traffic by 2019.
  • 34% of B2C marketers say pre-produced video will be critical to content marketing success.
  • Having a video on a landing page makes it 53% more likely to show up on page 1 of the SERP.
  • Adding an explainer video on your landing page triggers 20% average conversion and a big bang of sales and engagement.
  • The average CVR for websites using video is 8%, compared to 2.
  • The 25-34 (millennial) age group watches the most online videos and men spend 40% more time watching videos on the internet than women.
  • Researches show that coloured visuals increase people’s willingness to read a piece of content by 80%.
  • Video 51% of marketing professionals worldwide name video as the type of content with the best ROI.
  • 59% of executives agree that if both text and video are available on the same topic, they are more likely to choose video.
  • 5% of marketers and small business owners who have used video marketing say it had a direct impact on their business.
  • 62% of B2B marketers rated videos as an effective content marketing tactic.
  • Viewers retain 95% of a message when they watch it in a video compared to 10% when reading it in a text.
  • Email Using the word “video” in an email subject line boosts open rates by 19% and click-through rates by 65%.
  • Live Video In 2016, 14% of marketers used live video as part of their social media marketing.
  • Mobile Video 51% of all video plays are on mobile devices — this growth represents a 15% increase from 2015 and a 203% increase from 2014.
  • Videos under five minutes in length account for 55% of total video consumption time on smartphones.
  • 360 Degree Video 29% more people viewed a 360-degree video than the same video in traditional format.
  • Infographics were the B2B content marketing tactic with the biggest increase in use, from 2015 to 2016, up from 50% to 58%.
  • People following directions with text and illustrations do 323% better than people following directions without illustrations.
  • Images When people hear information, they’re likely to remember only 10% of that information three days later.
  • However, if a relevant image is paired with that same information, people retained 65% of the information three days later.
  • Tweets with images receive 150% more retweets than tweets without images.
  • 46% of marketers say that their current marketing and storytelling strategies are critically dependent on photography.
  • Pinterest stats depict that 88% of consumers have purchased a product they pinned and 49% have purchased 4 or more products that they’ve pinned.
  • Twitter 82% of Twitter users watch video content on Twitter 90% of Twitter video views happen on a mobile device.
  • 50 Mobile Marketing Stats to Know for 2024 – Digital Examiner: 59% of mobile users report being as comfortable with mobile advertising as they are with other outlets such as TV.
  • During the COVID-19 pandemic, Google ad conversions have fallen as much as 30% in the evening hours during times of increased coronavirus search activity.
  • 40% of American adults report giving their child a cell phone by the age of 10.
  • Mobile data traffic is expected to increase 25% from current levels by 2025.
  • 94% of participants in a Facebook study held their smartphones while watching television.
  • 75% of Americas admit to bringing their mobile phone into the bathroom.
  • The amount of mobile data traffic is expected to grow by 700% between 2016 and 2021.
  • 21% of millennials report accessing mobile apps at least 50 times per day.
  • In fact, 90% of smartphone users report that they have not selected a particular brand whenever they perform a search for a new product or service.
  • 60% of Google searches are performed from mobile devices, nearly double the volume from five years ago.
  • This is clear when looking at the data which shows that 60% of Google searches are now performed from a mobile device.
  • The likelihood of a local search resulting in an in-store visit increases by 35% when performed from a mobile device.
  • With nearly 96% of all mobile search traffic, Google is far ahead of the next two competitors, Yahoo and Bing.
  • By the year 2022, 69% of search ad growth will be from mobile (which will grow over time).
  • 80% of shoppers have used a mobile device while shopping inside a physical store to look up product information.
  • 59% of shoppers prefer to frequent stores that offer a mobile shopping experience.
  • 90% of buyers report that an excellent mobile experience is likely to convince them to make a repeat purchase from the same company.
  • An excellent mobile experience is also likely to convince up to 90% of buyers to return for another purchase.
  • 79% of smartphone users report having made a purchase online with their device within the last 6 months.
  • Data shows that nearly 80% of smartphone users have made a mobile purchase in the last 6 months and are therefore likely to do so again in the future.
  • Recent metrics show that 55% of all online visits to websites from major consumer verticals were from smartphones.
  • 88% of smartphone users report increasing their use of mobile coupons over the last 3 years.
  • Nearly 90% of smartphone users have used digital coupons on their mobile devices within the last few years, a statistic that highlights just how popular they have become.
  • 71% of teenagers watch an average of over 3 hours of videos online daily.
  • Using video content for marketing campaigns can grow revenue 49% faster than non-video campaigns.
  • It is clear why this is the case when you look at the data that shows marketing with video can grow revenue up to 50% faster than other means.
  • The fact that over 70% of YouTube video content is accessed through mobile devices shows how convenient streaming video has become.
  • With over 90% of mobile users actively sharing video content with others, it is possible to get a very wide reach from a single clip that goes viral.
  • Of the 4 billion active users on social media, 99% of them access websites through their mobile device.
  • Pinterest is the most active social media network on mobile, with 64% of traffic coming from mobile devices.
  • With 20% of leading websites still not optimized for mobile devices, this represents a massive missed opportunity for additional traffic.
  • Manufacturing Content Marketing Benchmarks and Statistics to Improve Your 2023 Strategy: 8% in 2022, there’s no denying the total number of online retail sales is still impressive at $1.
  • 3% of companies in June 2020 saw and understood the importance of content marketing.
  • In 2022, that number hit 78% for companies in the manufacturing industry.
  • 52% of manufacturing marketers agree videos provided the best results in the last 12 months.
  • Among the various video formats used, 53% of surveyed marketers said how-to videos, such as product explainers and instructional videos, produced the best content marketing results.
  • 94% of marketers agree that video content has increased their audience’s understanding of their products, making them more inclined to make a purchase.
  • Short articles and posts 83% of surveyed marketers agree that short articles and posts (fewer than 3,000 words) ranked as the best content in 2021.
  • 43% of manufacturing marketers reported short articles and posts were the most result-producing content.
  • In another Content Marketing Report for 2022, 30% of surveyed bloggers, marketers, and business owners concluded that producing quality blog content is essential for establishing credibility with potential customers.
  • Virtual events, webinars, and online courses In 2021, 70% of manufacturing marketers hosted virtual events, webinars, or online courses.
  • 35% of surveyed marketers agreed these online events were the best video format to publish.
  • The most used owned media platforms in 2021 were:Organization’s website (92%):On your website, you can promote your content, products and services, and virtual events.
  • Email newsletters (74%):Email newsletters are a great way to distribute your content to subscribed users and provide them with valuable knowledge and tools.
  • Emails other than newsletters (63%):Messages such as promotional and retention emails can distribute your content, reward engaged subscribers with special offers, or showcase new products and services.
  • The top three earned media channels for manufacturing companies in 2021 were:Media/public relations (61%):Builds brand awareness and amplifies your brand.
  • Speaking/presenting at events (51%):Getting a shout-out during a presentation circulates your content to a direct audience.
  • Collaborative social spaces (27%):These shared spaces promote collaboration and learning and make transferring knowledge more accessible.
  • Guest posts and articles in third-party publications came in a close fourth with 26%, followed by influencer partnerships with 24% (CMI).
  • Content Marketing Metrics and Performance According to the 2022 Manufacturing Content Marketing Report, 75% of manufacturing marketers surveyed said their organization measures content performance.
  • The report lists website traffic (73%), website engagement (69%), and email engagement (67%) as the top three ways to measure content marketing distribution and performance.
  • Content That Builds Brand Awareness and Trust In 2021, the top goal for 88% of surveyed manufacturing marketers was to create brand awareness, followed by gaining credibility and trust with customers (67%) and educating their audience (63%).
  • It’s no surprise 85% of manufacturing companies said they were going to invest in video in 2022 (Wyzowl).
  • Changes to (SEO)/search algorithms (62%) and data management/analytics (62%) have been key focuses for manufacturing marketers.
  • 53 Essential Telstra Stats and Facts:Revenue, Market Share and Employees – Learn Digital Marketing: Australia’s government once owned 100% of the telecommunications company Telstra.
  • Telstra is the number one mobile network provider in Australia, with a market share of 44%.
  • Today it retains a staggering 44% market share following the finalization of privatization back in 2011.
  • 19 Mind-Blowing SEO Stats To Improve Your Inbound Marketing – Growbo: GeneralSEO Stat #1:40% of Online Shoppers Start a Product Search With a Search Engine (Statista)Recent findings from Statista suggest that search engines are the most popular way for online consumers to discover a product or service.
  • SEO Stat #2:Organic Search Accounts for 53% of All Web Traffic (BrightEdge)Display ads, paid search, and social are nothing compared to the juggernaut that is organic SEO.
  • To put that into perspective, the next most dominant source of traffic is “Other” — which only makes up 27% of all traffic.
  • SourceSEO Stat #3:SEO Provides the Highest-Quality Leads for 60% of Sales Teams (HubSpot)A 2018 global report from HubSpot shed light on how useful SEO is for sales teams.
  • According to the survey findings, 60% of sales teams say that, among a few other things, their best leads come from content/blog articles.
  • SourceSEO Stat #4:Google Has a 92% Search Engine Market Share (Statcounter)It’s no secret that Google has a near monopoly in search engine market share.
  • As of March 2022, Statcounter finds that 92% of all internet searches are done through Google.
  • 63% of All Content Gets Zero Traffic Through Google (Ahrefs)Ahrefs, an SEO-obsessed company that offers, you guessed it, SEO tools, did a little analysis on over one billion pages.
  • SourceSEO Stat #7:94% of Blog Posts Have No External Links (Backlinko)So since Google likes content with backlinks, you’d think everyone would be adding plenty of hyperlinks in their content, right?
  • Well, it turns out that 94% of blog posts don’t even have a single external link, according to Backlinko (fitting name, right?
  • SEO Stat #8:69% of Marketers See Positive Results Stem From Link-Building (Aira)When Aira surveyed 253 marketers back in 2021, about 7 out of 10 of them said that building links improves their organic search rankings.
  • 5% of Marketing Teams Outsource Their Link-Building (uSERP)Link-building doesn’t exactly happen overnight.
  • No wonder over 60% of marketing teams use agencies, contractors, and freelancers to carry out their link-building efforts, as reported by uSERP.
  • 60% of All Clicks Come From the Top Five Search Results (Advanced Web Ranking)Advanced Web Ranking’s research indicates that any time someone clicks on a search result, there’s a nearly 7 out of 10 chance they’ll click on one of the first five results they see.
  • 1% of All Searches Use Question Keywords (Backlinko)When people have a question, they often go to Google for an answer.
  • 82% of Search Inquiries End Without a Click (SparkToro)SparkToro analyzed 5.
  • 48% of desktop Google searches resulted in zero clicks, that number is up to 77.
  • com’s survey of 1,250 online shoppers — where 53% of respondents said they expect e-commerce pages to load in 3 seconds or less.
  • SEO Pro OpinionsSEO Stat #16:36% of SEO Experts Deem Title Tags as the Most Important Factor in SEO (Databox)According to survey results from Databox, over a third of marketing professionals say that the title tag is more influential than any other SEO factor.
  • SourceSEO Stat #17:75% of Marketers Believe SEO Is Helping Them Meet Their Goals (HubSpot)Marketers today are quite confident that their SEO strategy is working — with 3 out 4 of them telling HubSpot that their SEO efforts are helping them with their marketing goals.
  • 3% of SEO Pros Struggle Proving ROI (GoodFirms)Trying to prove that SEO produces business results is difficult.
  • 3% of them said a top challenge of theirs is proving ROI to stakeholders.
  • SourceSEO Stat #19:70% of SEO Pros Prefer SEO Over PPC (Databox)70% of the SEO professionals that Datbox surveyed stated that SEO is more effective than PPC when it comes to driving sales.
  • Top Digital Marketing Data [Q2 2022 Stats]: Interest was so high that from 2022 to 2023, topics on learning about AI increased by 550%, according to an analysis we conducted of over 15,500 news articles and blogs.
  • 5%Sample:4,420 respondentsSource:Hootsuite Social Media Consumer 2024 Survey AI is inevitable on social, and scaling back on its use now would be like reverting from computers to typewriters.
  • The majority (60%) of organizations have a presence there, but only a third of them feel strongly that it benefits their business—which might explain the 7% drop in brand use.
  • views, 49% followers, 43% clicks/traffic, 21% leads, 14% sales/revenue, 4% time spent on site/app, 3% sentiment, 3% share of voice, 2% pipeline, 2% survey-based brand awareness.
  • Interest was so high that from 2022 to 2023, topics on learning about AI increased by 550%, according to an analysis we conducted of over 15,500 news articles and blogs.
  • The majority (60%) of organizations have a presence there, but only a third of them feel strongly that it benefits their business-which might explain the 7% drop in brand use.
  • views, 49% followers, 43% clicks/traffic, 21% leads, 14% sales/revenue, 4% time spent on site/app, 3% sentiment, 3% share of voice, 2% pipeline, 2% survey-based brand awareness.
  • The Local Digital Marketing Stats Every Franchise Brand Must Know: 89% of people search for a local business on their smartphone at least once a week.
  • Customers are 70% more likely to purchase a product when a company utilizes retargeting.
  • 72% of consumers that did a local search visited a store within five miles.
  • 86% of customers are looking for local business information on large search and social channels.
  • The User-Generated Content Marketing Stats You Need to Know in 2022 – TINT Blog: (State of User-Generated Content)76% of consumers have purchased a product because of someone else’s recommendation before.
  • (State of User-Generated Content)72% of consumers believe that reviews and testimonials submitted by customers are more credible than the brand talking about their products.
  • (State of User-Generated Content)62% of consumers report that they are more likely to click on content like ads, websites, social posts, or emails, that feature customer photos rather than an image created by the brand.
  • (State of User-Generated Content)60% of consumers wish that more brands would tell their fans and customers what type of content they want them to create.
  • (State of User-Generated Content)72% of users will accept a brand’s request to use their content, meaning people are excited to participate when brands ask them for rights to repurpose their content.
  • (State of User-Generated Content)64% of consumers have tagged a brand or used a hashtag on social media before.
  • (State of User-Generated Content)63% of consumers believe that visual testimonials are more credible than written testimonials.
  • (State of User-Generated Content)62% of consumers report that they are more likely to click on content like ads, websites, social posts, or emails, that feature customer photos rather than an image created by the brand.
  • (State of User-Generated Content)Social media users increased by more than 13% from 2020 to 2021, with nearly a half billion new users joining.
  • (State of User-Generated Content)Email Content Marketing StatsWhen emails contain user-generated content, click-through rates increase by about 73% and produce more conversions.
  • 20% of retail, e-commerce, and consumer goods and services companies are personalizing emails based on gender, race, ethnicity.
  • Marketers who use segmented campaigns note as much as a 760% increase in revenue.
  • Using user-generated content in social media ads can reduce cost-per-click (CPC) by 50%.
  • (State of User-Generated Content)Web Content StatsThere has been an increase of 29% in web conversions when websites featured user-generated content.
  • Websites with featured user content saw a 20% increase in return visitors.
  • Additionally, these websites recorded a 90% increase in time spent on-site.
  • 49% of marketers agree that the metaverse will impact their brand and marketing strategies in 2022.
  • (State of User-Generated Content)45% of consumers agree that they would unfollow a brand due to too much self-promotion.
  • (State of User-Generated Content)78% of consumers feel that they can tell when a brand is advertising to them.
  • (State of User-Generated Content)71% of marketers plan on showing more diversity, inclusivity, and accessibility in their content in the future.
  • (State of User-Generated Content)72% of consumers believe that reviews and testimonials submitted by customers are more credible than the brand talking about their products.
  • (State of User-Generated Content)76% of consumers have purchased a product because of someone else’s recommendation before.
  • (State of User-Generated Content) 75% of consumers report that they are likely to search for reviews and testimonials before making a purchase.
  • Pre-COVID, 46-85% of socially-engaged travelers used their smartphones for researching airfare, hotel rooms, vacation packages, or in-destination activities, and social content influenced their conversion rates.
  • 70 – 80% of travelers also want to book travel that has flexibility when it comes to canceling or rebooking.
  • EmailWhen emails contain UGC, click-through rates increase by about 73%.
  • Digital AdvertisingConsumers are 62% more likely to click on customer content rather than branded content and are 4-6x more likely to purchase from purpose-driven companies.
  • 102 Surprising Digital Marketing Statistics for 2023: Over 70% of internet users prefer quality content over any form of advertising to get information about a product or service.
  • Over 60% of businesses increased their online marketing spending in 2022.
  • On average, businesses put around 5-15% (small to large companies) of their revenue towards budgets for digital marketing in 2022.
  • According to a study by MarketingSherpa, 68% of B2B businesses have not identified or measured their conversion rates.
  • A study by Econsultancy reveals that a 1-second delay in page load time can lead to a 7% reduction in conversions.
  • A report by Adobe shows that personalization can increase conversion rates by up to 202%.
  • Organic Search (SEO) 49% of businesses receive their highest traffic and ROI from organic search.
  • The largest search engine Google holds over 92% of the global search engine market share.
  • Around 53% of all web traffic generates from search engines (organic search).
  • Over 60% of marketers believe that SEO is still the best way to generate traffic and leads to a website.
  • Over 75% of all Google users never go to page two when searching for something on Google.
  • Over 45% of all Google searches are from people looking for a local product or service.
  • The page ranking in the 1st position of Google SERP for any keywords has an average CTR of 31%.
  • Blogging More than 50% of marketers consider blogging still relevant and one of their top content marketing strategies.
  • Businesses with a blog tend to get around 55% more traffic to their main websites.
  • More than 57% of all businesses that have a blog have earned at least one customer through their blog.
  • Over 68% of people find it easy to trust a business/website with a blog.
  • 53% of digital marketers believe this is the best strategy for inbound marketing 1 out of 10 blog posts increases their organic traffic over a duration of time Compounding blog posts are able to generate 10% of more revenue and 38% more audience Companies posting 16+ blogs per month get 3.
  • A study by Nielsen found that podcast listeners are highly engaged with the content they listen to, with 80% of respondents saying they listen to all or most of each episode.
  • A report by Podcast Insights shows that podcast listeners are educated, affluent, and influential, with 51% of monthly listeners having an annual household income of $75,000 or more.
  • According to a study by Midroll, 61% of podcast listeners report having purchased a product or service they heard about on a podcast.
  • Social Media & Reviews Consumers tend to spend almost 50% more with brands that respond to online reviews and comments on social media.
  • Over 90% of people will search online and/or read reviews of a brand before making a purchase from it.
  • Social media marketing accounted for over 30% of all digital advertising spending in 2022.
  • On average, around 15% of the marketing budget of a business goes to social media.
  • As of 2022, over 90% of businesses were using social media as a part of their marketing campaigns.
  • According to HubSpot, content with relevant images gets 94% more views than content without relevant images.
  • A report by Venngage shows that 45% of marketers believe that visual content is their most important type of content.
  • According to a study by Cisco, by 2022, 82% of all internet traffic will be video content.
  • A report by Social Media Examiner found that 80% of marketers use visual assets in their social media marketing and that visuals are the most commonly used type of content on social media.
  • YouTube Let’s discuss the statistics of digital marketing that demonstrate the importance of Youtube:According to HubSpot, content with relevant images gets 94% more views than content without relevant images.
  • Source:viralwoot A report by Venngage shows that 45% of marketers believe that visual content is their most important type of content.
  • According to a study by Cisco, by 2022, 82% of all internet traffic will be video content.
  • A report by Social Media Examiner found that 80% of marketers use visual assets in their social media marketing and that visuals are the most commonly used type of content on social media.
  • Clickthrough Rate Check out some more online marketing statistics that show the value of clickthrough rate (CTR):The average CTR for Google Ads across all industries is around 18%.
  • 7%, while the average CTR for the top organic result on the desktop is 19.
  • According to a study by OptinMonster, a high-converting landing page typically has a CTR of 20% or higher.
  • Marketing Analytics Here are some digital marketing facts that give an idea about the importance of marketing analytics:Over 60% of marketers use some kind of CRM software for generating their digital marketing industry reports.
  • A study by Forrester Research found that companies that are adept at data-driven marketing are six times more likely to achieve an annual revenue growth rate of 15% or more.
  • Poor quality content and bad layout are the two main reasons why over 38% of users leave a website immediately after opening it.
  • Adblocking Here are some internet marketing statistics that demonstrate the vital role of adblocking:According to a survey by eMarketer, in 2022, 27% of internet users in the US are expected to use ad-blocking software on at least one of their devices.
  • According to a survey by HubSpot, 64% of users say they find ads annoying and intrusive, and 84% have left a website because of an intrusive or irrelevant ad.
  • A study by PageFair found that 30% of internet users in the US use ad-blocking software because they feel that there are too many ads on websites.
  • According to a study by GlobalWebIndex, 47% of consumers say they use ad-blocking software because they want to protect their privacy and security online.
  • Blogging Here is the list of digital marketing statistics that show the value of blogging:According to a study by HubSpot, businesses that blog receive 97% more backlinks to their website than businesses that don’t blog.
  • A study by Sprout Social found that 90% of consumers say they use social media to communicate directly with brands.
  • According to a study by Pew Research Center, 69% of adults in the US use social media.
  • After social media (89%), email marketing is the most popular marketing channel in terms of the percentage of all businesses that use it (87%).
  • Paid Advertising Here are online advertising statistics that help you to analyze the significance of paid advertising:With a 200% ROI, PPC (pay-per-click) is among the most successful digital marketing strategies in terms of return on investment.
  • Digital advertising on Google and social media can increase brand awareness by up to 80%.
  • Using a retargeting ad can increase the probability of a successful purchase by up to 70%.
  • Google Ads is the primary source of income for Google and accounts for almost 96% of the search giant’s revenue.
  • Google Ads has a very high average conversion rate of over 80% across all industries.
  • Digital Coupon Marketing – Statistics and Trends [Infographic] – Invesp: 5% of US internet users have redeemed a digital coupon or code at least once in 2016 and is expected to reach 59% by 2016.
  • Approximately 40% of smartphone users will redeem a mobile coupon at some point during 2016.
  • 19 visual Content Marketing Statistics to Know in 2024 – TrueList: (Smart Things) People remember only 10% of what they heard three days later.
  • (LucidPress) 50% of creators spend less than five hours a week on visual content.
  • (Relevance) 82% of all global consumer internet traffic will be video in 2022.
  • (Forbes) 95% of B2B customers evaluate a company based on visual content.
  • (Ziflow) 41% of marketers post visual content two to five times a week.
  • (Venngage) 40% of marketers say Covid-19 changed their video strategies.
  • And not only that, 90% of all information transmitted to the brain is visual, and the brain processes this type of information 60,000 times faster than text.
  • But, add to that a related and relevant image, and the retention rate grows to as much as 65%.
  • It’s no wonder then that visual content marketing statistics suggest that anywhere from 51% to 80% of businesses are very invested in visuals.
  • 50% of marketers report spending less than five hours per week making visuals.
  • 22% dedicate between five and 10 hours a week to visual content, while 29% spend between over 10 and more than 20 hours.
  • Most of them use video as the main medium but still 67% use illustrations or photos and 59% love infographics.
  • What’s more, some 62% said that ebooks and whitepapers were most effective while 47% claimed that case studies bring the best results.
  • It’s no wonder then that Facebook posts from brands that featured images got 87% of all engagements.
  • Visual content statistics further show that over at LinkedIn, images, as a rule, get a 98% higher number of comments.
  • As for Twitter, tweets with images get a massive 150% more retweets than those without, as well as 18% more clicks.
  • 70% of companies invest in the creation of visual marketing strategies.
  • Around 25% of marketers use content creation for the promotion of products and mainly use video as a medium.
  • Only 20%, however, use branded storytelling as a content creation strategy, digital marketing statistics show.
  • This is important because everyone is on the go since for example, 90% of videos on Twitter are played on mobile devices and 85% of people use multiple devices at once.
  • This is why 73% of videos are two minutes or shorter, to relay their message fast and not lose the battle with our ever-decreasing attention span.
  • Visual content statistics show that 58% of consumers report that the stories have piqued their interest in a product or brand.
  • Around 70% said they watch Facebook Stories more than Instagram or Snapchat.
  • 8% of all Facebook advertising revenue, marking a significant increase from the 13.
  • 5% more likely to get conversions if your own customers are making it, visual content marketing statistics show.
  • 95% of B2B customers create an opinion and evaluate a company based on its visual content.
  • Up to 86% of B2B companies did not create the content themselves choosing to outsource the job to other teams or digital marketing agencies and another 30% chose to outsource the distribution of their own content.
  • 40% of content creators report that Covid changed their video-making strategies for 2020.
  • Visual content marketing stats show that up to 91% of marketers are happy with the video ROI with the medium having overtaken other types of visual content such as infographics and blog content as the leading form of visual marketing.
  • 41% of content creators post visuals between two and five times a week.
  • Just over a quarter of marketers post visuals between five and 10 times a week, while 17% do so even more times, visual content marketing stats confirm.
  • 62% of marketers use visuals primarily as part of blog content or landing pages.
  • Social media follows, with the social media visual content distribution analysis by platform looking like this:49% use visuals for Facebook 47% use visuals for Instagram 42% use visuals for LinkedIn 33% use visuals for Twitter.
  • Then, 43% of marketers use visuals for print and other types of branding.
  • Reports further show that tutorials introduced in VR have a 36% better recall rate compared to classic YouTube tutorials.
  • This is why revenue from shopping ads on the platform grew by a full 100% in 2019, according to visual marketing statistics.
  • Social media marketing statistics also show that pins featuring products and services in action are 67% more likely to generate sales, further underscoring the importance of visual content.
  • At least that’s what 50% of viewers in this age bracket do, according to visual content stats.
  • 17% of content marketers spend more than five hours a week creating and distributing infographics.
  • Up to 90% of everything that is received by the human brain during one day is visual.
  • In fact, our attention is driven by images and content with visuals gets 94% more views than content without, according to visual content stats.
  • Marketing trends show the growth of visuals to almost a complete 100% in almost half of the surveyed marketers.
  • For 2020 alone, respondents reported using visual content in 91% to100% of their content.
  • 23% of marketers meanwhile said they used visuals in 70% to 90% of their content.
  • Up to 91% have stated that, according to visual content marketing statistics.
  • Content Marketing Roi Statistics [Fresh Research] • Gitnux: Content Marketing ROI:The Most Important Statistics 71% of B2B buyers read blog content before purchasing from a brand80% of content created by marketing teams goes unused by sales.
  • 65% of marketers cannot quantitatively demonstrate the impact of their marketing efforts.
  • See the best Content Marketing Software 80% of content created by marketing teams goes unused by sales.
  • 65% of marketers cannot quantitatively demonstrate the impact of their marketing efforts.
  • For 35% of marketers, understanding the ROI of their campaigns is either very or extremely important.
  • For the largest percentage of marketers (38%), content development is the best local link-building strategy that generates the highest ROI.
  • Although 83% of marketers use metrics to measure the performance of content, only 51% understand how their content is performing, and the remaining 17% either don’t use metrics or don’t know if metrics are tracked.
  • Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional advertising and generates 3x more leads.
  • Check out our latest Content Marketing Statistics Supplementary Statistics 89% of content marketers say content marketing generates more leads than traditional marketing methods.
  • On average, content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates three times more leads.
  • B2B companies that blog generate 67% more leads per month than those that don’t.
  • Small businesses with blogs generate 126% more leads than those without.
  • 80% of businesses believe their content marketing efforts are effective.
  • 47% of B2B buyers consume three to five pieces of content before engaging with a salesperson.
  • 68% of consumers feel more positive about a brand after consuming content from it.
  • 70% of people would rather learn about a company through an article than an advertisement.
  • 88% of B2B marketers use content marketing in their marketing strategies.
  • 92% of marketers report their organization views content as a business asset.
  • 57% of marketers say they’ve gained new customers specifically through blogging.
  • 22% of content marketers don’t know what their content marketing ROI is.
  • Content marketing leads to a 97% increase in click-through rate and a 13-time increase in ROI compared to traditional marketing tactics.
  • 75% of content marketers are optimizing their emails for mobile devices, resulting in higher ROI.
  • 30 Impressive Infor Stats and Facts:Usage, Employees and Revenue – Learn Digital Marketing: Only 1% of today’s businesses have no cloud infrastructure whatsoever, proving the incredible importance of ERP.
  • 8 years Around 40% of Infor employees are female, whilst around 60% are male The average Infor employee is White (57%), whilst Asian and Latinx employees make up 26% of the company’s employee roster (13% each).
  • London Digital marketing manager salary stats | How Much Does a Digital marketing manager in London Make? | Adzuna: 3% more than the average national salary for Digital marketing manager jobs.
  • 100+ Social Media Statistics to Know in 2024 – The Loop Marketing Inc: Contents Toggle Social Media StatisticsFacebook StatisticsX StatisticsInstagram StatisticsLinkedIn StatisticsYouTube StatisticsTikTok StatisticsSnapchat Statistics Social Media Statistics The total number of social media users only grew 3% YOY from 2022 to 2023.
  • 94% of marketers repurpose their content across various social media platforms.
  • Facebook’s popularity with teenagers has dropped from 71% in 2015 to 32% in 2022.
  • 33% of Americans get their news from Facebook, making it the dominant social media news source.
  • 82% of B2B content marketers who use social media distribute content on X.
  • And while you probably scroll LinkedIn a lot less than the big three (X, Facebook, Instagram), LinkedIn generates leads 227% more effectively than Facebook and Twitter.
  • A majority of LinkedIn users (80%) are those driving business decisions.
  • Most (94%) of people using a streaming service on their television watch a YouTube video.
  • 70% of YouTube viewers say they have purchased a product after seeing a YouTube ad about said product.
  • Over 75% of people aged 13-34 in the US, UK, Australia, France, and the Netherlands use Snapchat.
  • 47 game-changing digital marketing statistics to accelerate growth in 2022 – GoVisually: Email Get Started Content marketing statistics 46% of B2B marketers planned to increase the money spent on marketing content in 2020 vs.
  • the previous year (Statista) According to 87% of marketers, content marketing helped meet their brand awareness goals in 2020 (Statista) User-generated content on Facebook affected up to 26.
  • This amount of time has increased from 1 hour 46 minutes in 2019 (eMarketer)According to 94% of video marketers, video has helped increase user understanding of their product and service (Wyzowl)Out of all the types of content, B2B brands collaborate with influencers.
  • Email marketing statistics87% of marketers use email marketing to spread information about their business (Content Marketing Institute) The average email open rates are 18%, and click-through rates are 2.
  • 96% of worldwide traffic comes from Google Images, Google Search, and Google Maps (Sparktoro) The top result in Google’s organic search results has an average CTR of 31.
  • 2%) felt that they were not prepared for it (LinkDoctor) About 45% of shoppers worldwide buy online and then pick up from the store (Think With Google) Key takeaway:Search Engine Optimization (SEO) is one of the most beneficial investments you can make for your business when it comes to marketing.
  • 5% of the budget for their marketing was devoted to mobile marketing (Statista) Mobile banner advertising is projected to reach approximately 152.
  • Visual Social Media and Content Marketing Statistics 2024: Did you know people remember around 70% of what they see & hear (videos), as opposed to only 20% of what they hear (audio) and 30% of what they see (images)?
  • Landing pages with video lead to 800% more conversions (FunnelScience).
  • 96% of B2B Companies planned to use video in their content marketing in 2023.
  • 74% of marketers believe that content adorned with visuals will reap better business results.
  • Stats roundup:How social media marketing has changed after Covid-19: Global ad spend on Facebook and Instagram grew 43% year-on-year in Q3 2021 Global ad spend across Facebook and Instagram is soaring in the wake of the pandemic, according to new data found in Emplifi’s State of Social Media and CX Q3 2021 report.
  • Analysis indicates that combined spend on these platforms grew by 43% year-on-year during Q3 2021, matching the peak seen in 2020’s golden quarter.
  • Sixty percent of US B2B marketers now use Instagram, up from 30% in 2020 A summer 2021 report from US advertising agency SageFrog has found sixty percent of B2B marketers in the region now use Instagram as part of their marketing mix.
  • This figure is up from just 30% reported mid-way through 2020, demonstrating the power social media advertising, particularly that which is image and video-based, has had throughout the pandemic.
  • Unsurprisingly, LinkedIn remained the most implemented social platform by the B2B companies surveyed and has been used by 86% of these brands in the past year.
  • Seventy-nine percent also use Facebook, ranking it second, while a further 60% regularly use Twitter for their marketing communications.
  • Aside from Instagram’s recent rise in popularity amongst this demographic, YouTube has also gained traction, with an additional 20% of respondents using the platform compared to last year, bringing the current total to 56%.
  • In particular, branding has become a more highly-prioritised area of investment, with 27% of respondents increasing their spend in this area for 2021 versus 17% in 2020.
  • Social CPM grew 41% year-on-year in Q2 2021 Data from Skai reveals global social CPM grew 41% year-on-year in Q2 2021 to an average of $6.
  • Total social ad spend rose 41% on the same quarter a year before – the most badly-affected period throughout the pandemic – but increased just 3% on a quarter-on-quarter basis.
  • Meanwhile, ad spend on campaigns designed to grow brand awareness, traffic and reach shot up 114%, driven by a 62% increase in CPM, demonstrating a shift away from campaigns that target direct action from consumers.
  • It predicts total social advertising spend will grow by 10% as of the end of 2021, rising further to 12% in 2022.
  • Growth rate of Facebook MAUs and ad revenue continues to slow as life returns to ‘normal’ Facebook’s Q3 2021 financial statement shows the growth rate of Monthly Active Users (MAUs) on Facebook continues to slow, rising just 6% on the same period the year before to hit 2.
  • Family Monthly Active People (MAP) grew 12% year-on-year, matching the rate of growth reported a quarter earlier in Q2 2021, and indicating engagement remains stable across Facebook’s wider offering of social and messaging apps.
  • Despite a gradual decline in Facebook usership, total ad revenue rose by 33% over the three months to September, it remains several percentage points above pre-pandemic levels of growth.
  • While, again, this third quarter figure represents a slowdown from the 50%+ figures revealed in Q2, this is in line with the company’s expectations that it would “decelerate significantly on a sequential basis as we lap periods of increasingly strong growth.
  • This figure is up from an average 2 billion searches per month in 2016 – or a 150% increase – according to Social Media Today.
  • The number of searches per Pinner, according to analysis, has increased 31% year-on-year for those in the Gen Z age category, while the overall number of searches made by this demographic rose 96%.
  • These results are reflective of a sharp increase in Monthly Active Users over the past year, up 30% to 478 million by the first quarter of 2021 as consumers found themselves with more time to search for inspiration and for their next online purchase.
  • Indeed, data Pinterest released in April 2021 shows searches for ‘vacations’ rose 75% in March 2021, three times faster than the average search volume for the month across the last 2 years.
  • Meanwhile, there was an 85% increase in searches for ‘outfits’ April compared to April 2020, and interest in ‘home renovation’ in Q1 2021 was 65% higher than in Q1 2019.
  • Findings from an IPA report confirmed that the social media platform more than doubled its reach to 15-24 year olds throughout the initial coronavirus lockdown, up from 14% to 30%.
  • 35% of TikTok users have watched less TV and content from streaming services since downloading the app We Are Social’s 2022 trends report, titled Think Forward 2022, revealed 35% of TikTok users have watched less TV and content from streaming services since they downloaded the app.
  • So far, 30% of those aged 18-34 that took part in the study said they use social media with their volume up more now than they did before Covid-19, highlighting a renewed relationship between content and sound that brands should to take note of.
  • This is particularly true for the youngest cohort studied for the report – Gen Z – 43% of whom agree that algorithms are having a negative impact on their ‘media diet’.
  • 3% year-on-year at the height of the 2020 holiday season SocialBakers’ Q4 2020 Social Media Trends report found that global social media ad spend grew 50.
  • 3% year-on-year during the peak of the 2020 holiday season (Around mid-December), rising to a massive 92.
  • Across nine different sectors analysed, average social spend increased by 33% in Q4 2020 compared to levels seen the quarter before.
  • Globally, CPC rose 9% year-on-year at the highest point of the golden quarter in 2020, while average CPC across key industries grew 27.
  • There was a particularly large increase in CPC for ads placed in the Facebook News Feed, climbing 12% since Q4 2019 to $0.
  • Furthermore, close to a fifth (17%) of consumers purposely turn to social apps for shopping.
  • Of those that do, 35% cited convenience as a key purchase driver, while 26% also said they liked how quick it is to check out.
  • However, more than half (57%) admitted to neglecting online security by not always reviewing third party ratings for the websites they were purchasing from.
  • Fifty-eight percent of respondents claimed they were dissatisfied with their purchases and 38% were in the process of trying to process a refund or return of such items.
  • Worryingly, with more than half (54%) failing to check the refund/returns policies of social retailers, just one-fifth said they have received a full refund via the method with which they first paid and 88% said they have been left out of pocket for at least one purchase.
  • 3bn Research conducted by IAB and TikTok for Business found creator marketing in Europe grew 14% year-on-year in 2020 to reach €1.
  • Data shows that creator marketing growth is slowing, the 2020 figure of 14% is down from 38.
  • 4% in 2019 and nearly 50% in 2018, however the amount of investment in this format has almost tripled in the last three years.
  • Additional analysiss from WARC suggests that up to 45% of marketers now use the short-form video app for campaigns, marking TikTok the second most preferred platform for influencer marketing behind Facebook.
  • Snap DAUs rise 23% year-on-year in Q3 2021, marking fourth consecutive quarter of >20% growth Snap has once again seen rapid growth in revenue and Daily Active Users (DAUs) as we move into the latter half of 2022.
  • In a Q3 2021 financial statement, the social media company reported it was able to match the ‘record’ DAU growth rate it achieved in the quarter prior, and mark four consecutive quarters of >20% growth in the metric.
  • This quarter’s 23% uplift equates to an extra 57 million users engaging with the app daily compared to the same period the year before.
  • Ad revenue remained high – up 57% year-on-year – but shows signs of slowing from the 66% and 116% increases it saw in Q1 and Q2 of 2021, respectively.
  • A July 2021 survey found 7% of marketers plan to increase their budget for TikTok influencer marketing campaigns A July 2021 report from SocialPubli, titled The State of TikTok Influencer Marketing 2021 indicates 53.
  • 7% of marketers plan to increase their budget for TikTok influencer marketing campaigns in 2021, after the social app has seen explosive growth over the last 18 months.
  • Data shows nearly 88% of marketers agree TikTok influencer marketing is effective as part of their wider digital and social marketing strategies.
  • Part of this could be down to superior audience engagement on TikTok – 87% of influencers that use a multiple platforms told the study that they had recorded higher levels of engagement on the short-form video app than on other social apps.
  • Although influencers appear to be dominating TikTok in terms of performance metrics, only 17% share weekly content that is brand or product focused.
  • 5% of influencers have spent more time on TikTok, with 60% doubling their time spent on the app compared to pre-pandemic levels.
  • According to its Q4 2020 financial statement, the platform acquired over $705 million in revenue over the three months to December 31st, a 76% increase on the £399 million reported in the same period of 2019.
  • Snapchat comes next with a 62% growth rate, reaching $911 million in revenue compared to $560 million in Q4 2019.
  • More than 1 in 5 Millennials are using social media less than they used to More than 1 in 5 (22%) of Millennials, globally, are using social media less than they used to, according to data collected in Q3 2020 and published by GlobalWebIndex in Q1 2021.
  • However, those with this sentiment have been found to mostly use the platforms for ‘social reasons’ – as opposed to other activities like shopping – making them 19% more likely than others in their cohort to ensure they aren’t missing out on anything being posted.
  • But they appear to be taking more action to rectify this, with 26% setting up their devices to monitor screen time vs.
  • Despite the negative effects of these platforms, Millennials are surprisingly the most optimistic about social media’s role in society – on average, 38% say these platforms are ‘good for society’, rising to 45% in particularly heavy users.
  • 4% quarter-on-quarter in Q3 2020 SocialBakers’ Q3 2020 Social Media Trends Report has found that global social ad spend rose 56.
  • 7% in North America, with the widespread Facebook ad boycott in this and other regions throughout Q2 partly responsible for the sharp upturn in Q3.
  • 30 Content Marketing Statistics to Power Up Your Strategy in 2022 | Databox Blog: About 30% of the companies we surveyed think that new content ideas are everyone’s responsibility.
  • Also, more than 50% of those companies come up with new content ideas at least once a week.
  • Most Companies’ Content Teams Consist of 1-3 Marketers Over 60% of companies employ between 1 and 3 content marketers on their content teams.
  • Also, 80% of the surveyed companies stated they write for people (and not for search engines).
  • The Primary Reason for Writing Content Is to Attract New Visitors Attracting new visitors is the main reason more than 50% of marketers write content.
  • Oppositely, 47% of correspondents stated that they write content to nurture and educate leads and prospects.
  • But actually, blogging is more effective now than it was 2 years ago, at least for 68% of marketers we asked.
  • Most companies recognize the importance of blog updates:about 70% of our contributors have a process for blog updating.
  • Almost Half of Social Media Managers Schedule Content One Month in Advance Nearly 50% of the social media managers we surveyed prefer to schedule content at least a month in advance.
  • CEOs Set Marketing Goals in a Large Minority of Teams CEO sets the content marketing goals for more than 40% of teams.
  • 6% of companies we surveyed use data to make content decisions most of the time.
  • The Vast Majority of Experts Measure Post Conversion via Organic Traffic Almost 80% of the experts measure how well a post converts in terms of getting organic traffic.
  • About 63% also measure leads by post and some 58% look at the sales each post brings.
  • 15 Visual Content Marketing Statistics That’ll Blow Your Mind: Better recall:Up to 65% for visual content after three days Studies have shown that people can recall 65% of the visual content that they see almost three days later.
  • In comparison to about 10% of written content three days after it’s read.
  • 5% of marketers say that original graphics, like infographics, perform best Using boring stock images as your visuals will not help your marketing efforts in 2018.
  • 5% of marketers said that graphics like infographics are the most valuable.
  • 30% of marketers create their own visuals Only 30% of marketers create their own visuals, so it’ll be easy for you to get ahead of the pack.
  • 30% more bloggers were using multiple images in 2017 than in 2016 In 2017, more bloggers were using multiple images in their articles than in any year prior.
  • People follow visual instructions 323% better than written instructions One of the reasons that multiple images or infographics are so effective is that people follow them and can read them better.
  • 74% of marketers use visuals in their social media content If social media is more of your specialty, visual content marketing can help you as well.
  • With almost 75% of marketers using visuals on social media, it may seem that your content will not stand out.
  • You get 37% higher engagement on Facebook if you use a visual Facebook posts with images also drive more engagement than those without any images.
  • 51% of B2B writers put visual content at the top of their list of priorities It’s not only bloggers that are seeing the potential of using more visual content in their marketing.
  • Articles with images get 94% more views Omitting images from your articles will only cause people to ignore them from the beginning.
  • Articles with images get 94% more views than their visual-lacking counterparts.
  • Video will be part of 80% of all internet content by 2019 Video is about to take over the content marketing world.
  • In two short years, over 80% of all content that is shared on the internet will be in video form.
  • 2023 Content Marketing Stats & Trends: Marketers Moving Budget to Content According to the Content Marketing Institute, 43% of marketers surveyed say their 2021 budgets were higher.
  • Sixty-six percent of the group expect increases in their 2022 budget, and one in five say the increase will be greater than 9%.
  • Digital Video Becoming Essential 86% of businesses use video as a marketing tool, and 93% of marketers who use video say that it’s an essential part of their marketing strategy.
  • The most commonly created types of videos are explainer videos (73%), social media videos (67%), presentation videos (51%), sales videos (41%), and video ads (41%).
  • Trust & Inclusivity Matter According to Forbes, 96% of the top-performing B2B content marketers have said their audience views their brand as a credible and trusted source.
  • While 38% of customers are more likely to trust brands that show diversity in their advertising, 71% of consumers say they would be willing to spend more money to support products and services from a brand they trust.
  • YouTube and Facebook continue to dominate the online landscape, with 81% and 69%, respectively.
  • Search Engine Optimization is an important element of Content Marketing In 2021, 69% of content marketers invested in SEO, using it for strategic keywords (70%), localization (50%), and mobile optimization (48%).
  • Podcast listeners are much more active on every social media channel (94% are active on at least one – vs.
  • Podcast listeners are more likely to follow companies and brands on social media, and 80% listen to all or most of each podcast episode.
  • Eighty-three percent of marketers are conducting market research, and 88% of companies use market research to make business decisions.
  • Of those surveyed, 67% of marketers plan on increasing market research spend in the next year.
  • The top two technologies B2B organizations use to assist with content marketing are analytics tools (86%) and email marketing software (85%).
  • Social Media Marketing:Statistics, Trends, and Data. – TheB2BHouse: 50% of Gen Z and millennial users now use social media to decide on their product purchases, compared to 38% of adults overall.
  • Social media ranked higher than website/blog (36%) which was the second most popular digital marketing channels.
  • 73% of marketers they currently use Livestream videos as well, making it the second most popular content type products by Marketers.
  • The least used content type is Virtual experiences (46%) with 33% of marketers report they plan to use more virtual experiences.
  • However, user engagement with Twitter posts rose by 263%, with posting and video posting activity rising only by 17% and 22%, respectively.
  • Email marketing was the most automated marketing channel, according to 65% of respondents.
  • 80Social media effectiveness to drive salesTop tactics to drive virtual registrations – rated by marketersWith the increase of webinar usage (+162% YoY, according to ON24), marketers are constantly on the lookout for the best ways to drive registrations.
  • 80% of marketers rated the website is the most essential tool for driving registrations.
  • 60% of respondents rated social media as on of the top three channels to drive virtual registrations.
  • For context, there are estimated 7B people in the world, which means almost 83% of the world will rely on social media by 2027.
  • 6% of respondents mentioned that they use social media to keep in touch with friends and family.
  • While the number of users on TikTok grew by 32% YoY, most of these users were Gen X and Baby boomers.
  • 28% of Gen Z respondents also follow influencers and experts on social media.
  • Millennials (23%) and Gen X (16%) also use social media to follow influencers.
  • Millennials (49%) and Gen X (27%) also mentioned social media is used to find new products, other than online search.
  • United Arab Emirates (45%), Mexico (39%), Poland (38%) are the other top 5 countries who trust social media advertising.
  • Social media has the largest decrease in trust, by 8%, compared to 2021.
  • Time spent on social media on a typical dayThis year, participants have expressed more interest in travelling more (+24%) and spending less time on social media (+9%), according to GWI.
  • An increase of +13% of audiences now use social media for their news sites.
  • 118 Essential B2C Content Marketing Stats [and Facts] 2024: Conclusion General B2C Content Marketing Stats 2024 82% of marketers are actively investing in content marketing.
  • The global content marketing industry is expected to grow at an annual growth rate of 16%.
  • Content marketing also boosts conversion rates that are six times higher than other advertising methods On average, content marketing costs 62% less than other types of marketing.
  • The number of businesses using content marketing increased from 70% in 2019 to 82% in 2020.
  • 75% of organizations outsource content creation due to its time intensity.
  • 40% of outsourcing organizations delegate content distribution, while 25% outsource their entire content strategy.
  • 79% said that in 2021 lead generation was their main content marketing priority.
  • In 2021, 54% of B2C content marketers noticed that their budgets remained stable, with 27% noting that their budgets had increased and 18% noting that their budgets had decreased.
  • As of 2021, 62% of B2C content marketing teams remained stable in size, while 27% increased and 11% decreased in size.
  • Images and Photos Content Marketing Statistics In 2020, 48% of content marketers surveyed said that 91-100% of their content includes visuals, while 23% said they included visuals in 70-90% of their content.
  • Internet users typically read only 20% of all the text on a webpage during their visit.
  • On average, people remember only 10% of written content and 65% of visual content.
  • 26% of content marketers predict relying over 80% of their marketing strategies on visuals.
  • 25% of marketers predicted that they would invest between 10% and 20% of their total budgets on visual content creation.
  • 74% of marketers use visuals consistently in over 70% of the written content pieces they publish.
  • 90% of bloggers add visual content to their blog articles, but only 3% include over ten images per blog post.
  • Including more than ten images in a blog post increases the chances to get better results by 39%.
  • 43% of content marketers struggle at producing visual content consistently.
  • 90% of consumers claim that they prefer video content from their favorite brands to other types of content.
  • 49% of content marketers use Facebook videos in their content strategy.
  • Only 25% of content marketers use Instagram stories in their content strategy.
  • 78% of website owners claim that their website traffic has increased thanks to video content.
  • Only 18% of people prefer reading a written article rather than watching a short video on the topic.
  • 68% of people will finish watching a video that lasts less than a minute.
  • 55% of people watch video content daily Websites with video content have an average conversion rate of 4.
  • 9% for websites that do not use any video content at all On average, landing pages with videos have a conversion rate of 80%.
  • — Brian Dean Webinar Marketing Statistics 61% of marketers include webinars in their content strategy.
  • The pharmaceutical industry has the highest live webinar attendance rate at 63%, followed by the consulting industry (50%) and the advertising industry (33%).
  • 83% of content marketers consider webinars to be an effective strategy.
  • Tuesdays are the days with the most webinar registrations (24%), followed by Thursdays (16%) and Wednesdays (15%) On average, between 2% and 5% of attendees purchase something at the end of the webinar.
  • 93% of participants attend webinars from their desktops and only 7% from mobile devices.
  • Webinars in the communication industry have the highest conversion rate (67%), followed by training webinars (44%) and marketing webinars (39%).
  • 89% of marketers claim that webinars are the most effective lead generation strategy.
  • Only 39% of B2C businesses hosted webinars in 2020, compared to 67% of B2B businesses.
  • There are over 160 million podcast listeners in the US, which accounts for almost 50% of the US population.
  • In 2021, 41% of Americans over 12 years old listened to podcasts every month.
  • Surprisingly, 65% of all podcast listeners listen to the whole podcast episode.
  • 68% of all podcast listeners listen to all of the podcast episodes they have downloaded.
  • In 2020, 68% of Americans over 12 years old listened to some type of online audio each month.
  • In 2020, 14% of Americans over 55 years old listened to a podcast monthly.
  • 79% of podcast listeners listen to podcasts on their mobile phones, while only 15% listen to them on their laptops.
  • 28% of podcast listeners listen to podcasts as an audio source in their car.
  • 21% of podcast listeners listen to four or five different podcasts in a week.
  • Only 11% of podcast listeners focus on listening to only one podcast in a week.
  • Statistics on Content Marketing Channels 2024 In 2021, webinars and online course content increased by around 12% from the previous year.
  • Blog posts and short articles were the most common content form used by B2C marketers in 2020 (83%).
  • Long-form articles (over 3,000 words) were the least common content form used by B2C marketers in 2020 (22%).
  • In 2020, 75% of B2C marketers used email marketing as their top content marketing strategy.
  • 72% of B2C marketers used paid channels for content marketing in 2020, accounting for a 13% drop from the previous year.
  • Surprisingly, Facebook is the most common social media platform that B2C marketers used in 2020 (97%) The use of Instagram by B2C content marketers in 2020 increased by 7%, while the use of YouTube increased by 10%.
  • Content Promotion and SEO Statistics 2024 64% of digital marketers invest in search engine optimization.
  • 67% of digital marketers believe that SEO is the most effective content marketing strategy.
  • 76% of content marketers believe that organic traffic is the key metric to measure their content strategy success.
  • 94% of content marketers use social media as their primary content distribution channel.
  • Mobile Content Marketing Statistics 70% of the total digital media time is spent on smartphones.
  • B2C Content Marketing During Pandemic Statistics 63% of B2C organizations have changed their targeting and/or messaging strategy due to the COVID-19 pandemic.
  • 54% of B2C organizations adjusted their content calendar due to the pandemic.
  • 46% of B2C companies changed their promotion strategy due to the pandemic.
  • 82% of businesses adjusted their content strategy to the pandemic very quickly.
  • 83% of B2C businesses relied on blog posts and short articles during the pandemic.
  • During the pandemic, 74% of B2C businesses relied on email newsletters.
  • During the pandemic, 62% of B2C businesses relied on pre-recorded videos.
  • The number of marketers using in-person events to promote their business dropped by 11% between 2019 and 2020.
  • The number of marketers using online events, webinars, and online courses in 2020 increased by 12% from 2019.
  • The number of marketers using live streaming in 2020 increased by 22% % from 2019.
  • 82% of B2C marketers used social media to distribute their content organically during the pandemic.
  • It is estimated that 55% of all B2C businesses outsource some part of their content marketing activities.
  • Moreover, 80% of those businesses choose to outsource content creation specifically, as it is the most time-consuming content marketing activity.
  • Only 5% of digital marketers rate their B2C organizations’ content marketing efforts as extremely successful.
  • In comparison, 1% think that their content marketing efforts are not successful at all.
  • Moreover, 80% of those businesses choose to outsource content creation specifically, as it is the most time-consuming content marketing activity.
  • In comparison, 1% think that their content marketing efforts are not successful at all.
  • Essential Digital Marketing Automotive Industry Statistics in 2024 • ZipDo: The Latest Digital Marketing Automotive Industry Statistics Unveiled More than 70% of consumers who own cars start their shopping journeys online, not at dealerships.
  • In the realm of car ownership, it reveals that a staggering 70% of consumers ditch the conventional dealership visit, instead, they ignite their shopping journeys in the digital arena.
  • On average, automotive marketers spend 33% of their total marketing budget on digital advertising.
  • In the swirling vortex of today’s marketing strategies, it’s intriguing to spotlight that automotive marketers allocate a striking 33% of their total marketing budget for digital advertising.
  • Relatively 90% of all consumers use smartphones to compare vehicles on the spot.
  • The explosive statistic revealing that an impressive 90% of all consumers utilize smartphones to evaluate vehicles right then and there serves as a wake-up call to the automotive industry, indicating that they can no longer afford to ignore the digital realm.
  • Digitally-influenced car buyers closely follow TV advertisements (22%), then newspaper ads (18%).
  • In automotive digital marketing, 82% of consumers will read online reviews for local businesses.
  • The figure – 82%, is a clear demonstration of a major percentage of customers weaving their purchase decisions around the tapestry of online reviews.
  • Around 25% of car buyers use social media as a source for vehicle purchasing.
  • With approximately 25% seeking insight from their online peers, not leveraging the powers of these platforms as part of an automotive digital marketing strategy is akin to muting a choir in the middle of a captivating aria.
  • The revelation that almost 63% of car buyers first acquaint themselves with new vehicles online can fire up a booster for digital marketing strategies in the automotive industry.
  • As such, the 63% statistic becomes the cryptographer’s key to strategizing digital marketing campaigns for the automotive industry – focusing on attractive online representations, informative literature and engaging content that showcases vehicles and tips the decision-making balance.
  • Websites are the most extensively used digital channel for car purchase, with 85% of buyers using them.
  • Highlighting the potency of online platforms in today’s auto industry, it’s important to spotlight how a staggering 85% of buyers utilize websites for car purchases.
  • So, fire up your engines, marketers, the race towards website excellence has started, and it’s a thrilling journey that 85% of consumers have already embarked on.
  • More than 50% of all vehicle buyers use their smartphone to access auto content.
  • Navigating the endless highway of digital marketing trends, one particular statistic stands out like a beacon:over 50% of all vehicle buyers utilize their smartphone to access auto content.
  • YouTube is recognized as the most influential platform, affecting 40% of car shoppers who visited a dealership after watching a video online.
  • Unveiling this powerful perspective, let’s shed light on a captivating statistic-YouTube, the giant of digital platforms, sways a striking 40% of car shoppers to hit a dealership following an online video-viewing experience.
  • Automotive businesses using AI in email marketing campaigns saw an increase in revenues by 37%.
  • The impressive 37% revenue surge observed specifically in the automotive sector, elucidates that AI’s integration into email marketing campaigns isn’t just effective – it’s crucial towards driving remarkable change in digital marketing landscapes.
  • 61% of auto marketers see mobility services as an opportunity area on the digital front.
  • Painting the landscape of the digital marketing sphere in the automotive industry, we unearth the golden nugget that 61% of auto marketers identify mobility services as an untapped potential.
  • Over 50% of automotive businesses believe investment in digital skills and technology is the most pressing business requirement.
  • 88% of car purchasers use the internet to shop, making automotive the second highest category.
  • The statistic revealing that 88% of car purchasers rev up their internet engines to shop draws a stunning roadmap for why digital marketing is crucial for automotive businesses.
  • 80% of auto shopping is now done digitally with nearly half on mobile devices.
  • The surge into the digital space is dramatically redefining the auto-shopping landscape, with an astounding 80% of auto shopping now unfolding digitally, and almost half of that action taking place on mobile devices.
  • On average, automotive marketers spend 33% of their total marketing budget on digital advertising.
  • Relatively 90% of all consumers use smartphones to compare vehicles on the spot.
  • Digitally-influenced car buyers closely follow TV advertisements (22%), then newspaper ads (18%).
  • In automotive digital marketing, 82% of consumers will read online reviews for local businesses.
  • Around 25% of car buyers use social media as a source for vehicle purchasing.
  • Websites are the most extensively used digital channel for car purchase, with 85% of buyers using them.
  • More than 50% of all vehicle buyers use their smartphone to access auto content.
  • YouTube is recognized as the most influential platform, affecting 40% of car shoppers who visited a dealership after watching a video online.
  • Automotive businesses using AI in email marketing campaigns saw an increase in revenues by 37%.
  • 61% of auto marketers see mobility services as an opportunity area on the digital front.
  • Over 50% of automotive businesses believe investment in digital skills and technology is the most pressing business requirement.
  • 88% of car purchasers use the internet to shop, making automotive the second highest category.
  • 80% of auto shopping is now done digitally with nearly half on mobile devices.
  • The Latest Digital Marketing Automotive Industry Statistics Unveiled More than 70% of consumers who own cars start their shopping journeys online, not at dealerships.
  • In the realm of car ownership, it reveals that a staggering 70% of consumers ditch the conventional dealership visit, instead, they ignite their shopping journeys in the digital arena.
  • On average, automotive marketers spend 33% of their total marketing budget on digital advertising.
  • In the swirling vortex of today’s marketing strategies, it’s intriguing to spotlight that automotive marketers allocate a striking 33% of their total marketing budget for digital advertising.
  • Relatively 90% of all consumers use smartphones to compare vehicles on the spot.
  • The explosive statistic revealing that an impressive 90% of all consumers utilize smartphones to evaluate vehicles right then and there serves as a wake-up call to the automotive industry, indicating that they can no longer afford to ignore the digital realm.
  • Digitally-influenced car buyers closely follow TV advertisements (22%), then newspaper ads (18%).
  • In automotive digital marketing, 82% of consumers will read online reviews for local businesses.
  • The figure – 82%, is a clear demonstration of a major percentage of customers weaving their purchase decisions around the tapestry of online reviews.
  • Around 25% of car buyers use social media as a source for vehicle purchasing.
  • With approximately 25% seeking insight from their online peers, not leveraging the powers of these platforms as part of an automotive digital marketing strategy is akin to muting a choir in the middle of a captivating aria.
  • The revelation that almost 63% of car buyers first acquaint themselves with new vehicles online can fire up a booster for digital marketing strategies in the automotive industry.
  • As such, the 63% statistic becomes the cryptographer’s key to strategizing digital marketing campaigns for the automotive industry – focusing on attractive online representations, informative literature and engaging content that showcases vehicles and tips the decision-making balance.
  • Websites are the most extensively used digital channel for car purchase, with 85% of buyers using them.
  • Highlighting the potency of online platforms in today’s auto industry, it’s important to spotlight how a staggering 85% of buyers utilize websites for car purchases.
  • So, fire up your engines, marketers, the race towards website excellence has started, and it’s a thrilling journey that 85% of consumers have already embarked on.
  • More than 50% of all vehicle buyers use their smartphone to access auto content.
  • Navigating the endless highway of digital marketing trends, one particular statistic stands out like a beacon:over 50% of all vehicle buyers utilize their smartphone to access auto content.
  • YouTube is recognized as the most influential platform, affecting 40% of car shoppers who visited a dealership after watching a video online.
  • Unveiling this powerful perspective, let’s shed light on a captivating statistic—YouTube, the giant of digital platforms, sways a striking 40% of car shoppers to hit a dealership following an online video-viewing experience.
  • Automotive businesses using AI in email marketing campaigns saw an increase in revenues by 37%.
  • The impressive 37% revenue surge observed specifically in the automotive sector, elucidates that AI’s integration into email marketing campaigns isn’t just effective – it’s crucial towards driving remarkable change in digital marketing landscapes.
  • 61% of auto marketers see mobility services as an opportunity area on the digital front.
  • Painting the landscape of the digital marketing sphere in the automotive industry, we unearth the golden nugget that 61% of auto marketers identify mobility services as an untapped potential.
  • Over 50% of automotive businesses believe investment in digital skills and technology is the most pressing business requirement.
  • 88% of car purchasers use the internet to shop, making automotive the second highest category.
  • The statistic revealing that 88% of car purchasers rev up their internet engines to shop draws a stunning roadmap for why digital marketing is crucial for automotive businesses.
  • 80% of auto shopping is now done digitally with nearly half on mobile devices.
  • The surge into the digital space is dramatically redefining the auto-shopping landscape, with an astounding 80% of auto shopping now unfolding digitally, and almost half of that action taking place on mobile devices.
  • 5 Digital Marketing Stats to Develop Your CRE Marketing Strategy | inMotion Real Estate Media: 76% of all online experiences in B2B start with a search engine Your company’s digital footprint is all the information that exists on the internet about your business.
  • In fact, according to data from BrightEdge, 76% of all online experiences in B2B start with a search engine (BrightEdge).
  • Companies that excel at lead nurturing generate 50% more sales ready leads at a 33% lower cost.
  • In fact, recent studies show that lead-nurturing can generate 50% more sales-ready leads at 33% lower cost, according to data from Invesp.
  • Companies that blog get 55% more web traffic Over the last 5 years Google has invested significantly in enhancing the user experience by providing increasingly accurate and relevant search results.
  • And according to data from Hubspot (Hubspot), companies that blog get 55% more web traffic.
  • Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates about 3 times as many leads.
  • Below is a running list of some of the top commercial real estate events of 2024 from… Read On 64% of commercial real estate experts predict increased search traffic in 2014 One of the areas of CRE that’s most changed over the past couple of years is marketing.
  • 2020 SEO Stats For YouTube & Video Marketing: A study from Searchmetrics reveals 62% of Google universal searches include Video, and 8 of 10 of the video results come from YouTube rather than other video platforms.
  • Compared to click-through rates on plain text-based content, video click-through is 41% higher, so you’re getting more traffic to your website, increased brand awareness, and a better return on investment in your content creation efforts.
  • 2024 Digital Marketing Statistics You Can’t Miss! | upGrad blog: Here are some other handy, insightful statistics about e-mail marketing that can prove convenient… About 49% of your customer e-mails are opened on mobile devices.
  • Around 74% of marketers believe that e-mail marketing leads to an increase in customer engagement.
  • Close to 88% of all customers seek transparency about their shared personal information with your brand.
  • The following digital marketing statistics about the importance of CRO would help you learn more about it:About 86% of customers prefer watching visual content like videos on landing pages, thus observing a significant boost in conversions.
  • Despite the importance of having sufficient CRO statistics, more than 68% of small businesses don’t follow any solid-customer rate optimization strategy.
  • Adding up any custom call to action (CTA) can help drive 42% more visitors to your online website.
  • A few of them are:Over 72% of brand marketers reveal that meaningful content development is their crucial SEO tactic, as it helps your brand to reach a newer audience.
  • According to research, mobile payments will continue to grow at a pace of 27% during the 2022-2025 period.
  • According to research, mobile payments will continue to grow at a pace of 27% during the 2022-2025 period.
  • According to research, mobile payments will continue to grow at a pace of 27% during the 2022-2025 period.
  • According to research, mobile payments will continue to grow at a pace of 27% during the 2022-2025 period.
  • Top Content Marketing Funnel Characteristics [SEMrush Survey Stats]: Did you know that only 9% of marketing professionals worldwide evaluate the performance of their existing content strategy as “excellent”?
  • Content Marketing Funnel Overview Though the vast majority (87%) of marketers create content for different customer journey stages, the top of the funnel remains the most popular one – 95% of marketers create TOFU content.
  • Then comes the middle of the funnel (MOFU), covered by 86% of our respondents.
  • Finally, 76% of the survey participants create bottom-of-the-funnel (BOFU) content.
  • “87% of marketers rely on content throughout different stages of the customer journey, while half of them find it challenging to encourage audiences to move to the next funnel stage.
  • ” TOFU Content Top Stats According to 70% of our respondents, organic search is the most efficient channel in attracting traffic at this funnel stage.
  • Social media marketing and email marketing are the channels mentioned by 60% and 54% of marketers, respectively, which highlights the importance of delivering value through several touchpoints with audiences.
  • 72% of the survey participants described “How-to” guides as an absolute leader at the top of the marketing funnel.
  • However, the importance of such tried and tested formats as landing pages (mentioned by 35% of marketers), as well as infographics and checklists (selected by 28% and 27% of marketers, respectively), did not diminish either.
  • It’s no surprise that with the above formats our respondents use the number of visitors as their core metric (73%) to evaluate content success.
  • Then comes conversion rate with 54% of the votes and time on page with 52%.
  • MOFU Content Top Stats Surprisingly, here, “How-to” guides also work best to generate leads, according to 44% of our survey participants.
  • However, these are logically followed by more product-specific and application-oriented formats like product overviews (40%) and case studies (34%).
  • While organic search remains the most efficient (69%) channel for generating leads, followed by email marketing (54%) and social media marketing (52%), lead nurturing is carried out mostly via emails (72%).
  • Moreover, when a website visitor becomes a lead, 43% of marketers switch to success stories, 38% to product overview, and 36% to case studies to push these leads towards conversion.
  • That’s why conversion rate was chosen as the key metric for content efficiency by 75% of our respondents, along with number of leads (54%) and number of visitors (44%).
  • BOFU Content Top Stats As the deal moves to its closure, 51% of marketers rely on the product overview as the main factor that drives payments, trying to explain the value they deliver in every detail.
  • Other arguments for the purchase are believed to be found in customer reviews (49% of votes) and success stories (43% of votes).
  • As for the channels that drive payments, email marketing turns out to be most effective (73%).
  • Then comes organic search (61%) and paid advertising (47%), which proves that strong content is capable of striking you a deal overnight.
  • It’s no surprise that at the bottom of the funnel the majority (73%) of marketers use conversion rate and other income-related metrics such as the number of payments (53%) and ROI / ROMI (43%) to measure their success.
  • We learned that the absolute majority (88%) decide what content to create based on keyword research, and 73% rely on competitor analysis.
  • Almost half of respondents (49%) use in-house knowledge and results to decide on what content to create – they conduct content audits and refer to the sales or customer support team.
  • Encouraging prospects to move through the funnel was considered one of the most challenging tasks when building a funnel by 50% of our respondents.
  • 71% of them use email follow-ups to facilitate the process, 67% try to improve internal links and make the content easier to find, and 56% suggest related content to answer more specific queries.
  • Other serious challenges mentioned are creating content that generates quality leads (52%) and creating content that attracts traffic (48%).
  • As for the effectiveness of the funnel as a whole, 36% of the survey participants measure it by conversion rate, 23% the number of payments, and 15% by the number of leads and ROI / ROMI.
  • The majority of our respondents (41%) work for small businesses (companies of 1-10 employees), which are mostly either B2B (43%) or B2C (33%) companies.
  • Top 10 Social Media Statistics Every Marketer Should Know | Digital Marketing Institute: Social media itself has seen a 13% global increase in usage since the previous year.
  • In fact, statistics in America from the Pew Research indicate that 68% of adult Americans use Facebook, while 73% use YouTube.
  • Older computer-literate users are more comfortable with the older Facebook platform, as the same Pew Research indicates 41% of total Facebook users being 65 years or older.
  • YouTube, on the other hand, managed an astounding 94% of its total user population occupying the 18-24 age demographic according to the same data, so this will be an interesting trend to watch.
  • Twitter Is Bad for ROI, But Great for MarketingWhile Google itself, as a search engine is the #1 platform for ROI in terms of marketing, and Facebook impresses with a 30% share.
  • Twitter comes in last with just 2% of respondents in a survey indicating that they saw any kind of return on investment for their efforts here.
  • However, while Twitter might stumble on actual, hard ROI numbers, 47% of respondents surveyed said that it was very effective for marketing to the public.
  • So it’s not a complete surprise that marketers have found that including images in Tweets increases the chances of a retweet by 150%.
  • Furthermore, the retweet phenomenon is also followed up by people using the “favourite” function 89% more times, as well as the tweets themselves getting 18% more clicks.
  • Instagram passed one billion users in 2018 and continues to grow at 5% every quarter, beating even Facebook’s own growth for the year.
  • In fact, 42% of respondents in a 2018 survey indicate they are “taking a break” from Facebook, while 26% say they have deleted the app entirely and no longer use it.
  • In addition, 54% of Facebook users have now adjusted their privacy settings, so there’s a general feeling of distrust growing around the social media giant.
  • 22 Key Statistics For Successful B2B Social Media Marketing Programs | KoMarketing: Oberlo reports that half of all US adults with a degree use LinkedIn, and 25% of all LinkedIn users are senior-level influencers.
  • B2B marketers report 80% of their social media leads come from LinkedIn, and 40% say LinkedIn is the most effective channel for driving leads.
  • Statistica found that 25% of social media marketers at B2B companies use Pinterest to market their businesses.
  • Hubspot reported each additional social channel you add to your social media marketing plan can increase ROI and effectiveness by 35%.
  • According to Forrester, 68% of people don’t think brands share interesting content.
  • According to SproutSocial, 54% of marketers say video is the most effective format for reaching social goals.
  • 53% say images are best, 30% say text-based posts, 26% choose video, and 25% say live video drives the highest ROI.
  • Sprout Social reports 88% of consumers are likely to buy from a brand after reading reviews on social media.
  • 4% of B2B buyers are more likely to buy after reading a trusted review.
  • Facebook says their Carousel ads, which allow brands to share several images in one ad, see 30-50% lower cost-per-conversion and 20-30% lower cost-per-click than single-image link ads.
  • According to a Hootsuite survey, 60% of all businesses plan to increase their Instagram budget, and nearly half plan to do the same for Facebook, YouTube, and LinkedIn.
  • A 2021 survey by Hootsuite reported the top outcomes brands want to achieve on social include increased acquisition (74%), increased brand awareness (64%), and driving conversions like leads, purchases, or product inquiries (45%).
  • Eighty-eight percent of marketers say social media strategy positively impacts the bottom line, but only 1 in 4 reports those results to their manager or team — and just 10% use social media data to inform business decisions.
  • 37 Stats That Make the Case for Content Marketing ROI: Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates three times as many leads.
  • 82% of marketers are using content marketing in 2021, up 70% from the year prior.
  • 79% of content marketers use content marketing to generate high-quality leads.
  • 24% of B2B marketers have shifted their paid advertising spend to content marketing in the past year.
  • 82% of consumers feel more positive about a company after reading custom content.
  • 60% of top performers in content marketing have a documented strategy, while 79% of the least successful companies in content marketing don’t.
  • 41% of buyers view three to five pieces of content before engaging with a sales rep.
  • 87% of B2B buyers say online content has a major or moderate impact on vendor selection.
  • 48% of B2B C-suite executives report that thought leadership content directly led them to give a company their business.
  • 81% of consumers research a product or service online before purchasing.
  • More than 85% of internet users prefer to click on organic search results instead of ads.
  • Content marketing strategies generate over 400% more leads per $1,000 within 36 months compared to paid search campaigns.
  • Video traffic represents more than 60% of all downstream internet traffic.
  • 78% of marketers who used video in their content strategies say it directly helped increase sales.
  • 84% of consumers have been convinced to buy a product or service after watching a brand’s video.
  • Content marketing revenue growth is projected to increase more than 16% by 2027.
  • 62% of marketing agencies have seen an increased demand for content marketing services.
  • 52% of marketers indicate a strong commitment to content marketing, showing a 26% increase from 2018.
  • 70% of marketers believe that their content marketing efforts are more successful now than the year prior.
  • 117 Cool Chatbot Statistics 2024 [Learn Digital Marketing]: In Summary Key Chatbot Statistics and Trends this 2024 Chatbots are the fastest-growing brand communication channel, and the chatbot market size has increased by 92% over the last couple of years.
  • In 2020, almost one-quarter of purchasers used chatbots when communicating with businesses, which is a 13% increase from the previous year.
  • 67% of consumers worldwide have interacted with a chatbot in the previous 12 months.
  • A chatbot platform can answer as much as 80% of all standard simple questions.
  • 27% of consumers were unsure whether the last customer support interaction they had was with a chatbot or a real person.
  • More than 40% of consumers use conversational marketing tools for purchases, making them an excellent addition to your salesforce.
  • 2% of consumers report having a neutral or positive customer experience with chatbots.
  • 58%, which is 2% higher than the rate for discussions that get passed over to human agents.
  • The US has the most chatbot users (36%), followed by India (11%) and Germany (4%).
  • 41% of people who start online chat conversations with businesses are C-level executives.
  • 27% of consumers are currently interested in AI (artificial intelligence) support tools.
  • 37% of people use a customer service bot to get a quick answer in an emergency.
  • Almost 50% of female shoppers like chatbots and choose them to communicate when making purchases online, whereas only 36.
  • Chatbot Adoption Statistics 58% of B2B companies use chatbots, while only 42% of B2C websites have chatbots, according to Relay.
  • 39% of businesses use chatbots to make their websites more interactive.
  • 35% of consumers say they would like to see more companies taking advantage of chatbots.
  • 24% of enterprises, 15% of mid-sized companies, and 16% of small businesses are currently using chatbots.
  • 53% of service organizations say they plan to use chatbots within 18 months, which is a 136% growth rate.
  • 56% of businesses consider chatbots to be driving disruption in their industry.
  • Chatbot Conversion Statistics Average chatbots generate 35-40% response rates.
  • The best bot experiences with more engaged customers can generate up to 90% response rates.
  • Chatbot technology can increase website conversion rates on average by between 10% and 100%, depending on the industry.
  • E-commerce stores that have adopted the social media Facebook Messenger chatbot along with an abandoned cart chatbox have been able to boost revenue by between 7 and 25%.
  • Better bot experiences together with more engaged audiences, are getting 80-90% response rates.
  • Business leaders claim that, on average, chatbots have increased sales by 67%.
  • 57% of businesses say that chatbot delivers a massive ROI on minimal investment.
  • According to 68% of consumers, they like chatbots because they provide speedy answers.
  • Chatbots have helped cut operational customer service costs by up to 30%.
  • 60% of consumers thank that chatbot can’t understand their needs as well as a human.
  • 60% of consumers would prefer to wait and speak to a human rather than a chatbot.
  • Chatbot Marketing and Business Statistics Chatbots are used by 55% of businesses to generate higher-quality leads.
  • 40% of US, EU, and Chinese businesses use pre-built AI programs, including virtual agents and chatbots.
  • Chatbots are most commonly used for sales (41%), customer support (37%), and marketing (17%).
  • Top AI (artificial intelligence) chatbots use is for voice-to-text dictation (46%) and support team collaboration on tasks (26%).
  • 64% of businesses believe that chatbots will allow them to provide a more customized customer experience.
  • 50% of businesses plan on spending more on voice assistants than on mobile apps.
  • Conversations between brands and customers via Messenger have a 30% better ROI than retargeting ads.
  • 33% of internet users prefer conversational chatbots when making reservations and ordering online.
  • The top three work-related AI chatbots are Microsoft Cortana (49%), Apple Siri (47%), and Google Assistant (23%).
  • 53% of consumers are more likely to shop if they can message the business.
  • 48% of people would rather a chatbot was able to solve their issues above having a personality.
  • Industry-Specific Statistics The top five industries that benefit most from using chatbots are real estate (28%), travel (16%), education (14%), healthcare (10%, and finance (5%).
  • Finance Projections are that chatbots will handle 75-90% of banking and healthcare customer queries by 2024 Cost savings from banking chatbots will reach $7.
  • Travel/Hospitality Two-thirds of people surveyed said they would find a chatbot useful (40%) or very useful (26%) in relation to the management of their business and work travel arrangements.
  • When making travel plans or comparing booking options, 37% of users would prefer to deal with an intelligent chatbot.
  • If it could save them time and money, 87% of users would choose a travel chatbot to interact with.
  • By 2024, over 70% of chatbot conversations will be with retail chatbots.
  • In 2019, a survey found that more than 40% of US consumers had used chatbots to engage with the retail industry.
  • 22% of the most successful online stores sell clothes, followed by health products (9%), furniture (9%), electronics (8%), and jewelry (8%).
  • Recruiting By the end of 2024, expectations are that 35% of organizations will use chatbots for a large part of the recruitment process.
  • XOR, a recruiting chatbot vendor, claims their chatbot solution improves the recruitment process by 33%, screens 85% more resumes with the same budget, and spends 50% less per hire.
  • According to a survey by Allegis, 58% of candidates were happy to interact with AI and recruitment chatbots during the early stages of the application process.
  • Chatbots for Customer Support Statistics If you use abandoned cart chatbots alongside Messenger, you can boost your eCommerce revenue by up to 25%.
  • You can expect to save 30% on customer support costs by using chatbots.
  • In 2019, a growth rate of 136% was the prediction for customer service organizations.
  • 58% of consumers say their customer service expectations have been changed by chatbots.
  • 64% of customer support agents who use chatbots say they have more time to solve more complex and challenging problems.
  • 16% of Americans have used Alexa or Google Home chatbots when shopping.
  • Chatbot Implementation Statistics 53% of companies use AI chatbots in their IT department, and only 23% use them for administrative tasks.
  • Software represents around 40% of all cognitive artificial intelligence spending, and two areas of focus are conversational artificial intelligence and machine learning applications.
  • Around 47% of organizations plan to have chatbots for customer support by the end of 2021.
  • 80% of businesses are projected to integrate some form of conversational bot system by 2024.
  • 85% of customer interactions might be handled without a human agent by the end of 2021.
  • According to a survey by Relay, 58% of B2B companies and 42% of B2C companies actively use chatbots.
  • 100+ Freshly Updated Digital Marketing Statistics – 2024: 91% of businesses used video as an important part of their marketing strategy in 2023.
  • Digital marketing witnessed a US$271billion growth in 2023 Online Ads Statistics Research shows that search ads can increase brand awareness by 80%.
  • 52% of B2B marketers use native advertising along with sponsored content.
  • 70% of internet users want information about new products or services through descriptive content instead of advertisements.
  • Search Engine Optimization Statistics 70% of businesses believe that SEO generates more sales than PPC.
  • Out of billions of searches that Google receives daily, 15% of searches are unique and have never been seen before.
  • 76% of Near me local searchers on a mobile device visit a business within a day.
  • 49% of businesses believe that organic searches bring them the highest ROI.
  • 75% of people never scroll past page one of Google’s first results page.
  • Organic traffic (from the Google search engine) accounts for 43% of the total traffic for eCommerce sites.
  • 53% of marketers recommend guest posting as the most effective link-building strategy.
  • Companies that blog have 55% more visitors, 97% more inbound links, and 434% more indexed pages than those that don’t.
  • In 2023, less than 1% of the searchers will go to the second page of Google search results.
  • 98% of people read reviews before making any purchase for local businesses.
  • TikTok remained the fastest-growing social media network in 2022, with 40% of businesses planning to use TikTok in their social media strategy.
  • 80% of B2B businesses use Twitter to get organic results for their social media marketing.
  • 63% of ads on TikTok, which have the highest CTR share their message within 3 seconds.
  • Around 30 million businesses can be viewed on Snapchat maps 77% of Facebook users visit a business profile at least once a week.
  • 50% of US small and medium-sized businesses use marketing automation for email drip campaigns, while 47% reported using it for social media reactions.
  • Research shows that 58% of users check their emails before surfing the internet for other activities.
  • 49% of consumers report looking forward to receiving emails from their favourite brands.
  • 77% of marketers believe email nurturing is the best way to re-engage leads.
  • 22% of consumers are likelier to open an email with subject lines that show some sense of urgency.
  • 95% of marketers use generative AI for email creation, and rate is an effective way to do so.
  • Conversion Rate Statistics 74% of conversion rate optimization programs result in increased sales.
  • 79% of new leads are never converted into sales due to the absence of lead nurturing.
  • Less than 79% of marketers use A/B testing to improve their conversion rates on landing pages.
  • 84% of marketers believe putting more time and resources into the lead nurturing program will lead to better conversion rates.
  • Websites with superior user interfaces result in 200% higher conversion rates than poorly designed websites.
  • Yahoo witnessed 59% more conversions for the users who search after seeing a display ad.
  • A 1-second delay in your site speed can reduce the conversion rate by 7%.
  • 81% of the customers compare product prices on mobile while shopping offline.
  • 53% of users use search engines to know specific information about the product they wish to buy.
  • 💡 Interesting Read Mobile Marketing Statistics E-commerce Marketing Statistics Research shows that 80% of consumers are more likely to convert when they are provided with personalized experiences.
  • 73% of all consumers are more likely to purchase a product or service when explained through a video by the brand.
  • 35% of brands leverage AR/VR in their digital marketing strategies, and 42% plan to increase their investment in 2022.
  • There is a 10% growth in the digital marketing budget among all sections in 2023 Content Marketing Statistics 73% of B2B and 70% of B2C marketers use content marketing as their overall marketing.
  • 58% of US marketers increased their content creation performance using AI.
  • 83% of marketers say focusing on quality rather than quantity of content.
  • Statistics That Showcase the Importance of Medical Content Marketing | Digital Branding | Healthcare Brand Promotion: The Need for Medical Content Is Increasing About 7% of all searches in Google are health-related.
  • 66% of internet users use search engines to know about specific medical problems or diseases.
  • 70% of people prefer to be introduced to a business through content rather than ads.
  • More than 70% of patients will look for a new healthcare provider if the existing provider’s website lacks information.
  • About 66% of marketers now vouch for content marketing as an effective tactic.
  • 26% of the marketers have described their content marketing efforts as being very successful.
  • 95% of healthcare organisations plan to include content marketing in their marketing strategy.
  • The Influence of Online Reviews on Patients More than 90% of patients read online reviews to determine the quality of service offered by healthcare providers.
  • About 71% of patients read online reviews to choose a new doctor or hospital.
  • 43% of millennials are expected to change their healthcare providers in the coming years.
  • The Potential That Calls Hold 45% of marketers say that phone calls have higher conversion rates.
  • The Power of Social Media Platforms More than 40% of patients make their healthcare decisions based on content on social media.
  • Content has an 80% higher readership rate when visuals like infographics, images and charts are used in it.
  • 62% of all healthcare institutions are outsourcing their medical content development efforts.
  • 14 SEO Stats That Will Change Your Search Marketing Forever: Updating older content can increase organic traffic by 111% 5.
  • 57% of B2B marketers agree that SEO generates more leads than any other strategies 8.
  • 81% of consumers perform online research before making a large purchase Mobile SEO stats 9.
  • 87% of people with smartphones use a search engine once per day 10.
  • Mobile searches including the word “Best” have increased by 80% 11.
  • 40% of mobile visitors will leave your website if it takes more than three seconds to load Local SEO stats 12.
  • 72% of consumers visit a store within 5 miles of their current location after performing a local search 13.
  • 40% of all e-commerce sales during holidays come from smartphones Final thoughts on SEO statistics SEO statisticsThese are general SEO stats that you can use to improve your search marketing campaigns and performance.
  • 50% of all searches on Google are four words or longer (Source)Half of all users using Google search for terms that are what we consider long tail.
  • Updating older content can increase organic traffic by 111% (Source)A common dilemma marketers face is deciding whether to produce new content or update older ones.
  • It’s been found that updating old blog posts with new content and images can result in a 111% increase in organic traffic.
  • 7% of outbound leads (Source)I personally believe that every business needs a healthy balance of inbound and outbound marketing.
  • 93% of all online experiences begin with a search engine (Source)Think of the last time you wanted to know the answer to a question or learn something.
  • 57% of B2B marketers agree that SEO generates more leads than any other strategies (Source)What’s the heart and lungs of a B2B organization?
  • 81% of consumers perform online research before making a large purchase (Source)Do you sell high-ticket items?
  • This is why 81% of consumers perform their due diligence online before buying anything.
  • 87% of people with smartphones use a search engine once per day (Source)Mobile devices have become the go-to platform for surfing the internet, using social media, and checking emails.
  • Seeing as 87% of smartphone users find themselves searching for something via a search engine every day, it’s critical that you optimize websites for mobile users.
  • Mobile searches including the word “Best” have increased by 80% (Source)Similar to the rise of “Near me” keywords via voice search, phrases including “Best” have blown up.
  • 40% of mobile visitors will leave your website if it takes more than three seconds to load (Source)We live in what I like to call the “Amazon era.
  • It should be no surprise that 40% of mobile users will leave if your website takes more than three seconds to load.
  • 72% of consumers visit a store within 5 miles of their current location after performing a local search (Source)This is a fascinating local SEO statistic.
  • 40% of all e-commerce sales during holidays come from smartphones (Source)Do you operate an online store?
  • 2015 Digital Marketing Stats:The Good, the Bad and the Intriguing – Onimod Global: Good Content marketing in 2015 generates 3 times as many leads as traditional outbound marketing, but costs 62% less.
  • 28% of marketers have reduced their advertising budget to fund more digital marketing.
  • 84% of top performing companies are using or plan to start using marketing automation by 2015.
  • 73% of B2B marketers use video as a content marketing tactic, and 7% of marketers plan on increasing their YouTube marketing.
  • 70% of marketers were not confident in their companies ability to measure the return on mobile ad spend.
  • 52% of Americans think that most online shopping sites need improvement, whilst 79% of Brazilians2 and 87% of Chinese people think this.
  • 83% of consumers reported that they have had a “bad experience with social media marketing.
  • However, just 62% of marketers say that LinkedIn is effective, while 50% say the same for Twitter and only 30% of B2B marketers view Facebook as effective.
  • December 2014 20% of companies said Digital Marketing is very much separate from the rest of their marketing/advertising efforts, whilst only 14% said they were a ‘digital first organisation.
  • 91% of people have unsubscribed from company emails they have previously opted into.
  • Only 8% of companies have an email marketing team, despite the fact it is often rated as the platform the delivers the highest ROI of any digital marketing tactic.
  • Yet 39% of marketers say they have no strategy for mobile email, and only 11% of emails are optimized for mobile Intriguing 15% of Google searches have never been searched for before.
  • 60% of all Internet activity in the US originates from mobile devices and about half of total Internet Traffic flows through mobile apps.
  • 50% of all mobile searches are conducted in hopes of finding local results, and 61% of those searches result in a purchase.
  • 36 Must-Read Digital Marketing Research Stats: The most used campaign type amon all Facebook campaigns in Brand Awareness – 55% (Wordstream, 1029).
  • 30% of marketers are using last-click attribution to conversion (Wordstream, 2019).
  • Phones and tablets combined produce 74% of retailer Google search ad clicks in Q1 2019, an eight-point increase from a year earlier (Merkle, Digital Marketing Report Q1 2019).
  • 75% of marketers say that their social media marketing efforts have led to increased traffic.
  • Even if you are doing everything right, you can still expect to win the sale around 2% of the time (BigCommerce 2017)9.
  • For the majority of online transactions, the path from awareness to conversion is very short — 71% of consumers make their purchase within a week of awareness or desire (KPMG Global Survey – the truth about consumers 2017)The path from awareness to conversion is very short.
  • Less than half (43%) of companies with online stores report seeing significant traffic from social media (MarketingSherpa ecommerce benchmarks 2017).
  • In these countries, more than 38 % of consumers said price and promotions were the factors that drove their most recent product choice (KPMG Global Survey – the truth about consumers 2017)Price and promotions drive 38% consumers to make their most recent product choice.
  • Price and promotions drive 38% consumers to make their most recent product choice.
  • Price and promotions drive 38% consumers to make their most recent product choice.
  • 22% of omnichannel sellers sell through other marketplaces (including Amazon, Etsy, eBay, etc.
  • E-commerce is growing 23% year-over-year, yet 46% of American small businesses do not have a website (BigCommerce 2017).
  • 53% of marketers say blog content creation is their top inbound marketing priority.
  • 54% of B2B marketers rate their content marketing strategy as ‘moderately effective’ (Smart Insights)19.
  • Marketers believe research reports (46%) generate leads with the highest customer conversion rate (Ascend2 – Lead Generation to increase conversions report)20.
  • Total site sessions produced by organic search declined by about 2% in Q1 2019, down from 2% growth in Q4 2018 (Merkle, Digital Marketing Report Q1 2019).
  • Mobile accounted for over 50% of all organic search visits in Q1 2019, the first time passing that milestone (Merkle, Digital Marketing Report Q1 2019).
  • 61% of marketers say growing SEO/organic presence is a high inbound marketing priority (HubSpot, State of Inbound 2018).
  • Businesses that show up on the first page of results get 92% of consumer traffic (Joal House 2019).
  • One-third of respondents (33%) click on a paid search ad because it directly answers their search query (Clutch, Search Engine Marketing:Why People Click on Paid Search Ads, 2019).
  • Google display campaigns reach 80% of global internet users (Google Benchmarks and Insights).
  • Nearly two-thirds of people (63%) are most likely to click on a Google search advertisement.
  • The number of people who are most likely to click on search ads on other sites – Amazon (15%), Youtube (9%), and Bing (6%) – is less than half of the number who are most likely to click on Google search ads (Clutch, Search Engine Marketing:Why People Click on Paid Search Ads, 2019).
  • 70% of millennials like it when they can click on a product from an ad.
  • People who visit a website after clicking on a PPC ad are 50% more likely to make a purchase compared to visitors who clicked on an organic search result (Wordlead, 2019).
  • On average, most businesses see a 200% return on their investment when purchasing Google Ads (Power Traffick, 2019).
  • 17+ Content Marketing Stats to Strategize Over in 2022: Let’s jump right into the most important takeaways:Essential Content Marketing Statistics (Editor’s Choice) Content marketing revenues increase by 14% each year.
  • In the US, “strategy” is one of the most sought-after skills in the content marketing sphere, appearing in 60% of job offerings.
  • Content marketing on social media increases total exposure of their products and services, or so 88% of marketers say.
  • For comparison, the global revenue of digital advertising reached $463 billion in 2021, which means content marketing accounts for around 10% of the total marketing revenues.
  • (Source:Statista) This is another interesting fact about content marketing, especially for those who plan to start a career in this field—60% of all job postings in the field list “strategy” as a desired skill.
  • Social media content generation (53%), and SEO (41%) are next on the list, whereas things like metrics (24%), research (20%), and blogging (14%) don’t appear in job offerings as much.
  • In 2017, 37% of North American B2B marketers documented a content marketing tactic, but that number turned into 39% in 2018, 41% in 2019, and 43% in 2020.
  • The growing trend is also present in the B2C sector, where 73% of North American marketers develop and publish content, though (like in the B2B sphere) only 42% have it documented.
  • Some professionals say content marketing spend should account for approximately 30% of your total marketing investment, but the actual number varies from company to company.
  • Though the majority of bloggers write how-to articles, many of them also make use of infographics (30%), conduct interviews (41%), write opinion pieces (44%), and talk about current events and trends (49%).
  • 20% of US marketers believe that users actually read the content they develop.
  • In fact, 31% of marketers claim users click on the links within the text.
  • However, the statistics also show that marketing experts are somewhat less optimistic about their content directly affecting the users, with only 14% of them strongly agreeing with this statement.
  • In fact, half of the worldwide industry professionals regard new and returning visitors as crucial metrics, whereas 46% of them pay close attention to conversion rates.
  • According to marketers, other important indicators are interactions on social media (32%), time spent on a page (29%), number of downloads (25%), and page scroll (10%).
  • For instance, the majority of marketers in the UK agree that emails (65%) and social media content (57%) are the most powerful resources to reach consumers, but opinions are split 50-50 regarding blogs.
  • Fewer marketers think ebooks (36%), videos (28%), and infographics (20%) are impactful, whereas webinars, online presentations, and illustrations fall even further down the perceived-effectiveness scale.
  • For instance, Facebook ads have an 87% ROI (calculated over a three-year period) whereas online PR can get you a slightly smaller figure (62%).
  • As for email campaigns, they’re the third most profitable digital marketing strategy, right behind SEO (748% ROI) and Webinars (430%).
  • 88% marketers worldwide believe that content marketing on social media increases the exposure time of their products and services.
  • (Source:Statista) Moreover, 79% report that social media content marketing leads to increased traffic, 69% say that it generates leads, and 61% state that it helps build a loyal fanbase.
  • 81% of marketing experts consider videos essential aspects of their strategies.
  • According to the latest statistics, 73% of marketers use livestream videos, which allows them to establish a more direct contact with their users, whereas 54% of marketers add videos when building the company’s landing page.
  • Moreover, content marketing statistics indicate that 47% of companies embed videos in their emails, which is an example of how different subtypes of content marketing can be combined.
  • Digital Marketing Statistics (How Many Businesses Use Digital Marketing?) – Colorlib: 4 billion in 2022 Nearly 90% of companies plan to use marketing automation You may also be interested in reviewing our most important advertising statistics collection.
  • Nearly 60% of small businesses use digital marketing First, almost 90% of small businesses use some type of advertising, whether traditional or digital, or a mixture of both.
  • Moreover, 58% of small businesses use digital marketing, and nearly all plan to invest more of their marketing budgets into it.
  • Fun fact, the six most common digital marketing channels small businesses invest in are 1) social media (73%), 2) website (73%), 3) email marketing (57%), 4) SEO (49%), 5) video (34%) and 6) content marketing (32%).
  • 72% of the UK’s marketing experts direct their budgets toward online marketing More than two-thirds of the UK’s marketing experts are directing their budgets (most of it) toward online marketing.
  • 56% of marketing funds are oriented to digital channels In the annual CMO marketing spending research, Gartner reported that 56% of the budget is allocated to digital channels and 44% to offline channels.
  • Furthermore, more than 50% of the digital spending is invested in paid channels (social, search, display and video).
  • Nearly 70% of startups use marketing tools, but too few use them properly While 68% of startups use marketing technologies in their organization, only 59% have a strategic plan for using them.
  • Unfortunately, 41% of startups without a plan usually say the tech doesn’t meet their business objectives (which is obvious, don’t you think?
  • 69% of total ad spending will be mobile by 2027 With mobile becoming bigger each passing year, digital marketing is also revolving more around investing in mobile advertising (more than ever before).
  • Almost 81% of digital advertising revenue will be generated through programmatic advertising by 2027 Artificial intelligence and technology are growing in popularity by the day and are already highly valued by marketers all over the world.
  • Combine technology and advertising, and you get programmatic advertising, which will account for nearly 81% of total digital advertising revenue by 2027.
  • Almost half of the businesses don’t have a defined digital marketing strategy Even though 45% of businesses are doing digital marketing, they don’t have a defined strategy for it.
  • Moreover, 38% of businesses have it integrated into their marketing strategy and 17% have a defined strategy laid out in a document.
  • Marketers who plan their marketing are 331% more successful than those who don’t Those marketers and marketing teams that plan and document their strategies are more than three times likelier to experience success than those that don’t.
  • However, only 17% of marketers always plan their marketing campaigns ahead of time.
  • 33% of marketers use paid advertising for brand awareness When growing a business organically, it can take a lot of patience because it can take months, heck, years to see some tangible success.
  • Customers are 59% likelier to convert through search after seeing a display ad When potential buyers see a display ad, and they end up doing a search related to it, they are nearly 60% likelier to convert.
  • Interestingly, the search activity can rise by 155% after customers see a display ad, while 27% of customers are more prone to search for a business.
  • Facebook is the most popular social media platform amongst marketers globally In a global survey, a whopping 90% of respondents said they used Facebook as a marketing platform to advertise their business.
  • ) When it comes to the social media advertising market, Facebook’s market share accounted for 16% in 2022.
  • Increased exposure is the main benefit of using social media marketing When asked professionals which are the main benefits of social media marketing, 85% reported using it to increase exposure.
  • Almost 70% of marketers will increase their video activities on Instagram 68% of worldwide marketers stated they would increase their video activities on Instagram, while one percent less said they would do so on YouTube.
  • Over 64% of small businesses use email marketing Although social (Facebook in particular, 69.
  • 6%) is still the most preferred way of reaching customers, small businesses’ second method is email marketing (64.
  • 45% of marketers send emails weekly Have you ever wondered how often you should send emails to your subscribers?
  • 45% of marketers do it weekly, while over 30% do it several times a week.
  • Moreover, over 40% reported that Tuesdays are the best time to send marketing emails, while marketers don’t prefer Fridays and weekends.
  • 72% of marketers reduce email frequency to those who are no longer opening messages When the stats report that subscribers aren’t opening emails or clicking links, 72.
  • 9% of marketers don’t change the frequency, sending the same volume of emails to everyone on their email list.
  • A/B testing can increase your ROI by nearly 30% If you’re not satisfied with the performance of your email marketing campaigns, you MUST test and optimize them.
  • One of the best and most straightforward approaches is A/B testing (always test one thing at a time), which can increase you’re return by up to 28%.
  • Marketing emails influence 59% of subscribers’ purchasing decision Email marketing is powerful.
  • Almost 60% of respondents reported that marketing emails influence their purchasing decisions.
  • In addition to that, 34% make purchases multiple times monthly but only 3% once or more weekly.
  • 9% said they never purchased or that marketing emails have no impact on their purchasing decisions.
  • The industry’s average bounce rate is approximately 10% When considering all industries, the average email bounce rate is 10.
  • Google’s search engine market share is at 85%+ Google has been leading the search engine market for a long time and is FAR ahead of the competition.
  • Its one of the highest current search engine market shares was in 2018 at over 91% but has slightly dropped in 2023 to 85.
  • You can increase your CTR by 32% by moving up one position If you jump from fourth to third position in Google, it can mean a whopping increase of 32% in click-through rate.
  • Yes, jumping to the first position will have a much higher CTR (74% improvement) than jumping to the fifth one (29% improvement).
  • But moving from tenth to ninth position will mean scoring 11% more clicks.
  • Fun fact:Less than 6% of pages rank in Google’s top ten search results for at least one search query.
  • 3% of websites have no backlinks/referring websites One of the reasons for receiving no traffic from Google is having no backlinks or referring domains – that’s 66.
  • Over 90% of businesses use video as a marketing tool Video is getting increasingly popular, thanks to YouTube and other video-sharing platforms.
  • Thus, in 2023, 91% of businesses will use video as a marketing tool, a 5% jump from 2022 and a 30% jump from 2016.
  • 70% of those not using marketing videos will start in 2023 While there are many reasons for not using video marketing (lack of time, not knowing where to start, too expensive, etc.
  • 71% of marketers create social media videos Everyone’s on social media, and everyone’s binging on videos (usually hours per day), so it’s no secret that 71% of marketers created social media videos in 2022.
  • Other popular types were explainer videos (70%), presentation videos (50%), testimonial videos (46%), video ads (46%) and teaser videos (42%), to name a few.
  • Only 4% spend $20,000 on marketing videos A very tiny percentage (4%) of marketers spend tens of thousands of dollars on creating (the ultimate) marketing videos for their campaigns.
  • Spend on videoShare of respondents$0 – $50042%$501 – $1,00018%$1,001 – $5,00025%$5,001 – $10,0009%$10,001 – $20,0003%$20,000+4%How much do marketers spend on a video Source:Wyzowl Influencer Marketing Statistics 38.
  • Almost 90% of marketers name Instagram as the most important platform for influencer marketing A survey from 2020 found that 89% of marketers chose Instagram as the most crucial platform for influencer marketing, followed by YouTube in second place (70%).
  • 33% of Gen Zers made a purchase based on influencers’ recommendations A HubSpot survey found that around one-third of Gen Zers made a purchase based on influencers’ recommendations in the past three months (when the survey was sent out).
  • 1 in 4 marketers benefit from influencer marketing While one in four marketers currently leverage the power of influencer marketing, the rate will likely increase because of the excellent return on investment (9%).
  • It’s said that nearly 20% of marketers will invest in this type of marketing for the first time in 2023.
  • In addition, 89% of marketers already using influencer marketing plan to invest even more into it.
  • Micro-influencers have a higher engagement rate (60%) than macro-influencers The size of the influencers’ following may not be that important.
  • After all, micro-influencers have a much better engagement rate (up to 60%) than macro-influencers.
  • Fun fact:50% of millennials trust the influencers they follow, while less than 40% trust their favorite celebrities.
  • Around 62% of marketers use built-in marketing or CRM software for reporting Marketing reporting (and organization) is key to reap the benefits of it.
  • Approximately 62% of marketers reported using built-in marketing or CRM software for reporting (statistics).
  • Nearly 90% of companies plan to use marketing automation Shortly, 87% of companies plan to invest in marketing automation, while only 2% say they don’t plan to use it.
  • Remember, More than 70% of successful companies use automation because it benefits them in many ways regarding growth.
  • 100% of teams where marketing and sales work together use Martech You rarely see 100% mentioned in any statistical roundup, but we’re doing it (for the first time).
  • [Infographic] 48 statistics why personalization is important in digital marketing: ─Gartner Only 15% of CMOs believe their company is on the right track with personalization ─McKinsey 42% of B2B marketers report their marketing efforts are not fully personalized.
  • ─Folloze 39% of B2B marketers say their personalized marketing strategy is only somewhat advanced, while 15% say their personalization strategy is not at all advanced.
  • ─Folloze 95% of retailers state personalization as a top strategic priority (64% say it’s a TOP 3 priority).
  • ─McKinsey 36% of retailers state that personalization is necessary just to keep up with industry changes.
  • ─McKinsey Revenue impact Personalizing web experiences creates a 19% uplift in sales.
  • ─ Instapage 87% of marketers report a measurable lift from personalization, while 54% of marketers report a lift of more than 10%, and 13% report more than 30%.
  • ─ Evergage 15% of retailers saw 100-300% increase in new customer conversions.
  • ─McKinsey Companies that personalize their content can increase revenue 10% or more in retail.
  • ─McKinsey Offering helpful messages requires a depth of customer insight that can increase brand intent, purchase and repurchase rates, and cart size up to 20%.
  • ─Gartner 44% of consumers say they are likely to do repeat purchases after a personalized shopping experience.
  • ─Segment 49% of shoppers have bought a product they initially didn’t intend to buy after a personalized recommendation.
  • Meanwhile, 40% say they bought something more expensive because of a personalized experience.
  • ─Segment 21% of retailers saw customer traffic double, while 59% saw traffic increase 25-50%.
  • ─McKinsey Customer experience and brand 52% of consumers and 65% of B2B buyers are likely to switch brands/vendors if a company doesn’t personalize their communications to them.
  • ─Salesforce 54% of B2B buyers want personalized recommendations across all interactions with a company.
  • ─Evergage 98% of marketers agree personalization helps them create a better customer relationship.
  • ─Evergage 71% of consumers feel frustrated by the lack of personalization when shopping.
  • ─McKinsey Consumer expectations drive personalization efforts in retail and 46% of retailers see personalization as a way to be more customer-centric.
  • ─McKinsey 74% of millennials are frustrated with brands that send irrelevant and generic emails.
  • ─SmarterHQ 82% of B2B buyers want the same experience as when they’re buying for themselves.
  • ─Salesforce 72% of business buyers expect vendors to personalise engagement to their needs.
  • ─Salesforce For 84% of customers, being treated like a person, rather than number is very important to win their business.
  • ─McKinsey Personalization can make marketing 10-20% more efficient by saving costs.
  • ─Alterra Group Personalization can increase marketing spend efficiency by 30%.
  • ─Adweek 10% of retailers believe personalized marketing can also help them achieve higher marketing budget efficiency.
  • ─McKinsey Challenges Marketing leaders also report that 78% of them struggle to scale personalization, partly due to a lack of key competencies in the organization.
  • ─Gartner 54% of B2B marketers believe personalization is harder for B2B than B2C.
  • ─Folloze 67% of retailers state gathering, integrating, and synthesizing data needed for personalization as the greatest challenge.
  • ─ McKinsey 41% of retailers state delivering personalized marketing was hindered by finding the right solutions partner.
  • State Of Content Marketing:125+ Latest Content Marketing Statistics For 2023 – Smemark: According to a recent survey, a massive 72% of marketing professionals today describe their content marketing campaigns as falling between flat-out ineffective and only mildly effective.
  • Content marketing usage statistics 82% of marketers are actively investing in content marketing, 10% report not using content marketing, and 8% are unsure if their company uses content marketing.
  • (2021) Image Source:Hubspot 60% of marketers report that content marketing generates demand/leads.
  • In addition, 70% of marketers say that content marketing helps to educate the audience, and 60% say that it helps build loyalty with existing clients/customers.
  • (2021) Image Source:CMI 81% of marketers view content as a core business strategy (2021).
  • Image Source:CMI About 66% of marketers expected to increase their content marketing budget in 2022.
  • (2022) Image Source:CMI 59% of companies reported having 1-5 employees dedicated to content marketing.
  • (2022) Image Source:CMI Content marketing strategy statistics Only 5% of B2B marketers don’t plan to develop a content marketing strategy (2022).
  • Image Source:eMarketer 51% of the businesses that invest in content marketing publish content every day (The Manifest).
  • (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) Image Source:CMI Only 40% of B2B organizations reported having a documented content marketing strategy.
  • (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) Image Source:CMI The top five areas of investment for 2022:video (69%), events (digital, in-person, hybrid) (61%), owned-media assets (57%), paid media (55%), social media management/community building (39%).
  • (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) Image Source:CMI The five most common content marketing goals in 2021:creating brand awareness (80%), building credibility/trust (75%), educating audiences (70%), building loyalty with existing customers/clients (60%), and generating demand/leads (60%).
  • (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) Image Source:CMI On average, content marketers reported that 69% of the content they create is for the top of the funnel.
  • Only 43% of the content they create is for the middle of the funnel, 20% for the bottom, and 18% for retention.
  • (The State of Content Marketing 2020 by SEMrush) Image Source:SEMrush Content marketing ROI statistics 72% of the most successful marketers in North America measure the ROI of their content marketing (eMarketer).
  • Image Source:eMarketer Of marketers surveyed, 83% measure the success of their content based on website engagement (69%), conversions (67%), website traffic (65%), email engagement (64%), or social media analytics (51%).
  • Image Source:CMI In the past 12 months, most B2B marketers reported content marketing being most effective in creating brand awareness (80%), building credibility/trust (75%), and educating audiences (70%).
  • (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) 60% of marketers report that content marketing generates demand/leads.
  • In addition, 70% of marketers say that content marketing helps to educate the audience, and 60% say that it helps build loyalty with existing clients/customers (CMI).
  • Image Source:CMI Content distribution statistics 76% of B2B marketers reported increasing (45%) or maintaining (31%) their paid content distribution investment in the past 12 months.
  • (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) Image Source:CMI Social media remains the most popular with 77% of content marketers using paid distribution on various platforms as part of their content strategy.
  • (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) The top five B2B organic (non-paid) social media platforms that produced the best results in the last 12 months:LinkedIn (77%), Facebook (37%), Instagram (27%), YouTube (21%), and Twitter (17%).
  • (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) More than half (58%) of B2B content marketers said virtual events/webinars/online courses produced the best results for their content marketing in the last 12 months.
  • (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) LinkedIn is the social media platform most frequently used for B2B content distribution (75%), followed by Facebook (69%) and Instagram (30%).
  • (Demand Gen Report 2021 Content Preferences Survey Report) Image Source:Demand Gen LinkedIn is used by 96% of B2B content marketers (CMI).
  • B2C marketers who use at least two organic social media platforms report that Facebook (59%) and Instagram (21%) produce the best overall content marketing results (CMI).
  • Only 28% of B2B marketers don’t use paid content distribution channels (CMI).
  • Only 28% of B2C marketers don’t use paid content distribution channels (CMI).
  • 82% of marketers reported that video has become more important than ever as a medium.
  • (State of Video 2022 by Vidyard) Image Source:Vidyard YouTube remains the most widely used video platform for content marketers, with 88% of video marketers planning to use it in 2022.
  • (State of Video Marketing 2022 by Wyzowl) The number of marketers using TikTok as a marketing tool has increased 13% from last year to 33%.
  • (Statista) Image Source:Statista B2B content marketing statistics Only 4% of B2B marketers don’t plan to develop a content marketing strategy (CMI).
  • 87% of B2B marketers prioritize the audience’s informational needs over the organization’s sales/promotional messages (CMI).
  • 78% of B2B marketers employ keyword research for SEO while creating content (CMI).
  • Only 28% of B2B marketers don’t use paid content distribution channels (CMI).
  • LinkedIn is the social media platform most frequently used for B2B content distribution (75%), followed by Facebook (69%) and Instagram (30%).
  • (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) Only 40% of B2B organizations reported having a documented content marketing strategy.
  • (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) About 50% of all B2B marketers said they outsource content marketing activities, and 65% said their biggest challenge is finding partners with adequate subject matter expertise.
  • (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) The top five B2B organic (non-paid) social media platforms that produced the best results in the last 12 months:LinkedIn (77%), Facebook (37%), Instagram (27%), YouTube (21%), and Twitter (17%).
  • (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) More than half (58%) of B2B content marketers said virtual events/webinars/online courses produced the best results for their content marketing in the last 12 months.
  • Only 6% of B2C marketers don’t plan to develop a content marketing strategy (CMI).
  • B2C marketers who use at least two organic social media platforms report that Facebook (59%) and Instagram (21%) produce the best overall content marketing results (CMI).
  • Only 28% of B2C marketers don’t use paid content distribution channels (CMI).
  • 73% of B2C marketers employ keyword research for SEO while creating content (CMI).
  • Organic search statistics 68% of online experiences begin with a search engine (Brightedge).
  • 53% of shoppers say they always do research before a purchase to ensure they are making the best possible choice (Google).
  • In 2020, 75% of content marketers reported that organic search (aka SEO) was the most effective content marketing tactic they implemented during the year.
  • That was followed by updating and repurposing existing content, a strategy used by 61% of respondents.
  • (The State of Content Marketing 2020 by SEMrush) 69% of marketers actively invest in SEO (HubSpot).
  • 71% of marketers say that targeting strategic keywords is their top SEO tactic (HubSpot).
  • (Ahrefs) Image Source:Ahrefs 78% of B2B marketers employ keyword research for SEO while creating content (CMI).
  • 73% of B2C marketers employ keyword research for SEO while creating content (CMI).
  • How-to articles are the most popular content formats (77%), followed by news and trends (49%), and guides and ebooks (47%) (Statista).
  • Long articles/posts stood out as an area where those who are most successful reported better results than respondents overall (43% vs.
  • (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) Long reads of 3000+ words get 138% more traffic than those with fewer than 500.
  • (The State of Content Marketing 2022 by SEMrush) 78% of articles with fewer than 500 words haven’t been shared, period.
  • Articles with seven or fewer words in their H1 average 36% more organic traffic than those with 14 or more words.
  • 70% of viewers bought from a brand after seeing it on YouTube (Google).
  • (State of Video 2022 by Vidyard) 79% of people say they’ve been convinced to buy or download a piece of software or app by watching a video (Wyzowl).
  • That number jumps to 96% when asked if a video convinced them to buy a product or service.
  • (State of Video Marketing 2021 by Wyzowl) 96% of people have watched an explainer video to learn more about a product or service (Wyzowl).
  • 69% of respondents prefer to learn about a product or service from a short video.
  • In fact, articles with more than three videos generated 55% more backlinks than those with none.
  • (State of Video Marketing 2021 by Wyzowl) This number was consistent in 2021 but has grown from 85% in 2020, 81% in 2018, 63% in 2017, and 61% in 2016.
  • YouTube remains the most widely used video platform for content marketers, with 88% of video marketers planning to use it in 2022.
  • (State of Video Marketing 2022 by Wyzowl) The number of marketers using TikTok as a marketing tool has increased 13% from last year to 33%.
  • (State of Video Marketing 2022 by Wyzowl) A whopping 92% of marketers who use video say that it’s an important part of their content marketing strategy.
  • (State of Video Marketing 2022 by Wyzowl) An overwhelming 92% of video marketers feel the level of noise and competition has increased in the last year.
  • (State of Video Marketing 2021 by Wyzowl) 91% of marketers feel the pandemic has made video more important for brands (Wyzowl).
  • (State of Video Marketing 2022 by Wyzowl) 86% say video has helped them generate leads.
  • (State of Video Marketing 2022 by Wyzowl) 49% of video marketers say video has reduced the number of support calls they’ve received – up 6% from last year.
  • (State of Video Marketing 2022 by Wyzowl) 94% say video has helped increase user understanding of their product or service.
  • (State of Video Marketing 2022 by Wyzowl) 81% of video marketers say video has directly helped increase sales, and 87% of video marketers say video gives them a good return on their investment.
  • (State of Video Marketing 2021 by Wyzowl) About 91% of marketers say their webinars have been a success, making it the most effective video marketing channel, according to State of Video Marketing 2021 by Wyzowl.
  • 82% of marketers reported that video has become more important than ever as a medium.
  • (State of Video 2022 by Vidyard) 93% of content marketers believe that video converts the same or better than other forms of content.
  • (State of Video 2022 by Vidyard) About 74% of B2B consumers are only willing to spend 10 minutes or less watching video content, while 44% won’t spend more than 5 minutes.
  • (Demand Gen Report 2020 Content Preferences Survey Report) About 35% are willing to watch 30-60 minutes if it is a webinar.
  • 9% of B2B decision-makers use YouTube to research purchases (Hootsuite).
  • 51% of B2B marketers reported webinars/webcasts/web series delivering the best results for them in the past 12 months.
  • 80% of podcast listeners listen to all or most of each episode (Podcast Insights).
  • Posts with more than seven images get 116% more organic traffic than articles containing just text.
  • (The State of Content Marketing 2022 by SEMrush) Audience behavior and preferences statistics 55% of respondents said they relied even more on content to research and inform purchase decisions than they did in 2021.
  • (Demand Gen Report 2022 Content Preferences Survey Report) A majority of B2B buyers (62%) said they engage with 3-7 pieces of content before connecting with a salesperson, and 11% said they typically consume more than seven pieces of content.
  • (Demand Gen Report 2022 Content Preferences Survey Report) 51% of B2B buyers reported that “using data and research to support claims” made content more memorable and more likely to trigger a sales call for them.
  • (Demand Gen Report 2022 Content Preferences Survey Report) 39% of B2B buyers reported that B2B vendors could improve their content by curbing sales messages.
  • (Demand Gen Report 2022 Content Preferences Survey Report) 37% of B2B buyers reported that B2B vendors could improve their effectiveness by creating shorter content.
  • (Demand Gen Report 2022 Content Preferences Survey Report) 41% of B2B buyers reported putting more emphasis on the trustworthiness of the source of content.
  • (Demand Gen Report 2022 Content Preferences Survey Report) About 43% of people said they find research/survey reports to be most valuable when researching B2B purchases.
  • (Demand Gen Report 2022 Content Preferences Survey Report) 52% of B2B buyers report that they would like to see content organized by topic according to issue/pain point, 51% by topics, 46% by industry/vertical, and 42% by business role.
  • (Demand Gen Report 2022 Content Preferences Survey Report) In the early stages of their buyer’s journeys, 81% of B2B buyers report enjoying listicles, 72% infographics, 66% blogs, and 62% videos.
  • (Demand Gen Report 2021 Content Preferences Survey Report) In the mid-stage of their buying journey, 50% want to see assessments, 49% research and reports, and 46% case studies.
  • (Demand Gen Report 2021 Content Preferences Survey Report) Case studies (35%), third-party reports (31%), and assessments (18%) are preferred in the late stages.
  • (Demand Gen Report 2021 Content Preferences Survey Report) About 74% of B2B consumers are only willing to spend 10 minutes or less watching video content, while 44% won’t spend more than 5 minutes.
  • (State of Video Marketing 2022 by Wyzowl) When asked how they’d most like to learn about a product or service, 73% of respondents said they’d prefer to watch a short video than read a blog post, view an infographic, or watch a webinar, among other things.
  • (State of Video Marketing 2022 by Wyzowl) 85% of people want to see more videos from brands in 2021 (Wyzowl).
  • 53% of shoppers say they always do research before a purchase to ensure they are making the best possible choice (Google).
  • Sexism, price deflation, social media spend:5 killer stats to start your week – Marketing Week: Majority of filmmakers say the ad industry is sexist New research reveals 84% of filmmakers – 76% of males and 87% of females – think the ad industry is sexist, while 73% of female directors say they’ve witnessed sexism first hand while working in the sector.
  • Another 56% of female directors claim they would have more of a chance at winning a brief if they were a man.
  • And only 19% of female filmmakers say they have not been impacted by the gender pay gap.
  • Currently, 93% of ads are made by men while just 12% of creative directors in London are female.
  • Additionally, 71% of filmmakers [male and female] believe a lack of female directors is having a negative impact on the creative work in the ad industry.
  • 7% of marketers suggesting they are able to prove its impact quantitatively, and 39.
  • 3% of marketers who said they were able to quantify results last year, and the 45% who were unable to prove social’s impact.
  • Three-quarters of consumers would switch to a new brand for cheaper prices Three-quarters of consumers say they would consider switching to a new brand if it offered cheaper prices (76%), better quality (76%), a discount (72%) or enabled them to save time (60%).
  • This is despite just 24% saying they consider brands they haven’t tried before when making new purchases, indicating customers tend to stick with what they know.
  • TV (45%) and online search (43%) are the key ways for consumers to find out about a new product or service.
  • Visual Content Marketing Statistics:52 Must-Know Insights: Research indicates that articles with images receive 94% more views than those without, while videos on landing pages can increase conversion rates by 80%.
  • Furthermore, 65% of senior marketing executives believe that visual assets (photos, videos, illustrations) are core to how marketers communicate their brand story.
  • 65% of people are visual learners, making visual content an essential part of any marketing strategy.
  • Moreover, marketing statistics show that visual content receives 94% more views than text-only content, highlighting its effectiveness in capturing audience attention.
  • Posts with images on social media platforms also receive 150% more engagement compared to those without visuals, according to marketing statistics.
  • Furthermore, marketers utilizing visual content marketing strategies experience a 27% higher click-through rate, demonstrating how visual elements can drive user interaction and conversion rates.
  • The demand for visual content among marketers has surged by 40% in the past year, reflecting its growing significance in brand communication and engagement strategies, according to marketing statistics.
  • Brands that incorporated compelling visuals into their storytelling witnessed a remarkable 20% increase in customer engagement during these challenging times, according to marketers.
  • Moreover, marketers reported that virtual events and webinars using engaging visual content experienced an unprecedented surge in attendance by an astounding 200%, according to a source.
  • The Power of Video Marketing ROI Impact Businesses that invest in visual content marketing, according to marketers, have a 63% higher chance of achieving positive ROI, as reported by the source.
  • Visual content increases conversion rates by an average of 86% according to marketers.
  • Companies that use video marketing, according to marketers, grow their revenue 49% faster than those that don’t.
  • This is evident from the substantial increase in conversion rates in the market, with an average boost of 86% as a source, showcasing the effectiveness of visual elements in driving consumer action.
  • Furthermore, businesses leveraging video marketing experience accelerated revenue growth, outpacing their counterparts by 49%.
  • Interactive visuals, such as quizzes or polls, boost user engagement in the market by up to 80%.
  • Incorporating relevant images into articles significantly amplifies their visibility and reach, garnering a staggering 94% more total views compared to text-only articles, according to visual content marketing statistics.
  • Interactive visuals, like quizzes or polls embedded within content, play a pivotal role in boosting user engagement levels substantially upwards by up to an impressive margin of 80% in the market.
  • Over 50% of consumers say they are more likely to purchase after watching a shoppable video, according to visual content marketing statistics.
  • Brands using shoppable videos report an average increase in sales of 30% according to visual content marketing statistics.
  • Websites with visually appealing layouts experience a 38% lower bounce rate in the market compared to those without.
  • Furthermore, visual content has been found to increase the average time spent on a website by an impressive 47% in the market.
  • Moreover, tweets accompanied by visual content receive an astounding 150% more retweets than those comprising text only.
  • It’s been found that visual posts generate an astounding 650% higher engagement in the market than text-only ones.
  • Posts with relevant visuals in the market also boast a 180% higher engagement rate compared to those without.
  • Businesses leveraging Instagram Stories experience a substantial increase in reach and engagement in the visual content market – typically ranging from 15% to as high as 25%.
  • A staggering 73% of consumers express their inclination to purchase from brands that use high-quality images in the visual content market.
  • 5% increase in conversion rates, showcasing the power of authentic visuals in driving consumer action.
  • Research indicates that consumers are a striking 85% more likely to purchase after watching a product video, emphasizing the persuasive influence of videos in conveying product details effectively in the visual content market.
  • Studies reveal that individuals can retain up to 65% of product information three days after exposure if it is presented visually—a testament to the effectiveness and memorability of visual stimuli.
  • High-quality product images hold immense potential for driving conversions, as they result in an impressive 63% higher conversion rate compared to lower-quality or non-visual representations.
  • By 2022, 84% of communications will be visual, making it the most important type of content for 32% of marketers.
  • Implementing a well-thought-out strategy centered around visual content can significantly impact website traffic, potentially leading to an increase of up to 300%.
  • Statistics show that tweets with visual content receive 18% more clicks, 89% more likes, and a staggering 150% more retweets than text-only tweets.
  • Including visual content in a tweet can increase engagement by a substantial 35% in the market.
  • Moreover, tweets with images have a remarkable 55% higher chance of being retweeted compared to those without visuals.
  • Moreover, consumers are found to be 71% more likely to make a purchase based on social media referrals that include visual content such as photos or videos.
  • Research indicates that users spend 10% more time viewing video ads compared to static ads, highlighting the captivating nature of videos in retaining viewer interest.
  • For instance, incorporating engaging visuals can increase the time spent on a webpage by up to 100%.
  • Studies show that memes can increase brand awareness by up to 60% among these demographics.
  • Brands that successfully incorporate memes into their marketing strategy experience a significant 55% increase in engagement.
  • Live video streaming has gained immense popularity, with 82% of internet users preferring this dynamic form of content over traditional social media posts.
  • Approximately 71% of consumers anticipate encountering AR applications while browsing products online or in-store.
  • Strategies for Visual Content Success Implementing Tactics Optimizing images for SEO can significantly boost organic search visibility, with a potential increase of up to 63%.
  • Studies show that posts with images receive 94% more views than those without.
  • Video marketing has proven to be highly effective, with 85% of businesses using video reporting as an effective tool.
  • Social media platforms heavily favor visual content, with visuals generating 650% higher engagement than text-only posts.
  • Articles containing relevant images get 94% more total views compared to those without visuals.
  • Social Media Marketing ROI Statistics [Fresh Research] • Gitnux: 40% of social media marketers believe paid advertising is more effective than organic reach for ROI.
  • 46% of marketers say their main challenge in measuring social media ROI is determining the appropriate metrics to use.
  • Posts with images produce 650% higher engagement rates than text-only posts in social media marketing.
  • On average, companies allocate 9% of their marketing budgets to social media marketing.
  • B2B marketers see having the wrong target audience as the biggest barrier to ROI on social media (26%).
  • 51% of retailers say social media drives at least 10% of their website traffic.
  • The Most Important Statistics 83% of marketers say that social media return on investment (ROI) is difficult to measure.
  • Social Media Marketing Roi Statistics Overview 40% of social media marketers believe paid advertising is more effective than organic reach for ROI.
  • 46% of marketers say their main challenge in measuring social media ROI is determining the appropriate metrics to use.
  • Posts with images produce 650% higher engagement rates than text-only posts in social media marketing.
  • On average, companies allocate 9% of their marketing budgets to social media marketing.
  • B2B marketers see having the wrong target audience as the biggest barrier to ROI on social media (26%).
  • 51% of retailers say social media drives at least 10% of their website traffic.
  • 2022 Social Media Usage Statistics in the UAE – Award-Winning Marketing Agency in Dubai: According to a new study reported by the Telecommunications and Digital Government Regulatory Authority, the UAE has a usage rate of 106% — the only place on the globe to surpass 100%.
  • 5%) More people spend their time accessing these social media platforms on their mobile devices than on desktop or laptop computers.
  • So far, nearly 70% of total internet users use more than one social network.
  • At least 80% of people active on these social networks are on Facebook at least once a day.
  • 70% Social Media Advertising in the UAE Social media advertising is huge in the UAE, just like in other countries.
  • Most of these users are in the 25 to 34 age group, with 30% accounting for men and 13.
  • Access account.hibu.com. Hibu Performance Dashboard | Hibu digital marketing results, stats and tools: 1 s 45/100 10% TBT (Total Blocking Time) Value550 ms 54/100 30% CLS (Cumulative Layout Shift) Value0.
  • We found that 66% of them (27 requests) were addressed to the original Account.
  • Requests Breakdown Number of requests can be reduced by 20 (65%) Requests Now 31 After Optimization 11 Images JavaScript CSS The browser has sent 31 CSS, Javascripts, AJAX and image requests in order to completely render the main page of Account Hibu.
  • Visual Content Marketing Statistics [Fresh Research] • Gitnux: 60% of marketers predict that the use of infographics will increase in 2021 compared to 2020.
  • 74% of marketers say that more than 70% of their content contains visual elements.
  • 54% of consumers want to see more video content from a brand or business they support.
  • 72% of marketer respondents said video content converts more than written content.
  • The search volume for “infographic” increased by 800% between 2010 and 2012.
  • Visual assets get 40 times more shares, articles with images receive 94% more views, and videos result in 1200% more shares.
  • About 80% of marketers use visuals, infographics increase traffic by up to 12%, and 60% predict more infographic use.
  • Visuals grab attention and help comprehension, as 90% of information processed is visual and 65% of people are visual learners.
  • Around 95% prefer short videos for purchase decisions, and 74% of content has imagery or graphics.
  • Tweets with images get 150% higher retweets, and Facebook posts with pictures see 2.
  • Videos are used by 85% for promotion and 72% believe they convert better.
  • Visuals in blog posts hold attention 37 seconds longer, and emails with images have 46% higher click-through rates.
  • Infographics are shared 3 times faster, with search volume increasing 800% from 2010 to 2012.
  • 60% of marketers predict that the use of infographics will increase in 2021 compared to 2020.
  • Knowing that 65% of people are visual learners, it is essential for marketers to create content that appeals to this demographic in order to maximize their reach and engagement.
  • 74% of marketers say that more than 70% of their content contains visual elements.
  • 54% of consumers want to see more video content from a brand or business they support.
  • 72% of marketer respondents said video content converts more than written content.
  • The search volume for “infographic” increased by 800% between 2010 and 2012.
  • Content Marketing Statistics:The Facts You Can’t Ignore: (Forbes) Email campaigns (87%) and educational content (77%) are the top content marketing methods B2B marketing teams use to nurture their audience.
  • (Content Marketing Institute) 57% of B2B buyers make their purchase decision before ever speaking to a salesperson.
  • (SERP Watch) 91% of B2B marketers use content marketing to reach customers.
  • (Content Marketing Institute) 72% of marketers who have used content marketing say it has increased their number of leads.
  • (Content Marketing Institute) 69% of content is created for the top of the funnel.
  • 43% is created for the middle, 20% for the bottom, and 18% for retention.
  • (SEMRush) After reading custom content, 82% of consumers feel more positive about a brand.
  • (HubSpot) 75% of content marketers say they drive better ROI when they add visuals to their content.
  • (Brightedge) Google is responsible for more than 90% of the world’s search queries online.
  • (SparkToro) 95% of people only look at the first page of search results.
  • (Brafton) 53% of shoppers say they always do online research before making a purchase to ensure they are making the best possible choice.
  • (Bright Edge Research) 75% of brands say the most efficient content marketing tactic they use is search engine optimization.
  • Companies with blogs generate 67% more leads per month than companies without.
  • (Demand Metric) Companies that blog receive 97% more links to their website.
  • (SERP Watch) 70% of people prefer to get information from blogs than traditional advertisements.
  • (Demand Metric) 56% of marketers who leverage blogging say it’s effective and 10% say it generates the biggest return on investment.
  • (HubSpot) How-to articles are the most popular content formats (77%), followed by news and trends (49%), and guides and ebooks (47%).
  • (Medium) 54% of decision-makers say they spend more than one hour per week reading and reviewing thought-leadership content.
  • (Siegemedia) 55% of marketers say blog content creation is their number one inbound marketing priority.
  • (HubSpot) 47% of B2B customers view three to five posts before talking to a salesperson.
  • (Curata) 65% of companies that succeed in content marketing run content audits more than twice a year.
  • (Statista) 72% of consumers prefer their marketing communication to be via email over other channels.
  • (SERP Watch) 87% of B2B marketers say email is one of their top free organic distribution channels.
  • (Content Marketing Institute) Segmented emails have conversion rates 208% higher than batch-and-blast.
  • (SERP Watch) Marketers who use segmented email campaigns noted as much as a 760% increase in revenue.
  • (HubSpot) 74% of Baby Boomers think email is the most personal channel to communicate with brands.
  • (Content Writing Jobs) Fridays see the highest email open rates (nearly 19%), compared to the lowest open rates (17%) on Saturdays.
  • (Statista) 31% of B2B marketers say email newsletters are the best way to nurture leads.
  • Can you believe that content marketers who use video get around 66% more leads per year and adding video content to your website can drive an 80% increase in conversion rates?
  • (HubSpot) 75% of consumers aged 18-34 watch videos at least once daily.
  • (Aberdeen Group) 26% of consumers are less likely to finish a video if they need to turn their phones horizontally to watch.
  • (Google) 46% of content marketers who leverage short-form video consider it effective.
  • (HubSpot) 60% of people would rather buy a product recommended by a YouTuber than one recommended by a movie or TV star.
  • (SERP Watch) 88% of video marketers feel that video gives them a positive ROI.
  • (Wyzowl) 39% of viewers would never watch a video from a brand again if they had a negative viewing experience on mobile.
  • (Animoto) 79% of people say they’ve been convinced to buy or download a piece of software or app by watching a video.
  • (Wyzowl) 43% of video marketers say video has reduced the number of support calls they’ve received.
  • (Wyzowl) 96% of people have watched an explainer video to learn more about a product or service.
  • (Oberlo) 54% of Gen Z and 49% of Millenials say social media is their preferred channel for ad influence.
  • (Hubspot) 92% of B2B marketers prefer LinkedIn to other social networks.
  • (SERP Watch) LinkedIn is 277% more effective at lead generation than Facebook or Twitter.
  • (Hubspot) 82% of B2B markers report finding the greatest success on LinkedIn.
  • (LinkedIn Marketing Solutions) Over 46% of all social media traffic to company websites comes from LinkedIn.
  • (LinkedIn) 79% of people say that user-generated content on social media significantly impacts their purchasing decisions.
  • (Stackla) 64% of consumers report that watching a marketing video on Facebook has influenced a purchase decision.
  • (Hubspot) 85% of marketers rank short-form videos as the most effective type of social media content.
  • (DataBox) 93% of Twitter community members are open to brands getting involved in the conversation, such as providing help and support.
  • (Instagram) Answering a complaint on social media can increase customer advocacy by 25%.
  • (Convince & Convert) 83% of people use Instagram to discover new products and services and 87% said they took a specific action, like making a purchase, after seeing product information.
  • 45% of global internet users between 25-34 listen to podcasts (BuzzSprout) 43% of monthly podcast users listen to an entire podcast episode (Edison Research) Spotify is the most popular online audio brand.
  • (Podcast Insights 2021) 65% of podcast listeners listen to an entire podcast episode.
  • (Forbes) 78% of B2B buyers use case studies when researching purchases.
  • (SERP Watch) 76% of buyers say they will share information in exchange for a white paper, 63% for an e-book, and 57% for a case study.
  • Approximately 80% of companies that do PPC marketing use Google AdWords.
  • PPC visitors are 50% more likely to complete a desired action, such as call, book, or purchase, compared to organic visitors.
  • Over 65% of people trust Google ads compared to ads on Facebook or TikTok.
  • Approximately 83% of Millennials open text messages within the first 90 seconds of receipt.
  • Over 80% of consumers have received marketing SMS messages from a business.
  • Over 75% of consumers have a positive perception of companies that offer SMS communication.
  • Source:G2 Not only that, but also 60% of consumers believe businesses should contact them more through text messages.
  • Effective Dental Marketing for Millennials and Gen Z Patients Content Marketing Per lead, inbound marketing costs 62% less than outbound marketing tactics, such as PPC ads.
  • Source:B2B Content Marketing Trends Report Approximately 70% of consumers read reviews before deciding on a product/ business.
  • Source:Think with Google A whopping 95% of search engine users never go beyond page one of the search results.
  • Source:Fresh Chalk In 92% of the searches that contain a city and a business category, Yelp makes it into the top five results.
  • Digital Marketing vs. Traditional Marketing Statistics [Fresh Research] • Gitnux: Consumers are 68% more likely to open an email about entertainment, events, or hobbies than traditional business correspondence.
  • 66% of marketers believe that traditional advertising is less effective than digital advertising.
  • Nearly 60% of adults prefer to receive marketing information via email.
  • Over 75% of consumers prefer to see ads that are relevant to them instead of generic ads for a product.
  • 85% of marketers believe that targeting and personalization in digital marketing campaigns is more effective than traditional marketing.
  • In 2021, digital marketing’s share of total ad spending worldwide is set to reach 50%.
  • 45% of small businesses invest in both digital and print marketing channels.
  • Consumers spend 40% of their media time on digital media, surpassing traditional media.
  • 72% of consumers prefer to receive marketing content via email rather than social media.
  • Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates approximately 3 times as many leads.
  • 77% of consumers stated that they have been convinced to buy a product after watching a video, underscoring the power of digital marketing.
  • The Most Important Statistics 88% of businesses will engage in digital marketing in 2021, leaving only 12% solely focused on traditional marketing.
  • Consumers are 68% more likely to open an email about entertainment, events, or hobbies than traditional business correspondence.
  • Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics Overview 66% of marketers believe that traditional advertising is less effective than digital advertising.
  • Nearly 60% of adults prefer to receive marketing information via email.
  • Over 75% of consumers prefer to see ads that are relevant to them instead of generic ads for a product.
  • 85% of marketers believe that targeting and personalization in digital marketing campaigns is more effective than traditional marketing.
  • In 2021, digital marketing’s share of total ad spending worldwide is set to reach 50%.
  • 45% of small businesses invest in both digital and print marketing channels.
  • Consumers spend 40% of their media time on digital media, surpassing traditional media.
  • 72% of consumers prefer to receive marketing content via email rather than social media.
  • Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates approximately 3 times as many leads.
  • 77% of consumers stated that they have been convinced to buy a product after watching a video, underscoring the power of digital marketing.
  • 88% of businesses will engage in digital marketing while only 12% focus solely on traditional methods.
  • Consumers are 68% more likely to open emails about entertainment than business correspondence and 66% of marketers believe that traditional advertising is less effective than its digital counterpart.
  • Additionally, nearly 60% of adults prefer email as their primary source for receiving information from brands and over 75 percent want ads tailored specifically towards them instead of generic content.
  • 45 B2B Content Marketing Statistics You Should Know in 2023: The B2B marketing teams with the highest success rates spend 40% of the marketing budget on content marketing.
  • According to the Content Marketing Institute, 93% of content on B2B sites receives no links from other sites.
  • 77% of B2B agencies and companies offer an email newsletter as a major part of their content marketing plan.
  • 5% of American companies with 100 or more employees utilized digital content marketing strategies, while 87% of B2B companies used digital content marketing in the same year.
  • The top 5 formats that B2B marketers used as a channel to distribute content for marketing purposes are email (93%), social media (92%), blog posts (79%) real-life and in-person events (56%), virtual events, and webinars (55%).
  • Surprisingly, only 42% of B2B content marketing conduct audience research by speaking directly with their customers.
  • As per Search Engine Watch, 66% of all B2B marketers use paid channels to distribute their content.
  • 60% of customers consider inquiring and buying a product after reading any kind of content about it, based on a study done by Demand Metric.
  • 92% of B2B and B2C marketers think of the content they produce as their most valuable marketing asset.
  • Although content marketing costs 62% less money than traditional marketing techniques.
  • 76% of people expect brands to contribute to their well being and quality of life.
  • 58% of content provided to customers is considered hollow and meaningless.
  • The top 2 most outsourced content marketing activities is writing with 44% and graphic designing with 41%.
  • 62% of B2B decision-makers still prefer to consume content on a desktop or laptop.
  • Your website is still the best place to host your content, with 63% of survey respondents going directly to a company’s website when looking for information.
  • B2B companies that offer consistent blogging have 67% more leads monthly, compared to companies that don’t blog regularly.
  • According to 52% of B2B marketers, blogging is the most essential tactic for their success in content marketing.
  • It takes 3 to 5 pieces of content before 40% of B2B buyers reach out to the seller.
  • 75% of B2B marketers are more likely to use blogging for their social media content, while 61% of B2C marketers include blogs in their content.
  • Only 2% of articles created by B2B brands result in 75% of the social shares of all B2B content.
  • In 2018, it was found that 49% of B2C marketers rely on outsourcing agencies to create their content.
  • On average, blogs with relevant images receive 94% more views compared to articles without images.
  • 68% of B2B and B2C marketers say that they plan to add more images in the future.
  • Bloggers who spend longer time creating their blog post (about 6 hours) are 56% more likely to receive better content marketing results than those who spend less time on their content creation.
  • 50% of bloggers who create long-form blog posts are more likely to expect better content marketing results.
  • Numbers in headlines are a work of magic, 36% of readers are more likely to pick and click an article with a number in the main title and headlines.
  • Social media comes third as the most effective type of content that B2B marketers use in their content marketing at 41%.
  • More than 70% of B2B marketers who’ve been using social media for the last 12 months reported that it helped them improve sales.
  • 45% of B2B marketers use social media sharing to measure the success of their marketing strategy.
  • However, 60% still believe that web traffic is the golden standard and 51% rely on sales lead quality.
  • 7 seconds looking at a given piece of content In 2018, 58% of customers reported that they prefer visual types of content on social media rather than written ones.
  • In the same research, 59% of consumers said they’re looking for posts that teach them something new.
  • 80% of social media marketers said that increasing their brand awareness is their main goal of social media marketing.
  • 84% of B2B buyers constantly share business-related posts and content on LinkedIn.
  • 78% of B2B marketing companies think that LinkedIn is the most powerful social marketing media platform for their type of content.
  • 55% of B2B buyers around the world find video the most useful type of content.
  • The B2B marketing teams with the highest success rates spend [40%](https://contentmarketinginstitute.
  • 5% of American companies with 100 or more employees utilized digital content marketing strategies, while [87%](https://www.
  • pdf) that B2B marketers used as a channel to distribute content for marketing purposes are email (93%), social media (92%), blog posts (79%) real-life and in-person events (56%), virtual events, and webinars (55%).
  • As per Search Engine Watch, 66% of all B2B marketers use paid channels to distribute their content.
  • com/blog/how-to-outsource-content-writing) is writing with 44% and graphic designing with [41%](https://www.
  • Your website is still the best place to host your content, with [63%](https://www.
  • It takes 3 to 5 pieces of content before [40%](http://e61c88871f1fbaa6388d-c1e3bb10b0333d7ff7aa972d61f8c669.
  • com/social-media-marketing-industry-report-2019/) of B2B marketers are more likely to use blogging for their social media content, while 61% of B2C marketers include blogs in their content.
  • Only 2% of articles created by B2B brands result in [75%](https://backlinko.
  • Bloggers who spend longer time creating their blog post (about 6 hours) are [56%](https://www.
  • Social media comes third as the most effective type of content that B2B marketers use in their content marketing at [41%](https://contentmarketinginstitute.
  • However, 60% still believe that web traffic is the golden standard and 51% rely on sales lead quality.
  • Content Marketing Statistics You Should Know: B2C companies spend 22% of their total marketing budget on content marketing.
  • However, most successful companies spend closer to 40% of their total marketing budget on content marketing.
  • About 86% of businesses engage in blogging, while 67% of businesses send emails.
  • 1% higher win rates than those without a content strategy (CSO Insights).
  • 80% of people prefer learning about a company through custom content (Demand Metric).
  • B2C Stats on Content Marketing When it comes to strategy for B2C content marketers, a report by the Content Marketing Institute (CMI B2C) notes:71% of B2C marketers agree that their company needs a content marketing strategy.
  • Meanwhile, 20% of marketers plan to have a documented content strategy within 12 months.
  • Insofar as the preferred content marketing format for B2C marketers, 94% chose social media marketing, and 80% prefer blogs and short articles.
  • 39% of B2C content marketers say their companies are in a sophisticated or mature phase of content marketing maturity.
  • The top strategic goals that B2C marketers have achieved through content marketing in the last 12 months are:create brand awareness (84%), educate their audience (75%), build credibility and trust (65%), and generate demand and leads (61%).
  • But interestingly, only 48% have used content to directly generate sales and revenue.
  • According to the B2B Content Marketing:Benchmarks, Budgets and Trends report by the Content Marketing Institute (CMI B2B):43% of B2B marketers have a “documented” content marketing strategy.
  • 36% of B2B marketers have a content marketing strategy, but have not documented it.
  • Another 17% plan to have a content marketing strategy in the next 12 months.
  • As far as strategic goals, additional B2B marketing stats from the Content Marketing Institute are:86% of B2B content marketers rated creating awareness of their brand as their biggest goal over the past 12 months.
  • The answers may surprise you:For B2C content marketers, only 51% measure ROI on content marketing, according to the Content Marketing Institute (CMI B2C).
  • Other top metrics are website traffic (80%), website engagement (79%), and social media analytics (76%).
  • For B2B marketers, the good news is that 81% are using metrics to track their performance.
  • Email opens, clicks, and other email stats are the next most common tracked metric at 86%.
  • But ROI for content marketing is proven and pays off, as per the following statistics:The cost of acquiring a new customer through content is around 15% less than through paid channels for subscription-based businesses (Profit Well).
  • Subscription-based businesses using content see 5-10% better retention rates (Profit Well).
  • 96% of marketers find content marketing to be effective for their companies (Zazzle).
  • For B2B company content marketing budgets (per CMI B2B):47% had an annual content marketing budget of less than $100,000.
  • For small businesses of under 100 employees, about 57% of those had budgets under $100,000.
  • Even more interesting:32% of small businesses did not have any established budget for content marketing.
  • 5% of people use online search to gather information about a product or company.
  • A 2020 report from SEMrush explains:Creating content that generates quality leads is the biggest challenge for 54% of marketers.
  • 60% of marketers do not outsource content creation at all, but apparently do it all themselves.
  • The report also reveals that 94% of marketers use social media content to raise awareness.
  • For example, 60% of smartphone users have reached out to a business directly using the search results (Think with Google).
  • About 86% of B2B marketers use their organization’s blog to distribute marketing, according to the Content Marketing Institute’s B2B Content Marketing:Benchmarks, Budgets and Trends 2020 report.
  • Companies that blog receive 55% more internet users to their websites than those that don’t blog (HubSpot).
  • According to an Edelman research survey:Around 88% of decision-makers think thought leadership is an effective tool to enhance an organization’s perceptions.
  • However, only 17% of respondents rate the quality of thought leadership they read as very good or excellent.
  • Here are useful email marketing statistics:87% of B2B marketers use emails in their content marketing (CMI B2B).
  • 80% of organizations believe that email marketing is effective to increase customer retention (Emarsys).
  • 53 to 73% of millennials prefer communications from businesses via emails (HubSpot).
  • Almost half of B2B marketing experts use white paper marketing, with 47% saying they used white papers in the last 12 months (CMI B2B).
  • 57% of B2B buyers said they are willing to share information in exchange for case studies, 63% would do so for e-books, 66% would share information in exchange for third-party or analyst reports, 76% would do so for white papers and 79% would share information in exchange for a webinar.
  • Meanwhile, 19% of buyers will exchange information for podcasts and videos, and 24% of buyers will do the same for infographics (Demand Gen Report).
  • And running content marketing campaigns costs 62% less than traditional marketing.
  • According to Wyzowl’s Video Marketing Statistics 2020 report (Wyzowl), here are some video content marketing stats:87% of those surveyed said video marketing has increased traffic to their websites, and 81% of respondents said video marketing increases the time visitors spend on the page.
  • 96% of people have said that they have watched an explainer video to understand a product or service.
  • 87% of respondents say that video marketing has increased traffic to their websites, and 81% of respondents say videos increase the time visitors spend on the page.
  • Animoto research says:About 88% of video marketers are satisfied with the ROI of video marketing efforts on social media.
  • Also, 93% of video marketers say that posting a video on social channels leads to acquiring a customer.
  • As a result, 59% of users spend more time listening to podcasts than they do on social media.
  • 3% of respondents said they bought an item after listening to an ad on a podcast.
  • 3% of podcasters state that marketing and building an audience are among their top challenges.
  • What’s more, according to The Infinite Dial report on podcasting from Edison Research, the appetite for this particular content marketing platform is growing:Consider that 75% of Americans age 12+ are now aware of podcasting, which is 5% up from 2019.
  • 49% of respondents said visuals are very important to their marketing strategy.
  • 74% of marketers said more than 70% of their content includes some form of visual.
  • 62% of respondents said they create visuals for blogs or landing pages.
  • So it is no surprise that the most commonly used visuals are stock images (40%).
  • Other frequently used visuals are original graphics (34%), videos and presentations (14%), and charts and data visualizations (8%).
  • 72% of marketers spend less than 10 hours each week producing visual content.
  • 36% of marketers use an online tool or graphic maker to create this type of content.
  • Tweets with images receive 150% more engagement than those tweets without images (Buffer).
  • The breakdown is as follows for small businesses with under 100 employees:44% have no full-time person assigned to marketing with content.
  • B2B companies spend 26% of their total marketing budget on content marketing.
  • B2C companies spend 22% of their total marketing budget on content marketing.
  • However, most successful companies spend closer to 40% of their total marketing budget on content marketing.
  • About 86% of businesses engage in blogging, while 67% of businesses send emails.
  • 15 Content Marketing Statistics that Prove the Value of Your Efforts: 8% of internet users were blocking advertising on their connected devices.
  • (Demand Metric) 70% of people would rather get information about a company or learn something from an article or blog post rather than from a traditional advertisement.
  • For instance, only 22% of millennials want to see email from a brand they support, while 57% of 45 – 54-year-olds do.
  • Conversely, 52% of millennials want to see video from brands they support while only 25% of those 45-54 do.
  • 71% of a B2B respondent pool stated they reviewed a blog while on their buying journey.
  • 32% of consumers check out a brand’s social media presence before checking out their website.
  • Podcasts were cited by 64% of B2B respondents as a valuable content format in the early stage of the buying journey — only falling short of infographics (76%) (Demand Gen Report) 6.
  • Cisco projected that more than 80% of all Internet traffic will be video by 2021—which means brands definitely need a video content strategy.
  • When asked how they’d most like to learn about a new product, over two-thirds (68%) of consumer said a short video would be best, way ahead of text-based articles (15%),infographics (4%) presentations and pitches (4%) ebooks and manuals (3%).
  • 65% of B2B content consumers strongly agree they have higher preferences for credible content from industry influencers.
  • 73% of consumers have been impacted by a brand’s social media presence when making a purchase decision.
  • Content marketing generates over three times as many leads as outbound marketing and costs 62% less.
  • (Demand Metric) Content marketing generates over three times as many leads as outbound marketing and costs 62% less.
  • 75 Digital Marketing Quotes, Facts and Statistics: Click to Tweet Source:Coschedule The best time for emails to be opened is after work hours 6pm-11pm Click to Tweet Source:Campaign Monitor Emails with personalized subject lines are 50% more likely to be opened.
  • Click to Tweet Source:Hubspot Mobile ad blocking has increased 90% year-over-year.
  • Click to Tweet Source:Hubspot Nearly 75% of digital ad spending to be mobile by 2019 Click to Tweet Source:Marketing Land Chapter 4:Content Marketing Statistics Blog posts are becoming more visual and longer.
  • Click to Tweet Source:Hubspot 11% of marketers plan to add podcasting to their marketing efforts in the next 12 months.
  • Click to Tweet Source:State of Inbound The number of monthly podcast listeners grew from 21% to 24% between 2016 and 2017 Click to Tweet Source:Edison Research 8% of marketers are planning to add the blogging platform Medium to their marketing efforts in the next 12 months.
  • 74 billion monthly smartphone users (February 2017) Click to Tweet Source:Expanded Ramblings 79% of adult internet users use Facebook.
  • Click to Tweet Source:Pew Internet 59% of Americans with social media accounts believe that social customer service makes it easier to get questions and issues resolved.
  • Click to Tweet Source:Hootsuite 28% of Americans with social media accounts prefer to engage with a brand on social media rather than go to a brick-and-mortar location.
  • Click to Tweet Source:E consultancy Almost half of retailers (46%) indicate that customers use the internet to research major products, but usually make a purchase in-store Click to Tweet Source:Forbes 72% of consumers who did a local search visited a store within five miles.
  • Click to Tweet Source:Adwords Google now handles at least 2 trillion searches per year Click to Tweet Source:Search Engine Land 50% of search queries are four words or longer.
  • Click to Tweet Source:Wordstream 40% of adults now use voice search once per day Click to Tweet Source:Branded3 Chapter 7:Display Advertising Statistics In 2016, 91% of people say ads are more intrusive today than two years ago.
  • Click to Tweet Source:Hubspot 72% of consumers say they would have a lower opinion of a brand if they subjected the consumer to a pop-up ad.
  • Click to Tweet Source:Hubspot 54% of survey respondents said they didn’t trust banner ads Click to Tweet Source:Bannersnack 58% of users say they don’t click on ads, because they aren’t relevant, and 57% are concerned about security and privacy.
  • 05% Click to Tweet Source:Smart insights Chapter 8:Video Marketing Statistics 51% of people have a lower opinion of brands that use auto playing video ads.
  • Click to Tweet Source:Animoto Companies which use videos in their marketing grow revenue 49% faster year-on-year than those which don’t.
  • Need-To-Know Content Marketing Statistics: While content marketing costs 62% less than outbound marketing, it generates more than three times as many leads.
  • Content creation ranked the highest as a contributing factor to B2B marketing success with 89%, with strategy in 2nd at 72%.
  • The prevalence of “People Also Ask” panels has risen 10X over the past three years, and is now in 85% of SERPs According to the American Marketing Association, the average U.
  • Types of Content That Bring The Most Value Adding a blog to your website can increase the chances of ranking by 434% Infographics are liked and shared on social media 3X more than any other type of content.
  • People who watch videos stay on a site two minutes longer on average and are 64% more likely to make a purchase.
  • Compounding blog posts make up 10% of all blog posts and generate 38% of overall traffic.
  • Marketers who do email marketing correctly see an average of 760% increase in revenue from segmented, customized marketing campaigns 86% of consumers would like to receive promotional emails from companies they do business with at least monthly, and 15% would like to get them daily.
  • 56% of consumers say customer testimonials are helpful Types of Content Takeaway As preferences shift from textual to visual, content marketers need to keep their ideal consumer in mind.
  • 59% of marketers say inbound produces the highest quality leads for their sales team.
  • 72% of those who have calculated ROI have confidence in their marketing strategy (only 49% of those who haven’t calculated ROI feel confident in their strategy).
  • 80% of B2B marketers will focus on lead gen as a content marketing goal over the next 12 months.
  • 78% of organization use website traffic to determine how well its content marketing is producing results.
  • The most-used B2B content marketing tactics are social media content (83%), blogs (80%), and email newsletters (77%).
  • 52% of B2B marketers said blogs were the most critical tactic for success in 2017.
  • Email is the most popular way to distribute content (93%), with LinkedIn in second at 89%.
  • B2C Content Marketing Statistics 74% of B2C marketers report having a content marketing strategy (40% said it’s documented and another 34% have a verbal strategy).
  • 76% of those who have a strategy said it includes a plan to operate content marketing as an ongoing business process, not simply as a campaign.
  • 78% of B2C marketers say they can demonstrate, with metrics, how content marketing has increased audience engagement.
  • 74% say brand awareness is a primary goal of their overall content marketing over next the 12 months.
  • Most frequently used tools in B2C are:analytics tools (78%), social media calendars (68%), and a dedicated email platform (63%).
  • When asked what techniques they use to learn about their audience(s), 59% of B2C marketers said keyword research, 54% said social listening, and 54% said website analysis.
  • Only 36% of marketers say they can demonstrate that content marketing has lowered the cost of customer acquisition, but 78% say it has increased customer engagement.
  • 60% of consumers won’t purchase from a brand with poorly written content, overly personalized content, or content that isn’t optimized for mobile B2C Takeaway It is important to recognize the value in building a long-term customer base.
  • Digital Marketing Stats Every Dentist Should Know: 32% use TV for research 20% use magazines for research 18% use newspapers Pew research reports that 80% of internet users have searched a health related topic online Google data shows us that patients are being thoughtful and strategic in their online search.
  • 48% did more than two weeks of research before scheduling an appointment 61% visited two or more hospital websites before converting For patients who book appointments digital content is the critical link to conversion.
  • Users tapped into the following resources while searching for care:83% Provider website 54% Insurance provider website 50% Health information website 26% Consumer generated reviews hbspt.
  • 34% of all adults — have downloaded at least one app that is meant to support healthy living.
  • 44% of patients searching on a mobile device end up scheduling an appointment.
  • 61% of Americans age 65 and older are now active internet users, up from 14% in 2000 Social media usage has tripled among those 65 and older since 2010.
  • (Pew) Online Content Affects Patient Decisions 41% of consumers say that content found on social media will likely impact their choice of hospital or treatment center (PwC).
  • (Greystone) 55% of health care organizations use a digital marketing firm to help with digital strategies.
  • How Social Media Impacts a Brand:The Stats | Redefine Marketing Group: Follow Us – Contact Us Search for Back Social Media 16 min read How Social Media Impacts a Brand:The Stats Author Jason Martinez Published August 15, 2019 Share via:8 Shares 8 More than 40% of digital consumers use social networks to research new brands or products.
  • 78% of people who complain to a brand via Twitter expect a response within an hour 28% of marketing agencies that face difficulties when determining the impact of social media efforts.
  • According to Instagram, 80% of Instagram users follow at least one business on Instagram, and more than 200 million people visit at least one business profile every day.
  • And 71% of consumers who have had a good social media service experience with a brand are likely to recommend it to others as reported by Ambassador.
  • According to GlobalWebIndex, more than 40% of digital consumers use social networks to research new brands or products.
  • Instagram Business states that 60% of Instagram users claim they’ve discovered at least one new product on the platform.
  • And half of Generation Z and 42% or Millenials say social media is the most relevant ad channel, according to Adobe.
  • Brandwatch says that 96% of the people that discuss brands online do not follow those brands’ owned profiles.
  • 78% of people who complain to a brand via Twitter expect a response within an hour as reported by Lithium.
  • I’m sure some of us can relate to the social media statistics from MDG that state how 44% of businesses are not able to measure the impact of social media on their business, with only 20% saying they were able to quantify the success of the social media efforts.
  • Rise above the 28% of marketing agencies that face difficulties when determining the impact of social media efforts.
  • How to Set a Social Media Marketing Budget in 2022 (Stats and Pro Tips): LinkedIn Research found that 77% of digital marketers admit they measure ROI within the first month of their campaigns, even though they know their sales cycle is 3 months or longer.
  • Similarly, Oracle Data Cloud research tells us that only 47% of a social media marketing campaign’s value is seen in analytics in the first four weeks.
  • In fact, agencies like LoudBird can cost up to 50% less than an employee.
  • Top Content Marketing Statistics for 2023:Trends & Insights: 76% of enterprise marketers say content marketing has become more important to their organization.
  • 96% of decision-makers say content marketing has been effective for their brand.
  • 88% of marketers use content marketing to achieve their goal of increasing brand awareness and building trust and credibility.
  • 80% of very successful content marketers spend more than 10% of their total marketing budgets on content.
  • 71% of content marketers planned to increase their content marketing budgets for 2023.
  • Content marketers are increasingly embracing digital channels, with 77% of businesses using social media and 64% using email to reach customers.
  • 9 out of 10 consumers expect brands to provide content, but 58% of what’s out there is not considered meaningful content.
  • User-generated content (UGC) is one of the most effective forms of content marketing, with close to 80% of consumers saying that UGC highly impacts their purchasing decisions.
  • 96% of global traffic comes from Google Search, Google Images, and Google Maps.
  • 60% of marketers get their highest quality leads from inbound marketing.
  • Fresh content performs better in search, with 27% of high-performing content only a month old or less.
  • In fact, 73% of consumers prefer to watch short-form videos when learning about something.
  • Here are even more video content marketing statistics that truly prove the power and popularity of video content:89% of consumers have been convinced to make a purchase after watching a video.
  • 96% of consumers have watched an explainer video to learn more about a product or service.
  • 96% of video marketers say videos impact their ROI by increasing brand and product awareness, generating more leads, driving traffic and sales, and reducing support queries.
  • Among marketers who do not engage in video marketing, 30% say they lack the time to do it, 18% don’t know where to start, and 10% think video is too expensive.
  • To take advantage of this trend, 70% of non-video marketers will be creating online videos for the first time in 2023.
  • When it comes to video types, 66% of video marketers are doing live-action shorts, 57% produce screen-recorded videos, and 55% are into animation.
  • 71% of marketers produce social media videos, 70% create explainer videos, 46% shoot testimonial videos, 46% do video ads, 42% launch teaser videos, and 36% focus on product demo videos.
  • According to video marketers, the most effective video marketing platforms are YouTube (78%), LinkedIn (69%), and Instagram (67%).
  • 2% of all websites, with roughly 70 million new posts and 77 million new comments added each month.
  • Companies that blog regularly receive 97% more backlinks and 67% more leads than those that don’t blog at all.
  • 92% of content marketers publish blog posts as part of their marketing strategy.
  • For B2B businesses, creating and posting more content (52%) and improving content (51%) are the top tactics for gaining more organic traffic.
  • To amplify content reach, 53% of marketers use email, 51% buy social media ads, 29% invest in sponsorships like webinars and podcasts, 28% use PR and media outreach, 25% leverage influencer marketing, 16% promote on aggregate sites like Reddit, and 11% use guest posting.
  • The trend will continue for the foreseeable future, predicting growths of 11%, 8.
  • Businesses make $2 for every $1 spent on pay-per-click ads — resulting in a 200% ROI.
  • Customers are 155% more likely to search for brand-specific terms after viewing display ads.
  • Customers are 70% more likely to make a purchase from a retargeting ad.
  • 59 billion people around the world are on social media — roughly 60% of the world’s population.
  • TikTok is the fastest-growing social media platform, with a staggering 100% growth from 2020 to 2022.
  • Facebook is the most-used platform by marketers worldwide (89%), with Instagram coming in second place (80%).
  • Reels, or short-form videos, account for 30% of the time people spend on Instagram.
  • 6% of TikTok users look for funny or entertaining content on the platform.
  • Twitter has around 556 million monthly active users worldwide, with 53% using the platform to read the latest news and discourse on trending topics.
  • Video is the most shareable type of content, with 51% of online users saying they are more likely to share a video with their friends than a social media post, blog post, or product page.
  • 50% of Millennials trust product recommendations from influencers, compared to only 38% from their favorite celebrities.
  • 89% of marketers will increase or maintain their investment in influencer marketing in 2023.
  • 68% of marketers ran influencer campaigns on Instagram in 2022, followed by Facebook (52%) and TikTok (42%).
  • Influencer videos accounted for 60% of all video views on Facebook in the US.
  • 82% of marketers think AI-generated content is just as good (or better!
  • According to 57% of marketers, it takes less than six months to learn how to use AI technology.
  • 49% of marketers believe AI is good at writing clear or easy-to-read content, but it is not very reliable when it comes to generating accurate or error-free content.
  • 7% of marketers are already using AI tools for work, with 69% adopting ChatGPT.
  • 33% of businesses plan to use ChatGPT to write website content, and 44% will use AI to write content in other languages.
  • 1% of marketers agree that understanding AI is important for their job, while 85.
  • Adopting AI in sales can increase leads by as much as 50%, reduce costs by up to 60%, and cut back call time by up to 70%.
  • 29% of marketers believe that AI in email marketing can improve revenue.
  • 33% of organizations are already using generative AI in at least one business function, and 40% plan to invest more in the technology.
  • According to a Forrester report, robots will replace 7% of jobs in the US by 2025.
  • 9% of businesses have already replaced some human tasks with AI solutions, and 81.
  • 6% of marketers think content writers’ jobs are at risk because of artificial intelligence.
  • What’s refreshing to note is that 80% of those who considered themselves to be very successful at content marketing have a documented content marketing strategy.
  • According to Sprout Social, 91% of marketing executives anticipate their company’s social media marketing budget will increase over the next three years.
  • According to Content Marketing Institute survey respondents, video production costs will make up 62% of their total marketing budget by 2023 – making video one of the most popular content formats today.
  • B2B Content Marketing Statistics:Why It’s Worth It in 2023: Despite the value that meticulously designed content marketing represents, 63% of businesses don’t have a documented gameplan when it comes to marketing.
  • This reflects changing buyer habits too, with 55% of B2B buyers relying more on content to make purchasing decisions in 2022 than they did in 2021.
  • Indeed, more than one in ten (13%) of B2B marketers believed a steady supply of leads was the best way to keep up relations with their sales team.
  • Here’s what one told us:Heat Pump Source “We increased our traffic by over 900% by using SEO for content marketing.
  • 8 billion social media users globally in April 2023, which amounts to almost 60% of the total global population.
  • Social media has undoubtedly made itself a key channel for marketing, as 75% of B2B buyers use social media to make purchase decisions.
  • It will come as no surprise then, that 89% of B2B marketers use LinkedIn to generate leads.
  • A rather remarkable 15% of B2B leaders used TikTok to market their businesses in 2022.
  • ” Angel Martins, Marketing Specialist – Blogging StatisticsAccording to the Content Marketing Institute, 60% of B2B marketers struggle with creating engaging content, yet it’s crucially important to get your blogging right as 71% of B2B buyers read at least one blog post during their research.
  • For instance, just one in five (21%) of B2B companies used video marketing in 2022, according to Sagefrog Marketing Group.
  • Yet the same report found 32% are looking to explore video marketing more in 2023.
  • B2B SEO Statistics To Help You Justify Your Marketing Spend: With 34% of these qualified leads originating from SEO, it’s evident that organic search plays a crucial role in the B2B buyer’s journey.
  • According to 57% of B2B marketers, SEO generates more leads than any other marketing initiative.
  • With 57% of B2B marketers highlighting SEO as their primary lead source, it suggests that SEO is not only effective but also offers a favorable return on investment compared to other marketing channels.
  • B2B marketers who have blogs get 67% more leads than those who don’t (Optinmonster) Purchase decisions in the B2B space are often based on trust, expertise, and thought leadership.
  • The fact that B2B marketers with blogs generate 67% more leads than those without highlights the pivotal role of long-form content marketing in establishing credibility and authority in the industry.
  • During B2B research endeavors, 89% of B2B researchers leverage the internet.
  • When it comes to researching business purchases, 90% of B2B researchers rely on search as their primary tool.
  • At work, 80% of B2B buyers utilize mobile devices and more than 60% report that mobile played a significant role in a recent purchase.
  • (BCG) This BCG study also found that… 70% of B2B buyers increased mobile usage significantly in the past few years, with 60% expecting to continue to increase mobile usage.
  • More than 90% of B2B buyers report they’re likely to purchase from the same vendor again if they have a superior mobile experience.
  • While SEO is an undeniably powerful addition to a full-funnel marketing strategy, we would never recommend putting 100% of your marketing budget towards SEO.
  • According to 57% of B2B marketers, SEO generates more leads than any other marketing initiative.
  • B2B marketers who have blogs get 67% more leads than those who don’t (Optinmonster)4.
  • During B2B research endeavors, 89% of B2B researchers leverage the internet.
  • When it comes to researching business purchases, 90% of B2B researchers rely on search as their primary tool.
  • At work, 80% of B2B buyers utilize mobile devices and more than 60% report that mobile played a significant role in a recent purchase.
  • Content Marketing Statistics in Canada for 2024 | Made in CA: Content Marketing Statistics for Canadians 88% of Canadian companies are using at least one form of content marketing.
  • 84% of consumers expect entertaining content that provides solutions and creates experiences.
  • 82% of B2C companies consider content marketing as a key strategy to reach new customers.
  • 81% of content marketers say video content is the most difficult content to create.
  • Google is the most popular search engine in Canada with a 91% market share.
  • 81% of Canadian companies use email and newsletters for content marketing.
  • Use and cost of content marketing in Canada Statistics for content marketing show that 88% of companies in Canada use at least one form of content marketing as part of their marketing strategy.
  • 91% of B2B companies and 86% of B2C companies have a content marketing strategy in place.
  • Content marketing is a cost-effective way for companies to get their message out there, costing around 62% less than traditional marketing.
  • 56% of Canadian businesses say they have plans to increase spending on content creation and 28% will reduce their traditional marketing budget in favor of content marketing.
  • 84% of consumers expect companies to create entertaining content that tells a story, provides them with solutions, and creates experiences and events.
  • 70% of consumers also want to learn about the products through content marketing.
  • B2B content marketing Using blogs is an important tool for B2B marketers as 71% of B2B buyers read blog posts.
  • While 81% of B2B companies use blogging as a key marketing strategy, posting regular content poses challenges to companies and 64% of B2B companies outsource their content writing.
  • Another important tool for B2B marketers is videos since 82% of consumer traffic comes through video content from their blogs, social media, or YouTube.
  • As a result, 64% of B2B marketers have or are planning to increase their video marketing.
  • The main content marketing challenges B2B companies face include having a small team (67%), and not having enough time (44%).
  • Only 4% of B2B companies feel having a content marketing strategy is not needed.
  • As a result, only 43% of Canadian B2B companies have a documented marketing strategy, 34% say they have “an approach” but it is not formalised and 21% publish content but they have no strategy for it.
  • B2C content marketing More and more companies understand the value of content marketing with 82% of B2C marketers conserving it as a key strategy.
  • Between 2018 and 2019, there was a 68% increase in using audio and visual content to market directly to customers.
  • 60% of B2C marketers say they are committed to content marketing and on average 26% of the total marketing budget of B2C companies is spent on content marketing.
  • 61% of Canadian consumers say they have made a purchase after they read a recommendation on a blog and businesses that post on blogs generate 126% more traffic compared to those who don’t.
  • 5 times more traffic and while some people may say blogs are not as popular as they used to be, 77% of all internet users still read blogs, and posts with images have a 94% higher viewing rate.
  • Videos While videos might be one of the best ways to bring in more traffic, they are also some of the most challenging content marketing tools, with 81% of marketers saying video content is the most difficult kind of content to create.
  • However, 99% of marketers who already use video as part of their marketing strategy say they will continue in the future.
  • Video marketing works because 65% of people remember visual content better and video is even more memorable than still images.
  • 75% of consumers watch videos at least once a day and 87% of them wish brands would post more videos.
  • Millennials are the most likely generation to consume video content, with 77% watching at least one video every day and 50% saying they will stop what they are doing to watch an entertaining new video.
  • Social media While other forms of content marketing are also useful, 95% of content used in content marketing is posted on social media, according to the Content Marketing Institute.
  • 70% of marketers have also opted for paid advertising on social media and 40% of brands already use Instagram.
  • 75% of Facebook users visit the website at least once a day while Instagram is visited by 500 million people every day.
  • SEO For any content marketer, mastering SEO is vital as most traffic to their websites comes through search engines and Google holds 91% of the search engine market in Canada.
  • 5% of online searches are four words or longer, so websites and blog posts that utilise longer key phrases are likely to rank higher on searches.
  • Appearing on local searches is key for brick-and-mortar companies as 75% of consumers who find helpful information about local companies are more likely to visit the physical store.
  • 6% closing rate, which is significantly higher than leads from traditional outbound leads, including direct mail and print advertising, which have a 1.
  • Emails and Newsletters 81% of companies use emails and newsletters to market their products or services.
  • 7% of Canadian consumers check their email each time they pick their phone up and a quarter have a habit of checking emails first thing in the morning.
  • Consumers aged 25-34 are most likely to open marketing and newsletter emails as 31% of them say they open all the emails they get.
  • 75% of people in that age group have made a spontaneous purchase based on email or newsletter marketing, compared to 50% of the overall population.
  • According to a survey by Semrush, 55% of companies feel that improving the quality of their content made the biggest difference for them and 46% feel that search engine optimization was their biggest content marketing success in 2021.
  • Other big successes were creating and posting videos and other visual content for 41% and repurposing existing content for 35% of the companies.
  • The least successful strategies were trying out new channels at 20% and using social media influences in their content at 14%.
  • Content marketing goals Moving forward, 45% of Canadian companies want to use content marketing to increase the awareness of their brand and 37% want more traffic to their website.
  • 36% of companies will also focus on generating leads, while only 27% say they want to increase sales and revenue through content marketing.
  • 23% of Canadian companies also look to improve customer loyalty and engagement.
  • The key areas for content marketing investment among companies in Canada are building their social media presence and community with 41% and improving the quality of their written content with 40%.
  • Only 11% of the companies said they would invest in producing audio content.
  • While 92% of marketers and businesses identify content marketing as an important asset for them, creating and posting valuable content consistently can be challenging.
  • 61% of companies say changes to algorithms on search engines pose the biggest challenge for them when content marketing, while 45% are also concerned about algorithm changes on social media.
  • 7% of content marketers find the constant need to create engaging visual content challenging.
  • 27% of businesses say they find the lack of data challenging when creating their content.
  • 28% of them feel that not having a solid content marketing strategy makes creating content challenging for them.
  • The cost of content marketing is 62% cheaper than traditional marketing.
  • Social media is the most commonly used content marketing with 95% of companies who use content marketing using social media.
  • 10 Stats That Prove The Importance of Social Media Marketing: 64% of users purchase products after watching a video on social media3.
  • 33% of users would choose to contact a brand via social media instead of calling4.
  • Over 93% of brands acquire at least one new customer from a video they posted on social media5.
  • 71% of users who had positive experiences with a company on social media are likely to recommend them to others6.
  • 49% of consumers depend on social media influencers for recommendations8.
  • 40% of surveyed people said they’re unlikely to create an emotional connection with a brand they haven’t engaged with on social media10.
  • 46% of consumers will buy from brands they’re familiar withWant to up your social media game?
  • 54% of web users use social media to research productsSource:TruelistPeople don’t just use search engines for researching and buying products anymore.
  • 64% of users purchase products after watching a video on social mediaSource:BiteableVideo content on social media is an excellent way of providing engaging and helpful content to your audience and promoting your products.
  • With 64% of brands getting sales from doing precisely that, it’d be crazy not to!
  • As part of that 33%, one of the first places I’ll look when researching a brand is social media.
  • Aside from the ease of use benefits, many people have anxiety around making and receiving phone calls, with 76% of millennials reporting they become anxious when their phone rings.
  • Over 93% of brands acquire at least one new customer from a video they posted on social mediaSource:AnimotoWith almost every brand winning at least one customer from posting on social media, incorporating social into your digital marketing strategy is a bit of a no-brainer.
  • 71% of users who had positive experiences with a company on social media are likely to recommend them to othersSource:Lyfe MarketingThe right social media strategy can work wonders for your brand awareness and credibility.
  • 52% of online brand discovery comes from social media channelsSource:Lyfe MarketingIf you want to increase your brand awareness and visibility, social media is the place to do it.
  • 8% of the world’s population), you have an almost unlimited reach potential.
  • The takeaway here is that social media can help you build powerful emotional connections with your customers, and with 40% of consumers saying that they usually only make connections with brands on social media, it’s what your audience might want!
  • 46% of consumers will buy from brands they’re familiar withSource:Fit Small BusinessBrand recognition and trust are essential factors in a customer’s buying decision, and without them, you’ll struggle to bring in leads and sales.
  • Additionally, 47% of consumers will pay more for brands they trust, so if you can nail your content and build trust with your audience, you won’t just see more leads and sales coming in but potentially higher average order values as well!
  • 10 Digital Marketing Statistics for Aged Care Providers in Australia: Points of Differentiation for Aged Care Providers 68% of aged care marketers say that a website is the most effective channel to acquire clients.
  • Almost 90% of Australians in 50- to 70-year-old bracket have a smartphone that can connect to the internet.
  • (Office of the eSafety Commissioner) Facebook users in Australia aged 45 to 65 doubled from from 14% in 2010 to 30% in 2016.
  • (Google) Aged Care Marketing Budget and Priorities in Australia Media spend in the aged care and retirement sectors increased year on year by 28%.
  • (The Weekly Source) Senior living marketers name their top 3 priorities:lead generation (78%), brand awareness (58%), and sales (53%) (Brooks Adams Research).
  • Here are some of the findings:60% of providers had dated website content 60% of providers in suburban sites, the first point of contact was unable to answer questions 80% of providers do not return phone calls to prospects hbspt.
  • 100+ B2B Content Marketing Statistics You Need to Know: 84% of people expect brands to produce content that entertains, provides solutions and produces experiences and events.
  • That said many marketers don’t know how to use content marketing and as much as 63% of businesses don’t even have a documented content strategy.
  • Other content marketing statistics worth taking note of include:35% of marketers report that creating engaging visual content consistently is one of their top struggles.
  • 56% of businesses reported they want to increase their content creation spending 61% of marketers ranked improving “their ability to measure and analyze their marketing efforts” as a vital priority.
  • Changes to SEO is the top concern (61%) of content marketing organizations (followed by social media algorithm changes at 45%) 91% of consumers are prepared to reward brands for their authenticity.
  • Content Marketing ROI Statistics The latest CMI research report shows that 70% of B2B marketers say their content marketing is more successful than it was a year ago.
  • Blog traffic generation increases up to 30% after you post 24–51 blog posts.
  • 43% of B2B marketers say “blogging” is the most important content they produce.
  • 47% of B2B customers read about four blog posts before talking to a salesperson.
  • 55% of marketers want to focus on blog creation as their top inbound marketing priority.
  • 46% of blog posts were 500–1000 words long in 2018, compared to only 8% that were more than 2000 words.
  • 34% of bloggers reported “always” utilizing analytics when tracking blog performance.
  • Audio and Podcast Statistics According to Statista, 45% of global internet users aged 25-34 listen to podcasts.
  • It is also probably why the State of Inbound report reveals that 17% of marketers plan to add podcasting to their marketing efforts in the next 12 months.
  • According to Edison Research:Monthly podcast listeners grew from 24% of Americans to 26% year over year.
  • Other statistics worth noting are :In the US alone, almost 1 in 5 Americans listen to audiobooks, and 40% listen to podcasts.
  • 50% of homes report being fans of at least one podcast and 22% consider themselves “avid” fans.
  • According to Podcast Insights, 49% of podcast listening happens at home.
  • Video is trusted by 40% of millennials and half of those aged 18-34 would stop what they’re doing to watch a new video.
  • The CMI’s content marketing statistics show 72% of B2B marketers and 76% of B2C marketers use video.
  • It’s pretty effective:Aberdeen Group says marketers who use video get 66% more leads per year.
  • According to Wyzowl (an animated explainer video company):87% of businesses now use video as a marketing tool.
  • )91% of video marketers consider video an important part of their marketing strategy.
  • )90% of video marketers feel the level of competition and noise has increased in the past year.
  • But despite this – 99% will continue to use video in 2019, with 88% saying they’ll spend more than they did in previous years.
  • User preferences 96% of people say they’ve watched an explainer video to learn more about a product or service.
  • 79% of people say a brand’s video has convinced them to buy a piece of software or app.
  • 68% of people say they’d most prefer to learn about a new product or service by watching a short video.
  • This makes video more popular as a learning tool than text-based articles (15%), infographics (4%) presentations and pitches (4%) ebooks and manuals (3%).
  • Video Marketing Effectiveness 94% of video marketers say video has helped increase user understanding of their product or service.
  • 84% of marketers say video has helped them increase traffic to their website.
  • Facebook Video 84% of video marketers have used Facebook video as a channel.
  • Instagram Video 51% of video marketers have used Instagram video as a channel.
  • LinkedIn Video 51% of video marketers have used LinkedIn video as a channel (Up from 38% in 2018.
  • Twitter Video 45% of video marketers have used Twitter video as a channel (Up from 39% in 2018.
  • Facebook Live 35% of video marketers have used Facebook Live as a channel (Up from 34% in 2018.
  • Interactive Video 23% of video marketers have used Interactive video as a channel (Up from 20% in 2018.
  • Snapchat12% of video marketers have used Snapchat video as a channel (Up from 11% in 2018.
  • Virtual Reality 11% of video marketers have used VR as a channel (Down from 14% in 2018.
  • Mobile Video An overwhelming majority of people split their video viewing time between mobile and desktop, with just 1% saying they watch ALL their video on desktop and just 6% saying they watch exclusively on mobile.
  • 34% say they watch ‘mainly’ on mobile, and 17% ‘mainly’ on desktop, with 42% watching ‘pretty much equally’ across mobile and desktop.
  • Vertical Video 87% of people say they typically hold their phone ‘vertically’ for general use such as web browsing, email and texting.
  • 82% of people find it annoying or off-putting to watch videos with a ‘black bar’ where the video hasn’t been properly optimized to display in their chosen orientation.
  • Video-Sharing Statistics 48% of people said they’d be most likely to share video content with their friends, ahead of any other type of content.
  • Video came out ahead of social media posts (23%), news articles (16%), blog posts (5%) and product pages (3%).
  • Webinar Marketing Statistics According to Go to Webinar’s report:29% of all webinars are produced by software and technology companies followed by financial services firms and educational institutions.
  • 92% of GoToWebinar users agree that webinars are the best way to engage a large, remote audience.
  • 59% of registrations occur less than a week before the webinarEmail drives 57% of webinar registrations this is followed by social media which drives 15% of registrations.
  • Marketing webinars have an average attendance rate of 44%78% of marketing webinars use live Q&A, but only 15% use polls.
  • 93% of marketers agreed that interactive content is effective in educating its buyers versus just 70% for static content.
  • 88% of marketers said that interactive content is effective in differentiating their brand from their competitors.
  • 81% of marketers agree that interactive content is much more effective at grabbing people’s attention than static content.
  • 66% of marketers have reported greater audience engagement after using interactive content.
  • 79% of marketers said that combining interactive content with other content marketing tactics increases message retention.
  • 79% of marketers said interactive content can be reused a lot, leading to repeat readers.
  • 75% of marketers said non-gated interactive content offers a sample of the brand and nurtures leads.
  • 68% of marketers said interactive content makes it easy to repurpose passive content.
  • 54% of marketers use interactive assessments, making it the most common type of content.
  • 88% of mobile users searching for local information take action within a day of finding results.
  • 53% of mobile users will close a website if it takes more than three seconds to load.
  • 12% rate for desktop traffic) 81% of mobile search queries derive from Google.
  • A delay of one second in page response can reduce the conversions by 7%.
  • At least 50% of marketers surveyed feel their email campaigns are very poor to average.
  • 33% of marketers report custom video drives the most engagement out of all visual content for them, but only 6% reported live video specifically.
  • 64% of B2B marketers increased their use of audio/visual content in the past year, but only 43% of marketers overall actually used/developed video snippets.
  • 81% of respondents claim that video is still the hardest type of content to produce.
  • 70% of marketers reported that content incorporating visuals assets performed better than those without.
  • 87% of marketers are using still email to nurture their audience, while only 45% are using storytelling.
  • 74% of B2B marketers created long-form written content in the past year.
  • Only 37% of people dedicated time to producing social media story content in the past year.
  • 64% said they prefer podcasts at the top-of-the-funnel, while 48% said webinars were valuable to them in the mid-stage of their buying journey.
  • Content Marketing Distribution Statistics 71% of the most successful b2b content marketers are using paid methods to distribute content, compared to only 55% of the least successful.
  • 80% report paid distribution as an effective way to attract a new audience, while 65% report it as an effective way to generate traffic when organic isn’t delivering.
  • Content Marketing Budget & Reporting Statistics Over 50% of marketers expect to increase their content marketing budget in 2018.
  • According to a study, when asked if they’re tracking their content marketing ROI, 51% of marketers either said “no” or “unsure.
  • ” — Only 25% report being extremely proficient in tracking their content marketing metrics overall.
  • 4 Content Marketing Stats Every B2B Marketer Should Know: 97% of marketers include content marketing strategies More than anything, this shows that the industry is basically entirely in agreement that content marketing is an essential strategy.
  • Not Everyone Has Got the Message… Despite a majority of marketers including content marketing strategies, a surprising percentage of B2B organisations (32%) have no one employed on a full-time/dedicated content marketing team, with just an average of 4% with a dedicated team of over 11 people.
  • Similarly, over half (58%) of B2B organisations have just one person running their entire content marketing strategy!
  • 65% of marketers say case studies and success stories are the biggest value drivers Say you’re looking for a restaurant to eat at for the evening.
  • 67% of marketers want more resources for content creation Every business wants an ace team of writers at the helm who can shift and shape their writing style to the task at hand, but relying on the pure skill of your writers won’t get you great content all the time.
  • 44% of B2B buyers typically consume 3-5 pieces of content before engaging This further speaks to the long-term nature of content marketing and how its main focus is on building trust with an audience.
  • This is further backed up by a not insignificant 70% of consumers who say that they prefer to learn about a product or service through content rather than traditional advertising.
  • Cannabis Marketing Statistics 2023 | Digital Third Coast: While only 40% of adults born before 1945 are in favor of decriminalization (Gallup) 61% of Baby boomers and members of 63% of Generation X are close to the national average in terms of favorable views of marijuana legalization (Gallup) Americans are more likely to use cannabis daily than Canadians.
  • 80+ Law Firm Marketing Statistics:Social Media, Website & SEO: Top Stats At A Glance In 2023, the majority of law firms, approximately 87%, are utilizing Google Ads as part of their digital marketing strategy.
  • 63% of US law firms decided to increase their marketing budget, indicating a willingness to invest more in promotional efforts.
  • 83% of law firms reported a noticeable rise in website visits as a direct result of their Google Ads campaigns.
  • 64% of law firms witnessed an increase in display advertising impressions as a result of their Google Ads campaigns.
  • Google Ads remains the most popular choice for online advertising among law firms, with approximately 70% of them using this platform.
  • 25% 46% 66% 78% Submit Answer function submitAnswer() { var selectedAnswer = document.
  • 98% of legal firms say that intake software helps them make better decisions about marketing.
  • 65% of legal firms say that Intake software helps them close more clients.
  • 79% of legal firms say that Intake software helps them use their time more efficiently while getting new clients.
  • 145% of legal firms allocate a portion of their marketing budget to remarketing efforts, specifically to follow up with leads that didn’t convert into customers initially.
  • 91%, report having repeated interactions with the same clients multiple times.
  • 1Although 74% of firms express confidence in their marketing strategies, a significant number of them, around 70%, acknowledge that they are also investing money in low return-on-investment (ROI) campaigns.
  • Approximately 83% of legal firms outsource their marketing work to external marketing firms.
  • Yes, approximately 45% of legal firms allocate a portion of their marketing budget to remarketing efforts.
  • The average allocation for marketing in legal firms is approximately 49% of their annual budget.
  • 1In the future, about 66% of legal firms express their intention to increase their investment in website development and improvement.
  • 2Approximately 48% of legal firms express their interest in increasing the budget for online marketing through popular channels.
  • 1On average, a company will allocate approximately 49% of its marketing budget to remarketing efforts.
  • 1Hourly rates are the most prevalent billing method provided by 97% of law firms.
  • 3 Interactive Infographic Only 37% of law firms offer flat fees for any type of legal matter.
  • Only 31% of law firms offer the ability for clients to pay online for legal services.
  • 4Lawyers fail to collect payment for approximately 12% of the hours they bill.
  • Hourly rates are the most common billing method offered by law firms, and lawyers typically bill for only about 31% of an 8-hour workday.
  • Around 48% of legal firms express their interest in increasing their budget for online marketing through popular channels.
  • On average, a company will allocate approximately 49% of its marketing budget to remarketing efforts.
  • MarketSplashMarketSplash TeamThe statistics reveal that a significant majority of law firms, approximately 84%, are successfully generating leads through organic social media traffic.
  • 2A total of 17% of law firms indicated that they handled their digital marketing in-house and did not outsource it to external agencies or consultants.
  • MarketSplashMonique SolomonsRoughly 33% of law firms acquire leads through online review sites.
  • 1Around 41% of law firms experience traffic from clients who find them by searching on digital professional directories, aiming to avail themselves of legal services.
  • 1Daily, 33% of law firms utilize Facebook for marketing purposes, leveraging the platform to engage with their audience and promote their services.
  • 1 Law Firm Size Percentage Using Video For Marketing Law Firm Size Percentage Using Video for Marketing Soloists 10% 2-9 Lawyer Firms 19% 10-49 Lawyer Firms 18% All Respondents 28% Among all law firms, 51% utilize Google Analytics to assess their marketing budget allocation.
  • 1 Additionally, 45% of law firms rely on Facebook Insights, while 37% make use of Twitter Analytics to make informed decisions on where to invest their marketing funds.
  • 1 Social Media Presence Of Law Firms Platform Percentage of Firms Maintaining Presence LinkedIn 87% Facebook 61% Twitter 37% Instagram 13% Approximately 77% of lawyers leverage social media as a tool for career development and networking, while 52% utilize it for client development.
  • 6Roughly 45% of law firms employ LinkedIn as a platform for their marketing efforts.
  • Approximately 77% of lawyers leverage social media as a powerful tool for career development and networking, connecting with peers, potential clients, and industry professionals.
  • Around 52% of lawyers utilize social media as a means for client development, engaging with potential clients and promoting their legal services effectively.
  • Roughly 45% of law firms actively use LinkedIn as a platform for their marketing efforts, tapping into its wide professional network to connect with potential clients and business partners.
  • 24% of law firms had their website management handled by the marketing team.
  • 2 Around 21% of firms relied on external consultants to manage their websites.
  • 2 In 13% of firms, the responsibility for managing their website fell to a single lawyer.
  • 2 For 12% of firms, website management was carried out by firm administrators.
  • 2 Just 17% of respondents mentioned that they could schedule consultations through their firm’s website.
  • 8Currently, 94% of law firms have established their presence online with a website.
  • 8Around 69% of law firms confirm that their websites are mobile-friendly, while 26% are uncertain about the mobile-friendliness of their websites.
  • 8Partner profiles are the most prevalent content on law firm websites, with approximately 99% of websites including them.
  • 8About 59% of law firm websites include legal articles that are written in-house by the firm’s attorneys or staff.
  • 8Approximately 55% of law firms showcase recent successful cases on their websites.
  • 8Approximately 37% of law firms indicate that they maintain a blog on their websites, and this percentage is higher among larger firms compared to smaller ones.
  • 8As high as 88% of law firms utilize their blogs primarily for client development purposes.
  • 8 Marketing Methods Used By Law Firms Marketing Method Percentage of Law Firms Print Marketing 25% Direct Mail 18% Radio 9% Yellow Pages 8% Event sponsorships remain a significant marketing channel for 50% of law firms.
  • 67%) of law firms expressed their intention to increase their investments in their websites in the near future.
  • Approximately 50% of law firms consider event sponsorships as one of their main marketing channels.
  • 67%) of law firms have expressed their intention to increase their investments in their websites in the near future.
  • As high as 88% of law firms utilize their blogs mainly for client development purposes.
  • The average law firm experiences an impressive 526% return on investment (ROI) from its SEO efforts over a three-year period.
  • A staggering 75% of users never scroll past the first page of search results, emphasizing the crucial importance of top rankings.
  • MarketSplashMonique SolomonsBy enhancing their SEO strategies, a typical law firm witnesses an average increase of 21% in organic traffic to their website.
  • 9In a comprehensive law firm study, 79% of surveyed legal professionals rated SEO as the most effective channel for marketing and acquiring new clients.
  • 11A significant proportion of legal firms, approximately 56%, opt to outsource their SEO efforts to external marketing firms.
  • It offers substantial returns on investment, with an average ROI of 526% over three years.
  • By enhancing their SEO strategies, a typical law firm can experience an average increase of 21% in organic traffic to their website.
  • According to a comprehensive law firm study, 79% of surveyed legal professionals rated SEO as the most effective channel for marketing and acquiring new clients.
  • SEO is of paramount importance for law firms, as 85% of potential clients prefer to use Google as their primary source for research when searching for a lawyer.
  • 15 Mind-Blowing Social Media Statistics | Roadside Dental Marketing: With that said, here are 15 of the “freshest” stats to help you flavor your dental marketing strategy:Social media statistics 97% of consumers used social media in the past month.
  • Hootsuite 43% of consumers use social media when researching things to buy.
  • 27% of social media users say they find new products through paid social ads (following word-of-mouth, TV ads, and search engines).
  • Global Web Index 68% of Americans use Facebook and 74% of Facebook users check it daily.
  • HubSpot YouTube is the preferred form of social media marketing worldwide, preferred by 83% of all consumers.
  • 300+ Digital Marketing Stats to Drive Your Marketing Strategy – Marketing Insider Group: Content Marketing Stats 84% of digital marketing leaders acknowledge the role of AI in enhancing personalization.
  • (Zippia) 82% of marketers report that AI significantly influences their content creation plans.
  • (Hubspot) 79% of companies have observed revenue growth in marketing and sales due to AI.
  • (Zippia) 76% of marketers using generative AI apply it for basic content creation and copywriting tasks.
  • (Insider Intelligence) 61% of marketers consider AI a crucial component of their data strategy.
  • (DemandSage) Image Source:Bloggers Passion 88% of marketers plan to increase or maintain their investment in SEO.
  • (Hubspot) 75% of marketers recognize SEO as their most effective content strategy.
  • (Semrush) 75% of users don’t look beyond the first page of search results.
  • (DemandSage) 49% of marketers believe organic search yields the best ROI.
  • (Search Engine Journal) 97% of marketers incorporate customer data into their decision-making process.
  • (Statista) 80% of businesses deem personalization as essential for growth.
  • (Adobe) 80% of consumers are more inclined to purchase from companies offering personalized experiences.
  • (Slideshare) 80% of marketers using audience segmentation report a rise in sales.
  • (NotifyVisitors) Marketers utilizing buyer personas achieve 73% higher conversion rates.
  • (Startups Magazine) Over 90% of brands utilize social media for marketing.
  • (Engati) 76% of social media users have bought items they saw on social platforms.
  • (Forbes) 73% of marketers find social media to be effective for their business.
  • (Statista) 97% of marketers using Account-Based Marketing (ABM) report it delivers higher ROI than other marketing activities.
  • (Growth Badger) A majority of bloggers, over 50%, fall within the age range of 21 to 35 years.
  • (Truelist) Blog posts are the leading content format, utilized by 90% of marketers for achieving content objectives.
  • (DemandMetric) Nearly 60% of marketers recognize the value of blogging.
  • (DemandMetric) Websites with active blogs have 434% more indexed pages and 97% more inbound links compared to those without blogs.
  • (BKA Content) Businesses that maintain blogs generate 67% more monthly leads than those without blogs.
  • (HubSpot) 80% of bloggers affirm that blogging contributes to significant marketing success.
  • (Orbit Media) 90% of businesses employ content marketing tactics like blogging.
  • (DemandMetric) Companies that blog attract 55% more website visitors than non-blogging companies.
  • (Orbit Media) 88% of bloggers who gate content see some or strong results, with 35% reporting strong results.
  • (OrbitMedia) 70% of consumers prefer learning about a company through articles over advertisements.
  • Original visuals like infographics are considered the most effective by 40% of content marketers.
  • (Orbit Media) 88% of marketers incorporate visuals in more than half of their blog articles.
  • (Venngage) Bloggers who publish 2-6 times per week are 50% more likely to report strong results.
  • (Orbit Media) 52% of bloggers find engaging with readers through content increasingly challenging.
  • (Orbit Media) Producing original visuals consistently is a struggle for 35% of content creators, despite its effectiveness.
  • (HubSpot) B2B bloggers spend on average 26% more time on each post compared to B2C bloggers.
  • (Worldometers) 21% of search engine users click on more than one result.
  • (Ahrefs) In the US, 53% of people research products using search engines before making a purchase.
  • (Up Inc) Google dominates nearly 86% of the global search engine market.
  • (Backlinko) 84% of search engine users turn to Google three or more times daily.
  • (Backlinko) 49% of marketers agree that organic search offers the best ROI among all marketing channels.
  • (LinkedIn) 72% of consumers who conducted a local search visited a business within 5 miles.
  • (HubSpot) 97% of people learn about local businesses online more than anywhere else.
  • (SEO Tribunal) 72% of desktop/tablet users and 67% of mobile users prefer ads tailored to their location.
  • (Think With Google) Approximately 80% of consumers use search engines for local information.
  • (Think With Google) 88% of mobile searches for local businesses result in a visit to the store within a week.
  • (Think With Google) Following a local mobile search, 76% of individuals visit the business within a day, and 28% of these searches lead to a purchase.
  • (Think With Google) About 94% of keywords receive 10 or fewer monthly searches.
  • (WordStream) Approximately 15% of Google searches are unique and have never been searched before.
  • (Google) 95% of the entire keyword database gets less than 10 searches per month.
  • (Ahrefs) More than 29% of keywords with 10,000 monthly searches consist of three or more words.
  • (Ahrefs) Roughly 74% of link builders create fewer than 10 links per month.
  • (Ahrefs) Voice Search Stats Over 40% of voice search results come from featured snippets.
  • (Brafton) 58% of consumers utilize voice search to find local businesses online.
  • 9% of marketing executives believe their businesses have the skills to utilize marketing analytics effectively.
  • (HBR) 72% of marketers consider content crucial for improving client retention.
  • (Mailchimp) Google Analytics allows cross-platform data analysis and can reduce reporting time by 50%.
  • (Mailchimp) Leading marketers are 72% more likely to invest in improving the quality/volume of first-party data they collect.
  • (ThinkWithGoogle) Image Source:Think With Google Over 70% of people describe themselves as channel-agnostic, flexible about buying offline or online.
  • (Martech) Digital marketing accounts for nearly 60% of marketing spending, as per the AMA’s 2021 CMO survey.
  • (Martech) The US Bureau of Labor Statistics forecasts a 10% annual increase in employment for marketing managers over the next eight years.
  • (UChicago) 57% of marketers likely draw incorrect conclusions by misinterpreting data.
  • (MarketingEvolution) 66% of marketers find data analytics vital, and 63% agree on the importance of data literacy.
  • (MarketingEvolution) 76% of marketing leaders base decisions on data analytics.
  • (MarketingEvolution) 37% of marketers find demonstrating the value of marketing analytics as one of their top challenges.
  • (MarketingEvolution) Leaders are 53% more likely to believe machine learning aids in analyzing consumer intentions.
  • (MarketingEvolution) Marketing analytics is the most significant investment, accounting for 16% of annual expenditures.
  • (MarketingEvolution) Paid search comprises about 39% of a company’s total marketing budget.
  • (MarketingEvolution) 37% of respondents in Gartner’s survey find manual data gathering a hindrance to team effectiveness.
  • (MarketingEvolution) 32% of marketers consider competition and marketing analytics crucial for their initiatives.
  • (MarketingEvolution) 57% of marketing research analysts hold a bachelor’s degree, and 39% have a master’s degree.
  • (MarketingEvolution) The demand for market research analysts is expected to grow 22% from 2020 to 2030.
  • (MarketingEvolution) Over 80% of marketers report that their decisions are now predominantly data-informed.
  • (SAS) Smartphone analytics predict a 25% increase in mobile traffic by 2025, according to the Ericsson Mobility Report.
  • (ThinkWithGoogle) The employment of market research analysts is projected to grow 19% from 2021 to 2031.
  • 68% of the total internet users (Demand Sage) Experts predict that the number of podcast listeners will reach 504.
  • (Demand Sage) Image Source:Demand Sage 84% of podcast advertisements are dynamic.
  • (Spiralytics) 82% of marketers plan to maintain or increase their podcast investments.
  • (Hubspot) Video Marketing Stats 91% of consumers express a desire for more online videos from brands.
  • (Hubspot) 90% of marketers credit video with aiding in lead generation.
  • (DemandSage) 87% of marketers report a direct, positive impact on sales from video marketing.
  • (Wyzowl) 72% of customers would rather watch a video than read about a product (Gitnux) Image Source:Gitnux Websites with video content are 53x more likely to rank on page one of Google SERPs.
  • (Gitnux) 89% of people say watching a video has convinced them to buy a product or service.
  • (Demand Sage) The average user spends 88% more time on websites that have videos.
  • (Demand Sage) 85% of internet users in the United States watch online video content.
  • (Demand Sage) YouTube is the most widely used video marketing platform, with 90% of video marketers using it.
  • (Demand Sage) Only 36% of marketers have published ‘live’ video content, such as live streams on social media channels.
  • (Demand Sage) Webinar Marketing Stats 95% of businesses consider webinars a crucial part of their marketing strategy.
  • (On24) 73% of B2B companies view webinars as the best method to generate high-quality leads.
  • (GoTo) 76% of webinars are primarily focused on generating leads and sales.
  • (Content Marketing Institute) 73% of B2B webinar attendees typically convert to leads.
  • (WebinarCare) In the B2C sector, only 20%-40% of webinar attendees convert.
  • (BigMarker) 41% of attendees feel that 30 minutes is the ideal webinar runtime.
  • (BigMarker) Only 44% of those who pre-register for webinars actually attend.
  • (WebinarCare) 80% of B2B marketers use their websites to drive webinar registrations.
  • (Statista) 29% of people register for webinars on the same day they take place.
  • (WebinarCare) Only 15% of attendees register for webinars 15 days or more in advance.
  • (WebinarCare) 92% of attendees find Q&A sessions at the end of webinars beneficial.
  • (Ruler Analytics) A/B testing landing page designs increases conversions by 12%.
  • (Campaign Monitor) 47% of marketers consider email their most effective marketing channel.
  • (Techjury) 43% of US respondents check their work emails outside business hours.
  • (Statista) 49% of consumers prefer to receive weekly promotional emails from favorite brands.
  • (AWeber) Including the word “video” in email subject lines increases open rates by 19% and click-through rates by 65%.
  • (AWeber) Including videos in emails can increase click rates by up to 300%.
  • (DataReportal) Only 25% of users access Facebook via laptop or desktop.
  • (Khoros) 40% of Facebook advertisers use the Click-to-Messaging format.
  • (Khoros) 83% of users say they discover new products and services on Instagram.
  • (Statista) Less than 7% of Instagram’s advertising audience is over 55.
  • (Khoros) 77% of X users have a better impression of a brand when they respond to a post.
  • (Khoros) Lead Generation & Nurturing Stats 65% of businesses say generating traffic and leads is their biggest marketing challenge.
  • (HubSpot) 93% of B2B companies say content marketing generates more leads than traditional marketing strategies.
  • (Marketo, Forbes) 93% of B2B buying processes start with an online search.
  • (Pinpoint Market Research and Anderson Jones PR) 96% of visitors who come to your website aren’t ready to buy.
  • (Marketo) 68% of B2B companies will use landing pages to nurture new sales leads for future conversion.
  • (HubSpot) 74% of companies say converting leads into customers is their top priority.
  • (HubSpot) 48% of businesses say most of their leads require “long cycle” nurturing with many influencers.
  • (Ascend2) 54% of email marketers say increasing engagement rate is their number one priority.
  • (Ascend2) Targeting users with content relevant to their position along the buying process yields 72% higher conversion rates.
  • (Aberdeen) 51% of email marketers say email list segmentation is the most effective way to personalize lead nurturing.
  • 1% of businesses don’t use any attribution model to measure marketing performance.
  • (Bizible) Only 29% of brands nurture their existing customers beyond the initial purchase.
  • (Demand Gen) 85% of marketers say lead generation is their most important content marketing goal.
  • (ZipDo) Image Source:ZipDo 57% of marketers say lead nurturing is the most valuable feature of automation software.
  • (Ascend2) 79% of top-performing companies have been using marketing automation for three or more years.
  • (Pardot) The biggest benefits of automation are saving time (74%), increased customer engagement (68%), more timely communications (58%), and increased opportunities including up-selling (58%).
  • (Adestra) 91% of users believe marketing automation is “very important” to successfully marketing across multiple channels.
  • (VB Insight, APSIS) 58% of best-in-class marketing automation users say the most useful metrics for measuring performance are Conversion Rate and Revenue Generated.
  • (Ascend2) 63% of companies using marketing automation outsource all or part of it.
  • (MarketingCharts) 91% of marketers say marketing automation helps them achieve their objectives.
  • (Liana) Marketers who use automation are 46% more likely to report having an effective marketing strategy.
  • (Ascend2) 18% of companies use automation as their primary email marketing tactic.
  • (Dash Research) 81% of marketers expect to compete primarily on customer experience in the next two years.
  • (MarketingEvolution) 88% of customers say the experience a company provides is as important as its products or services.
  • (PwC) As many as 86% of consumers claim they would leave a brand after 2-3 bad customer service experiences.
  • (Emplifi) Consumers will pay up to a 16% price premium for a positive customer experience.
  • (Salesforce) 62% of customers say their experience in one industry affects their expectations of other industries.
  • (Salesforce) 64% of consumers want chatbots to provide the same quality of service as a human customer service agent.
  • (Zendesk) For 80% of buyers, speed of delivery is a prime factor in customer experience.
  • (PwC) 60% of consumers say they’ll become repeat buyers after a personalized experience.
  • (SuperOffice) 41% of “customer-obsessed” companies achieved a 10% or greater revenue growth.
  • (MarketingCharts) 70% of CX leaders struggle to increase customer loyalty.
  • (IDC, Emplifi) 60% of customers disagree that brands are providing a good customer experience.
  • (IDC, Emplifi) Over half of businesses think their customers are satisfied with their self-service options, yet only 15% of customers agree.
  • (NICE) Brands that deliver great customer experiences can achieve revenue growth 4-8% higher than the industry average.
  • (Bain) Ecommerce & Online Shopping Stats By 2026, 24% of retail purchases are expected to take place online.
  • 8% of Ecommerce sales, the highest market share of all Ecommerce companies.
  • (Adobe Analytics) 57% of online shoppers report shopping internationally.
  • (National Retail Federation) The most common reason online shoppers abandon their cart is because of additional costs like shipping, taxes, and fees (48%).
  • (Statista) 24% of online shoppers abandon their cart because the site wanted them to create an account.
  • (SEMrush) 22% drop out of an online shopping session because shipping is too slow.
  • (IPC) The online shopping cart abandonment rate on mobile devices is 84%.
  • (National Retail Federation) Millennials shop on social media the most—55% of people aged 18 to 24 in the United States have made a purchase on social media.
  • (Insider Intelligence) China has the highest rate of social commerce shoppers—nearly 50% have purchased from social networks.
  • (Paypal) 49% of social commerce shoppers have had an influencer’s recommendation impact their purchase.
  • (Intuit) Mobile commerce sales are expected to account for 6% of all retail sales in 2023.
  • Essential Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics in 2024 • ZipDo: The Latest Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics Unveiled 72% of consumers prefer learning about products through content over traditional advertising.
  • In the realm of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics, the revelation that a sweeping 72% of consumers favor discovering products via content as opposed to conventional advertisements speaks volumes.
  • 89% of all companies include content marketing in their digital marketing strategies.
  • Traditional Marketing, a powerful weapon emerges in the form of content marketing which has been embraced by a staggering 89% of all companies within their digital marketing strategies.
  • When we delve into the opinions of marketing connoisseurs, we uncover an intriguing figure:approximately 44% of marketing experts advocate for the superior return on investment (ROI) of digital marketing compared to its offline counterparts.
  • In the ongoing debate between digital marketing and traditional marketing, the statistic revealing that 72% of users visit a store within 5 miles after viewing a mobile ad sheds light on the persuasive power of mobile advertising in the digital realm.
  • Email marketing has an average ROI of 122%, which is more than 4x higher than other marketing formats.
  • In the battle between Digital Marketing and Traditional Marketing, the astonishing figure of Email marketing’s 122% average ROI emerges as a powerful contender, dwarfing alternative marketing formats by an impressive 4x.
  • On average, 47% of marketing budgets are spent on digital marketing, compared to 53% on traditional marketing.
  • The intriguing interplay between 47% of marketing budgets being allocated to digital marketing and 53% to traditional marketing lays the foundation for a stimulating debate in the realm of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics.
  • 61% of internet-enabled consumers perform research online before making a purchase decision.
  • In the battleground of Digital Marketing versus Traditional Marketing, the statistic revealing that an impressive 61% of internet-enabled consumers conduct online research prior to making a purchase decision serves as powerful ammunition for digital marketing enthusiasts.
  • 28% of consumers claimed that social media influenced their buying decisions.
  • In the ongoing battle between Digital Marketing and Traditional Marketing, the statistic revealing that 28% of consumers are swayed by social media in their purchasing choices serves as a powerful weapon for the digital front.
  • The 28% factor certainly tips the scale towards digital dominance in the marketing arena, presenting a persuasive case for the supremacy of social media and digital marketing over their traditional counterparts.
  • 85% of retailers believe that search marketing (including paid and SEO) is the most effective customer acquisition tactic.
  • A striking 85% assert that search marketing, which encompasses both paid and SEO efforts, reigns supreme as the most effective customer acquisition tactic.
  • 88% of marketers believe that marketing personalization helps deliver a superior customer experience.
  • The impressive figure of 88% of marketers believing in the value of marketing personalization for delivering an unparalleled customer experience, undoubtedly serves as a testament to its significance.
  • This empowers businesses to not only forge stronger connections and nurture customer loyalty but also to capture the hearts of 88% of marketers keen on harnessing the prowess of personalization for an unrivaled customer experience.
  • 92% of adults aged 60 and above prefer traditional media (TV, radio, and print) over digital media.
  • A staggering 92% of adults in this demographic showcase a penchant for these conventional outlets, emphasizing the value and impact traditional marketing experiences in creating strong connections with this mature, discerning audience.
  • 84% of companies have a digital marketing strategy, but only 11% have a clear digital marketing plan.
  • Diving into the realm of digital marketing versus traditional marketing, a striking revelation emerges:a staggering 84% of companies now uphold a digital marketing strategy.
  • Yet, the plot thickens as merely 11% have a coherent digital marketing plan in place.
  • 45% of small business owners are still not using digital marketing for their businesses.
  • When delving into the realm of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics, it’s intriguing to discover that a significant 45% of small business owners have yet to embrace the power of digital marketing for their businesses.
  • Video content produces 86% more views for businesses than those using only static visuals or text advertisements.
  • Driven by the power of statistics, our attention shifts towards a remarkable figure:video content outshines static visuals or text advertisements by generating a whopping 86% more views for businesses.
  • 53% of mobile users abandon sites that take longer than 3 seconds to load.
  • The remarkable statistic, revealing that an overwhelming 53% of mobile users discard websites that fail to load within 3 seconds, becomes a critical factor in this contest.
  • In the realm of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics, the striking figure of 58% global internet usage illustrates the vast potential of digital marketing to reach a colossal audience.
  • Online advertising was expected to account for 53% of global advertising spending in 2020.
  • In the epic battle of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing, the 2020 forecast of online advertising capturing a dominant 53% of global advertising spending is a testament to digital marketing’s meteoric rise.
  • 9% of online marketers see improving SEO and organic presence as a top priority.
  • 9% of online marketers charging full steam towards securing their organic presence and fortifying their SEO strategies, it’s apparent that optimizing for search engines has become a critical weapon in their online arsenal.
  • Delving into the realm of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics, the revelation that Google Ads boasts a staggering 200% return on investment rate, on average, is a beacon, illuminating the path towards marketing success.
  • 97% of millennials use social media as an integral part of their marketing strategy.
  • Traditional Marketing Statistics, the striking figure of 97% of millennials leveraging social media as a crucial component of their marketing arsenal underscores the dramatic shift taking place in the marketing landscape.
  • Digital marketing efforts (specifically, content marketing) were 62% cheaper yet generated 3 times more leads than traditional marketing.
  • As companies grapple with budget constraints and the desire to maximize impact, a marketing approach that is 62% more cost-effective while simultaneously creating a lead generation machine to the tune of three times the output highlights the sheer potency of digital marketing.
  • The Latest Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics Unveiled 72% of consumers prefer learning about products through content over traditional advertising.
  • In the realm of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics, the revelation that a sweeping 72% of consumers favor discovering products via content as opposed to conventional advertisements speaks volumes.
  • 89% of all companies include content marketing in their digital marketing strategies.
  • Traditional Marketing, a powerful weapon emerges in the form of content marketing which has been embraced by a staggering 89% of all companies within their digital marketing strategies.
  • When we delve into the opinions of marketing connoisseurs, we uncover an intriguing figure:approximately 44% of marketing experts advocate for the superior return on investment (ROI) of digital marketing compared to its offline counterparts.
  • In the ongoing debate between digital marketing and traditional marketing, the statistic revealing that 72% of users visit a store within 5 miles after viewing a mobile ad sheds light on the persuasive power of mobile advertising in the digital realm.
  • Email marketing has an average ROI of 122%, which is more than 4x higher than other marketing formats.
  • In the battle between Digital Marketing and Traditional Marketing, the astonishing figure of Email marketing’s 122% average ROI emerges as a powerful contender, dwarfing alternative marketing formats by an impressive 4x.
  • On average, 47% of marketing budgets are spent on digital marketing, compared to 53% on traditional marketing.
  • The intriguing interplay between 47% of marketing budgets being allocated to digital marketing and 53% to traditional marketing lays the foundation for a stimulating debate in the realm of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics.
  • 61% of internet-enabled consumers perform research online before making a purchase decision.
  • In the battleground of Digital Marketing versus Traditional Marketing, the statistic revealing that an impressive 61% of internet-enabled consumers conduct online research prior to making a purchase decision serves as powerful ammunition for digital marketing enthusiasts.
  • 28% of consumers claimed that social media influenced their buying decisions.
  • In the ongoing battle between Digital Marketing and Traditional Marketing, the statistic revealing that 28% of consumers are swayed by social media in their purchasing choices serves as a powerful weapon for the digital front.
  • The 28% factor certainly tips the scale towards digital dominance in the marketing arena, presenting a persuasive case for the supremacy of social media and digital marketing over their traditional counterparts.
  • 85% of retailers believe that search marketing (including paid and SEO) is the most effective customer acquisition tactic.
  • A striking 85% assert that search marketing, which encompasses both paid and SEO efforts, reigns supreme as the most effective customer acquisition tactic.
  • 88% of marketers believe that marketing personalization helps deliver a superior customer experience.
  • The impressive figure of 88% of marketers believing in the value of marketing personalization for delivering an unparalleled customer experience, undoubtedly serves as a testament to its significance.
  • This empowers businesses to not only forge stronger connections and nurture customer loyalty but also to capture the hearts of 88% of marketers keen on harnessing the prowess of personalization for an unrivaled customer experience.
  • 92% of adults aged 60 and above prefer traditional media (TV, radio, and print) over digital media.
  • A staggering 92% of adults in this demographic showcase a penchant for these conventional outlets, emphasizing the value and impact traditional marketing experiences in creating strong connections with this mature, discerning audience.
  • 84% of companies have a digital marketing strategy, but only 11% have a clear digital marketing plan.
  • Diving into the realm of digital marketing versus traditional marketing, a striking revelation emerges:a staggering 84% of companies now uphold a digital marketing strategy.
  • Yet, the plot thickens as merely 11% have a coherent digital marketing plan in place.
  • 45% of small business owners are still not using digital marketing for their businesses.
  • When delving into the realm of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics, it’s intriguing to discover that a significant 45% of small business owners have yet to embrace the power of digital marketing for their businesses.
  • Video content produces 86% more views for businesses than those using only static visuals or text advertisements.
  • Driven by the power of statistics, our attention shifts towards a remarkable figure:video content outshines static visuals or text advertisements by generating a whopping 86% more views for businesses.
  • 53% of mobile users abandon sites that take longer than 3 seconds to load.
  • The remarkable statistic, revealing that an overwhelming 53% of mobile users discard websites that fail to load within 3 seconds, becomes a critical factor in this contest.
  • In the realm of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics, the striking figure of 58% global internet usage illustrates the vast potential of digital marketing to reach a colossal audience.
  • Online advertising was expected to account for 53% of global advertising spending in 2020.
  • In the epic battle of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing, the 2020 forecast of online advertising capturing a dominant 53% of global advertising spending is a testament to digital marketing’s meteoric rise.
  • 9% of online marketers see improving SEO and organic presence as a top priority.
  • 9% of online marketers charging full steam towards securing their organic presence and fortifying their SEO strategies, it’s apparent that optimizing for search engines has become a critical weapon in their online arsenal.
  • Delving into the realm of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics, the revelation that Google Ads boasts a staggering 200% return on investment rate, on average, is a beacon, illuminating the path towards marketing success.
  • 97% of millennials use social media as an integral part of their marketing strategy.
  • Traditional Marketing Statistics, the striking figure of 97% of millennials leveraging social media as a crucial component of their marketing arsenal underscores the dramatic shift taking place in the marketing landscape.
  • Digital marketing efforts (specifically, content marketing) were 62% cheaper yet generated 3 times more leads than traditional marketing.
  • As companies grapple with budget constraints and the desire to maximize impact, a marketing approach that is 62% more cost-effective while simultaneously creating a lead generation machine to the tune of three times the output highlights the sheer potency of digital marketing.
  • Digital Marketing Statistics | Runaway Digital: The way you find what your looking for has changed dramatically with online marketing – 68% of all web searches start there!
  • 78% clicking and making an actual purchase or taking some other action after seeing those pages.
  • 3% of all website visits, which means that if you have a site with the right keywords in it then your chances are high for success!
  • 92% of global traffic comes from the search engine, images and maps on their website!
  • 72% of online marketers consider high-quality content creation as the most efficient SEO tactic.
  • 60% of marketers say that inbound SEO is their highest quality source for leads, while blog content and social media are also incredibly valuable tools.
  • 6% conversion rate, SEO leads have the highest closing rates among all of our offers and it’s possible they could make up 25% or more your total sales volume per month!
  • Here are some stats about ranking well on Google:The top-ranking page gets the most search traffic only 49% of the time.
  • 7% of pages will rank in the top 10 search results within a year or less!
  • 22% of the time, but they’re even more sparing with fat-head keywords and long tail phrases than typical key word variations!
  • The average level at which Google displays these different types varies significantly – 38% for “fat head” terms versus 34% for “long Tail”.
  • The researchers found out that 66% of pages had no links, but only 26 percent were from 2014 or earlier – indicating it’s time for marketers and webmasters alike to start paying attention!
  • 6% of domains have reciprocal links, meaning that some of the sites they link to also link back and forth between them as well!
  • 87% of keywords with more than 10,000 monthly searches consist simply one or two words and not much else!
  • 53% of keywords with ten searches per month or fewer consist of only one or two words.
  • 41% more for monthly retainers, and a 275% more for one-off projects than those who’ve been in business for fewer than two years.
  • 76% of people who search on their smartphones for something nearby visit a business within a day.
  • Yelp appears in the top five search results for 92% of Google web queries that include a city and business category.
  • 54% of smartphone users search for business hours and 53% search for directions to a local store.
  • “Where to buy” + “near me” mobile queries have grown by over 200% from 2017–2019.
  • 51% of smartphone users have discovered a new company or product when conducting a search on their smartphones.
  • 51% of consumers make use of mobile devices to identify new brands and items on the market.
  • 7% of the clicks, whereas ranking in position #1 on desktop gets you 19.
  • Approximately 75% of voice search results rank in the top 3 for that query.
  • Marketers who used segmented campaigns noted as much as a 760% increase in revenue.
  • 78% of marketers have seen an increase in email engagement over the last 12 months.
  • 31% of B2B marketers say email newsletters are the best way to nurture leads.
  • B2B Email Marketing Statistics 81% of B2B marketers say their most used form of content marketing is email newsletters.
  • 87% of B2B marketers say email is one of their top free organic distribution channels.
  • 90% of content marketers say email engagement is the top metric they track to measure content performance.
  • Mobile Email Marketing Statistics 35% of business professionals check email on a mobile device.
  • The average number of people who open their emails via mobile devices is 49% Apple iPhone is the most popular mobile client for reading emails with 29% of all opens occurring on this platform.
  • B2C Email Marketing Statistics 80% of business professionals believe that email marketing increases customer retention.
  • 59% of respondents say marketing emails influence their purchase decisions.
  • On average, the open rate for welcome emails is 82% The most opened emails relate to hobbies, with an open rate of 27.
  • Social media digital marketing statistics Nearly 50% of the world’s population uses social media.
  • While 71% of teens claimed to use the platform in 2015, the number has now dropped to 51%.
  • If your Facebook ads contain images, then they will be between 75% and 90% more effective.
  • With 36% of viewers watching political Story content, politics is the top-Facebook Stories topic.
  • In Q3 of 2019, Twitter had more than 145 million monetizable daily active users — a 17% YoY growth.
  • Twitter’s 2019 Q3 revenue was $824 million, or 9% higher than Q3 in 2018.
  • 83% of the people who sent a Tweet to a company and received a response, felt better about the company and were more likely to do business with them.
  • Only 3% of Tweets about customer service issues call out the company’s username with the @ symbol.
  • Instagram continues to attract a younger audience with 72% of teens saying that they use the platform.
  • Ad spending on Instagram is 23% higher than on Facebook according to an internal analysis by Merkle.
  • In 2019, an estimated 25% of Facebook’s total ad revenue came from Instagram.
  • By the end of 2020, Instagram’s share of that revenue will grow to 30% globally.
  • Over 46% of all social media traffic to company websites comes from LinkedIn.
  • 54% of all people want marketers to put out more video content, and this is an excellent place to begin.
  • Roughly 50% of TikTok’s global audience is under the age of 34 with 26% between 18 and 24.
  • Video digital marketing statistics Videos attach 300% more traffic and help to nurture leads.
  • Including a video on your landing page can boost your conversion rate by up to 80%.
  • Nearly 50% of internet users look for videos related to a product or service before visiting a store.
  • 65% of executives have gone to the marketer’s site and 39% have called them on the phone after watching a marketing video.
  • 97% of marketers say video has helped users gain a better understanding of their products and services.
  • 50% of viewers aged 18-34 said they would stop what they were doing to watch a video from their favourite creator.
  • 64% of consumers will make a purchase after watching branded videos on social platforms.
  • 100 + Mind-Blowing Content Marketing Statistics (2024): Video was the primary form of content produced in 2021, followed by blog articles (produced by over 50% of marketing teams) and lastly, infographics (HubSpot).
  • 67% of B2B content teams say top-of-funnel content is the type of content they create most (Databox).
  • 46% of businesses say they want to increase their content marketing spending in 2022 (CMI).
  • 33% of marketers who currently don’t use artificial intelligence (AI) or automation tools have plans to in 2022 (HubSpot).
  • Only 2% of companies reported decreasing their content marketing team’s size due to COVID-19 (CMI).
  • In 2021, the top five content areas people were planning on investing in include:content creation (70%), website improvements (66%), events – digital and hybrid (48%), content distribution (46%), and social media management (39%) (CMI).
  • 60% of the best B2B marketers have a well-planned content marketing strategy (CMI).
  • 95% of B2B customers view content as an essential way of establishing trust when considering working with a business (Ziflow).
  • 52% of B2B buyers said they “definitely” are more likely to purchase from a company after consuming its content (Marketing Charts).
  • Email campaigns (87%) and educational content (77%) are the most popular content types B2B marketers use for nurturing their customers (CMI).
  • 95% of B2B marketers create social media content, making it the most popular type of content (CMI).
  • 6% of B2C marketers have no plans of developing a content marketing strategy (CMI).
  • 73% of B2C marketers use keyword research as part of their content creation process (CMI).
  • 60% of B2C marketers view content marketing as an essential part of their marketing campaigns (PointVisible).
  • B2C marketers use live video at a higher rate (66%) than B2B marketers (24%) (Statista).
  • 40% of B2C content marketers only do a competitor analysis once per year (or not at all) (Conductor).
  • B2C marketers deploy an average of 26% of their marketing budget for content marketing.
  • The most successful content marketers deploy 40% of their budgets (CMI).
  • 96% of people have watched an explainer video when researching a product or service (Wyzowl).
  • Approximately 91% of marketers think video is more important post-COVID-19.
  • 91% of marketers claim to be satisfied with the ROI from video marketing on social media (Animoto).
  • 76% of marketers view video as their most effective content type (HubSpot).
  • 97% of consumers and marketers believe video helps consumers better understand products or services (Wyzowl).
  • Video content on a website can increase conversion rates by 80% (Smart Insights).
  • 64% of B2B respondents cited podcasts as a valuable content type for users in the early stages of the buying journey, followed by 76% for infographics (DemandGen).
  • 80% of podcast listeners listen to most of each episode they consume (Podcast Insights).
  • The number of people over 12 who have heard about podcasts increased from 22% in 2006 to 75% in 2020 (2 billion + people) (Statista).
  • podcast listeners are aged 12–34, 32% (ages 35–54), and 20% are over 55 (Edison Research).
  • SEO content statisticsNearly 70% of all online experiences start with a search on a search engine (Brightedge).
  • 32% of consumers look at a brand’s social media before visiting their website (Animoto).
  • 75% of marketers reported SEO as their most successful content marketing strategy.
  • The next most effective was updating and repurposing content (used by 61% of respondents) (Semrush).
  • Google’s research shows that comparison searches using “best” have increased by 80% in the last two years (Google).
  • Social media statisticsSenior social media use has increased by 66% in the last five years, with 45% of seniors now using social media in total (Pew Research Center).
  • 94% of content marketers use social media as a content distribution channel (Semrush).
  • 89% of marketers said social media was their most popular content distribution channel (CMI).
  • Social media advertising / promoted posts increased from 60% to 83% in 2020 (CMI).
  • The most popular content formats are how-to guides (77%), news and trends (49%), and guides and eBooks (47%) (Statista).
  • 89% of content marketers utilize blog articles as part of their content strategy (MarketingProfs).
  • 57% of marketers report blogging has helped customers find them (OptinMonster).
  • 36% of bloggers writing 3,000 words + per post reported the best results (Orbit Media).
  • 71% of B2B respondents read a blog article during their buying journey (DemandGen).
  • Content strategy statisticsNearly 40% of marketers say content marketing is crucial for their marketing strategy (HubSpot).
  • 70% of marketers reported changing their messaging and targeting strategy in 2020 (CMI).
  • 79% of marketers reported that increasing quality leads was their top priority in 2021 (Semrush).
  • 63% of content marketers use their content marketing strategy to build loyalty with their current customers (CMI).
  • 63% of businesses have no official documented content strategy (Marketing Profs & CMI).
  • Content ROI statisticsOnly 4% of marketers measure ROI over 6 months or more (LinkedIn).
  • The top priority for 44% of marketers is improving their measurement of ROI for demand generation (HubSpot).
  • 75% of content marketers state that they receive a better ROI when incorporating visuals in their content (Contently).
  • 40% of survey respondents said they consume 3–5 content pieces before contacting a salesperson (DemandGen).
  • 31% higher open rates versus non-segmented email campaigns (Mailchimp).
  • Only 22% of millennials want emails from brands they support versus 57% of 45–54-year-olds (HubSpot).
  • Email marketing has an ROI of 40% for every dollar spent (Smart Insights).
  • 87% of marketers use email marketing to distribute their content (CMI).
  • Adding videos to your emails can help increase click rates by 300% (Martech Advisor).
  • 49% of respondents said they want to receive weekly promotional emails from their favorite brands (Statista).
  • A/B testing can help to increase email marketing ROI by up to 37% (Litmus).
  • 85% of B2B marketers are or plan to use interactive infographics as part of their content strategy (DemandGen).
  • 75% of respondents agree that non-gated interactive content results in a superior degree of lead nurturing (CMI).
  • Content marketing via augmented reality is expected to increase since 67% of marketing agencies already use this as part of their content efforts (Vibrant Media).
  • 94% of marketers agree interactive content is effective for educating customers (Inc).
  • 88% of marketers stated interactive content helps differentiate their brand from competitors (SnapApp).
  • 43% of consumers stated they prefer interactive video over other video content as it gives them the option to choose what information they want to engage with (MarketingCharts).
  • 88% of companies with budgets between $100 million and $1 billion were already experimenting with AR in 2018 (Deloitte).
  • The Latest B2B Content Marketing Trends, Statistics and Insights for 2021 – circle S studio: Here are some key insights from the report:Most companies have a content marketing strategy, but less than half have documented it In this year’s survey, 79% of B2B marketers reported that their organization has a content marketing strategy.
  • There is a correlation between having a strategy and effectiveness, as 60% of the most successful content marketers have a documented content marketing strategy.
  • The pandemic has required businesses to respond quickly and the research found that 83% of B2B marketers made quick changes to their content marketing.
  • Of those B2B marketers with a content marketing strategy, 70% made major or moderate adjustments to their strategy due to the pandemic.
  • 22% view those adjustments as short-term while 66% view them as both short- and long-term.
  • The top three changes made in response to the pandemic include updating targeting/messaging strategy (70%), adjusting the editorial calendar (64%), and changing the content distribution and promotion strategy (53%).
  • When asked to rate the success of their overall content marketing efforts, this year 85% of marketers said their efforts were either extremely successful (5%), very successful (26%) or moderately successful (54%).
  • A somewhat significant number of marketers (14%) considered their efforts minimally successful and only 1% reported their efforts to be not at all successful.
  • B2B marketers who reported high levels of content marketing success (extremely/very successful) said the top two factors contributing to that success were the value their content provides (83%) and website changes (60%).
  • On the flip side, marketers who reported low levels of content marketing success (minimally/not at all successful) said it was mostly due to content creation challenges (63%) and strategy issues (51%).
  • These goals include creating brand awareness (87%), building credibility/trust (81%), educating audiences (79%), generating demand/leads (75%), building loyalty with existing clients/customers (68%) and nurturing subscribers/audience/leads (60%).
  • The majority of B2B companies track content performance Highlighting the importance of metrics, 81% of B2B content marketers report their organization is using metrics to measure content performance.
  • The top 5 metrics tracked to measure content performance are website traffic (90%), email engagement (86%), website engagement (84%), conversions (80%) and social media analytics (76%).
  • Blogging remains the cornerstone of content marketing As in previous years, blog posts/short articles are the number one (93%) content type used by B2B marketers in the last 12 months.
  • Following blog posts in popularity are email newsletters (77%), case studies (68%) and videos (68%).
  • Of all the content types they use, B2B marketers reported that blog posts/short articles and virtual events/webinars/online courses (both tied at 22%) produced the best overall content marketing results for their organization in the last 12 months.
  • Although it was one of the most popular content marketing methods in years past, the use of in-person events has decreased to 42% from 73%.
  • But with the decrease in in-person events, the use of virtual events/webinars/online courses has increased to 67% from 57%.
  • Similarly, the use of live-streaming content has increased to 29% from 10%.
  • In fact, 89% used social media as an organic content distribution channel in the last 12 months, with email marketing (87%) and the company website/blog (86%) as close seconds and thirds.
  • Nearly all B2B marketers (96%) use LinkedIn for organic content distribution, as well as Twitter (82%), Facebook (82%), YouTube (62%) and Instagram (49%) rounding out the top five.
  • 72% of the B2B content marketers use paid methods to distribute content (down from 84% last year), and of that group 83% use social media advertising/promoted posts.
  • Other paid content distribution channels include search engine marketing/pay-per-click (65%), sponsorships (60%), banner ads (48%), native advertising/sponsored content (35%) and partner emails (33%).
  • When it comes to social media advertising and promoted posts, LinkedIn is the top choice (80%), followed by Facebook (67%), Twitter (27%), Instagram (26%) and YouTube (17%).
  • Small content marketing teams serving the entire organization is the most common team structure The majority of marketers (55%) reported that their organizations have a small (1-5 dedicated people) content marketing team serving the entire organization.
  • While only 11% of large organizations (1,000+ employees) have a large team (11 or more dedicated people), nearly half (43%) of medium organizations (100-999 employees) have 2-5 employees serving the entire organization.
  • Interestingly, 35% of respondents reported that they have no one full-time dedicated to content marketing, while most companies regardless of size are most likely to have teams of 1-5.
  • Nearly half of B2B marketers outsource at least one content marketing activity When asked about outsourcing, 49% of B2B marketers outsource at least one content marketing activity.
  • Large firms are the most likely to outsource (61%), with small firms the least likely to outsource (37%).
  • The activity most likely to be outsourced is overwhelmingly content creation (86%), regardless of company size, content marketing budget, or overall content marketing success.
  • Interestingly, the top reported challenge for B2B marketers who outsource is finding partners with adequate topic expertise (69%).
  • Half of B2B marketers indicated there was no change in their content marketing spending in the first half of 2020 as a response to the pandemic 53% of B2B marketers indicated there was no change in their content marketing spending in H1 2020 in response to the pandemic.
  • Another 29% reported a decrease in spending, and 18% actually reported an increase.
  • While 69% of B2B marketers expect their content marketing spending to stay the same (57%) or decrease (12%) in the second half of 2020 compared to the first half, nearly one-third (30%) expect their spending to increase.
  • 36% of B2B content marketers reported a 2019 annual content marketing budget of less than $100,000, while the average reported annual budget for all respondents was $185,000.
  • 50+ Digital Marketing Statistics for 2024 [SEO, SMM, CRO]: 7% of pages will rank in the top 10 search results within 1 year of being published.
  • Here’s a list of social media statistics in 2023– The number of social media users increased only by 3% from January 2022 to January 2023.
  • (SproutSocial) Social media recently took over paid search as an advertising tool, growing 25% YoY and exceeding paid search over just $2 billion.
  • (G2) In 2023, 29% of marketers plan to invest more in Instagram than any other platform.
  • Listed below are some important content marketing statistics – 73% of B2C marketers employ keyword research for SEO when creating content.
  • How-to articles are the most popular content formats (77%), followed by news and trends (49%), and guides and ebooks (47%).
  • (CMI) 83% of marketers want to focus on the quality of content rather than the quantity, even if it means posting less often.
  • (Hubspot) 80% of marketers think automation generates more leads and conversions.
  • (Digital Media Stream) Effective blog headlines drive 500% more traffic.
  • Listed below are some global digital marketing statistics for advertising – 46% of the page clicks go to the top 3 PPC ads.
  • (Hosting Tutorials) 30% of consumers say that influencer recommendations are one of the key factors in deciding about the purchase.
  • (Statista) 70% of users have purchased a product after viewing an ad about it.
  • (WYZOwl) 39% of marketers who used video as a marketing tool for the first time in 2022, said they were able to do so because it had become easier to convince others in the business of the value of video content.
  • (Zenithmedia) 86% of marketers choose video marketing as their primary promotion tool.
  • (Omnisend) 81% of SMBs still consider email marketing as their primary customer acquisition channel.
  • (Campaign Monitor) 90% of marketers believe personalisation is the future.
  • (Optinmonster) 47% of email recipients will open your email solely based on subject lines.
  • 6% is the average conversion rate for ecommerce websites for organic leads.
  • (Monsters Insights) Only 22% of the businesses are happy with the conversion rate.
  • (Econsultancy) Personalized CTAs generate 42% more conversions than non-personalized CTAs (Hubspot).
  • (Marketing Evolution) Marketing teams that document their strategy are 313% more likely to report success than those that don’t.
  • 8 Digital Marketing Stats from 2021 (And How To Leverage Them in 2022) – DEKSIA: Additionally, a study from eMarketer found that digital advertising spending will have increased 25% in 2021 from 2020.
  • Further, entertainment, retail, and CPG will all increase their digital ad spending by more than 30% this year.
  • Paid Search is Still in High Demand (Up 39%) Seeing that Google pulled such huge ad revenue results in 2021, it’s no surprise that paid search advertising is still in high demand.
  • In fact, spending in this category went up 39% in 2021, accounting for $98.
  • 20% of Ad Budgets are Spent on Social Media Advertising Social media advertising is growing, and fast.
  • According to Forbes, social media ad spending increased 36% compared to last year, totaling $58.
  • com, online searches for “TikTok ads” are up 102% from last year, and up 375% in the last 2 years.
  • YouTube & Twitch Advertising is up 47% from 2020 This stat comes from Forbes again.
  • Less Than 1 out of 10 Businesses Have Their Own YouTube Channel Unfortunately, a vast majority of businesses (91%) don’t have a YouTube channel, according to brandwatch.
  • Content Marketing Statistics from 2020 and Beyond: (CBRE) Email subject lines of 6-10 words had the highest open rate, at 21%.
  • (Invesp) 80% of users ignore paid search results and move straight to organic rankings.
  • (IMPACT) Search engines (like Google) send 300% more traffic to sites than social media.
  • (McKinsey and Company) Google is still dominating the market with 70% of all global desktop search traffic (Net Marketshare) Facebook ad spending was 32% higher in 2021 than 2020.
  • Indeed, if your business hasn’t focused on content marketing up to this point, it’s a good idea to start—especially since 60% of B2C businesses are using content marketing strategies (Review42).
  • (Review 42) 42% of marketers can’t measure the results of their campaigns.
  • (Review 42) 72% of marketers believe branded content is more effective than traditional advertising.
  • (Wordstream) 61% of customers who have made a purchase did so after reading a blog post.
  • (Content Marketing Institute) 34% of bloggers have a means to analyze the performance of a blog post.
  • (Hubspot) 95% of content used in content marketing is made for social media.
  • (Lifewire) Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing (Wordstream) yet was estimated to become a $300 billion industry in 2020.
  • (Venngage) 53% of mobile users will close a website if it takes longer than 3 seconds to load.
  • (Think with Google) Only 66% of B2B marketers will prioritize a customer need over their own sales message in content.
  • Roughly 60% of people purchase a product after reading a post about it.
  • (Demand Metric) 86% of people reported wanting more videos from brands.
  • (Backlinko) Over 60% of larger organizations stated that they outsource content marketing work.
  • (Content Marketing Institute) Around 94% of marketers expressed that video content has helped them increase understanding around their product or service.
  • To stay relevant amongst the sea of content more than 50% of marketers will create more of it.
  • Roi Of Digital Marketing Statistics [Fresh Research] • Gitnux: 4% growth in 2021, surpassing 100 billion dollars for the first time since 2018.
  • ROI of Digtial Marketing:Most Important Statistics 73% of in-house and 75% of agency marketers rated email marketing as excellent or good for ROI in a 2019 survey of global marketers, with 57% based in the UK.
  • Paid search advertising spending on Google in the US increased 34% in Q3 2021, with a 25% increase in cost-per-click and an 8% increase in clicks compared to the same period in 2020.
  • 73% of in-house and 75% of agency marketers rated email marketing as excellent or good for ROI in a 2019 survey of global marketers, with 57% based in the UK.
  • Paid search advertising spending on Google in the US increased 34% in Q3 2021, with a 25% increase in cost-per-click and an 8% increase in clicks compared to the same period in 2020.
  • Social media impressions have increased by nearly 20% year-on-year, but traditional forms of advertising are seeing a decrease in clicks and clickthrough rates, leading to uncertainty among global marketers on the ability to measure ROI.
  • 34% of global marketers were uncertain about their ability to measure social media marketing ROI in early 2020, while 30% believed they could measure it.
  • 3% indicates that email marketing is an effective way to reach and engage with customers, and that businesses can expect to see a return on their investment in this area.
  • The main content production objectives for companies in France in 2020 were to acquire/transform new customers (40%) and gain notoriety/increase traffic (38%), with profitability being the main expectation for content investment.
  • Investing in SEO can result in a 42% average ROI for businesses and generate 1000% more traffic than organic social media, making it a worthwhile investment to focus on and measure for positive ROI.
  • 4% growth in 2021, surpassing 100 billion dollars for the first time since 2018.
  • Content Marketing Statistics for 2024: 37% Compound Annual Growth Rate (CAGR) expected (2022-2027), as 71% of marketers recognize its growing importance for brand storytelling.
  • Consider this:in the past year alone, a whopping 71% of marketers emphasized its heightened significance to their brands.
  • [Technavio]93% of B2B marketers and 86% of B2C marketers use content marketing.
  • 40% of B2B content marketers have a documented content marketing strategy.
  • [CMI]70% of content marketers say their organizations integrate content strategy into the overall marketing sales/communication/strategy.
  • According to Hubsopt, 83% of marketers say it’s better to focus on content quality over quantity.
  • [Hubspot]But according to Semrush, 55% of marketers who create more content and post more frequently helped the most to boost their content ranking.
  • 94% of small businesses have plans to boost their marketing spending in 2024.
  • [Taradel]24% of marketers said that content marketing takes up one-fourth or more of the total marketing budget.
  • [CMI]45% of marketers believe that their content marketing budget will increase in 2024.
  • [CMI]80% of content marketers who are successful spend more than 10% of their marketing budgets on content.
  • [Semrush]69% B2B marketers say they would increase their spending on video, followed by thought leadership content (53%), and in-person events (47%).
  • 61% of successful marketers conduct content audits two or more times a year.
  • [Databox]53% of marketers say updating their content helped increase engagement while 49% saw an increase in traffic and/or rankings.
  • [DemandSage]51% of marketers say that content requests go through a centralized content team in large organizations (100-plus employees).
  • [HubSpot]48% of content marketers want to learn to work with new technologies like AI.
  • 31% of marketers say that having “no structured content production process” is one of the big challenges when scaling content production.
  • [CMI]But only 31% of marketers say that they’re using the right tools to manage their content.
  • [Web Tribunal]90% of content marketers leverage websites and blogs the most in their content strategy.
  • 2% more referring domain backlinks than content shorter than 1000 words.
  • Here are some essential video content marketing statistics you should know for 2024:Videos will account for a whopping 82% of all consumer internet traffic by 2025, while video streaming will make up 91% of global internet traffic.
  • [Integral Ad Science]53% of marketers say that case studies/customer stories and videos deliver some of their best results.
  • [CMI]69% of B2B content marketers think that their companies would increase their investment in video.
  • [CMI]40% of marketers said creating more visual, and video content improved their content marketing.
  • [Semrush] 97% of marketers said that video helped increase user understanding of their product or service, while 76% said that it helped them increase sales and revenue.
  • [Statista]82% of marketers plan on investing the same or more into podcasts or other audio content moving forward.
  • Jonathan Perelman of BuzzFeed 90% of marketers use social media platforms (organic), followed by blogs (79%), and email newsletters (73%) to distribute content.
  • [CMI]When it comes to paid content distribution channels, 78% use social media advertising/promoted posts.
  • [CMI] 62% of marketers said that pay-per-click produces the best results for distributing content.
  • 72% of the successful marketers measure the ROI of their content marketing.
  • 46% of B2B marketers agree their organization measures content performance effectively.
  • [CMI]Content marketing costs 62% less than outbound marketing and provides 3x better lead generation.
  • [Insider Intelligence]73% of marketers use conversions as the most frequently used metric to assess content performance.
  • Other metrics are email engagement (71%), website traffic (71%), website engagement (69%), and social media analytics (65%).
  • [CMI] 84% of marketers have problems integrating/correlating data across multiple platforms when it comes to measuring content performance.
  • But it’s not an easy feat since about 45% of marketers said that optimizing content for SEO is one of the biggest challenges of content creation.
  • 82% of marketers say generative AI has impacted how they plan to create content.
  • [Hubspot]69% of marketers say it is important to their overall content strategy.
  • [Hubspot]76% of marketers using generative AI say they use it for basic content creation and copywriting.
  • [Insider Intelligence]91% use free tools like ChatGPT while about 27% pay for AI tools such as Jasper.
  • [CMI]73% of consumers, on average, trust content written by generative AI tools.
  • [Capgemini] 61% of marketers have no guidelines for using generative AI tools.
  • VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS IN 2023 | Amra And Elma LLC: 2 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #2 – 35% of Instagram Story users prefer shorter, narrative-style stories 2.
  • 3 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #3 – around 62% of marketers are using webinars as visual content marketing tools with success rates of 91% 2.
  • 3 times the engagement of those without them (37% increase in engagement) 2.
  • 7 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #7 – using the word ‘video’ in the subject line of an email can increase open rates by 6% and click rates by 65% 2.
  • 8 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #8 – 93% of companies have obtained a new customer after sharing a video on social media 2.
  • 9 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #9 – viewers remember 95% of a message when they watch it in a video, as opposed to 10% when reading it in text 2.
  • 10 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #10 – 35% of video marketers had used Facebook Live as a marketing channel and 74% reported that it had worked well for them 2.
  • 11 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #11 – 84% of consumers agree that watching promotional videos has convinced them to purchase a product or service 2.
  • 13 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #13 – 75% of Instagram users take action after watching a brand’s video ad on the platform 2.
  • 14 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #14 – Internet users spend 88% more time on websites and web pages that feature video content 2.
  • 15 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #15 – 49% of marketers said that visual content marketing was ‘very important’ to their overall strategy 2.
  • 16 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #16 – 72% of consumers would rather learn about a product or service they are interested in through a video 2.
  • 17 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #17 – 74% of marketers now incorporate visual elements into more than 70% of their content 2.
  • 18 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #18 – 70% of respondents in a recent survey claimed that they watch Facebook Stories more often than Snapchat or Instagram 2.
  • 19 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #19 – 69% of consumers keep the sound off when watching online videos, as opposed to social media stories, which are watched with the sound on by 56% of consumers 2.
  • 20 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #20 – videos on landing pages can lead to 800% more conversions 2.
  • 22 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #22 – since 2000, the searches for the term ‘infographics’ had increased by 800% 2.
  • Webinars also taking lead with 40% of marketers using webinars as visual content marketing tools with success rates of 83%.
  • VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #2 – 35% of Instagram Story users prefer shorter, narrative-style stories As visual content marketing becomes increasingly popular, it’s important to understand the trends and preferences of users.
  • According to a recent Hubspot survey, 35% of Instagram Story users prefer shorter, narrative-style stories.
  • VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #3 – around 62% of marketers are using webinars as visual content marketing tools with success rates of 91% According to a survey, visual content marketing tools like webinars are becoming increasingly popular, with around 62% of marketers using them currently.
  • And success rates are high, with 91% of those that have used webinars for visual content marketing considering themselves successful.
  • 5% According to research, infographics and illustrations are the visual content types that perform the best in terms of engagement.
  • 3 times the engagement of those without them (37% increase in engagement) A study by BuzzSumo found that posts with images on Facebook receive 2.
  • In addition, social media strategist Jeff Bullas reports that Facebook posts with photos receive an average 37% increase in engagement.
  • VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #7 – using the word ‘video’ in the subject line of an email can increase open rates by 6% and click rates by 65% According to a research, using the word ‘video’ in the subject line of an email can increase open rates by 6%.
  • Click rates go up by 65% when ‘video’ is used in the subject line, and unsubscribe rates decrease by 26%.
  • Including a video thumbnail in the email can also improve subscriber engagement by nearly 41%.
  • According to recent studies, roughly 93% of companies have obtained a new customer after sharing a video on social media.
  • According to a study, viewers remember 95% of a message when they watch it in a video, as opposed to 10% when reading it in text.
  • 36% of respondents said they planned to keep using the platform, making it one of the most popular channels among video marketers.
  • VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #11 – 84% of consumers agree that watching promotional videos has convinced them to purchase a product or service Visual content marketing is a powerful tool that can convince consumers to purchase a product or service.
  • According to Wyzowl, 84% of consumers agree that watching promotional videos has convinced them to purchase a product or service.
  • VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #13 – 75% of Instagram users take action after watching a brand’s video ad on the platform A recent study found that 75% of Instagram users take action after watching a brand’s video ad on the platform.
  • VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #14 – Internet users spend 88% more time on websites and web pages that feature video content Video is an effective way to communicate complex information in a concise and visual manner.
  • According to SocialMediaToday found that Internet users spend 88% more time on websites and web pages that feature video content.
  • According to a recent survey of marketers, 49% of respondents said that visual marketing was ‘very important’ to their overall strategy, and 22% said it was ‘important’.
  • VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #16 – 72% of consumers would rather learn about a product or service they are interested in through a video A recent study by SocialMediaToday showed that 72% of consumers would rather learn about a product or service they are interested in through a video.
  • In fact, visual content is so effective that it can increase conversion rates by up to 80%.
  • When it comes to video marketing specifically, viewers are able to retain 95% of the information they watch, compared to only 10% when reading text.
  • Infographics have become particularly popular, with 65% of B2B marketers in North America using them as a part of their marketing strategy, as per Content Marketing Institute.
  • VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #18 – 70% of respondents in a recent survey claimed that they watch Facebook Stories more often than Snapchat or Instagram Facebook Stories is a visual content marketing tool that allows businesses to share photos and videos with their followers.
  • The platform has quickly become popular with consumers, with 70% of respondents in a recent survey claiming that they watch Facebook Stories more often than Snapchat or Instagram.
  • VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #19 – 69% of consumers keep the sound off when watching online videos, as opposed to social media stories, which are watched with the sound on by 56% of consumers According to Verizon Media, 69% of consumers keep the sound off when watching online videos.
  • This is in contrast to social media Stories, which are sometimes watched with the sound on by 56% of consumers, and always watched with the sound on by 29% of consumers.
  • VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #20 – videos on landing pages can lead to 800% more conversions According to a recent survey, 70% of marketers believe that content adorned with visuals will reap better business results.
  • People are drawn to visual content and are more likely to engage with it – videos on landing pages can lead to 800% more conversions as per FunnelScience.
  • VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #22 – since 2000, the searches for the term ‘infographics’ had increased by 800% The appeal of infographics is that they can convey a lot of information in a concise and visually appealing way.
  • With 74% of marketers now incorporating visual elements into more than 70% of their content, and 49% saying that visual content is ‘very important’ to their overall strategy, it’s clear that there is a demand for quality visuals.
  • Additionally, 35% of video marketers have used Facebook Live as a marketing channel and 74% reported that it had worked well for them.
  • 2 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #2 – 35% of Instagram Story users prefer shorter, narrative-style stories 2.
  • 3 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #3 – around 62% of marketers are using webinars as visual content marketing tools with success rates of 91% 2.
  • 3 times the engagement of those without them (37% increase in engagement) 2.
  • 7 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #7 – using the word ‘video’ in the subject line of an email can increase open rates by 6% and click rates by 65% 2.
  • 8 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #8 – 93% of companies have obtained a new customer after sharing a video on social media 2.
  • 9 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #9 – viewers remember 95% of a message when they watch it in a video, as opposed to 10% when reading it in text 2.
  • 10 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #10 – 35% of video marketers had used Facebook Live as a marketing channel and 74% reported that it had worked well for them 2.
  • 11 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #11 – 84% of consumers agree that watching promotional videos has convinced them to purchase a product or service 2.
  • 13 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #13 – 75% of Instagram users take action after watching a brand’s video ad on the platform 2.
  • 14 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #14 – Internet users spend 88% more time on websites and web pages that feature video content 2.
  • 15 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #15 – 49% of marketers said that visual content marketing was ‘very important’ to their overall strategy 2.
  • 16 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #16 – 72% of consumers would rather learn about a product or service they are interested in through a video 2.
  • 17 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #17 – 74% of marketers now incorporate visual elements into more than 70% of their content 2.
  • 18 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #18 – 70% of respondents in a recent survey claimed that they watch Facebook Stories more often than Snapchat or Instagram 2.
  • 19 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #19 – 69% of consumers keep the sound off when watching online videos, as opposed to social media stories, which are watched with the sound on by 56% of consumers 2.
  • 20 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #20 – videos on landing pages can lead to 800% more conversions 2.
  • 22 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #22 – since 2000, the searches for the term ‘infographics’ had increased by 800% 2.
  • 35+ Key Social Media Marketing Statistics (2023 Updated Data): Social Media is Utilized By Most Americans, With 76% of the Population Actively Using these Platforms.
  • Around 44% of Internet Users Aged 16 to 64 Have Made Social Media Their Primary Source of Information When Researching.
  • 64% of Consumers Believe in Brands That Have an Active and Positive Social Media Engagement.
  • 76% of Users Make Buying Decisions Based on What They Discover on Social Media.
  • 66% of Employees Utilize Social Media for Interaction and Communication with Coworkers.
  • 84% of Social Media Content Sharing Occurs Away From Where It Was Initially Posted.
  • 97% of People Who Make Online Purchases Have Looked at Social Media in the Last Month.
  • 90% of Consumers Will Likely Communicate With a Brand Using Social Media.
  • 86% of Americans Will Likely Seek Alternative Shopping Options if a Brand Lacks Transparency.
  • Live Video is Considered the Most Transparent Form of Content by 43% of Consumers.
  • The Primary Goal for 80% of Marketers is to Enhance Social Media Engagement.
  • 53% of Consumers Believe Businesses Take a Stance Primarily to Enhance Their Marketing Efforts.
  • 70% of Consumers Anticipate that Businesses will Adopt a Stance on Important Issues.
  • 43% of Consumers View Live Video as the Most Effective Means of Achieving Transparency.
  • Social Media is Utilized By Most Americans, With 76% of the Population Actively Using these Platforms.
  • Around 44% of Internet Users Aged 16 to 64 Have Made Social Media Their Primary Source of Information When Researching.
  • 64% of Consumers Believe in Brands That Have an Active and Positive Social Media Engagement.
  • 76% of Users Make Buying Decisions Based on What They Discover on Social Media.
  • 66% of Employees Utilize Social Media for Interaction and Communication with Coworkers.
  • 84% of Social Media Content Sharing Occurs Away From Where It Was Initially Posted.
  • 97% of People Who Make Online Purchases Have Looked at Social Media in the Last Month.
  • 90% of Consumers Will Likely Communicate With a Brand Using Social Media.
  • 86% of Americans Will Likely Seek Alternative Shopping Options if a Brand Lacks Transparency.
  • Live Video is Considered the Most Transparent Form of Content by 43% of Consumers.
  • The Primary Goal for 80% of Marketers is to Enhance Social Media Engagement.
  • 53% of Consumers Believe Businesses Take a Stance Primarily to Enhance Their Marketing Efforts.
  • 70% of Consumers Anticipate that Businesses will Adopt a Stance on Important Issues.
  • 43% of Consumers View Live Video as the Most Effective Means of Achieving Transparency.
  • The figures for social media saw a 10% growth from 2021 to 2022 Social media is utilized by most Americans, with 76% of the population actively using these platforms.
  • Around 44% of internet users aged 16 to 64 have made social media their primary source of information when researching.
  • Live video is considered the most transparent form of content by 43% of consumers.
  • 2% of Gen Y are active on social media platforms 64% of consumers believe in brands that have an active and positive social media engagement.
  • 76% of users make buying decisions based on what they discover on social media.
  • In 2023, social media platforms will undeniably transform into a vital aspect of daily life for billions of individuals worldwide, making up 60% of the world’s population.
  • 4% of the world’s population is now active on social media, with the primary barrier for non-users being internet connectivity.
  • The latest statistics reveal that 60% of global internet users access the web through mobile devices.
  • Social Media is Utilized By Most Americans, With 76% of the Population Actively Using these Platforms.
  • A recent Hootsuite survey indicated that 75% of individuals aged 13 and older are active on social media.
  • In the long run, it’s foreseeable that 100% of individuals aged 13 and above will be connected to the internet and engaged in social media.
  • Around 44% of Internet Users Aged 16 to 64 Have Made Social Media Their Primary Source of Information When Researching.
  • Think about it this way:If we assume people sleep for about 7 to 8 hours daily, we spend about 15% of our waking hours on social media.
  • 2% participating in social media, although the older generations might use fewer platforms than the younger ones.
  • 64% of Consumers Believe in Brands That Have an Active and Positive Social Media Engagement.
  • Recent statistics indicate that 56% of Americans maintain multiple social media accounts, each serving a particular purpose.
  • 76% of Users Make Buying Decisions Based on What They Discover on Social Media.
  • Additionally, a survey has demonstrated that 93% of marketers use Facebook to connect with their audience.
  • 66% of Employees Utilize Social Media for Interaction and Communication with Coworkers.
  • 84% of Social Media Content Sharing Occurs Away From Where It Was Initially Posted.
  • A recent survey highlights that 84% of content sharing occurs independently from the platform where it was initially posted.
  • Recent research indicates that adding a location tag can boost engagement by 79%, and involving another user can increase engagement by 56%.
  • Recent findings from Statista highlight that 40% of individuals aged 18-34 who regularly use the internet have purchased through social media platforms in the past month.
  • A recent Hootsuite survey reveals that over 75% of internet users use social media for product research.
  • 97% of People Who Make Online Purchases Have Looked at Social Media in the Last Month.
  • Remarkably, a staggering 97% of buyers need to verify the authenticity of both the product and the seller.
  • A recent survey showed that 71% of customers who had experienced a positive social media interaction with a company would recommend the brand to others.
  • The same survey found that 80% of consumers have decided to buy something because they have seen it recommended by a social media influencer.
  • 90% of Consumers Will Likely Communicate With a Brand Using Social Media.
  • Recent research indicates that 90% of consumers use social media to communicate with businesses.
  • However, a recent survey found that people find out about 52% of brands via social media.
  • The study highlighted that 50% of individuals aged 18 to 29 bought a product in the past year solely because it was promoted on social media.
  • According to surveys, the typical consumer buying through social media will spend 20-40% more than those shopping through traditional online stores or physical retail settings.
  • 86% of Americans Will Likely Seek Alternative Shopping Options if a Brand Lacks Transparency.
  • In a recent survey, 86% of Americans expressed willingness to take their business elsewhere.
  • Live Video is Considered the Most Transparent Form of Content by 43% of Consumers.
  • According to a recent survey, 43% of consumers believe that live video is the most effective means of demonstrating transparency.
  • If creating live videos is not feasible, standard videos remain a potent tool, with 67% of consumers finding them effective in illustrating transparency.
  • The survey revealed that 53% of social media users consider transparency essential concerning product changes.
  • The Primary Goal for 80% of Marketers is to Enhance Social Media Engagement.
  • Hootsuite’s recent data reveals that 80% of social marketers publish content on social media primarily to enhance engagement.
  • This strategy proves effective, with a notable 50% of companies using social media for over two years reporting sales growth.
  • Furthermore, 93% of marketers acknowledge that exposure and resulting engagement constitute the most significant advantages of advertising on social media.
  • 53% of Consumers Believe Businesses Take a Stance Primarily to Enhance Their Marketing Efforts.
  • Another study reveals that 53% of consumers think businesses primarily take a stance for image, publicity, and marketing benefits.
  • Notably, 40% of consumers view businesses partnering with non-profits as more authentic.
  • 70% of Consumers Anticipate that Businesses will Adopt a Stance on Important Issues.
  • A recent survey indicated that 70% of customers anticipate this alignment.
  • However, the same study revealed that 55% of consumers are inclined to discontinue their association with a business with differing opinions.
  • 43% of Consumers View Live Video as the Most Effective Means of Achieving Transparency.
  • The survey indicated that 67% of consumers consider them an effective means of showcasing transparency.
  • Furthermore, the survey revealed that 53% of social media users deem transparency crucial, especially regarding product changes.
  • 140+ Eye-Opening Digital Marketing Statistics for 2021!: Email marketing is the key strategic channel according to 91% of marketers.
  • Objectives for email marketing campaigns include sales (62%), engagement (50%), brand awareness (47%), and building loyalty (45%).
  • General Social Media StatisticsUsing a social media platform to market your products and services is powerful:83% of marketers ranked social media as an important channel.
  • 86% of consumers buying IT products use social media to make a decision.
  • IBM increased its sales by an impressive 400% thanks to its inbound social selling program.
  • 98% of sales reps with at least 5,000 LinkedIn contacts reach or surpass their sales quota.
  • InstagramInstagram is the most popular visual marketing platform and is particularly well suited for businesses that are targeting Millennials:33% of social media users use Instagram discount codes.
  • Instagram’s addressable advertising audience, compared to the population aged 13+, is 15%.
  • LinkedIn’s addressable advertising audience, compared to the population aged 13+, is 11%.
  • 79% of Twitter followers are more likely to recommend the brands they follow.
  • Google currently holds over 92% of the worldwide search engine market share.
  • An unbelievable 80% of purchases start online, even if they end in-store.
  • 70% of businesses surveyed by databox confirmed that SEO generates more sales than Pay Per Click (PPC).
  • Improving SEO and organic presence is a top inbound marketing priority for 61% of marketers.
  • Digital marketing professionals that combine organic SEO and PPC ads see 25% more clicks and 27% greater profits when compared to results from just one technique.
  • 84% of internet users say they’ve searched online for a product or service to buy.
  • 42% made their online purchase using a laptop or desktop computer while 55% made an online purchase via a mobile device.
  • Lead generation forms have an average of 11 fields and a conversion rate of 17% while contact forms with only 4 fields have conversion rates of only 1%.
  • A 1-second delay in loading reduces your conversions by a depressing 7%.
  • Businesses using video as a marketing tool have increased by 41% since 2016.
  • The types of videos created are explainer videos (73%), social media videos (67%), presentation videos (51%), sales videos (41%), and video ads (41%).
  • 24% of video marketers said they used video for the first time in 2020.
  • 96% of people have watched an explainer video to learn more about a product or service.
  • 84% say they’ve been convinced to buy a product or service by watching a brand’s video.
  • 79% have been convinced to buy or download a piece of software or app by watching a video.
  • 86% of video marketers say video has increased traffic to their website.
  • A striking 55% of internet users bought something online via a mobile phone in the past month.
  • This distinction makes a big difference to your marketing strategy, as is shown by these statistics:77% of B2B purchasers said they would not speak to a salesperson until they did their own research.
  • 67% of B2C and 41% of B2B companies have acquired a customer through Facebook.
  • Surprisingly, 36% of marketers planned to explore automation and Artificial Intelligence as a marketing and sales strategy.
  • 5% higher open rate and a 152% higher click-through rate than generic email newsletters.
  • Businesses that excel at lead nurturing generate 50% more sales-ready leads at a 33% lower cost.
  • 78% of marketers said that email was the most effective online channel for lead nurturing campaigns.
  • 65% of businesses say generating traffic and leads is their biggest marketing challenge.
  • 74% of companies say that converting leads into buying customers is their top priority.
  • Perhaps surprisingly, 96% of visitors that come to your website aren’t ready to buy.
  • 68% of B2B companies will use landing pages to nurture new sales leads for future conversion.
  • 49% of businesses say most of their leads require “long cycle” nurturing with many influencers.
  • 51% of email marketers say email list segmentation is the most effective way to personalize lead nurturing.
  • 51% of advertising and marketing managers say that losing a highly skilled team member unexpectedly would have a significant adverse impact on their business because they’d be hard to replace.
  • 45% said they would be stretched thin but could find a replacement quickly.
  • More than 60% of creative marketers managed more than four unique projects every week.
  • 78% of all marketing work is subject to at least one type of compliance.
  • Millennials overspend to avoid FOMO, with 40% overspending or going into debt to keep up with their friends.
  • 73% of Millenials who went into debt to keep up with their friends kept it a secret.
  • 27% of Millenials responded that they felt uncomfortable saying “no” when a friend suggested an activity they couldn’t afford.
  • The biggest things creating FOMO for Millenials are travel (59%), parties and events (56%), and food (29%).
  • Facebook is the most common contributor to FOMO at 72%, then Instagram (14%), Twitter (11%), and Pinterest (8%).
  • 56% of people are afraid of missing out on events, news, and important updates if they are away from social networks.
  • 5% higher open rate and a 152% higher click-through rate than generic email newsletters.
  • Content Marketing Statistics Australia – Red Search: 3% of Australian Brands Changed Their Content Marketing Strategy During the PandemicA market study by Venngage revealed that more than 64% of small and medium Australian businesses recalibrated their content marketing according to changes brought about by the global health crisis.
  • On the other hand, about 36% said they don’t have to realign their techniques amid the COVID-19 pandemic.
  • Creators Spend About 5 Hours Developing New ContentAbout 36% of content creators reported consuming about 5 to 10 hours of developing visual marketing content.
  • 5% takes 10 to 20 hours to produce new content for SEO and digital marketing.
  • Visual Media Content is Dominating the IndustryMost Australian digital brands reported that over 91% of their content includes visual elements and graphics.
  • About 21% of respondents claimed to have used visual content for 80% of their website content, while 7.
  • 6% of respondents utilise original design for content marketing, while only 14.
  • 3% visualise their content and insights through charts and infographics.
  • 84% of B2B Companies Outsource Content MarketingA Smart Insights study showed that roughly 84% of B2B brands rely on content creation and marketing outsourcing.
  • Moreover, visual content such as charts, infographics, and others are growing by 56% compared to last year.
  • Original Content is Most Effective in Achieving Digital Marketing GoalsMore than half (57%) of digital brands in Australia reported that using original content and infographics helped them achieve their goals better than stock photos (7.
  • The Race for Content Marketing Led Brands to Spend 30% of Their BudgetMany Australian brands are investing in the rapidly growing content marketing industry.
  • That’s why about 36% of brands spend as much as 21%-30% of their marketing budget on content marketing.
  • 1% allocate approximately 10% of their marketing budget to publish new content and update and refresh old content.
  • Moreover, market changes and digitalisation caused by the pandemic drove brands to increase their content marketing spending by 10%.
  • Roughly 7% estimate their budget spending to be as high as 70% in 2021.
  • Visual Content is Crucial for More than 71% of Australian BrandsThe same study by Venngage showed that 71.
  • 4% of Australian brands say that visually appealing content and data are vital to their overall digital marketing strategy.
  • 6% believe that visual content is helpful but not very significant for digital marketing.
  • Social Media Content Dominates as the Type of Content for B2B MarketersOut of the three most prominent content types, social media content ranks as the most effective medium for content marketing at 95%.
  • Blog posts and short articles rank second at 89%, while newsletter and email marketing fall third at 81%.
  • 6% of Australian Brands rely on In-House Content DevelopersOut of 200 digital brands and marketers, 28.
  • Over Half of Brands Say Blog Content is a Marketing PriorityAn industry study showed that 55% of B2C businesses focused on blog content development in their overall digital marketing strategy.
  • 7% of Marketers Publish Content More Than 5 Times WeeklyMore brands are hopping into content marketing for SEO and digital marketing strategies.
  • About half of the respondents produce 2 to 5 content materials weekly, while roughly 36% publish up to 10 times in the same period.
  • The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: 47% of consumers are blocking ads In a survey of 93,803 internet users aged 16 to 64, GlobalWebIndex has found that 47% of global internet users use an ad blocker today.
  • APAC narrowly leads in ad blocking, with 50% of respondents in this region having used an ad blocker to stop ads in the past month.
  • In terms of the top motivations for ad blocking, 48% say it is because there are far too many ads, while 47% say it is because ads are annoying or intrusive.
  • Programmatic Best Practice Guide 53% of Next sales are made online It’s been reported that annual sales for UK retailer Next have continued to fall, while its online business has grown.
  • Despite recent investment in its high street presence, sales in Next’s stores fell nearly 8% last year to £1.
  • According to Next, 53% of its sales are now made online, with online profits jumping nearly 14% in 2018.
  • This is in contrast to offline performance, where annual profits at its high street stores fell by just over 20%.
  • Despite this, Next insists that its stores are an integral part of business, stating that more than half of online orders were delivered to stores last year, while more than 80% of returns were also made through stores.
  • 29% of TV ads not ‘viewable’ Finally, a new study from IPG Media Lab has revealed that 29% of TV adverts are not actually seen by viewers.
  • The study found that 29% TV ad deliveries are not ‘viewable’, meaning that nobody is in the room for at least two seconds while the ad is airing.
  • In comparison to this, 31% of digital video was classed as not viewable.
  • 20% of marketers ‘will never truly understand’ customer buying decisions A new report from Clicktale has revealed that brands are still struggling to get to grips with customer experience.
  • In a survey of over 200 marketing professionals, 20% of respondents said they feel they will “never truly understand” their customers’ buying decisions.
  • The report states that the reason for this is because 34% of respondents are unable to unite data between their web and mobile-optimised sites to create a single customer view, while 39% struggle to unite data from their websites and mobile apps.
  • This inability also means that 71% of brands can’t action customer insights in real time, while 73% are struggling to provide a consistent experience across channels.
  • Just 20% of fashion retailers share customer reviews and product ratings New research from Fresh Relevance has revealed that retailers are at risk of losing sales by failing to provide product ratings and review information consistently.
  • In a survey of 2,000 UK consumers and 50 top retailers, 61% of UK respondents said they base their purchase considerations on detailed reviews from other customers and 56% on product star ratings.
  • However, just 20% of the fashion retailers surveyed are actually providing this information.
  • Just half of footwear brands surveyed provide star ratings and customer reviews, and 60% of jewellery, accessories, and electronics brands currently share these details on their websites.
  • Interestingly, beauty brands are leading the way in meeting customer expectations, with 100% of those surveyed providing ratings and reviews information.
  • The results found that the UK ranks weakest across the board, generating the highest total bug count, accounting for 45% of all bugs found.
  • Content Marketing Statistics:2023 Trends & Predictions: It also said 46% of businesses plan to increase content spending this year.
  • Here’s what we found:91% of B2B businesses are currently using content marketing.
  • 71% of B2B marketers say content marketing has become more important in the last year.
  • Only 29% of those surveyed consider their content marketing successful.
  • 49% of those surveyed were challenged to align their content marketing efforts with sales.
  • Documented Content Strategy Did you know that 42% of marketers say they struggle to produce content consistency and measure it?
  • In addition, 37% of marketers said they planned but had not yet documented a content strategy.
  • Specialist Creators According to Content Marketing Institute, 46% of businesses plan to increase their content creation spending in 2023.
  • It also said 46% of businesses plan to increase content spending this year.
  • Here’s what we found:91% of B2B businesses are currently using content marketing.
  • 71% of B2B marketers say content marketing has become more important in the last year.
  • Only 29% of those surveyed consider their content marketing successful.
  • 49% of those surveyed were challenged to align their content marketing efforts with sales.
  • Documented Content Strategy Did you know that 42% of marketers say they struggle to produce content consistency and measure it?
  • What’s more, according to SemRush, 40% of businesses don’t even have a documented content strategy in place.
  • In addition, 37% of marketers said they planned but had not yet documented a content strategy.
  • Specialist Creators According to Content Marketing Institute, 46% of businesses plan to increase their content creation spending in 2023.
  • In addition, 47% of marketers surveyed said they will hire or contract a dedicated content creator, and 22% said they’d hire a dedicated social media marketer.
  • Best Startup Statistics [2023] Learn Digital Marketing: Conclusion General Startup Statistics 2024 69% of entrepreneurs in the US start their businesses at home.
  • According to a report from the National Association of Small Business, 35% of small businesses are LLCs, followed by S-corporations (33%), corporations (19%), sole proprietorships (12%), and partnerships (2%).
  • The State of Startups Statistics 45% of European startups said that they have easy access to financing.
  • 32% of European startups said they had difficulty getting access to funding.
  • 66% of European startups said that their primary funding source is self-financing, whereas 9% were funded through business angels and 7% from venture capital firms.
  • 42% of startups in the UK, Canada, and the US had venture capital as their primary funding source.
  • If a startup founder has previously achieved business success, they’ve got a 30% chance of being successful again with their next venture.
  • 82% of successful business owners consider their qualifications and experience enough to run a company.
  • 29% of startups failed because they ran out of funding and personal money.
  • In 2018, 82% of businesses that went under did so because of problems with cash flow.
  • The top causes of small business failure are no market need (42%), running out of cash (29%), not having the right founding team (23%), getting outcompeted (19%), pricing/cost issues (18%), and user-unfriendly product (17%).
  • Effect of the COVID-19 Pandemic on Startups 77% of startup founders said they faced potential failure in 2020 due to the global pandemic.
  • Since the beginning of the pandemic, typical startups have laid off an average of 33% of their staff.
  • Since the start of the pandemic, 72% of startups have experienced a decrease in revenue.
  • More than 40% of companies experienced a revenue decline of 40% or more.
  • Expense cutbacks have been made by an average of 22% of startups due to the pandemic.
  • Between March and April 2020, Portugal’s business formation experienced a 70% decline.
  • Turkey (58%), France (54%), and Hungary (47%) have also been severely impacted.
  • Fintech deals fell to around 30% in the second quarter of 2020, compared to the year’s first quarter.
  • 2% of entrepreneurs say they are optimistic about startups, so much so that they were planning to start one in 2021.
  • 9% of respondents believe that now is an excellent time to start a business.
  • 9% of entrepreneurs were more likely or very likely to start a new business now than in the previous three months.
  • 7% of entrepreneurs said they were less likely to start a business now than three months ago.
  • 3% said that the pandemic had increased their interest in controlling their destiny through company ownership.
  • 8% said that the pandemic has made them lean towards pandemic-resistant businesses.
  • 72% of startup founders say they feel optimistic that the recruitment pace will increase in 2021.
  • Analysts are predicting that the US will experience a 5% economic growth rate.
  • Less than 1% of startups evolve into unicorn startups such as Airbnb, Uber, Stripe, Docker, and Slack.
  • 65% of startups admit to not being confident they’ve got enough money to start their business.
  • 93% said they calculated they might run short of money in less than 18 months.
  • The most popular small business financing methods in 2018 were:personal funds (77%), bank loans (34%), borrowing from family and friends (16%), donations from family and friends (9%), online lenders (4%), angel investors (3%), venture capital (3%), and crowdfunding (2%).
  • 73% of startups want to invest more in their social media, and 57% plan to increase investment in email marketing.
  • Startup Founder Demographics and Diversity Statistics Reason for starting 26% of people who start a small business say they did it because they were ready to be their own boss.
  • 19% of people starting a small business say that the opportunity presented itself, and they took it.
  • 2% of new business startups say they were dissatisfied with corporate America.
  • 3% started a new small business after a life event such as death or divorce.
  • In 2019, 73% of small business owners identified as male, while 25% identified as female.
  • Education 33% of people starting a small business have a High School/GED.
  • When it comes to age, the largest percentage of small business owners are in the 50-59 age bracket, while the smallest percentage is over 70 (40%).
  • Small Business Statistics for Startup Teams 99% of US businesses are considered small, which means they have less than 500 employees.
  • A startup owner can spend 40% of their working day doing tasks that generate no income, such as payroll, hiring, and HR tasks.
  • A startup’s chance of success increases when there are two founders, three times the customer growth, and 30% more investment.
  • In 2020, 34% of freelancers were forced to start new projects because of the pandemic.
  • Startups Industry Specific Statistics The industries with the maximum number of small business startups in 2018 were business services (11%), food-restaurant (11%), health/beauty/fitness (10%), general retail (7%), and home services (6%).
  • 4% NPM), management of companies and enterprises (16% NPM), and activities related to real estate (14.
  • 7% NPM), semiconductor and other electronic component manufacturing (0.
  • Construction Startup Statistics The failure rate in construction is the second highest at 53%.
  • AI technology is all set to boost construction industry startup profits by 71%.
  • As of 2018, the tech startup industry has the highest startup company failure rate of 64%.
  • Between 2007 and 2016, tech-based wage growth was 20% compared to just 3% for the average US wage growth.
  • Between 2007 and 2016, electronics and computer manufacturing startups have risen by 78%.
  • Around 31% of commercial real estate investors plan to invest in prop-tech companies.
  • 26% of commercial real estate investors plan on partnering with prop-tech companies.
  • The Future of Startup Statistics 60% of entrepreneurs agree that AI is currently the most promising innovation technology and will remain so for the next decade.
  • When asked about long-term goals, 50% of company leaders said the acquisition was the most realistic scenario.
  • 2%) and the second-largest percentage of failed startups in the United States (13.
  • Around 90% of startup companies funded will not make it to the initial public offering (IPO).
  • 2%) and the second-largest percentage of failed startups in the United States (13.
  • The Big List of Content Marketing Statistics | Brafton: Semrush Only 30% of marketers say the COVID-19 pandemic will not change their plans in 2022.
  • Influitive 65% of marketers say case studies and success stories are the biggest value drivers for their business.
  • Hubspot 70% of marketers use account-based marketing strategies to target their content.
  • Hubspot 72% of marketers say their company uses reporting tools for data analysis.
  • Oracle 58% of companies with more than 80 marketing employees say their efforts were “extremely successful” last year compared to 33% at companies with marketing departments of 30 or fewer employees.
  • Oracle 82% of organizations plan to add, remove or replace components of their marketing tech stack to improve performance.
  • Altimeter Only 13% of companies rely purely on internal creative ideas, while others employ a mix of company goals, competitor analysis, audience needs and digital data.
  • Altimeter Nearly half (46%) of marketers plan to use better data to create personalized content that serves the customer journey.
  • Deloitte 83% of consumers in 2021 are aware that brands are using their personal data and 71% of users expressed concern over how companies are using their personal data.
  • Brafton Most marketers agree that blog articles (68%) and downloadable assets like eBooks and white papers (62%) are the best way to learn about content marketing.
  • B2B Content Marketing Trends Content Marketing Institute 77% of B2B marketers report having a content marketing strategy, though only 40% documented their strategy.
  • Content Marketing Institute 66% of B2B marketers expect their 2022 content marketing budget to increase over their 2021 budget.
  • WPromote Social media has the biggest impact on the customer experience for 57% of B2B marketers.
  • Content Marketing Institute 50% of B2B marketers outsource content marketing activities.
  • Content Marketing Institute The top 2 content marketing-related areas of investment for 2022 are expected to be video (69%) and events (digital, in-person or hybrid) at 61%.
  • WPromote 67% of B2B marketing executives expect to increase spend on marketing technology.
  • WPromote 60% of B2B marketers say that “wasted time” is the greatest cost associated with lead generation struggles.
  • Vidyard 68% of B2B marketing influencers regard research and case studies to be the most trusted type of content.
  • Demand Gen 44% of B2B buyers typically consume 3 to 5 pieces of content before engaging with a vendor.
  • Demand Gen 79% of B2B buyers say that vendor content had a significant impact on a buying decision.
  • B2C Content Marketing Trends Content Marketing Institute 70% of B2C marketers report having a content marketing strategy, though only 39% documented their strategy.
  • Content Marketing Institute 50% of B2C marketers outsource content marketing activities.
  • Content Marketing Institute 65% of B2C marketers prioritize the audience’s informational needs over their organization’s sales/promotional message.
  • Oracle 37% of B2C marketers are testing and implementing tactics in new social platforms like TikTok, Discord and Twitch.
  • Hubspot Influencer marketing is a tactic that 61% of B2C marketers plan to use in 2022.
  • Content Marketing Institute 61% of B2C marketers expect their 2022 content marketing budget to exceed their 2021 budget.
  • Content Marketing Institute 72% of B2C marketers predicted their organization would invest in video in 2022.
  • Semrush 69% of marketers use social media to distribute and promote their content organically.
  • Social Media Examiner 88% of marketers say social media marketing increases business exposure.
  • Demand Gen 71% of B2B professionals use LinkedIn to share business-related content.
  • Animoto 93% of brands got a new customer because of a video on social media.
  • Email Marketing Statistics Semrush 54% of marketers use email marketing to distribute and promote their content.
  • DMA 72% of marketers use email to engage with consumers across the customer journey.
  • Litmus 80% of email marketers use name, company name and other profile data to personalize email sends.
  • Litmus On average more than 65% of marketers create at least 2 versions of an email to segment and personalize the content.
  • DMA 41% of marketers send emails to their mailing lists on a daily basis.
  • Litmus 30% Email marketing is very critical to company success for 30% more marketers now than before the pandemic.
  • Litmus 43% of marketers are changing how they measure email performance because of Apple’s Mail Privacy Protection.
  • DMA 51% of marketers believe consumers open and read at least half of the emails they receive, though most consumers (59%) report that they open and read less than half.
  • Blogging Statistics Hubspot 48% of companies that have a content marketing strategy leverage blogging.
  • ” Semrush Articles with 7 or fewer words in their H1 get 36% more average organic traffic than those with 14 or more words.
  • Moz Re-optimizing your content can increase the number of clicks a page generates by more than 40%.
  • Brafton 70% of websites in the HR industry that generate more than 100,000 organic visitors per month write 2 or more blogs per week.
  • Visual Content Marketing Statistics Venngage Almost half (48%) of marketing content contains visuals.
  • Venngage 49% of marketers primarily use visual content on blogs and websites followed by social channels such as Facebook and Instagram.
  • Hubspot 56% of content marketers who use infographics say that they’re the most effective marketing content type.
  • Hubspot 42% of marketers plan to increase budget in virtual reality (VR) and augmented reality (AR).
  • Venngage Around 50% of content marketers spend less than 5 hours a week creating visual content.
  • Wyzowl 92% of marketers value video as an ‘important part’ of their marketing strategy.
  • Wyzowl The majority of marketers say video has helped them increase understanding of their product or service (94%), improve brand awareness (93%), boost traffic (87%) and generate leads (86%).
  • Vidyard 93% of sales and marketing professionals believe that video converts the same or better than other forms of content.
  • Vidyard 91% of organizations are maintaining or increasing video content production budgets.
  • Social Media Examiner 71% of marketers plan to increase their YouTube video marketing efforts.
  • Wyzowl 88% of people say they’ve been convinced to buy a product or service by watching a brand’s video.
  • Wyzowl 69% of people say they’d most prefer to learn about a new product or service by watching a short video.
  • Lemonlight 62% of consumers say they prefer to watch video content on a smartphone or tablet.
  • Unbounce 81% of marketers know speed impacts their conversions, yet only 3% say faster load times are their top priority.
  • Content Marketing Institute Both B2B (69%) and B2C (67%) marketers say website engagement provides the most insight into content performance.
  • Altimeter 63% of companies use website analytics to create personalized/customized content.
  • Search Engine Optimization Statistics Hubspot 69% of marketers actively invest time in SEO.
  • Semrush 61% of marketers say improving the quality and authenticity of their content increases organic search ranking.
  • Hubspot Over 50% of marketers use keyword rankings and organic traffic to measure the success of their SEO strategies.
  • Hubspot Almost 25% of companies invest in mobile optimization as a top SEO tactic.
  • Think With Google Over 40% of shoppers go to Google when researching a purchase they plan to make in-store or online.
  • Search Engine Marketing Statistics Brainlabs 74% of brands say that pay-per-click is a huge driver for their business.
  • Brainlabs 58% of marketers spend less than $50,000 per year on PPC tactics.
  • Brainlabs The top platforms that brands spend money on are Google (90%), Facebook (81%) and Microsoft (59%).
  • Brainlabs 65% of marketers say paid search is the most effective PPC channel.
  • Hubspot 79% of marketers report buying paid advertising on social media in 2021.
  • Formstack 78% percent of marketers rely on Google AdWords and social media advertising to promote their messages.
  • Formstack 54% of marketers conduct paid campaigns to generate better quality leads WordStream Sponsored search results account for 65% of clicks, compared to 35% for organic results.
  • eMarketer About half of adult US internet users said that when brands use their data in advertising, it helps them discover (50%) and find (49%) products and services that interest them — but 44% said this often feels invasive.
  • Audio Content Statistics Infinite Dial 68% of people in the US over age 12 have listened to online audio in the last month.
  • Infinite Dial 28% of people in the US over age 12 listen to a podcast on a weekly basis.
  • Hubspot 80% of marketers who leverage audio content and podcasts plan to invest the same amount or more budget in 2022.
  • Edison Research 51% of podcast listeners who are 18+ and listen to 5 or more hours of podcasts every week say they pay more attention to ads on podcasts than on other media.
  • Edison Research 53% of podcast listeners say their opinion of a company is more positive when it’s on a podcast they regularly listen to.
  • Virtual Event Marketing Statistics Hubspot 40% of marketers plan to increase their investment in virtual events, webinars and conferences in 2022.
  • Vimeo 59% of companies host webinars for lead generation and marketing purposes such as promoting their brand, product or service.
  • Content Marketing Institute Webinars are the highest-performing video format for more than half (51%) of B2B marketers.
  • Eventbrite 53% of virtual event consumers said they plan to attend both virtual and in-person events in the future — even when it is safe to gather in person again.
  • Demand Gen Almost half (49%) of B2B buyers say webinars are the most valuable content format in the early stages of the buying process.
  • Vimeo Virtual event attendees say that quality of speakers (64%) and relevance of content (63%) encourage them to sign up for events.
  • Top 10 content marketing statistics in 2022: Social media is the most effective way to reach out to potential customers, with 78% of companies using it as a marketing tool.
  • 70% of people who read blog posts will either take action or buy something.
  • 85% of people who purchase due to a content marketing campaign were contacted through email.
  • 83% of content marketing companies say that it has increased their revenue by at least 20%.
  • 91% of marketers say that they are increasing the amount of user-generated content on their websites.
  • 97% of marketers use interactive website content, such as surveys and quizzes to engage with customers.
  • 85% of marketers say that they measure the effectiveness of their content marketing campaigns using some metric, such as bounce rate.
  • A study by the Content Marketing Institute (CMI) found that 62% of marketers use content marketing in their businesses.
  • This number has been increasing yearly, with 78% of marketers utilizing content marketing in 2022.
  • In 2018, 71% of marketers said that creating quality content was essential to their success as a business.
  • Additionally, 72% of marketers said that building an audience was crucial to their success as a business.
  • In 2018, 50% of marketers said content marketing was one of the most effective ways to improve their SEO ranking.
  • Furthermore, 50% of marketers said that creating high-quality content was one of the most effective ways to improve their SEO ranking.
  • A study by The Content Marketing Institute (CMI) found that 81% of marketers publish their content online, up from just 54% in 2009.
  • According to a study by Aberdeen Group, 65% of B2B marketers publish at least one print piece each month.
  • For example, if your website has a 1% drop in visitors, 1,000 people visited your website and spent an average of 30 minutes.
  • If your website had a 2% drop in visitors, it means that 800 people visited your website and spent an average of 30 minutes on it.
  • Social media is the most effective way to reach out to potential customers, with 78% of companies using it as a marketing tool.
  • 70% of people who read blog posts will either take action or buy something.
  • 85% of people who purchase due to a content marketing campaign were contacted through email.
  • 83% of content marketing companies say that it has increased their revenue by at least 20%.
  • 91% of marketers say that they are increasing the amount of user-generated content on their websites.
  • 97% of marketers use interactive website content, such as surveys and quizzes to engage with customers.
  • 85% of marketers say that they measure the effectiveness of their content marketing campaigns using some metric, such as bounce rate.
  • A study by the Content Marketing Institute (CMI) found that 62% of marketers use content marketing in their businesses.
  • This number has been increasing yearly, with 78% of marketers utilizing content marketing in 2022.
  • In 2018, 71% of marketers said that creating quality content was essential to their success as a business.
  • Additionally, 72% of marketers said that building an audience was crucial to their success as a business.
  • In 2018, 50% of marketers said content marketing was one of the most effective ways to improve their SEO ranking.
  • Furthermore, 50% of marketers said that creating high-quality content was one of the most effective ways to improve their SEO ranking.
  • A study by The Content Marketing Institute (CMI) found that 81% of marketers publish their content online, up from just 54% in 2009.
  • According to a study by Aberdeen Group, 65% of B2B marketers publish at least one print piece each month.
  • For example, if your website has a 1% drop in visitors, 1,000 people visited your website and spent an average of 30 minutes.
  • If your website had a 2% drop in visitors, it means that 800 people visited your website and spent an average of 30 minutes on it.
  • Social media is the most effective way to reach out to potential customers, with 78% of companies using it as a marketing tool.
  • 70% of people who read blog posts will either take action or buy something.
  • 85% of people who purchase due to a content marketing campaign were contacted through email.
  • 83% of content marketing companies say that it has increased their revenue by at least 20%.
  • 91% of marketers say that they are increasing the amount of user-generated content on their websites.
  • 97% of marketers use interactive website content, such as surveys and quizzes to engage with customers.
  • 85% of marketers say that they measure the effectiveness of their content marketing campaigns using some metric, such as bounce rate.
  • A study by the Content Marketing Institute (CMI) found that 62% of marketers use content marketing in their businesses.
  • This number has been increasing yearly, with 78% of marketers utilizing content marketing in 2022.
  • In 2018, 71% of marketers said that creating quality content was essential to their success as a business.
  • Additionally, 72% of marketers said that building an audience was crucial to their success as a business.
  • In 2018, 50% of marketers said content marketing was one of the most effective ways to improve their SEO ranking.
  • Furthermore, 50% of marketers said that creating high-quality content was one of the most effective ways to improve their SEO ranking.
  • A study by The Content Marketing Institute (CMI) found that 81% of marketers publish their content online, up from just 54% in 2009.
  • According to a study by Aberdeen Group, 65% of B2B marketers publish at least one print piece each month.
  • For example, if your website has a 1% drop in visitors, 1,000 people visited your website and spent an average of 30 minutes.
  • If your website had a 2% drop in visitors, it means that 800 people visited your website and spent an average of 30 minutes on it.
  • [Infographic] 48 statistics why personalization is important in digital marketing: ─Gartner Only 15% of CMOs believe their company is on the right track with personalization ─McKinsey 42% of B2B marketers report their marketing efforts are not fully personalized.
  • ─Folloze 39% of B2B marketers say their personalized marketing strategy is only somewhat advanced, while 15% say their personalization strategy is not at all advanced.
  • ─Folloze 95% of retailers state personalization as a top strategic priority (64% say it’s a TOP 3 priority).
  • ─McKinsey 36% of retailers state that personalization is necessary just to keep up with industry changes.
  • ─McKinsey Revenue impact Personalizing web experiences creates a 19% uplift in sales.
  • ─ Instapage 87% of marketers report a measurable lift from personalization, while 54% of marketers report a lift of more than 10%, and 13% report more than 30%.
  • ─ Evergage 15% of retailers saw 100-300% increase in new customer conversions.
  • ─McKinsey Companies that personalize their content can increase revenue 10% or more in retail.
  • ─McKinsey Offering helpful messages requires a depth of customer insight that can increase brand intent, purchase and repurchase rates, and cart size up to 20%.
  • ─Gartner 44% of consumers say they are likely to do repeat purchases after a personalized shopping experience.
  • ─Segment 49% of shoppers have bought a product they initially didn’t intend to buy after a personalized recommendation.
  • Meanwhile, 40% say they bought something more expensive because of a personalized experience.
  • ─Segment 21% of retailers saw customer traffic double, while 59% saw traffic increase 25-50%.
  • ─McKinsey Customer experience and brand 52% of consumers and 65% of B2B buyers are likely to switch brands/vendors if a company doesn’t personalize their communications to them.
  • ─Salesforce 54% of B2B buyers want personalized recommendations across all interactions with a company.
  • ─Evergage 98% of marketers agree personalization helps them create a better customer relationship.
  • ─Evergage 71% of consumers feel frustrated by the lack of personalization when shopping.
  • ─McKinsey Consumer expectations drive personalization efforts in retail and 46% of retailers see personalization as a way to be more customer-centric.
  • ─McKinsey 74% of millennials are frustrated with brands that send irrelevant and generic emails.
  • ─SmarterHQ 82% of B2B buyers want the same experience as when they’re buying for themselves.
  • ─Salesforce 72% of business buyers expect vendors to personalise engagement to their needs.
  • ─Salesforce For 84% of customers, being treated like a person, rather than number is very important to win their business.
  • ─McKinsey Personalization can make marketing 10-20% more efficient by saving costs.
  • ─Alterra Group Personalization can increase marketing spend efficiency by 30%.
  • ─Adweek 10% of retailers believe personalized marketing can also help them achieve higher marketing budget efficiency.
  • ─McKinsey Challenges Marketing leaders also report that 78% of them struggle to scale personalization, partly due to a lack of key competencies in the organization.
  • ─Gartner 54% of B2B marketers believe personalization is harder for B2B than B2C.
  • ─Folloze 67% of retailers state gathering, integrating, and synthesizing data needed for personalization as the greatest challenge.
  • ─ McKinsey 41% of retailers state delivering personalized marketing was hindered by finding the right solutions partner.
  • 50+ Content Marketing Statistics You Need To Know [2024]: Content Marketing Strategy Statistics Content marketing is an essential part of the marketing strategy for 97% of marketers.
  • 55% of marketing professionals reported that improving content quality made their content marketing strategy successful.
  • 4% of content marketers reported that 91-100% of their content comprises visual elements.
  • 2% of content marketers spent 0-10% of their budget on creating visual content, however, they were expected to spend 21-30% of their budget on visuals in 2022.
  • According to content marketing statistics, 86% of businesses prefer leveraging video content format for marketing their products/services.
  • Marketers report that 78% of customers purchase a product/service after going through a video.
  • YouTube, a video streaming site by Google, is the most popular website in the United States by traffic and 73% of marketers are using it.
  • In a survey, 96% of the customers revealed they watch an explained video to get more information about a product or service.
  • Video is a highly effective content type amongst millennials, with 40% of them trusting it.
  • Data suggests that the search volume of the term ‘Infographics’ has increased by over 800% in the last two years.
  • 7% of marketers struggle with problems related to design and visual content.
  • Updating the existing blog content has remained an effective technique for 51% of organizations.
  • An article with over 7000 words of content drives 4x more traffic and is shared 43% more than an article of an average length (1500-2000 words).
  • According to the data, 82% of content marketers receive a positive ROI from blogging.
  • The latest data for 2022 revealed that 62% of Americans aged 12+ listen to podcasts.
  • Podcasts form a significant part of the marketing strategy for 50% of content marketing specialists.
  • Open rate is the most tracked email marketing metric with 95% of the businesses tracking it, while the conversion rate is being tracked by only 55% of the customers.
  • 46% of professionals stated that their company spent at least $10,000 on content marketing in 2019.
  • 78% of the top brands were successful with their content marketing in the year 2022.
  • According to data, 58% of marketers around the world allocated their content marketing budget to contract content creators/agencies, while 51% of them spent it on content management tools.
  • Content marketing cuts down costs by 62% as compared to traditional marketing.
  • 72% of marketers planned to increase their content marketing budget in 2022 as compared to traditional marketing.
  • In a survey conducted in 2021, roughly 40% of the participating marketing professionals stated that these were the major challenges faced by them as well.
  • 100+ Need-To-Know Social Media Marketing Statistics (2024): This coincides nicely with the number of Americans discussing politics on Twitter which comes in at 42%.
  • 71% of American Tweeters actually read the latest news on the platform.
  • The truth is, most of its users spend 26% more time with ads on Twitter than other social media users.
  • Video is Twitter’s fastest-growing advertising tool, and when you take into account that Twitter ads with video are 50% cheaper in cost-per-engagement, then you can see why it’s a viable option.
  • 73%, year-over-year, it’s a good opportunity to convert traffic into leads.
  • Tweets with hashtags tend to get almost 100% more engagement than those without, providing an easy way to get more eyes on your content.
  • However, over one-third (36%) of Facebook’s audience are still 45 or older.
  • But you might also be shocked to know that 43% report that they get their news from Facebook.
  • But only 15% use it to shop for products which can be frustrating for advertisers when you consider how many people can be reached through Facebook ads, which we’ll look at next.
  • Especially when 26% of people who click on ads report making a purchase.
  • It’s also worth paying attention to the mobile user experience for Facebook ads because 94% of ad revenue comes from mobile advertisements.
  • For example, did you know that Facebook will usually reject an ad image that contains more than 20% text?
  • Running an online giveaway is a great way to do this – especially when you know that over 20% of Instagram users visit a business profile daily.
  • This is likely due to the platform being available in 80 languages, which covers 95% of the internet’s population.
  • This leads nicely into the state of YouTube advertising, with mobile ads getting peoples’ attention 83% of the time.
  • (Source:Ipsos) The fact that 95% of YouTube ads are audible likely plays into this.
  • With 92% of Fortune 500 companies using LinkedIn, it’s safe to say that this is the best social network for connecting with like-minded professionals.
  • In fact, 45% of them are in upper management, highlighting the hiring power of the platform.
  • When considering your options for advertising on LinkedIn, it’s worth noting that 58% of B2B advertisers like LinkedIn’s ROI on ads.
  • It turns out InMail has a 300% higher response rate than traditional email, which makes it far easier for you to reach the right candidate for your latest job openings.
  • (Source:Demand Wave) And from the same source, 71% of those people say they use LinkedIn as part of their marketing strategy.
  • Top Digital Marketing Stats Every Hospital Should Know About: (PwC) 33% of patients already use mobile for health research and appointment booking (Google) Digital Isn’t Only for the Young 61% of Americans age 65 and older are now active internet users, up from 14% in 2000 Social media usage has tripled among those 65 and older since 2010.
  • (Pew) Online Content Affects Patient Decisions 41% of consumers say that content found on social media will likely impact their choice of hospital or treatment center (PwC).
  • 5 Statistics Healthcare Marketers Should Know About Digital Marketing: To help medical marketers keep up with the latest in digital marketing, here are five statistics every professional needs to know:5% of Google searches are for health-related information:That is one in every twenty searches, which is a lot of patient-initiated medical searching.
  • In fact, a Google study revealed that 77% of patients used search prior to booking an appointment.
  • 62% of smartphone owners use their devices to look up information about a health condition:The web as we know it is evolving into a mobile entity.
  • 41% of patients say social media does influence their selection of a healthcare provider:The medical community will have to be more social and open to engaging in conversations with the patient community.
  • Inbound marketing can deliver 54% more leads into the marketing funnel:The traditional methods of outbound advertising are no longer effective in healthcare marketing.
  • 48 Social Media Marketing Statistics for 2023 – 99firms: 277% more leads are generated on LinkedIn than on Facebook and Twitter.
  • 71% of consumers with a good social media experience are likely to recommend the brand to others.
  • The COVID-19 pandemic prompted people to spend more time online, and stats show that an average user will dedicate 15% of their day to social media platforms.
  • The adoption rate for social media users accelerated by more than 13% in 2021.
  • Statistics on social media marketing show 43% of social media users admit to using these platforms as a discovery engine.
  • As many as 99% of social media consumers worldwide report regularly accessing social media platforms from their mobile phones.
  • 98% of Pinterest users have tried out things they found on the platform.
  • The latest Pinterest stats show that 89% of Pinners are on the platform for purchase inspiration, while another 50% of US users frequently shop on Pinterest.
  • Facebook is the leading platform for marketers, with over 90% using it.
  • In the latest worldwide survey, Facebook won on account of having the most extensive reach, as 93% of social media marketing experts are using it.
  • Social media marketing data reveal Instagram comes in second with 78% of marketers using it, and LinkedIn third with 61%.
  • More visibility and exposure and raising brand awareness are the most critical social media marketing factors for 90% of marketers.
  • Fewer than 8% of marketers believe that social media marketing is “somewhat ineffective” or “very ineffective.
  • 1% are uncertain because calculating social media ROI is more complicated than other marketing channels.
  • Social media marketing stats meanwhile show 77% of consumers are more likely to buy from a brand they follow on social media.
  • Marketers are increasingly confident in social media marketing’s benefits, with nearly 90% seeing it as very or somewhat important to their overall strategy.
  • Nearly 70% of social marketers see brand awareness as a priority in their strategy.
  • Social media marketing facts show raising brand awareness is still a top priority for 69% of marketers.
  • Increasing web traffic is in second place for 52%, followed by growing a brand’s audience for 46%.
  • 50% of consumers follow brands on social media to learn about new products/services.
  • Research, which examined consumer expectations from brands on social media, showed that half of users want to learn about new products and services, closely followed by 48% who want to be entertained.
  • For followers of brands they are already loyal to, the third place goes to staying up-to-date with company news (40%).
  • Research on why consumers drop brands on social media points to poor customer service as the primary reason, with 56%.
  • Social media statistics for business show sharing irrelevant content follows with 51%, while 43% of consumers claim they’ve seen one too many ads.
  • 277% more leads are generated on LinkedIn than on Facebook and Twitter.
  • 74% of visitor-to-lead conversion rate, compared to below 1% for both Facebook and Twitter.
  • 27% of B2B companies believe social media to be indispensable in their marketing campaigns.
  • Social media marketing data shows Facebook is used by 91%, LinkedIn by 79%, and 70% report using Twitter for marketing.
  • Over 80% of executives check social media before making a purchasing decision.
  • Social media for business statistics reveal that 84% of executives use social media before making purchasing decisions.
  • A platform with half a billion users, LinkedIn accounts for 80% of lead generation for marketers.
  • B2B marketers mostly use this network to deliver content and say it generates 50% of traffic to B2B websites.
  • Social media marketing data shows that a whopping 91% of marketing executives also believe LinkedIn to be the platform for relevant leads and content.
  • Social media marketing facts reveal that 85% of businesses opt for third-party tools, such as HubSpot, Buffer, and Sprout Social.
  • More than 70% of consumers with a pleasant social media experience are likely to recommend the brand to others.
  • 71% of satisfied customers are likely to recommend strongly performing brands to the people in their network, amplifying the effect of social media marketing efforts.
  • 60% of marketing professionals identify measuring ROI as one of their most significant social media marketing challenges.
  • 3% of marketers think they can quantify the impact of social media marketing.
  • After following a brand on social media, 87% of consumers report visiting its website or app.
  • 78% of consumers also report visiting a brand’s physical store (if it exists) after following it on social media.
  • 71% of people complaining to a brand on Twitter expect a response within an hour.
  • Social media marketing data analysis shows over 80% would recommend it to others.
  • Instagram shopping posts have increased traffic for brands by as much as 2,600%.
  • Just under 70% of brands use influencer marketing on Instagram, according to social media marketing facts.
  • While influencers will often use several social media platforms, Instagram takes the cake as the most popular, with 67% of influencer campaigns targeting Instagram users.
  • Influencer marketing is reported as the least popular on Twitter and Twitch, with 15% and 8%.
  • 98% in 2019 and even 99% in 2020 of its total revenue came from paid advertising.
  • Snap’s product, Spectacles, accounted for an insignificant part of income, 1% and 2% in 2019 and 2020, respectively.
  • Social media ads statistics show that just over two-thirds of the company’s revenue (64%), originated in the US.
  • The engagement levels are stunning, the highest of all social media and 22% higher than on Facebook.
  • Marketing analysts also compared the audience size of the 50 largest brands on Facebook and Instagram, and the results show a 35% larger audience on the latter.
  • Said metrics include:CTR (link click-through rate)CRM (cost per 1,000 impressions)Landing page conversion rateEffective Facebook ads should have a CTR above 1% and a CRM lower than $40 on average.
  • Businesses worldwide are reacting to Instagram’s rising popularity, as 90% of top brands have an account.
  • 98% median engagement rate for Instagram across all industries, decreasing from 1.
  • Predictions for 2022 reveal a whopping 82% of online content will be video.
  • Social media marketing stats show that 73% of videos in 2020 were shorter than 2 minutes.
  • 82% of those who use the internet also have at least one account on social media.
  • Social media usage statistics show boomers are less likely to use other social networks and 19% more likely to share content.
  • Social media marketing statistics point to 55% of consumers of all ages trust UGC over other marketing forms.
  • For millennials, video content from YouTube makes 67% of all their online video consumption.
  • The latest data shows over 50% of businesses worldwide are using social media to increase their virtual presence.
  • Social media usage statistics by country reveal that 63% of businesses in Australia used social media in 2020.
  • The average spending on social media marketing is 10%-20% of total digital marketing budgets.
  • We can’t point to an exact number, but we can tell you 78% of salespeople who use social media outsell their peers who don’t.
  • Social media marketing industry facts reveal 90% of top salespeople use social selling tools.
  • Companies with social selling processes are 40% more likely to achieve their revenue goals.
  • Social media statistics point to a stunning 53% of the world population regularly using social media.
  • Social media marketing statistics point to 90%-97% of marketers using social media as an essential part of their strategy.
  • Content Marketing Statistics That Define the Industry in 2023 | SerpWatch: Top Content Marketing Statistics | Editor’s Choice There was a 13% increase in the digital marketing budget in 2020.
  • The latest statistics reveal that content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing.
  • In 2020, 45% of B2B content marketers stated that the COVID-19 pandemic made a moderate impact on their content marketing strategy.
  • 86% of video marketers say video has increased traffic to their website in 2021.
  • Around 62% of consumers are more likely to buy a product that has customer photos and videos.
  • 46% of marketers revealed that their companies spent around $10,000 on content marketing efforts in 2019.
  • The 2020 digital marketing statistics reported a 13% increase in digital marketing budget compared to the previous year.
  • According to the latest content marketing cost statistics, traditional marketing costs 62% more than content marketing.
  • Statistics on content marketing effectiveness reveal that 60% of marketers believe that content marketing helped them nurture subscribers in 2020.
  • 29% of B2B content marketers reported an increase in technology spending in the last 12 months of 2019.
  • B2B content marketing statistics reveal that 87% of B2B marketers stated content marketing helped their organizations achieve brand awareness.
  • The results indicated that 81% of respondents believed that their organizations managed to build credibility amongst customers with the help of content marketing.
  • In addition, 75% of them revealed that they could generate leads, while 68% stated that they managed to build loyalty with existing clients.
  • However, only 45% of marketers reported that content marketing can support their organization in launching a new product.
  • The 2020 content marketing statistics show that 45% of B2B content marketers said that the pandemic has had a moderate impact on their content marketing strategy.
  • The current content marketing trends reveal that over 36% of consumers in the US made an impulse buy that was based on an ad since the beginning of 2020.
  • Organic LinkedIn usage by B2B marketers increased to 96% in the last 12 months.
  • Content writing statistics from 2021 report that 78% of B2B marketers use keyword research tools for SEO while creating content.
  • Visual content statistics indicate 86% of video marketers consider videos have increased traffic to their website in 2021.
  • Millennials are the most targeted group of digital marketing campaigns—since the start of the pandemic, 43% of millennials spend more time watching video content.
  • Video content marketing stats reveal that 60% of businesses use video as a marketing tool in 2021.
  • Social media marketing ROI statistics for 2020 show that 30% of marketers believe they are able to measure social media ROI.
  • According to visual content marketing stats, nearly 62% of consumers were more likely to buy a product if customer photos and videos were available.
  • 4% of respondents stated that Instagram’s UGC affected their shopping decisions, while 16.
  • 60% of content marketing budget spend should be allocated for content promotion and no more than 40% for content creation.
  • According to 2019 content marketing facts, 46% of marketers stated their company spent up to $10,000 on content marketing efforts.
  • Even though many companies are finally seeing the potential that content marketing brings, data shows that only 17% of companies worldwide invested between $10,000 and $25,000 in their content marketing campaigns in 2019.
  • 10 Social Media Advertising Stats Marketing Professionals Can’t Ignore: Digital media and technology activity increased by 24% from 2015 to 2016.
  • In 2015, global analysts predicted a 33% increase in spending for social media ads.
  • 25% of people who see a social ad, will then respond by visiting the store or website.
  • According to eMarketer, in addition to the 25% who see a social ad and visit a store or website, between 14 – 17% will ultimately convert by purchasing a product or service.
  • According to eMarketer, this number will jump to 49% in 2016 as the platform opens up advertising opportunities to all businesses.
  • Over 50% of B2B marketers rank social media as a “very” or “somewhat” low cost ad option.
  • 60% of all time spent on digital media is performed on a mobile device.
  • Over 90% of advertisers and agencies plan to run Facebook video ads this year.
  • 25 Social Media Marketing Statistics You Need to Know in 2022: But this increased focus is causing the price of digital advertising to increase by 45% on average.
  • Facebook and Instagram saw an increase of 60% in how much marketers spent on their ads year over year from 2020 to 2021.
  • In the US, 68% of internet users are on social media, with the percentage increasing with how young the user is.
  • This breaks down into 90% of teenagers being on social media, 90% of millennials, 77% of Gen Xers, and 48% of Baby Boomers.
  • And 40% of internet users between the ages of 18 – 34 are using social media to buy products.
  • Even more telling is that 54% of internet users sign on to social media for product research.
  • Nearly 71% of customers who have positive social media interactions with a brand recommend it to their friends.
  • And when companies interact with customers on social media, customers will spend anywhere from 20% to 40% more on products.
  • And if people like your branded content, they’ll share it – 74% of users share branded video content.
  • But unfortunately, 40% of customers are using ad blockers, which disables the ability of your ads to get through to your customers.
  • 49% of users between the ages of 18 and 29 have bought a product they saw from a social media ad.
  • Surprisingly, 86% of US internet users valued transparency so much that if the brand wasn’t being transparent, they’d buy items from a different company.
  • Social consciousness is also very important to consumers, with 70% saying that they want brands to take public stands on issues.
  • This sentiment is true across the political spectrum, with 78% of liberals and 52% of conservatives agreeing that brands should be more political.
  • But taking a public stand can have a huge backlash because 55% of consumers said they might boycott a disagreeable brand.
  • The verdict is in:social media marketing campaigns are used by pretty much everyone, with 92% of American businesses utilizing them.
  • And the rate is even higher among small business owners, with 96% of them using social media marketing campaigns.
  • 90% of businesses say it has improved their exposure, and 75% of marketers say that these campaigns have increased traffic to their websites.
  • By the end of 2025, digital advertising spending is expected to be $315 billion, which is an increase of an astounding 106% from 2020 levels.
  • Social Media Marketing Statistics for 2024:All You Need to Know – InboundBlogging: 5% of Americans use social media in 2023, which corresponds to 246 million people.
  • 1% of US businesses with over 100 employees use social networks for marketing purposes.
  • 55% of consumers state that they use social media to learn about new businesses.
  • More than 75% of the global population above 13 years old uses social media.
  • 82% of people purchased a product found on social media through their phones.
  • 76% of Americans expect brands to respond within 24 hours on social media.
  • TikTok is the most used influencer marketing channel, leading with 56%.
  • 1% of US marketers in organizations with more than 100 employees use social media as a marketing tool.
  • 79% of the total internet users in the US had used at least one social media platform in January 2023.
  • 80% of all users’ time on social media is spent on mobile devices, including both smartphones and tablets.
  • 82% of shoppers had bought a product directly from their mobile phones after discovering it on social media.
  • 27% of individuals access the internet through a mobile device, whereas just 39.
  • Predictions suggest that 72% of all internet users will access the web solely via smartphones by 2025.
  • Despite mobile prevalence, 75% of internet users between the ages of 16 and 64 still use laptops and desktop computers to access the internet.
  • You can increase your engagement rate by 79% on Instagram posts by tagging the location.
  • Your landing page’s conversion rate can rise by 80% if you include a product video.
  • 74% of people who viewed an explanatory video about a product/service purchased it.
  • 1% of global social media users said they use social media platforms for brand research, while 43.
  • 49% of consumers say they rely on recommendations from social media influencers to make shopping decisions.
  • 71% of customers are likely to tell their friends and family about a brand after having a positive encounter with it on social media.
  • Nearly 40% of consumers between the ages of 18 and 34 have purchased a product through social media.
  • The average Twitter user posts only 2 tweets per month, but 10% of users who are the most active in terms of volume, tweet 138 times every month.
  • The top 10% of most active tweeters are generally women and focus more on politics.
  • Native documents have the potential to generate 5x more clicks than any other content on the platform, reaching a CTR of 8% to 13%.
  • For 61% of Pinterest users, the platform is their go-to place to start a new project.
  • 46% of weekly Pinners say that they’ve discovered a new product or brand on Pinterest.
  • YouTube is the fourth most used social media platform by marketers, with 52% leveraging the platform.
  • 95% of US teens say they use YouTube, giving it the gold medal among teenage users.
  • Facebook’s share of the social media advertising market is estimated to be 16%.
  • Influencer Marketing Stats 68% of marketing organizations collaborate with social media influencers.
  • 6% of internet users aged 16 to 64 follow influencers and experts on social media.
  • 61% of companies have worked with influencers they already know from different campaigns.
  • 9% of marketers plan to use machine learning and artificial intelligence to find influencers and create campaigns.
  • 4% of businesses admit they’ve used a virtual influencer (a digital character that acts like a real human) in their campaigns.
  • According to Hubspot’s survey, 80% of marketers work with micro-influencers with under 100K subscribers/followers.
  • In contrast, just 16% of marketers claim to work with mega influencers who have more than 1 million followers.
  • 90% of businesses cite new business creation as their primary ABM strategy objective.
  • 56% of marketers think that a successful ABM strategy depends on personalized content.
  • 5% of Americans use social media in 2023, which corresponds to 246 million people.
  • 1% of US businesses with over 100 employees use social networks for marketing purposes.
  • Millennials and Social Media Statistics 2022:Platforms and Marketing | WBL: The report further indicates that nearly 77% of the total US millennial population uses Facebook daily.
  • Top Statistics About Millennials And Social Media:Editor’s Choice 79% of US millennials use social media multiple times a day.
  • 82% of millennials make impulse purchases if they like the item enough.
  • The 2019 survey conducted by Pew Research Center reported that 86% of millennials in the US use social media.
  • According to the latest millennials and social media stats, 79% of millennials in the US use social media multiple times a day.
  • According to social media usage statistics by age, 87% of US millennials use Facebook at least once a week.
  • Out of 4,000 Adobe consumers, 19% think that millennials are most easily influenced by online content.
  • According to YPulse’s millennial social media statistics, 43% of millennials spend more time watching video content during the COVID-19 pandemic.
  • The latest data from Oberlo indicates that the most popular social media for millennials in the US is Facebook, with almost 80% active millennials.
  • The most recent social media users statistics for 2021 reveal that millennials make up about 25% of LinkedIn users.
  • Millennials and Zoomers are the most active on Reddit, as 36% of users are 18–29.
  • At 22%, older Millennials and Generation X—aged 30–49—are the second biggest user group on the platform.
  • Reddit figures indicate a downward trend in usage and engagement the older the user group is, as only 10% are 50–64 and 3% are over 65.
  • 4% of millennials said that social media improved their life satisfaction.
  • 4% of Americans think that social media improves their life satisfaction.
  • 72% of millennials buy fashion and beauty products based on Instagram posts.
  • The latest millennials and social media stats indicate that 70% of millennials trust brands that post videos about their products.
  • The latest millennial market research shows that a brand’s social media presence impacts 75% of millennials’ purchasing.
  • 82% of millennials purchase an item the first time they see it if they like it enough.
  • According to Roy Morgan’s 2020 survey, 61% of millennials in Australia have an Instagram account.
  • The latest BCG millennials and social media statistics indicate that 62% of millennials have spent more time on social media during the pandemic.
  • The report further indicates that nearly 77% of the total US millennial population uses Facebook daily.
  • According to the latest data, 86% of millennials use social media daily.
  • 25 SEO Statistics that Prove the Power of Search – SMA Marketing: With 6 billion queries a day and roughly 15% of those searches having never been searched before, there is enough of the pie for everyone.
  • png’ alt=’SEO Statistics ‘ 540px border=’0’ />Here are some of my favorites SEO statistics:According to Net Market Share (as of April 2017) the global marketing share percentage, in terms of the use of Search Engines heavily favors Google, with over 77%.
  • (WordStream, 2016)71% of B2B researchers start their research with a generic search.
  • (Google, 2015)72% of consumers who did a local search visited a store within five miles.
  • A Guide to the Social Media Marketing Statistics in the Philippines – WAZILE Inc.: 7% of the total active social media users access social media via their mobile devices.
  • Here’s the number of audiences you can potentially reach and engage using advertisements on the following platforms (Digital 2021:Philippines):Facebook – 83 million (53% female and 47% male) Facebook Messenger – 45 million (53.
  • 8% male) To add, although social media doesn’t directly affect or increase your SEO efforts, let alone your search engine rankings, it still pays to know more about the search statistics.
  • 10 Social Media Advertising Stats Marketing Professionals Can’t Ignore: Digital media and technology activity increased by 24% from 2015 to 2016.
  • In 2015, global analysts predicted a 33% increase in spending for social media ads.
  • 25% of people who see a social ad, will then respond by visiting the store or website.
  • According to eMarketer, in addition to the 25% who see a social ad and visit a store or website, between 14 – 17% will ultimately convert by purchasing a product or service.
  • According to eMarketer, this number will jump to 49% in 2016 as the platform opens up advertising opportunities to all businesses.
  • Over 50% of B2B marketers rank social media as a “very” or “somewhat” low cost ad option.
  • 60% of all time spent on digital media is performed on a mobile device.
  • Over 90% of advertisers and agencies plan to run Facebook video ads this year.
  • 15 Social Media Marketing Statistics Every SaaS Business Needs to Know | kenmoo.me: 93% of marketers agree that brand exposure is the main advantage of social media advertising.
  • 75% of marketers say they have experienced an increase in website traffic due to their social media campaigns.
  • 73% of marketers said that their social media marketing activities have been “somewhat effective” and “very effective” for their businesses.
  • 43% of consumers surveyed said they had discovered new brands or products via social media.
  • 90% of respondents will buy from brands they connect to on social media as they feel more loyal toward them.
  • 71% of consumers who have had a good experience with a brand on social media are likely to recommend it to others.
  • 81% of Instagram users surveyed said that they learn about products and services through the platform.
  • 78% of salespeople using social media outperform their peers who don’t use social media.
  • 93% of marketers say that Facebook is the most important social platform for their business.
  • 62% of marketers say that social listening as a social media marketing strategy has helped them to acquire new customers.
  • 66% of small businesses benefit from the use of social media for marketing purposes.
  • 40% of Twitter users purchased following an influencer’s recommendation via the platform.
  • Social media marketing has a 100% higher lead-to-close rate than outbound marketing tactics.
  • The Most Important Travel SEO Marketing Statistics for 2024: As a result of this disruption, it is no surprise that over 90% of global travel marketers drastically reduced their marketing budget to keep their business afloat during these challenging times.
  • A smart travel SEO strategy can help your business appear in search results, which is important since paid search only reaches 39% of search result pages with ads.
  • It’s worth noting that 72% of people who conduct a local search will eventually visit a physical store as a resubecausesearch, that goes which travel businesses like agencies, tour operators, camps, and hotels.
  • Studies show that 90% of individuals conduct all their holiday research online, typically starting 12 weeks before their trip to a chosen destination.
  • In fact, for 60% of travelers, the first step is placing an online search.
  • 81% in link acquisition, while those not leveraging social media see a slightly lower rate at 13.
  • As a result of this disruption, it is no surprise that over 90% of global travel marketers drastically reduced their marketing budget to keep their business afloat during these challenging times.
  • A smart travel SEO strategy can help your business appear in search results, which is important since paid search only reaches 39% of search result pages with ads.
  • It’s worth noting that 72% of people who conduct a local search will eventually visit a physical store as a resubecausesearch, that goes which travel businesses like agencies, tour operators, camps, and hotels.
  • Studies show that 90% of individuals conduct all their holiday research online, typically starting 12 weeks before their trip to a chosen destination.
  • In fact, for 60% of travelers, the first step is placing an online search.
  • 81% in link acquisition, while those not leveraging social media see a slightly lower rate at 13.
  • As a result of this disruption, it is no surprise that over 90% of global travel marketers drastically reduced their marketing budget to keep their business afloat during these challenging times.
  • Researchers have shown that “staycation” searches increased by more than 500% in July 2020 compared to just one year before.
  • A smart travel SEO strategy can help your business appear in search results, which is important since paid search only reaches 39% of search result pages with ads.
  • Appearing in organic search results is crucial to capturing the remaining 60% of searches.
  • Across the internet, 81% of consumers on the internet find products and services by using search engines.
  • It’s worth noting that 72% of people who conduct a local search will eventually visit a physical store as a resubecausesearch, that goes which travel businesses like agencies, tour operators, camps, and hotels.
  • About 78% of local searches on search engines lead to a purchase being made offline.
  • Based on data from Ruler Analytics, the majority of conversions, 85%, occur online, while a smaller percentage, 15%, occur over the phone.
  • Studies show that 90% of individuals conduct all their holiday research online, typically starting 12 weeks before their trip to a chosen destination.
  • In fact, for 60% of travelers, the first step is placing an online search.
  • About, 90% of link builders state that no-follow links impact search rankings.
  • 81% in link acquisition, while those not leveraging social media see a slightly lower rate at 13.
  • About 32% of link-building professionals spend 1-2 hours for a single link, while 24% may require more time, with 3-5 hours per link.
  • B2B Marketing Statistics 2023:SEO Trends, Growth and Facts: As of reports in 2023 over the world, 74% of B2B Marketers have set goals but out of which only 3% have achieved their marketing goals.
  • As of reports in 2023 over the world, 74% of B2B Marketers have set goals but out of which only 3% have achieved their marketing goals.
  • Editor’s choice According to Statista 2022, in-house marketing activities were conducted by 41% of B2B businesses.
  • Whereas, to drive the sales rate higher 86% of B2B marketers have used LinkedIn.
  • In 2022, around the world, 66% of B2B marketers have planned to increase their spending on B2B content marketing.
  • After reading the content, almost 52% of buyers are more inclined to purchase from vendors in 2023.
  • The major area of marketing spending comes from website development which is leading with 51%, followed by digital marketing (44%), content marketing (33%), Branding (27%), and social media (22%).
  • com) In 2023 around the world, B2B buyers by 77% have faced an overly complex last deal in a B2B buying cycle.
  • As of now, the B2B buying cycle is getting shorter According to the latest B2B marketing stats only 33% of B2B marketers have completed sales within four to six weeks.
  • For enhancing sales rate 41% of marketers are currently using the B2B video marketing strategy.
  • The significant purchase factor for buyers is content personalization and 63% of B2B teams include approximately 3 decision makers.
  • According to Statista 2022, in the United States in-house marketing teams were observed in 56% of B2B companies, 38% of B2B companies had both outsourcing and in-house marketing, and 6% of companies’ marketing tasks were outsourced.
  • The most implemented B2B tactic in 2022 was email marketing with a leading share of 84%, second best B2B tactic was social media used by 75% of B2B experts followed by content marketing and blogging (69%).
  • companies spend on B2B marketing which dedicates 5% of their budget to marketing.
  • Whereas, 23% of B2B companies didn’t put any effort into implementing B2B strategies and spent less than 1%.
  • Only 47% understand the importance of B2B strategies which allocate almost 10% to the marketing sector.
  • On the other hand, across the world, only 13% of companies have reported spending on total budget with more than 15%.
  • com) As of 2022, around 32% of B2B companies have invested almost 5% of their annual budget for marketing.
  • 21% of B2B companies have allocated 10% of their budget followed by more than 13% of B2B companies that have invested 15% of their budget, another 13% of B2B companies have allocated only 1% of their budget and 10% of B2B companies have allocated less than 1% budget for enhancing marketing.
  • Whereas, the other activities that B2B marketing teams outsource are followed by content distribution (31%), content technology (22%), Content strategy (13%), Measurement (13%), Editorial planning (12%), and others (18%).
  • It is expected that the United States is going to spend more than $30 billion on advertising by the end of 2023 projecting a share of 48%.
  • com) In 2022, B2B marketers have stated that the best channel for generating leads with the highest return on investment (ROI) is 50% email marketing.
  • com) As of 2022, in B2B businesses more than 60% of buyers were likely to make repeat purchases whereas, 62% of business buyers have preferred cooperating with old vendors.
  • Video content played an effective role as over 70% of business buyers have watched videos for product research.
  • B2B buyer’s purchasing decision was influenced directly by vendor website (70%), internet search (67%), Social media (53%), regular publication (47%), and email content (41%).
  • Remote or digital interaction was preferred by 70% of B2B buyers and human or self-service interaction was preferred by 80% of B2B buyers.
  • According to B2B digital marketing statistics, 70%-74% of B2B business buyers have spent half of their time doing online research on websites, video sites, social media, and search engine results in 2022.
  • According to search engine optimization statistics, B2B marketers achieved 70% of organic traffic from searches.
  • In 2022, almost 40% of the B2B Company’s revenue has increased by using organic search in content marketing.
  • For finding out online information 71% of B2B clients preferred using search engines.
  • Statistics by B2B Paid Marketing As of 2023, almost 16% of B2B companies claimed that the top spending of digital marketing is online advertising.
  • For enhancing brand awareness and driving out paid traffic 6% of B2B firms have used YouTube.
  • For launching advertising campaigns almost 80% of B2B marketers used Google Ads.
  • In the case of sharing online content around 61% of B2B marketers used paid ads.
  • B2B Marketing Statistics by Strategies The other effective strategies are followed by personalization (32%), Inbound Marketing (29%), Podcast and live streaming (27%), conversational marketing with chatbots (24%), and mobile-first strategy (22%).
  • Some least used strategies are programming advertising, voice optimization, CMR, digital marketing, and SMM with shares holding 11%, 11%, and 5% respectively.
  • uk) The five highest-performing strategies used by B2B markets in 2022 are account-based marketing (46%), video marketing (41%), influencer marketing (38%), artificial intelligence (38%), and retargeting (33%).
  • Among B2B marketers across the world, the most popular social media platform is Facebook and 42% of B2B organizations have used social media to attract new clients.
  • Across the world, B2B marketing specialist by 83% has shared their content on this platform, and Facebook ad campaigns were launched by 2/3rd of marketers.
  • The main source of using social marketing is to increase brand awareness by 25% of marketing firms.
  • Another way of increasing brand awareness in 84% of B2B businesses is influencer marketing.
  • The second most popular social media platform is LinkedIn and almost 89% of businesses use it for generating leads and 65% of B2B business firms attract new clients by using this platform.
  • According to marketing statistics, Instagram was used by 46% of B2B content marketing specialists.
  • For enhancing potential client reach 17% of organizations used Instagram ads.
  • Statistics by B2B Video Marketing As of 2023, video marketing spends 88% more time on their sites and helps in drawing user’s attention.
  • More leads are attracted by video content along with increasing conversion rates which is claimed by 83% of B2B markets.
  • Over the world, video marketing is used by 75% of companies to help increase ROIs.
  • The most effective client conversion is experienced by 71% of video marketers.
  • According to B2B marketing statistics, 31% of marketers believed that email engages more readers.
  • Email messages are used as tools by 82% of marketing specialists for sharing informative content with others.
  • For increasing sales opportunities, 81% of B2B content marketers have used newsletters to keep their subscribers informed.
  • Around 16% of B2B companies or organizations will spend more on email marketing in 2023 across the world.
  • Whereas, email marketing is termed as the top tool used by 59% of B2B organizations that helped in gaining sales.
  • B2B Marketing Statistics by Industries Almost 50% of the High-tech B2B industry remained digital and in coming years the trends are expected to enhance more.
  • Whereas, the high–tech industry remained extremely competitive in 2022 stated by 60% of organizations.
  • Meetings with sales managers were avoided by 59% of B2B tech buyers The average cost for generating leads in the B2B financial sector is around $43 and for overcoming competitors in financial service sectors 77% of financial institutions have planned on implementing innovation.
  • According to B2B marketing strategies, the largest B2B financial company is Stripe As of 2022, 26% of the budget was spent by B2B companies in manufacturing industries on marketing.
  • B2B businesses in the worldwide healthcare industry have invested 18% of their budgets in marketing efforts.
  • In the sectors of insurance, finance, and banking B2B companies have spent around 14% of their budget on marketing strategies.
  • Whereas, only 2% of the budget was used on marketing by mining and construction-based B2B organizations.
  • uk) As of 2023, B2B marketers have achieved successful content marketing by creating 83% brand awareness, and in 2022 it was around 80%.
  • The other successful content marketing in 2023 and 2022 are followed by building/trust/growing credibility (77% and 75%), educating the audience (72% and 70%), Building loyalty with existing clients (63% and 60%), Generate leads (67% and 60%), and Nurture leads/subscriber (54% and 49%).
  • It has been observed that B2B businesses those are having good content marketing strategies remain more beneficial for attracting new clients and worldwide 91% of marketers have used B2B marketing strategies in their businesses.
  • B2B Marketing Statistics – Holistic SEO: Source:Content Marketing Institute 51% of B2C Marketers and 33% of B2B Marketers use Instagram.
  • Source:Content Marketing Institute 65% of B2B Companies acquire customers with LinkedIn Ads at least once.
  • Source:SmartInsights gives 2% less than the Content Marketing Institute.
  • 67% of B2C Businesses and 41% of B2B Companies acquire customers on Facebook at least once.
  • B2B Marketers use Facebook at a rate of 96% and LinkedIn at 83% as a digital marketing platform.
  • Source:ComScore 75% of B2B Marketers use social media to support their purchasing decisions.
  • Source:Hubspot Facebook (89%), LinkedIn (81%), and Twitter (75% probability) are the most used social media B2B channels.
  • For Return on Investment, 59% of marketers say SEO is the best method for B2B Marketing.
  • Source:Marketing Charts 59% of B2B Marketers use YouTube to promote their content.
  • Source:Content Marketing Institute 75% of B2B Marketers definitely use video.
  • Source:Content Marketing Institute 64% of B2B Marketers consider video marketing to be decisive for them.
  • Source:Tabular Insights 71% of B2B Search searches begin with a general concept on Google.
  • Source:Google 50% of B2B Marketers see content creation as their biggest hurdle.
  • Source:LinkedIn 90% of B2B Marketers say it is difficult for them to generate interest.
  • Source:Statista 70% of B2B Marketers prioritize content quality over quantity.
  • Source:Kapost 88% of B2B Marketers consider case studies to be the most effective content type.
  • Source:Content Marketing Institute 85% of B2B Marketers engage in content marketing on a regular basis.
  • Source:Content Marketing Institute 81% of B2B Companies say blog posts are critical to conversion.
  • Source:Nurture B2B Companies get 70% more leads if they publish 1-2 blog posts every month than if they don’t publish at all.
  • Source:HubSpot 49% of B2B Marketers consider a tested sales tunnel essentially.
  • Source:Statista 34% of B2B Blog readers state that B2B Companies publish content on topics that they are not interested in.
  • Source:KoMarketing 53% of B2B Marketers have a one-person or multiple-person content production team.
  • Source:Content Marketing Institute 95% of B2B marketers say readers use blog posts to see their company’s credibility.
  • Source:Adscope 49% of B2B Marketers consider “article” content essential for their marketing.
  • Source:Statista 70% of B2B Marketers consider producing more content than last year.
  • Source:BuzzSumo 47% of B2B Customers read 3-5 pieces of content before speaking to a sales representative.
  • Source:DemandGen Between 57% and 70% of B2B customers conduct research before contacting a B2B company for the first time.
  • Source:Google 58% of B2B marketers say it takes longer to make a decision.
  • Source:Business2Community 44% of B2B marketers leave their website if their contact information is not visible.
  • Source:KoMarketing 70% of B2B Customers watch at least one video while making a decision.
  • Source:Google 96% of B2B Customers prefer content that includes ideas from industry leaders.
  • Source:DemandGen 73% of B2B Customers prefer personalized B2C-like content and experiences.
  • Source:Google More than 50% of B2B Searches are performed on mobile devices.
  • Source:Google 20% of B2B Sales are carried out through mobile marketing.
  • Source:BCG 80% of B2B employees search for the products they will buy on tablets and mobile devices in the evening.
  • Source:IDG Global Solutions 67% of B2B marketers make inbound marketing a priority.
  • Source:HubSpot 70% of internet users use content to learn about products, not images.
  • Source:B2B Marketing Insider 68% of B2B Companies do not have any defined sales channels.
  • The engagement rates in B2B email marketing exhibit variability, typically falling within 20% to 30% for open rates and approximately 3% to 5% for click-through rates.
  • Several research and surveys indicate that a substantial majority, ranging from 80% to 90%, of business-to-business (B2B) marketers believe that testimonials and customer reviews influence the purchasing decisions made by potential customers.
  • According to industry reports for 2021, it has been suggested that the average conversion rates for B2B websites often fall within the region of 2% to 5%.
  • Nevertheless, websites that demonstrate exceptional performance have the potential to attain significantly elevated conversion rates, occasionally surpassing the threshold of 10%.
  • 20 content marketing statistics that will make you think – Marq: 85% of businesses have seen an increase in demand for content in the last year.
  • 87% of businesses say at least some customers expect personalized content, and 43% say most customers expect personalized content.
  • Only 32% of brands report that the majority of their content is personalized.
  • 36% of businesses report that a majority of customer decisions are influenced by their brand’s content.
  • 68% of brands believe most of their content is relevant to their customers.
  • 83% of businesses believe content is most effective in the awareness and consideration stages.
  • 86% of marketers and creatives believe content is most effective in the awareness and consideration stages.
  • 60% of people in sales believe content is most effective in the consideration stage.
  • 67% of survey respondents say content they consume from other businesses is irrelevant or only somewhat relevant.
  • Over half of respondents (56%) think other brands’ content is only somewhat or not at all trustworthy.
  • However people are or aren’t tracking their content, survey respondents estimated that content — specifically personalized content — could, on average, increase revenue by a whopping 48%.
  • Survey respondents believe personalized content could increase a brand’s revenue by 48%.
  • 48% of businesses say 50% or less of their content is regularly used by stakeholders.
  • The majority of sales professionals say they use less than 50% of their brand’s content.
  • Only 27% of brands actively measure the ROI of the content they produce.
  • 64% of creative teams spend at least 5-10 hours per week on mundane content and edit requests.
  • 7 content marketing stats that should shake higher education – and 5 ways to act on them | Cursive Content: 66% of prospective college students believe schools should have a social media presence.
  • More than 90% of colleges have a Facebook fan page and 80% of prospective students use Facebook.
  • Over the past two years, the number of colleges with blogs has grown from 36% to 55%, pointing to the growing recognition that content is key.
  • 50 Visual Content Marketing Statistics:The Complete Guide | Pepper Content: People remember 65% of what they see three days later than 10 percent of what they hear.
  • 88% of marketers said they used visual content in 50% or more of their content.
  • For 42% of marketers, stock photography is the most commonly utilized visual material.
  • Similarly, by 2022, the video will account for 80% of all internet traffic.
  • The first impression is everything Visual information makes up 90% of the data sent to your brain.
  • Approximately 11% of respondents to Venngage’s survey stated they spend more than 20 hours a week producing visual content.
  • Marketers’ use of visual content Visuals are vital to 64% of marketers.
  • Venngage’s annual poll found that 40% of respondents said they use them more frequently than any other sort of visual material.
  • Despite being the most often utilized visual material, just 13% of respondents said stock photographs were the most effective.
  • According to estimates, consumer internet traffic will be 82% video by 2022.
  • That’s why 64% of individuals who view a sponsored social video end up making a purchase.
  • That’s why 84% of those who took part in an Infographic World poll said infographics were successful.
  • While adding a cinemagraph (a form of GIF) in an ad for Mist Twst raised CTR by a stunning 75%.
  • According to a Venngage report, just 4% of marketers utilize memes and GIFs as their most often used visual material.
  • According to 72% of marketers, branded content is more effective than magazine adverts.
  • Include visuals in your blog 81% of companies choose to promote videos on Facebook.
  • In contrast, just 16% of responders were successful with only one image.
  • Visual social media platforms are popular among teens Instagram is used by 72% of teens, while Snapchat is used by 69% of the same age group.
  • After seeing a brand or product in Stories, 58% of consumers said they were more interested in it.
  • Notably, 20% of Americans use Twitter, totaling roughly 70 million users!
  • LinkedIn users adore visuals LinkedIn is the most popular social networking site for B2B firms, with 80% of B2B marketers using it.
  • On LinkedIn, the material is frequently seen as more reliable than that found on other sites, such as Facebook, accounting for 46% of all social traffic to B2B websites.
  • 53% of individuals say they would select a brand that utilizes VR over a brand that doesn’t use VR if given the option.
  • 69% of millennials prefer to conduct their product searches using images rather than text.
  • Forty-nine percent of marketers say visual marketing is critical, while 22% say it is vital.
  • People remember 65% of what they see three days later than 10 percent of what they hear.
  • 88% of marketers said they used visual content in 50% or more of their content.
  • For 42% of marketers, stock photography is the most commonly utilized visual material.
  • Similarly, by 2022, the video will account for 80% of all internet traffic.
  • Despite being the most often utilized visual material, just 13% of respondents said stock photographs were the most effective.
  • According to estimates, consumer internet traffic will be 82% video by 2022.
  • While adding a cinemagraph (a form of GIF) in an ad for Mist Twst raised CTR by a stunning 75%.
  • According to a Venngage report, just 4% of marketers utilize memes and GIFs as their most often used visual material.
  • After seeing a brand or product in Stories, 58% of consumers said they were more interested in it.
  • On LinkedIn, the material is frequently seen as more reliable than that found on other sites, such as Facebook, accounting for 46% of all social traffic to B2B websites.
  • 69% of millennials prefer to conduct their product searches using images rather than text.
  • People remember 65% of what they see three days later than 10 percent of what they hear.
  • 88% of marketers said they used visual content in 50% or more of their content.
  • People remember 65% of what they see three days later than 10 percent of what they hear.
  • Social media advertising and marketing in the Netherlands – Statistics & Facts | Statista: 3% of all users) Detailed statistics Netherlands Facebook users 2023, by age and gender Most common Instagram user Female, 25-34 years old (13.
  • 151 Up-To-Date Content Marketing Statistics for 2022: General Content Marketing Statistics The most successful companies are 40% more likely to have a documented content marketing strategy.
  • (HubSpot, 2021) 82% of surveyed companies say they actively use content marketing.
  • (HubSpot, 2021) Only 4% of marketers measure ROI over a six-month timeframe or longer.
  • (HubSpot, 2021) 94% of content marketers changed their content marketing strategy because of the pandemic.
  • (HubSpot, 2021) 63% of companies reported an increase in their marketing budgets for 2021.
  • (Semrush, 2020) 34% of outsourced content is plagiarized, and another 18% is written by AI.
  • (2022, GrowthBadger) 69% of companies say most of their new content is for the top of their marketing funnel.
  • (The Manifest, 2019) 55% of B2C marketers outsource at least one aspect of content marketing.
  • (Content Marketing Institute, 2020) Only 33% of organizations have a documented content strategy.
  • (Content Marketing Institute, 2020) Content Marketing ROI Statistics Only 4% of marketers measure ROI over a six-month timeframe or longer.
  • (LinkedIn, 2021) 61% of companies that engage in content marketing have a way to measure their content marketing ROI.
  • (Semrush, 2020) 44% of B2B marketers say their top priority is to measure the ROI of their demand generation activities better.
  • (Demand Gen Report, 2021) 53% of B2B marketers say webinars are the best type of top-of-funnel marketing for bringing in high-quality leads.
  • (Demand Gen Report, 2021) 83% of organizations surveyed say they are either very or somewhat confident that their website is helping them reach their marketing targets.
  • (HubSpot, 2021) 72% of marketers say their company uses reporting tools.
  • (Litmus, 2020) According to Twitter, brands that tap into trending topics see an 8% increase in brand awareness, a 7% increase in brand preference, and a 3% increase in purchase intent.
  • (Twitter, 2018) About 40% of marketers say that content marketing is a “very important” part of their marketing strategy.
  • (HubSpot, 2020) Social Media Marketing Statistics 82% of companies used social media marketing in 2021.
  • (HubSpot, 2021) 82% of Americans over the age of twelve actively use social media.
  • (Edison Research, 2021) TikTok was used by 44% of American 12-34 year olds in 2021, up from 25% in 2020.
  • (Edison Research, 2021) 96% of B2B marketers who distribute content on social media organically use LinkedIn.
  • (Content Marketing Institute, 2021) 66% of B2B marketers say that compared to all other social media platforms, LinkedIn brought in the best organic content marketing results for their companies in the last year.
  • (Content Marketing Institute, 2021) 90% of video plays on Twitter occur on mobile devices.
  • (Twitter, 2021) 87% of marketers use social media for content distribution.
  • (Sprout Social, 2021) 67% of marketers who use TikTok say that it’s an effective marketing channel.
  • (Wyzowl, 2021) Video Content Marketing Statistics (Including Live Streaming) Over 82% of all internet traffic is online video.
  • (Wyzowl, 2021) Ecommerce product pages with embedded video convert 80% better than those without video.
  • (Social Media Today, 2018) According to YouTube, channels that host a weekly live stream can expect up to 40% more subscribers.
  • 5 times as much traffic and 32% more shares than articles without video.
  • (Semrush, 2021) 84% of people say branded video content has convinced them to buy a product or service.
  • (Wyzowl, 2021) 96% of people have watched an explainer video to learn about a product or service.
  • (Edison Research, 2021) 94% of video marketers say the medium increases their users’ understanding of their product or service.
  • (Wyzowl, 2021) 86% of video marketers say video has driven more traffic to their websites.
  • (Wyzowl, 2021) The first 15 seconds of a video are critical:43% of consumers decide in that time whether they want to watch it until the end.
  • (Podcast Insights, 2021) 78% of Americans aged 12+ are familiar with podcasting in 2021.
  • ) (Edison Research, 2021) 57% of Americans aged 12+ have listened to a podcast.
  • (Edison Research, 2021) 41% of Americans aged 12+ listen to podcasts each month.
  • (Edison Research, 2021) In the United States, 43% of men and 39% of women listen to podcasts on a monthly basis.
  • (Edison Research, 2021) 68% of Americans aged 12+ now listen to streaming online audio each month.
  • (Edison Research, 2021) 33% of Americans aged 12+ now own a smart speaker.
  • (Edison Research, 2021) 46% of Americans aged 12+ have ever listened to an audiobook.
  • (Statista, 2020) 77% of marketers say they got more email engagement in 2021 than in 2020.
  • (Litmus, 2020) 87% of B2B marketers use email to distribute their content.
  • (HubSpot, 2021) The average open rate for triggered transactional emails is 53%.
  • (Statista, 2020) B2B marketing emails get 47% higher CTRs than B2C emails.
  • (GetResponse, 2020) Including a preheader increases email open rates by over 15%.
  • (Campaign Monitor, 2021) According to Campaign Monitor, 72% of consumers say they’re more likely to open an email that mentions a discount in the subject line.
  • (Campaign Monitor, 2021) 72% of content marketers use email for content distribution.
  • (HubSpot, 2021) In 2021, 69% of marketers invested in SEO — up from 64% in 2020.
  • (HubSpot, 2021) 75% of companies say their SEO tactics are effective at helping them achieve their marketing goals.
  • (HubSpot, 2021) 70% of web searches are for long-tail keywords (phrases of 3+ words).
  • (CWS, 2017) Organic search drives 51% of all online content consumption.
  • 7% (Backlinko, 2021) Moving up a single position in organic search rankings will increase that page’s CTR by 30.
  • (Backlinko, 2021) 89% of content marketers use SEO for content distribution.
  • (Semrush, 2021) List articles get 80% more traffic than other types of posts.
  • (Impact Plus, 2016) Bullet points help blog posts perform better:posts that have at least one list per 500 words of other text get 70% more traffic than posts that don’t.
  • 5 times as much traffic and 32% more shares than articles without video.
  • (GrowthBadger, 2021) Blog posts with one or more images get 2x as much traffic, 30% more shares, and 25% more backlinks than blog posts without images.
  • 11 Video Stats that will Blow Your Content Marketing Mind: Videos increase people’s understanding of your product or service by 74% 75% of executives watch work-related videos on business websites at least once a week Online video users are expected to double to 1.
  • 4% of Internet users view at least one video online over the course of a month Video is a key aspect of any content marketing strategy—and fueling your video channels with fresh, targeted content takes a content operation.
  • Visual Content Marketing Statistics:20 Important From 2020: Infographics increase website traffic by up to 12%, but only if they are informative and optimized enough.
  • HubSpots findings showed that 32% of marketers increased investment in visual content marketing during 2020.
  • One more proof in favor of visual content is the fact that almost half of the buyers (49%, to be precise) view 3-5 pieces of content before making a purchase or engaging in talks with a sales agent.
  • Those companies have 434% more indexed pages compared to the companies that do not blog.
  • One more data from Content Marketing Institute survey showed that over 60% of all online purchases are the direct result of a customer reading a blog and finding useful info there.
  • CMI survey also showed that the majority of marketers that work in the B2B sector (73%) strongly believe that blog posts enriched with visual elements are the most effective content type for the current generation of customers.
  • Answers collected by eMarketer showed that 60% of marketers create at least one piece of content daily.
  • Over 70% of marketers are actively investing resources in content marketing, making it better and more appealing to potential clients.
  • DemandMetric claims that 80% of people appreciate learning about a company through visual content, especially if it is unique.
  • 86% of highly effective organizations have someone in charge of content strategy.
  • The same study from DemandMetric showed that companies could save up to 62% when using content marketing over traditional marketing.
  • Research showed that 60% of marketers use one piece of content between two and five times.
  • Digital marketing in Italy – Statistics & Facts | Statista: 5% Detailed statistics User reaction to direct e-mail marketing in Italy 2019, by type of company Click-to-open rate of B2C retail newsletters in Italy 11.
  • 6% Detailed statistics Opening rate of DEM e-mails in Italy 2020, by B2C industry Show more factsShow less Loyalty marketing Share of companies using CRM systems for loyalty marketing services in Italy in 2018 37.
  • 9% Detailed statistics Preferred tools for loyalty marketing in Italy 2018 Share of companies using apps for loyalty marketing services in Italy in 2018 24.
  • 1% Detailed statistics Preferred tools for loyalty marketing in Italy 2018 Share of companies using proximity marketing tools for loyalty marketing services in Italy in 2018 15.
  • Visual Content Marketing:Statistics Relevant In 2021: General Visual Content Marketing Stats Here’s why visuals are a must-have in your content marketing mix:Web users scan text and read about 20% of the words on a page during an average visit.
  • Further 65% of the general population are visual learners, and after three days of consumption, they can remember 65% of the visual information vis-à-vis 10% recall for written content.
  • A Venngage survey of 200 content marketers predicted that visuals would remain an integral part of marketing strategies in 2020 and 2021 for 66% of businesses.
  • In 2020, 25% of marketers anticipated spending between 10% to 20% of their total budgets on visual content creation.
  • 74% of marketers said that they used visuals in more than 70% of the articles they published.
  • Because colors can improve your brand recognition by up to 80% as per Xerox.
  • 80% of people say that they switch between online search and video while buying.
  • 69% of marketers plan on increasing their use of YouTube video, 73% want to learn more about marketing on the platform, It’s also the number-one video channel, used by 55% of marketers.
  • 70% of people used YouTube during 2020 to watch online replacements of live events.
  • 56% of live streamers even agreed that watching them can be just as good as being at an event in person.
  • Social Media Stats You Need To Know – YCS Marketing, LLC: (Pew Research Center) Only 45% of marketers think that their Facebook efforts are effective.
  • (Buzzsumo) Facebook continues to have the most engaged users — 70% log on daily, including 43% who do so several times a day.
  • (Pew Research Center) Facebook sends 82% of social media traffic to longer stories and 84% of social traffic to shorter news articles.
  • (Pew Research Center) 63% of Facebook and Twitter users say each platform serves as a source for news about events and issues outside the realm of friends and family.
  • (Pew Research Center) 73% of people say they use Facebook for professional purposes.
  • (HubSpot) In the past two years, content consumption on Facebook has increased 57%.
  • (HubSpot) 76% of people use their Facebook feed to find interesting content.
  • 1460390947) Twitter Marketing Stats 23% of adult internet users use Twitter.
  • (Pew Research Center) 3 in 10 online urban residents use Twitter, compared with 21% of suburbanites and 15% of those living in rural areas.
  • (Pew Research Center) 30% of online adults under 50 use Twitter, compared with 11% of online adults ages 50 and older.
  • (Pew Research Center) Twitter accounts for 16% of referrals to longer articles from social sites and 14% for shorter news articles.
  • (Pew Research Center) In the past two years, content consumption on Twitter has increased 25%.
  • 1460390947) LinkedIn Marketing Stats 25% of adult internet users use LinkedIn.
  • (Pew Research Center) 46% of online adults who have graduated from college are LinkedIn users, compared with just 9% of online adults with a high school diploma or less.
  • (Pew Research Center) 32% of employed adults are LinkedIn users, compared with 14% of online adults who are not employed.
  • (Pew Research Center) In the past two years, content consumption on LinkedIn has increased 21%.
  • (HubSpot) LinkedIn has 450 million members, but only 25% actively visit the professional social network each month.
  • 1460390947) Instagram Marketing Stats On Instagram, photos showing faces get 38% more Likes than photos not showing faces.
  • (Georgia Institute of Technology) 28% of adult internet users use Instagram.
  • (Pew Research Center) 59% of Instagram users are on the platform daily, including 35% who visit several times a day.
  • (Instagram) General Social Media Stats 64% of marketers are using social media for six hours or more and 41% for 11 or more hours weekly.
  • (Social Media Examiner) Nearly 19% of marketers spend more than 20 hours each week on social media.
  • (Social Media Examiner) 83% of all marketers actively pursue social media marketing initiatives.
  • (Aberdeen) As of 2015, 35% of all those 65 and older report using social media, compared with just 2% in 2005.
  • (Pew Research Center) As of 2015, 90% of young adults use social media, compared with 12% in 2005.
  • (Buffer) Researchers found that colored visuals increase people’s willingness to read a piece of content by 80%.
  • Top 13 Content Marketing Stats you need to know: Those who do are 74% more likely to get strong results” – Orbit Media Creating a blog and making it successful is just not enough.
  • “The average blog post is now 1,142 words (up 41% since 2014)” – Orbit Media With the ever-changing search engine’s algorithm, the competition to get ranked on the first page of Google has increased drastically.
  • “Paid content promotion is up 5x since 2014” – Orbit Media Fact – “98% of the searchers make their decisions from page 1 of Google” Therefore, it has become extremely crucial for businesses to secure theirs.
  • A report by Google shows that businesses typically see a 200% ROI from AdWords.
  • “Only 8% of marketers consider themselves “very successful” or “extremely successful” at tracking content marketing ROI.
  • “57% of B2B buyers have already made their purchase decision before ever speaking to a sales person.
  • “The most common content marketing delivery mechanism is social media, used by 87% of marketers.
  • “Gamification is the least common content marketing tactic, with only 10% of marketers using it.
  • However, this strategy has not been used much and only 10% of marketer apply gamification in the real world.
  • 50+ Digital Marketing Stats 2024:Must Read | Huptech Web: 86% of the global search engine market (Statistica) According to 75% of people never go past the first search results page (DemandSage) Ranking at the No 1 position on Google results in a 39.
  • 8% organic click-through rate (First Page Sage, 2023) The SEO industry is forecasted to be worth almost $218 billion by 2030 (Forbes) Fast loading pages rank significantly higher than pages that load slowly (Backlinko) The first organic result on mobile searches gets 27.
  • 33% of searchers say they click on a search ad because it directly answers their query (Clutch) According to Google, advertisers see a return of $2 for every $1 they spend on Google Ads (Google) Traffic from pay-per-click (PPC) converts at 3.
  • Mobile Marketing 61% of website visitors won’t return to a website that isn’t mobile friendly Mobile advertising spending will reach nearly $413 billion by 2024 (Statista) 31% of retail spending was made on mobile devices in the U.
  • 85 billion users by 2027 (Forbes) 76% of social media users have purchased something they saw on social media The United States remains the largest social media ad market globally (Statistica) 94% of marketers use Facebook.
  • Of those people, 58% of consumers check their email first thing in the morning (OptinMonster) 84.
  • 3% of consumers say they check their emails at least once a day (Pathwire) 82% of marketers send emails with no more than 60 characters in the subject line (Backlinko) Including a recipient’s name in your email subject line increases open rates by up to 18.
  • 30% (Superoffice) Including videos in your email can increase clickthrough rates by up to 300% (Martechadvisor) Adding a call-to-action button in your emails instead of simply a text link can lead to a 28% increase in click-throughs (CampaignMonitor) Segmented email campaigns also earn 100.
  • 95% higher clickthrough rates as compared to non-segmented email campaigns (MailChimp) The best day of the week to send a marketing email is Tuesday.
  • 8 min read Rishi Thakker February 16, 2024 The Ultimate Guide to Measuring Your Content Marketing ROI 21% of content marketers say that measuring ROI is the biggest challenge when developing content.
  • Social media advertising and marketing in Europe – statistics & facts | Statista: Marketer usage Social media ad spend growth in Europe 7% Detailed statistics Social media ad spend growth in Europe 2017-2022 Social video ad spend in Europe 10.
  • 7% Detailed statistics Marketing budgets in the UK 2022-2023, by platform Social media advertising spend in Germany 1.
  • The 77 Statistics for Digital Marketing in 2022 you Need to Know: The Size of the Digital Marketing Industry The annual growth for the digital marketing industry is expected to be 9% year on year.
  • Since 2021, nearly two-thirds of businesses (63%) have increased their digital marketing budgets.
  • Nearly half of all businesses (49%) state that organic search brings the best ROI.
  • The Dominance of Digital Marketing in a Brand’s Budget About 72% of a brand’s budget is spent on digital marketing channels.
  • The average local business places up to 10% of their revenue into a digital marketing budget.
  • The average large business claims that 14% of their revenue is put towards digital marketing.
  • Consumer Behaviours Consumers will spend 50% more per order if a business regularly responds to reviews.
  • Consumers will spend 500% more time on a website after seeing a bad review.
  • 45% of consumers prefer to buy online and have the order delivered than pick up the product in-store.
  • Nearly half of all searches (46%) are for local brands, products, and services.
  • Display Advertising Statistics Display adverts will increase the brand awareness of a company by 80%.
  • Consumers are 155% to search using brand-specific terms after seeing a display advert.
  • Consumers are 70% more likely to purchase after seeing a retargeting advert.
  • Consumers who search on Google or other search engines will convert 59% of the time.
  • A consumer’s search activity will rise by 155% after they’ve seen a display advert.
  • Only 4% of marketers will increase their digital advertising expenditure within 2022.
  • The annual advertising expenditure for websites on social media is $134 billion in 2022, a 17% increase.
  • More than 91% of brands will use social media to market to consumers and clients.
  • 40% of businesses will use TikTok in their social media strategy during 2022.
  • 87% of brands use email marketing to distribute content to their users.
  • 78% of marketers in 2020 said email marketing is vital for the success of their brand.
  • Websites Less than three-quarters (72%) of small businesses have a website.
  • Nearly 60% of consumers would not recommend a business with a poorly designed mobile website.
  • 70% of small business websites are missing a call to action on the homepage.
  • Digital Marketing Reporting 62% of marketing professionals use CRM software for analyzing and creating professional reports on campaign success.
  • 13 Must-Know Digital Marketing Statistics to Guide Your 2023 Planning: Users are more interested in organic results than paid for 94% of searches.
  • A dedicated budget for conversion rate optimization can increase ROI by 30%.
  • 60+ Compelling Digital Marketing Industry Statistics [2023]:How To Market Digitally In The U.S. – Zippia: Here are the key digital marketing statistics that every business person should know:As of 2022, 90% of marketers use content marketing.
  • Only 37% of companies don’t have a clearly defined content marketing strategy.
  • 55% of executives rely on decisions based on data rather than gut instinct-based decisions.
  • Small businesses with blogs get 126% more lead growth than those without.
  • 7% of the global industry, a percentage that highlights just how important marketing is for U.
  • Only 35% of marketers think their content marketing strategy is very successful compared to their competitors.
  • Meanwhile, the largest percentage of marketers, 46%, described their strategies as somewhat successful, while only 19% considered their strategy unsuccessful.
  • And that percentage is even higher for marketers, for whom 75% generally choose to outsource at least some of their content creation.
  • Digital marketing reaches 50% more customers than traditional marketing.
  • According to our research:55% of marketers say blog content is their top inbound marketing priority.
  • And there’s a reason why, as companies with blogs attract 67% more leads per month than those without them.
  • Overall, 82% of companies who have used blogs as part of their marketing strategy see positive ROI.
  • Only 42% of B2B marketers see positive results from content marketing campaigns.
  • Unfortunately, that’s less than half of the 93% of B2B marketers who actively use content marketing for their business.
  • Because of that, the most successful B2B marketers will dedicate up to 39% of their total marketing budget to content marketing alone.
  • 75% of B2C marketers create content to educate the audience about their brand.
  • Marketers also use content marketing to create brand awareness (84%), build credibility and trust (65%), and generate leads (61%).
  • And that number is even higher for larger companies, as 85% of US companies with 100 employees or more regularly invest in content marketing.
  • With that in mind, here are some top digital marketing data and technology facts:Data-driven marketing campaigns increase ROI by 500-800%.
  • That’s why 32% of marketers report that data-driven marketing strategies are vital for successful strategies.
  • Studies show that 63% of companies that use marketing automation outperform their competitors.
  • 74% of companies began implementing automation tools in their marketing less than ten years ago.
  • Of the companies who’ve started using automation tools and platforms, 42% started only 1-2 years ago, 32% started 5-9 years ago, and only 16% started more than a decade ago.
  • From 2020 to 2021, installs of shopping apps increased by 10% globally.
  • Further, usage of these apps has increased at an even more telling rate, 30% year-over-year.
  • 61% of marketers say improving SEO and search engine rankings is their top priority.
  • For context, consider that half of that percentage (30%) would be considered significant for anything labeled a “top priority” in the marketing world.
  • Further, 75% of clicks will go to the first three results, and 25% will click on the first result.
  • Finding local businesses and learning local information is a key aspect of most Google searches, as roughly 85% of consumers use the internet to discover and find local businesses.
  • For example, 35% of home & garden searches related to “furniture near me” and “near me” searches when traveling also increased.
  • 57% of marketers report that relevant content is the most effective SEO tactic.
  • That includes the 49% who believe that relevant keyword/phrase research is the top priority when creating that relevant content.
  • 72% of marketers report that content marketing has quantitatively improved audience engagement.
  • While 72% say that all content marketing increases engagement, 56% of marketers also agree that personalizing this content promotes higher engagement rates.
  • A whopping 93% of all online interactions start with search engines, meaning that you’d be potentially missing out on 93% of your potential customers if you were to ignore SEO altogether.
  • With that in mind, here are some insights our research uncovered about digital marketing sales:68% of B2B businesses use landing pages for new sales leads.
  • That said, it’s also worth mentioning that 48% of marketers will build a new landing page for every offer.
  • And that lack of proper analysis shows, as 79% of marketing leads are never converted into sales.
  • However, the importance of this goal also tends to become an issue for companies, as 65% of them note that generating traffic and leads is also their biggest marketing challenge.
  • Even more telling is that in 2019, only two years prior, e-commerce sales only accounted for roughly 14% of all global retail.
  • Personalized emails are vital for online businesses, as personalized subject lines generate 50% higher open rates.
  • At the very least, these emails generate an average opening rate of 45%, as nearly half of those who receive them will open them.
  • Overall, here are some facts about visuals in digital marketing:Videos on landing pages increase conversion rates by up to 80%.
  • The fact is that 90% of the information inputted into the brain is visual, and the brain can process these visuals (say in a video advertisement) 60,000X faster than text.
  • In general, 87% of marketers agree that videos help them generate a positive ROI.
  • The majority of marketers say that 91-100% of their content includes visuals.
  • The number of marketers saying this each year is increasing, as it reached 74% in 2019.
  • For comparison, 64% of marketers said the same a year prior, meaning that visual marketing is rapidly becoming a dominant type of content for marketers.
  • Here are some interesting facts about mobile marketing:47% of email campaign emails are checked from mobile devices.
  • 1% through webmail, the fact is that mobile devices are huge when it comes to checking emails.
  • A considerable 58% of people use their phones to check emails as soon as they wake up.
  • 46% of voice searches are used to look for information on local businesses daily.
  • smartphone owners who used voice searches, 71% now prefer to perform mobile searches by voice rather than typing.
  • 51% of consumers identify new products and brands on their mobile devices.
  • Here are the facts:81% of executives believe that marketing segmentation is crucial for increasing profits.
  • However, even though most recognize its importance, only 25% said their companies used it effectively.
  • Overall, personalized calls to action are far more effective than generic ones, up to 202% more effective.
  • This, in turn, amounts to an average of 42% more potential customers visiting your website/store.
  • Overall, here are some interesting facts about social media marketing:28% of Facebook users use the site to strengthen their professional network or follow brands and companies.
  • Overall, 11% of Facebook users use the site to strengthen their professional network, while 17% use it to follow brands and companies.
  • Facebook is the most widely used social media platform, with 93% of marketers using it.
  • In order from most popular to least popular, other social media platforms used by marketers include Instagram (78%), LinkedIn (61%), YouTube (55%), Twitter (48%), TikTok (9%), and Snapchat (4%).
  • While this average did take a dip to 12% in 2020 due to the pandemic, the overall year-over-year growth for social media ad spending has been significant.
  • And that’s not all, as consumers are also 71% are more likely to purchase products and services when they come from social media referrals.
  • Knowing that, here are some facts about consumer opinions to help you hone your marketing strategy:53% of consumers are more likely to purchase from transparent brands.
  • Transparency is very important to consumers, as over 90% agree that it’s important to their purchasing decisions.
  • Even further, a whopping 94% are more likely to be loyal to a brand that has complete transparency in its supply chain.
  • Keeping that in mind, here are some of the biggest challenges facing digital marketers:63% of marketers say driving traffic and leads is their biggest content marketing challenge.
  • On top of that, 37% of marketers also say they struggle with producing visuals regularly.
  • According to our research:Professionally written content increases engagement by 28%.
  • 7% of the global industry, a percentage that highlights just how important marketing is for U.
  • Overall, 90% of marketers around the globe now use digital marketing due to the industry’s massive size and widespread internet use.
  • The digital marketing industry is growing at a fast and healthy rate, at least 10% every year.
  • 34% of small businesses outsource their digital marketing, and the percentage is even greater for large companies.
  • What’s more, professionally written content increases engagement by 28%.
  • For example, there are over 80,000 job openings for Digital Marketing Specialists, with an impressive 20% job growth rate.
  • Conclusion With 90% of marketers using content marketing, digital marketing is currently an integral part of any marketer or businesses’ marketing strategy.
  • After all, digital marketing reaches 50% more customers than traditional marketing.
  • “Blogging Businesses Experience 126% Higher Lead Growth Than Non-Blogging Businesses.
  • “61% of marketers say improving SEO and growing their organic presence is their top inbound marketing priority – Organic Search – Digital Logic.
  • “B2B Marketing Research:68% of B2B marketers haven’t identified their Marketing-Sales funnel … and it shows.
  • “RESEARCH NEWS:Articles with images get 94% more views than those without.
  • “Personalized Call-To-Actions Convert 42% More Visitors into Leads than Generic CTAs.
  • 6% of the global industry, a percentage that highlights just how important marketing is for U.
  • What’s more, professionally written content increases engagement by 28%.
  • For example, there are over 80,000 job openings for Digital Marketing Specialists, with an impressive 20% job growth rate.
  • 15 Eye-Opening LinkedIn Video Stats to Inform Your Video Marketing in 2024 – THM SEO Agency: For 73% of B2B marketers, video content has been a game-changer, significantly boosting their marketing return on investment.
  • Video Marketing Trends and Platform Preferences 79% of businesses have embraced LinkedIn for their video marketing efforts, trailing only behind of Facebook at 86% and YouTube at 90%.
  • Over half, specifically 51%, of video marketers have incorporated LinkedIn videos into their promotional strategies.
  • Looking ahead, 66% of video marketing professionals are planning to integrate LinkedIn into their future video marketing plans.
  • A significant 74% of consumers on LinkedIn show a preference for authentic, less polished videos over highly produced ones.
  • In contrast, only 26% of consumers express a preference for slick, professionally produced video content.
  • Executive Insights and Marketing Impact Given a choice between video and text, 59% of executives would opt for video content on LinkedIn.
  • A notable 54% of senior executives regularly share work-related videos with their colleagues on a weekly basis.
  • For 73% of B2B marketers, LinkedIn video content has been a game-changer, significantly boosting their marketing return on investment.
  • Social Media Addiction + Usage Statistics 2023 (Beyond Marketing) | Hook Agency: Mobile users account for approximately 91% of all social media users (Datareportal, 2024).
  • A survey found that 71% of millennials check social media sites first thing in the morning (OnePoll, 2021).
  • 45% of teenagers feel overwhelmed by the number of notifications they receive daily (Common Sense Media, 2021).
  • Social Media Marketing Statistics for 2024 90% of brands use social media to increase brand awareness (Emarsys, 2021).
  • Nearly 73% of marketers believe that their efforts through social media marketing have been “somewhat effective” or “very effective” for their business (Buffer, 2021).
  • As of 2024, the average business spends between 20 – 30% of its total marketing budget on social media advertising (Web Strategies, 2024).
  • 71% of consumers who have had a positive experience with a brand on social media are likely to recommend the brand to their friends and family (Lyfe Marketing, 2021).
  • LinkedIn is the top-rated social network for lead generation – 79% of B2B marketers say LinkedIn has been an effective avenue for lead generation (LinkedIn, 2021).
  • Over 80% of consumers discover products they like on Facebook (Facebook, 2024).
  • Weekly Infographic:99+ Useful Retargeting Statistics Every Marketer Should Know – PageTraffic Buzz – SEO, Search Marketing, News, Events, Guide: Only 2% of shoppers who convert on their first encounter with an ecommerce site ever return to make additional purchases, according to Adroll!
  • Some retargeting stats include:92% of consumers do not intend to purchase their first visit to a website.
  • 76% of retargeted ads are more likely to get clicked than social media campaigns.
  • 91% of marketers think retargeting is more effective than emails and displays.
  • 100 Important & Mind Boggling B2B Marketing Statistics – Luca Tagliaferro | SEO Consultant: B2B Content Marketing StatisticsAccording to the Content Marketing Institute, over 90% of B2B site content has no backlinks to other sites.
  • Highly successful B2B marketing teams spend about 40% of their total marketing budget on content marketing, a prevalent B2B marketing strategy.
  • The leading five content marketing channels used by the most successful B2B companies are email (93%), social media (92%), blog posts (79%), real-life events (56%), and virtual events (55%).
  • Over 50% of B2B clients prefer to buy from companies that create their content.
  • Over 80% of B2B marketers have email newsletters as their most utilized type of content marketing.
  • Over 60% of B2B content teams create majorly top-of-funnel content, while about 30% create content for those in the middle of the funnel.
  • 80% of B2B consumers prefer articles over ads from potential B2B companies.
  • Over 60% of successful B2B organizations have documented content marketing strategies.
  • Over 30% of B2B marketers believe email newsletters are an excellent way to develop leads.
  • About 90% of B2B marketers trace email engagement as the top performing metric.
  • Over 80% of marketing professionals use email marketing to share their content with others.
  • The average click-through rate for B2B emails is about 5%, and only one of five B2B emails gets opened.
  • According to over 60% of B2B marketers, sales intelligence can optimize email send times.
  • B2B Social Media Marketing Statistics Over 90% of B2B companies have a budget dedicated to content production.
  • Social media is the most used content type, with 95% of B2B marketers using it.
  • More than 80% of B2B businesses use influencer marketing to increase brand awareness.
  • B2B companies consider LinkedIn the second most popular social media platform, as 86% of B2B marketers use it.
  • In 2021, 82% of B2B content marketers utilized Twitter for organic marketing.
  • Over 60% of B2B marketers have seen a return on investment from social media paid ads.
  • 6% of B2B companies use YouTube ads to increase brand awareness and traffic.
  • Over 80% of B2B marketers believe that video marketing aids lead generation and increase the B2B market conversion rate.
  • 86% of businesses utilize video marketing as it resonates the best with marketing audiences, followed by website content and blog post links.
  • Over 40% of consumers found branded video content more interesting than the photo and written content.
  • 30% of B2B marketers view their video marketing strategy as more important than their website.
  • B2B SEO Statistics 89% of B2B buyers use the internet to get information about prospective purchases.
  • 29% of Google search users only visit one page from the search engine results.
  • Organic search content marketing success creates about 40% of the revenue of B2B companies.
  • B2B marketers are investing more in SEO as there was a 5% increase from 2020 to 2021.
  • Over 70% of marketers use strategic keywords as their primary content marketing strategy.
  • B2B Marketing Automation Statistics Almost all B2B executives (92%) have an account-based marketing program.
  • 68% of B2B companies use automation to master their business processes.
  • 94% of users stated that the design of a website helped them to make a first impression about the company.
  • Over 50% of B2B firms spend over half their budget on website development.
  • More than 40% of potential B2B customers do not look for contact information online if it’s available on the company website.
  • B2B Marketing Teams Statistics 41% of B2B companies carry out their marketing activities in-house.
  • B2B Marketing Financial Statistics 25% of B2B companies allot only 5% of their total budget to marketing.
  • The average spend on paid advertising in the B2B industry increases by 20% yearly.
  • Over 40% of B2B companies plan to increase their content marketing spend.
  • B2B companies in the mining and construction business allocate 2% of their total budget for marketing.
  • B2B companies in the financial industry spend 14% of their total budget on marketing.
  • About 70% of company representations prefer digital interactions to real-life interactions.
  • 70% of B2B clients report that their primary content source is from the B2B vendor website.
  • B2B Lead Generation Statistics 50% of B2B created content is focused on developing brand awareness.
  • 86% of B2B companies use their website as their primary lead generation source.
  • Over 30% of digital marketers in B2B firms believe email marketing is the best lead generation tool.
  • More than 70% of B2B companies use lead conversion as a performance metric.
  • B2B Industry Statistics About 60% of the B2B market works exclusively digital.
  • Over 60% of B2B companies are expected to increase their number of decision-makers in 2023.
  • 66% of B2B buyers will switch to B2B companies that offer tailored quotes.
  • 100+ Social Media Marketing Statistics for Business | SlickText: 91 billion), TikTok is the fastest-growing platform, which shot up with a 105% user increase in the past few years.
  • In 2023, spending for social advertising is predicted to hit $226 billion and grow by over 11% in the next four years.
  • According to 77% of marketers, social media has been a very effective platform for their companies.
  • According to HubSpot, most social media marketers post anywhere from 4-6 times a week, and 82% reuse content across social media platforms.
  • In the third quarter of 2022, Facebook’s daily user count had grown 3% from the previous year, sitting at 1.
  • The platform accounts for a quarter of all ad spending, coming in just behind Google (28%) and ahead of Amazon (10%).
  • Facebook is a mobile-first platform, with over 98% of users accessing the platform from their phones.
  • The percentage of teens that used the platform fell from 71% in 2014-2015 to 32% in 2022.
  • Don’t ignore Facebook stories–57% of brands feel they’re one of the most effective ways to promote their products.
  • The platform’s live video engagement is 26%, which is higher than other social media platforms.
  • If you’re looking for a benchmark, the average engagement on a Facebook post is just under 4% while organic reach is just over 5%.
  • Although TikTok is the newest social platform on the scene, it gets the most engagement by far with an average engagement rate of almost 6%.
  • TikTok’s engagement potential is falling, however, dropping by 28% per year.
  • TikTok has impressive visibility, with the platform’s ads reaching about 19% of total internet users across the world.
  • Influencers see engagement rates around 15%, which is more than triple the typical average.
  • Despite high engagement, only 18% of marketers are actively using TikTok.
  • TikTok Made Me Buy It is a real trend — 55% of TikTok users have purchased something after seeing a brand on the platform.
  • Working with creators has been shown to boost views by as much as 193%.
  • The most popular age range on LinkedIn is 25 to 34 years old, making up 60% of users.
  • 97% of B2B marketers are using LinkedIn in their marketing strategy, and 82% of them rate LinkedIn as their most effective platform.
  • Including a link in your post can boost engagement by an average of 45%.
  • LinkedIn is ideal for finding and pursuing leads, proving to be 277% more effective than Facebook and Twitter.
  • The average visitor-to-lead for LinkedIn is just under 3%, compared to .
  • Almost 50% of social media traffic to a company’s website is funneled from LinkedIn.
  • Most Instagram business accounts grow their following by about 1% each month.
  • Around 1 in 3 Instagram users are expected to make a purchase through the platform in 2023, and 15% of American shoppers will start their buying journey on Instagram.
  • 98% of marketers choose Instagram as their influencer platform, beating Facebook by almost 50%.
  • Instagram Reels play a major role in engagement, as 91% of Instagram users report watching videos on the platform every week.
  • In the United States, 10% of Twitter users compose 90% of the platform’s tweets.
  • 52% of users check Twitter every day, 84% check weekly, and 96% check monthly.
  • While most other platforms shave a fairly even split of gender demographics, Twitter’s user base is 70% male.
  • While tweets are known for their brevity, ads on Twitter are viewed 26% longer than on other platforms.
  • Just under 80% of Twitter users follow at least one brand, and it’s the number-one platform for brand interaction.
  • According to Twitter, the platform’s ROI is 40% higher than other platforms.
  • Twitter is one of the most liberal-leaning social media platforms, with 65% of users identifying as Democrats.
  • Twitter users value brands that show support for social issues, with 77% of people reporting more positive feelings when they see brands support local and global causes.
  • Top 10 Social Media Marketing ROI Statistics for 2024 | Sprinklr: By 2025, video content is expected to account for 82% of all consumer internet traffic.
  • It’s no wonder that social posts created in collaboration with micro-influencers had 60% higher engagement rates.
  • Last year 90% of customers reported that UGC has greater influence on their purchase decisions than conventional advertising.
  • Additionally, more than 82% of marketers view it as a crucial planning component of their social media strategy.
  • In fact, recent studies predict that AI will be used in 95% of all customer interactions by 2025.
  • Additionally, customer issues may be resolved more quickly, and providing resolution will become 91% less expensive with conversational AI and bots.
  • Companies that provide personalized experiences increase the likelihood that 80% of their customers would make a purchase again.
  • 8% of marketers claimed that, of all social media platforms, Facebook had the highest return on investment.
  • 100 Digital Marketing Statistics for 2024 – Plerdy: Digital marketing’s compound annual growth rate (CAGR) from 2020-2026 projected at 9%.
  • 63% of businesses increased digital marketing budgets in the past year.
  • 14% growth rate in digital marketing budget spending between 2020 and 2021.
  • Return on Investment (ROI) and Success RatesPPC returns $2 for every $1 spent—200% ROI.
  • Over 20% of businesses measure marketing success by the number of leads generated.
  • Industry Demand and Job MarketMarketing job demand set to increase by 10% by 2026 according to the Bureau of Labor Statistics.
  • Online Advertising EffectivenessDigital ads can increase brand awareness by 80%.
  • Consumers are 155% more likely to look up brand-specific terms after display ad exposure.
  • TikTok is the fastest-growing platform, with 40% of businesses planning to use it in 2023.
  • ”25% of TikTok users researched or purchased a product after seeing an ad.
  • 78% of marketers in 2020 said email is important to overall company success.
  • 38% of people will stop engaging with a website if the content or layout is unattractive.
  • Superior user experience on websites generates a 400% higher conversion rate.
  • Nearly 60% of people wouldn’t recommend a business with a poorly designed mobile website.
  • About 40% of people stop interacting with a website if images take too long to load.
  • 70% of small business websites lack a call to action on their homepage.
  • Nearly 90% of consumers will shop with a competitor after a poor website experience.
  • E-commerce and Consumer BehaviorUS e-commerce revenue increased by 7% between 2021 and 2022.
  • 60% of marketers either don’t understand or don’t know their Core Web Vitals.
  • 73% of customers spend more with brands that demonstrate complete transparency online.
  • The Value of SEO:Key SEO Statistics | Example Marketing: In this study, social media was the top result, with nearly 70% – but SEO was second, with 40% of organisations say that it was their primary approach.
  • So, 40% of marketers believe SEO is the single most important thing you can do when it comes to marketing – a powerful vote in favour of SEO.
  • A majority of marketers invest in SEOIn the same study, 69% of marketers reported that they had actively invested in their SEO strategy or activity in 2021.
  • In the Hubspot survey, 71% of marketers said that their primary SEO strategy was looking for “strategic keywords”.
  • Search engines are the internet for many peopleIn another stat that really underscores the importance of optimising your website for search engines, did you know that 68% of online experiences actually begin with a search engine?
  • Search engine results are “winner takes all”You might have heard that search engine results are “winner takes all”, but did you know that recent research has demonstrated that the first result in Google gets around a third of all the clicks on the search engine – 32%!
  • People research their purchases onlineMore than half (53%) of consumers in the US say that they research products online using a search engine, before they decide whether or not to buy.
  • 74% The Journal Issue 12 The Journal Issue 11 Should You Cut Your Marketing Budget During An Economic Downturn?
  • The 58 Most Surprising Digital Marketing Statistics of 2020 | Kantaloupe: 5%)Factors that keep businesses from producing more video content include the following:Not enough time (66.
  • 4%) – BufferWhen learning about a product or service, 72% of buyers prefer video content.
  • – Social Media WeekWebsites with video content see users who spend 88% more time browsing.
  • – Social Media WeekBy 2022, online videos will generate 82% of all consumer traffic on the web.
  • – Social Media WeekVideo is the content preferred by 59% of executives.
  • – Social Media WeekUse of interactive video leads to positive results for 83% of marketers, with 90% of interactive videos viewed all the way through.
  • – Social Media WeekSource:Buffer, State of Social Report, 2019Influencer Marketing StatisticsRoughly 68% of marketers say that influencer marketing is somewhat-to-very effective.
  • -BufferMarketers found that following platforms to be most effective for influencer marketing:Instagram (70%)Facebook (35.
  • 1%)The most important measurements when running influencer campaigns include:Reach (31.
  • 8%) – BufferMicro-influencers, those with 5,000-30,000 followers, accounted for 90% of all branded partnerships.
  • When compared with traditional marketing, content marketing delivers 3 times the number of leads and costs 62% less.
  • – Demand MetricContent marketing is actively invested in by 70% of marketers, with 60% indicating it is a very-to-extremely important part of their marketing strategy as a whole.
  • 3%) – BufferB2C marketers create content to cater to varying audiences, with most content developed to generate brand awareness and interest.
  • sales, newsletter subscriptions, reach, impressions, keyword rankings, click-through rate) – 6% – SEMrushSource:SEMrush, The State of Content Marketing 2019Social Media Marketing StatisticsThere are nearly 4 billion active social media users.
  • – GlobalWebIndexMost marketers use social media for content distribution, specifically 94%.
  • – SEMrushForty-two percent of internet users take to social networks to research a brand, and 21% have discovered a new brand based on a recommendation on social media.
  • – GlobalWebIndexSocial media videos help 64% of online buyers make a purchase decision.
  • – OmnicoreSnapchat users are more likely to impulse shop, to the tune of 60%.
  • What’s more, 60% of digital marketers are increasing their Amazon ad budget.
  • – Marin Software Most marketers (84%) plan to or currently use responsive search ads on Google, estimated to generate up to 10% more clicks and conversions when used with expanded text ads.
  • – Marin SoftwareShoppable ads and images are growing in paid search and paid social, 65% and 62% respectively.
  • 5% indicated that pay-per-click (PPC) campaigns help with search engine optimization (SEO) efforts, including helping to identify target keywords.
  • PPC advertising, 70% of marketers say that SEO is more effective at driving sales compared with 30% for PPC.
  • In fact, featured video clips on Google often contain the exact keyword in the title, 80% according to a recent study.
  • 1 reason why nearly 91% of pages don’t get any traffic from Google is that they don’t have any backlinks.
  • In fact, the use of “image search” via a mobile device increased more than 60% from 2016-2018, while voice search on mobile rose 27%.
  • – Think with GoogleGoogle data also showed that mobile searches with the term “podcast(s)” have increased more than 80%.
  • – Think with GoogleNinety-two percent of mobile users share video content, and video viewing through mobile devices has risen annually by 100%.
  • – Social Media WeekSimultaneous multidevice usage is reported among 85% of adults.
  • – Social Media WeekWhen people have a poor mobile experience, they’re 62% less likely to be future customers.
  • – OmnicoreAd blocking on mobile devices has increased more than 60% since 2017, with 527 million currently using the technology.
  • Poor user experience (UX) design is responsible for 35% of lost ecommerce sales.
  • – CareerFoundryA majority of enterprise chief executives view UX as a competitive differentiator, 70% specifically.
  • What’s more, 88% of users who have a bad website experience typically don’t return, while 90% of people discontinue using apps that perform poorly.
  • In fact, 83% of people say it’s important they have a seamless experience across devices.
  • – ToptalOmnichannel support could increase a company’s return on investment more than 100%.
  • – ZendeskNearly 48% of omnichannel campaigns that employ text messaging are more likely to experience conversions.
  • – OmnisendMarketers using 3 or more channels in a campaign as opposed to 1 benefited from a 287% higher purchase rate.
  • 5 Shocking B2B Marketing Stats You Need to Know [2021] – Digital Clarity: B2B Buying Journey 43% of B2B purchases involve 8 or more stakeholders in the decision-making process (Google) B2B buying journeys and sales cycles can be long.
  • B2B Podcasting 54% of podcast listeners say they are more likely to consider buying from the brands they hear advertised on podcasts (Edison Research) Not using podcasting in your marketing strategy?
  • In 2018, it was reported that 17% of marketers were actively planning to add podcasting to their strategy (HubSpot).
  • Reaching Modern B2B Buyers 94% of B2B buyers are fully informed about a business before making contact (Google) This is a staggering statistic that illustrates the importance of not focussing solely on conversions and sales as key performance indicators.
  • Basing the ‘good results’ of an advertising campaign exclusively on last-click conversions is a short-sighted approach that does not take into consideration the fact that only 6% of people will convert on their first visit to your site.
  • Data and Attribution 43% of B2B organisations don’t know which marketing or sales channels are driving them qualified leads (Digital Clarity).
  • Hubspot’s State of Marketing Report 2021 revealed that only 54% of marketers are using attribution reporting to analyse which marketing channels are influencing buying decisions.
  • Marketing and Sales Alignment 42% of B2B marketers rate the alignment between marketing and sales teams to be fair or poor (Content Marketing Institute) An essential ingredient for B2B companies’ growth is a synergy between marketing and sales.
  • 67% of marketers said their customer relationship management (CRM) system is important to support their company’s sales enablement efforts (Content Marketing Institute).
  • 50+ Powerful Content Marketing Statistics and Trends Every Content Marketer Must Know: Content Marketing Statistics and Trends 80% of content marketers plan on creating more content than the previous year according to the Content Matters 2022 Report by Parse.
  • ly 48% of companies with a strong content marketing strategy consider blog content creation as a core content marketing activity, says HubSpot.
  • 56% of marketers find blogging to be very effective and 10% find blogs deliver the biggest ROI among all content types.
  • 54% of decision-makers (buyers) say they spend more than an hour every week reading thought-leadership pieces but more than 70% say that nearly half of thought-leadership content delivers no valuable information.
  • 47% of marketers plan to increase spending by 11% or more, while another 25% of marketers hope to increase their budget up to 10%.
  • :Source:SEMrush According to the 12th Annual Content Marketing Survey by CMI and MarketingProfs, the 4 major areas of content marketing investment in 2022 are likely to be videos (69%), events (61%), owned media assets (57%), and paid media (55%).
  • The SEMrush survey, however, found that the top 3 key areas of investment in content marketing in 2022 will be Social Media and Community Building (41%), Better quality of written content (40%), and Content distribution and promotion(40%) – with Video (35%) at number 4.
  • 47% of companies plan to grow their content marketing teams in 2022, according to SEMrush.
  • Content Strategy Statistics HubSpot’s State of Content Marketing Report 2021 said that 82% of marketers actively use content marketing as an integral part of their strategy.
  • Nearly 57% of content marketers have a documented content strategy according to SEMrush.
  • The same SEMrush report also reveals that only 19% of marketers believe their content marketing strategy is at an advanced stage in terms of maturity.
  • Though 36% do believe that their content marketing strategy is fairly developed.
  • 4% of marketers made a reasonable amount of changes to their content marketing strategy after the Covid-19 pandemic, while another 38% of marketers said they made many more changes.
  • Source:Venngage Content ideation is among the top 10 content marketing challenges with 25% of respondents voting for it in the SEMrush survey.
  • Content SEO Planning Statistics HubSpot found in The State of Media & Content Planning in 2022 that organic search and SEO are leveraged by 36% of marketers and media planners.
  • HubSpot also found that nearly 64% of marketers today believe mobile optimization to be a necessary and effective area of investment.
  • Marketers are spending more time auditing and optimizing content, which includes improving UX on their blog/website (36%), identifying top-performing content (34%), finding content gaps (34%), and improving SEO and SERP rankings (33%).
  • Searchers use Google autocomplete suggestions in their search 23% of the time, according to Backlinko.
  • Content marketers who proactively plan their content marketing campaigns increase their chances of success by 331%, according to CoSchedule.
  • 2% of businesses said they will rely heavily on visual content in 2021 and 2022, so these numbers only seem to be growing.
  • 86% of businesses use video content as a core marketing tool, according to Wyzowl.
  • Source:Wyzowl The top 4 reasons for not using video marketing as part of their content strategy by marketers in the Wyzowl report include lack of time (23%), not knowing where to start (16%), lack of interest (13%), and high costs of production (10%).
  • As of 2021, YouTube was the most popular platform for consumers when it comes to watching video content, with 35% of respondents voting for it in a HubSpot survey.
  • The Wyzowl survey shows that 86% of marketers have been able to increase lead generation with videos.
  • Infographics are very popular among the latest trends in visual content marketing, with nearly 45% of marketers already investing in them according to HubSpot.
  • 38% of those who haven’t experimented with infographics yet, plan to invest in this visual format in 2022.
  • Audio Content Marketing Statistics 53% of marketers find audio content like podcasts to be effective digital marketing tools, according to HubSpot research.
  • Though only 1% of them think it yields any considerable ROI, 80% still plan to invest in audio content in 2022 as they feel it drives engagement and helps build brand awareness.
  • Audio chatrooms (like Clubhouse and Twitter Spaces) are trending in 2022 as 68% of marketers who are already using this marketing tool say that it’s extremely effective as a social media marketing strategy, though the ROI is low right now.
  • Despite the growing popularity of podcasts and other audio content formats, only 11% of marketers consider audio content as a key area for investment in 2022, according to the SEMrush survey.
  • Social Media Content Marketing Statistics The SEMrush State of Content Marketing report lists organic social media (69%) as the number 1 channel used for content distribution, followed closely by email marketing (54%).
  • Short form videos are the most popular content type used by marketers on social media with 85% of marketers saying that it is the most effective.
  • Live streaming and videos are a close second with 70% of marketers vouching for their effectiveness.
  • List posts are shared 218% more than how-to posts on social media, according to Backlinko’s research.
  • Source:Backlinko 67% of marketers have plans of increasing their investment in TikTok as a social media marketing channel.
  • More than 84% of B2B decision-makers also use social media to make important purchase decisions.
  • B2B Content Marketing Statistics 46% of B2B marketers plan to increase their content marketing budgets anywhere between 1% to 9% in 2022, according to the CMI/MarketingProfs survey.
  • 58% of B2B marketers said that virtual events produced the best results for them in 2020-21, among all B2B content assets.
  • 55% of B2B buyers say that if a piece of though-leadership content does not kindle their curiosity or interest, they are likely to move on to other content within a minute.
  • More than 67% of B2B content marketers invest most of their time and resources in top-of-the-funnel content creation, according to Databox.
  • B2C Content Marketing Statistics 81% of B2C marketers feel that their content marketing efforts were very, or at least moderately, successful over the past 12 months.
  • The same survey by HubSpot also revealed that 51% of B2C marketers are planning to spend more on content marketing in 2022.
  • The top content marketing goals of B2C marketers in 2022 are increasing brand awareness (49%), advertising products (44%), and increasing revenue (43%).
  • 50% of marketers said they outsource at least one content marketing activity while 50% did not.
  • Content Marketing ROI Statistics 51% of content marketers say they understand how their content is performing and track relevant metrics to measure performance, according to the Parse.
  • But a huge 49% are still clueless about gauging content performance accurately.
  • ly Only 35% of marketers believe measuring their content ROI is ‘Very’ or ‘Extremely’ important, according to HubSpot’s State of Marketing report 2021.
  • 30% of content marketers consider maximizing content ROI as one of their primary goals in marketing, which means seeking tangible and real results from the content they publish.
  • Influencer marketing seems to be generating a very high ROI as 57% of marketers find it to be effective and 11% also say it had the highest ROI when they tested different trends.
  • Native ads are growing in popularity as 36% of content marketers say it’s effective and almost 5% call it their best ROI-generating strategy.
  • ROI in video marketing is measured on the basis of engagement (62%), views (61%), and leads or clicks (60%) that videos get, according to the Wyzowl survey.
  • Marketing Technology Statistics 62% of marketers surveyed by CoSchedule don’t use any kind of project management software to manage their content marketing projects, despite the fact that project management tools evidently contribute to marketing success.
  • The CoSchedule report also shows that only 30% of marketers use project management software, 23% use marketing automation platforms and 34% use SEO planning platforms.
  • When it comes to visual content though, 41% of marketers use an online tool or graphic maker, the Venngage survey revealed.
  • The Big List of Content Marketing Statistics | Brafton: Semrush Only 30% of marketers say the COVID-19 pandemic will not change their plans in 2022.
  • Influitive 65% of marketers say case studies and success stories are the biggest value drivers for their business.
  • Hubspot 70% of marketers use account-based marketing strategies to target their content.
  • Hubspot 72% of marketers say their company uses reporting tools for data analysis.
  • Oracle 58% of companies with more than 80 marketing employees say their efforts were “extremely successful” last year compared to 33% at companies with marketing departments of 30 or fewer employees.
  • Oracle 82% of organizations plan to add, remove or replace components of their marketing tech stack to improve performance.
  • Altimeter Only 13% of companies rely purely on internal creative ideas, while others employ a mix of company goals, competitor analysis, audience needs and digital data.
  • Altimeter Nearly half (46%) of marketers plan to use better data to create personalized content that serves the customer journey.
  • Deloitte 83% of consumers in 2021 are aware that brands are using their personal data and 71% of users expressed concern over how companies are using their personal data.
  • Brafton Most marketers agree that blog articles (68%) and downloadable assets like eBooks and white papers (62%) are the best way to learn about content marketing.
  • B2B Content Marketing Trends Content Marketing Institute 77% of B2B marketers report having a content marketing strategy, though only 40% documented their strategy.
  • Content Marketing Institute 66% of B2B marketers expect their 2022 content marketing budget to increase over their 2021 budget.
  • WPromote Social media has the biggest impact on the customer experience for 57% of B2B marketers.
  • Content Marketing Institute 50% of B2B marketers outsource content marketing activities.
  • Content Marketing Institute The top 2 content marketing-related areas of investment for 2022 are expected to be video (69%) and events (digital, in-person or hybrid) at 61%.
  • WPromote 67% of B2B marketing executives expect to increase spend on marketing technology.
  • WPromote 60% of B2B marketers say that “wasted time” is the greatest cost associated with lead generation struggles.
  • Vidyard 68% of B2B marketing influencers regard research and case studies to be the most trusted type of content.
  • Demand Gen 44% of B2B buyers typically consume 3 to 5 pieces of content b